The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink About2012 NRA Range Source Book THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section I Chapter 1 GENERAL INFORMATION Range Services ©2012 National Rifle Association 12 I-1-2 I-1-3 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. INTRODUCTION 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Cross References ARTICLE 2. PLANNING OVERVIEW 2.01 General Considerations 2.02 Step One - Determining the Type of Range 2.03 Step Two - Select Alternatives 2.04 Step Three - Site Selection 2.05 Step Four - Preliminary Design 2.06 Step Five - Final Design 2.07 Community Relations ARTICLE 3. OUTDOOR RANGES 3.01 General Considerations 3.02 Site Selection 3.03 Range Distances 3.04 Range Layout Considerations 3.05 Range Control 3.06 Optional Features ARTICLE 4. INDOOR RANGES 4.01 General Considerations 4.02 Site Selection Factors 4.03 Range Layout and Features 4.04 Range Control 4.05 Optional Features I-1-4 ARTICLE 5. APPENDIX 5.01 Site Evaluation Questionnaire and Appraisal 5.02 Firing Positions ©2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264 I-1-5 ARTICLE 1. INTRODUCTION 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 This chapter discusses the general requirements for the design of a range. It provides the range builder with a quick reference of sizes and types of facilities needed on a particular type range. Note that physical design alone cannot always account for the unpredictable. The safety plan must include consideration of design and construction as it relates to an intended use. For example, a range designed only for .22 caliber rimfire rifles should never be used for high power rifles. Safety must include certain control measures to ensure the facility is used within its design. Range development planning and design involve the blending of what is needed with an assessment of risks associated with its use. Safeguards must be incorporated in each phase to minimize risks, and are applied throughout the process of planning, design, site selection, and construction-right through the final day of operation. Further, they apply during the construction of target frames, the enforcement of rules and regulations, and training of members, users and supervisors. 1.01.2 This chapter also includes an overview of the decision making process. 1.02 Cross References 1.02.1 Additional information relating to range development is available: a. Range Source Book 1. Introduction 2. Safety Plan - Section I Chapter 2 3. Planning and Design - Section I Chapter 3 4. Organization and Management - Section I, Chapter 4 5. Operations & Maintenance - Section II Chapter 3 6. Vendors List Section IV b. References - NRA Programs 1. Range Development and Operations Conference Program The Range Development & Operations Conference is a five-day industry seminar focusing on fundamental aspects of building and maintaining a shooting facility. Attendees will receive a multidisciplinary perspective on major topics such as: • Developing business and master plans • Public hearings and zoning boards • Environmental sound • Insurance • Lead on outdoor ranges and OSHA lead standards • Range maintenance • Range safety The Range Development & Operations Conference is designed to educate range owners and operators, of both existing and proposed range facilities, to identify potential problems associated with engineering, environmental issues, and safety. This information is vital for government agencies, as well as commercial, public, private, school, club, and casual ranges, of both indoor and outdoor types. For I-1-6 additional information regarding the NRA Range Development and Operations Conference Program visit http://www.nrahq.org/shootingrange/development.asp, email range@nrahq.org or call (877) NRA-RANGE. 2. Range Technical Team The NRA Range Technical Team is a nationwide network of volunteers trained in the field of shooting range development, design, and operations. The Range Technical Team was developed to provide an extension of NRA Headquarters to range owners and operators at the local level. Services provided by Range Technical Team Advisors (RTTAs) include: • range planning assistance • range use and procedural evaluations • range safety and design evaluations To open an NRA Range Case to initiate RTTA assistance, please send an RTTA request form to the NRA Range Services Department by visiting http://www.nrahq.org/shootingrange/rtta-request.pdf to download a request form. Email, mail, or fax your request to: NRA Range Services Department 11250 Waples Mill Road Fairfax, VA 22030 Telephone: (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264) FAX: (703) 267-1011 range@nrahq.org For additional information on the Range Technical Team, visit http://www.nrahq.org/shootingrange/technicalteam.asp 3. Grants available for Ranges NRA Foundation Range Grants All NRA Foundation grants must comply with all IRS requirements relating to 501(c) (3) and 501(c) (4) grants. State Fund Grants are awarded to eligible applicants for qualifying projects or activities that promote firearms and hunting safety; enhance the marksmanship skills of those participating in the shooting sports; educate the general public about firearms in their historic, technological, and artistic context; or contribute to the general well-being of the public at large. All NRA Foundation grants must comply with all IRS requirements relating to 501(c) (3) grants. Completed application forms are to be submitted directly to the NRA Field Representative within the respective state. Contact your NRA Field Representative prior to application submission to inquire whether there are I-1-7 additional state specific requirements. More information can be found at www.nrafoundation.org/grants/statefund.asp. NRA Range Grants Range grant funds for facility improvements are made available at NRA's sole discretion to qualifying NRA-affiliated clubs and associations by approval of the Range Development Committee - a standing committee of the NRA Board of Directors. Applicants must be a 100% NRA membership NRA-Affiliated Club, with preference given to Gold Medal Clubs. This Range Grant program is limited to $5,000 per applicant per year, and the deadline for submission is August 1 annually. All NRA Foundation grants must comply with all IRS requirements relating to 501(c) (4) grants. For more information, please contact us at (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264) or email range@nrahq.org. 4. Clubs and Associations The NRA Clubs & Associations Department provides services and assistance to a network of over 13,000 NRA-affiliated clubs, associations, and businesses. Visit www.nrahq.org/clubs for more detailed information on the benefits and services available to affiliated NRA Clubs. Contact (800) NRA-CLUB (672-2582) or email clubs@nrahq.org with any questions. 5. NRA Business Alliance The NRA Business Alliance was established in 1992 to provide NRA member businesses with a marketplace to sell goods and services to fellow NRA members. The NRA’s Business Alliance web site, service directory, member magazines and promotions, and NRA member businesses reach nearly four million NRA members. NRA Business Alliance members also enjoy many benefits including NRA member magazines, NRA Endorsed Insurance and discounts on a wide range of business services all for $35 per year. Visit http://www.nraba.org for more information. 6. Competitions NRA's Competitive Shooting Division offers a wide range of activities in all types of shooting, for everyone from the novice to the world-class competitor. The NRA sanctions over 10,000 shooting tournaments and sponsors over 50 national championships each year. If you have any questions call (877)672-6282. For current information on a particular program, click on the appropriate department listed at http://www.nrahq.org/compete/index.asp I-1-8 7. Competitions Rulebooks NRA Rule Books are now available on line in PDF format: http://www.nrahq.org/compete/nra-rule-books.asp 8. Education and Training Whether you’re a new or prospective gun owner or hunter in search of training, whatever your age or level of expertise, whatever type of firearm you’re interested in, NRA’s Education & Training Division is here to help you. Training Department From beginner to developing competitor, the NRA Training Department develops safe, ethical, responsible shooters through a network of more than 65,000 instructors, more than 3,800 coaches, and more than 1,700 training counselors. NRA Training Counselors recruit and train instructors to teach NRA’s basic firearm courses. NRA Coaches, in turn, develop competitors at the club, high school, collegiate and national levels. Hunter Services With over 2.3 million members who hunt, the NRA offers hunters a wide range of programs addressing all aspects of hunting, including youth hunter skills, advanced skills training and the conservation of our natural and wildlife resources. All Hunter Services Department programs work toward the common goal of instilling and promoting the skills and ethics that will ensure the continuance of America’s proud hunting heritage. Women’s Programs It hasn’t always been easy for women to break into the world of shooting sports. But now with organized programs for women, by the women of the NRA, it’s as easy as can be. Whether a woman’s interest is personal safety, gun safety, gun knowledge, marksmanship, hunting, or recreational or competitive shooting, the NRA has a variety of programs and activities that all encourage female participation at all skill levels. Youth Programs The NRA helps America’s adult leaders and national youth serving organizations set up shooting programs, introduces the first-time or intermediate shooter to a lifetime of recreational and competitive opportunities, and develops programs for NRA youth members and NRA-affiliated youth clubs. Gunsmithing NRA short term gunsmithing schools offer courses on topics such as general gunsmithing, bluing, stockmaking, checkering, engraving, and parkerizing. More specialized courses focus on topics such as accurizing the AR-15 rifle; accurizing varmint rifles; fine tuning single-action revolvers and long guns for cowboy shoots; accurizing the Colt Model 1911 pistol; and English Gunsmithing. Law enforcement armorer classes are also offered. Visit http://www.nrahq.org/education/index.asp for more information on these programs. I-1-9 9. Law Enforcement Activities Division http://www.nrahq.org/law/index.asp 10. Friends of NRA is a grassroots fund-raising program that fosters community involvement, raises money, and gives 100 percent of the net proceeds to qualified local, state, and national programs. Working with the NRA’s field staff, thousands of volunteers nationwide participate in the program by organizing committees and planning events in their communities. Monies raised at these events go to The NRA Foundation, a 501(c) (3) charitable organization. Established in 1990, The NRA Foundation raises tax-deductible contributions in support of a wide range of firearm related public interest activities of the National Rifle Association of America and other organizations that defend and foster the Second Amendment to the United States Constitution rights of all law-abiding Americans. These activities are designed to promote firearms and hunting safety, to enhance marksmanship skills of those participating in the shooting sports, and to educate the general public about firearms in their historic, technological and artistic context. Funds granted by The NRA Foundation benefit a variety of constituencies throughout the United States including children, youth, women, individuals with physical disabilities, gun collectors, law enforcement officers, hunters and competitive shooters. All NRA Foundation grants must comply with all IRS requirements relating to 501(c) (3) grants. Interested in getting involved or attending a banquet, visit www.friendsofnra.org for more information. 11. NRA Programs NRA offers America’s preeminent shooting, training, education and public service programs that foster the safe, responsible ownership and use of firearms. Visit the NRA website at http://www.nra.org/programs.aspx. 12. NRA Endorsed Property and Casualty Insurance Program One of the many benefits of membership in the National Rifle Association is having access to a broad selection of insurance products through the NRA Endorsed Property and Liability Insurance Program. Together with the NRA, Lockton Risk Insurance has developed a wide range of products that offer the insurance solutions today’s NRA members are looking for. From member specific coverage’s, to customized plans for NRA affiliated clubs and businesses, you will be covered. For information or to contact them for a quote, call (877) 487-5407 or visit www.NRAEndorsedInsurance.com. Under this program, eligible NRA members and NRA affiliated clubs may contract with and purchase insurance from various insurance companies. Please note that the NRA is not an insurance company and does not itself insure its members. c. References external of the National Rifle Association 1. National Shooting Sports Foundation (NSSF) http://www.nssf.org/shooting/ I-1-10 2. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 3. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Best Management Practices for Lead at Outdoor Shooting Ranges PDF http://epa.gov/region2/waste/leadshot/epa_bmp.pdf 4. National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/ranges/ d. References Other Shooting organizations 1. Single Action Shooting Society (SASS) -http://www.sassnet.com/ 2. International Defensive Pistol Association (IDPA) - http://www.idpa.com/ 3. International Benchrest Shooters Association (IBSA) - http://www.international-benchrest.com/ 4. United States Practical Shooting Association (USPSA) - http://www.uspsa-nationals.org/ 5. Amateur Trapshooting Association (ATA) - http://www.shootata.com/ 6. National Skeet Shooting Association (NSSA) - http://www.nssa-nsca.org/index.php/nssa-skeet-shooting/ 7. National Sporting Clays Association (NSCA) - http://www.nssa-nsca.org/index.php/nsca-sporting-clays-shooting/ I-1-11 ARTICLE 2. PLANNING OVERVIEW 2.01 General Considerations 2.01.1 To plan, design, and construct a shooting facility, base all decisions on proven engineering practices. Plan logically so nothing is overlooked. Suggested guidelines are as follows: 2.02 Step One - Type of Range 2.02.1 Whether an organization is starting up or seeking to upgrade an existing range facility, the first decision is to identify the types of shooting necessary to meet the needs of the user. To determine the user needs, conduct a community survey. This will also indicate how well the community will back the project. 2.02.2 The following guidelines are suggested: a. What type of range is required? b. Will it be an indoor or outdoor facility? c. How many shooters must be accommodated? d. Will emphasis be on training and/or competitive shooting activities? e. What type, or caliber of firearms will be allowed on the facility? f. Will the facility be open to the general public or be used exclusively for members? g. What special uses will be made of the facility, such as law enforcement, etc.? 2.02.3 The initial decision is whether the facility will be indoors or outdoors or a combination. Other factors to be considered during the decision making process includes the following: a. Prevailing climatic conditions b. Availability of land c. Available funding d. Health and safety considerations e. Seismic zones f. Location of neighbors g. Location of site in relation to schools and medical facilities 2.03 Step Two - Select Alternatives 2.03.1 Alternatives depend on whether the organization has existing facilities in need of upgrading or plans to construct a new facility. 2.03.2 Existing Facilities: a. Restore an existing facility to accepted use criteria. b. Expand an existing range, where feasible, to accommodate either a new shooting activity or a combination of shooting activities. c. Construct a new facility on an existing site. d. Sell the existing site and relocate. e. Remain as is and do nothing. 2.03.3 New Facilities a. Move to an existing range and share facilities with another group. b. Rent shooting time from another range. c. Plan, design, site, and construct a new facility. I-1-12 2.03.4 Examine each alternative based upon the needs of the shooting community and the specific user. 2.04 Step Three - Site Selection 2.04.1 Prior to site selection, decisions must be made based on the previously stated alternatives. Remember, do not attempt to force a facility onto a site. Rather, find, evaluate and select a site that will accommodate the required facility. In many cases, a parcel of land is purchased with visions of the ultimate range facility, only to find during the planning phases that the parcel is inadequate. The key to deciding whether the project is feasible is to gather the following data: a. Obtain from the state, county and local authorities, copies of ordinances, zoning regulations, soil conservation standards, health department requirements and any other regulation which may pertain to the project. A thorough review of these documents by an attorney will determine whether the project is legally feasible. These documents will often cover every aspect, from where a firearm can be discharged to what must be done to protect the environment. In some instances, local jurisdictions do not specifically single out shooting facilities in code books or ordinances, so guidance is not available. Where applications have been made for permits and local codes or ordinances do not specifically address the issue, major delays have been encountered while local authorities attempt to resolve the matter. Certain precautions should be taken during the permit application process. You are strongly advised to engage a local zoning attorney licensed to practice law in your state to advise you in regard to these matters. b. Identify several sites as some may prove unsuitable or construction costs may be prohibitive. c. Gather technical data relevant to each site, including zoning maps, aerial photographs, topographic maps, and on-site information gathered both on the ground and in the air. 2.04.1.2 Determine if a site is suitable: a. Fill out a copy of the questionnaire provided in the Appendix to this chapter on each site. This will provide valuable insights for the decision making process. b. Guidelines highlighted on the questionnaire indicate the areas that either meet or exceed acceptable standards. The failure of one or two items does not necessarily mean the site cannot be used, rather that modifications are needed to make the site acceptable. c. Once questionnaires are completed, rank each site in order of preference and suitability. Assign a low value to sites requiring sizable expenditures for modifications and high values to those which do not. d. Additional criteria in this process are: 1. Environmental Restrictions - Endangered Species Act, Wilderness Act, air and water pollution, wetlands, etc. You are strongly advised to engage a local attorney licensed to practice law in your state to advise you in regard to these matters. I-1-13 2. Poor Access - must construct roadway to site. 3. High Cost of Construction - berms, baffles, barriers, earth moving, etc. 4. Other restrictive federal or state statutes and local ordinances. 5. Property values should also be considered, especially in areas where urban growth is aggressive. Escalating property values often make it unwise to locate in a particular area. e. Select the site that meets or exceeds acceptable standards for safety, sufficient space, ease of access, acceptable zoning, community acceptance, construction costs, acquisition of land, and future land values. 2.05 Step Four - Preliminary Design 2.05.1 After selecting the site, apply information gathered under Step One and Three to the rendering of preliminary drawings. a. Prepare preliminary layout sketches for the site. b. In the draft document specifications include applicable zoning, environmental, building code and other pertinent restrictions. c. Prepare alternative preliminary site plans showing different layouts. d. Prepare a safety plan for each specific project. See Safety Plan for guidance. e. Submit all zoning and building permit applications for approval. Be prepared with the draft document to present and perhaps defend the proposal at public hearings before zoning boards, health officials or other governmental bodies involved with issuing permits. You are strongly advised to engage a local attorney licensed to practice law in your state to advise you in regard to these matters. 2.06 Step Five - Final Planning and Design 2.06.1 Preliminary site plans prepared in Step Four, along with previous documentation, should provide enough information to make the final site selection. Hire the necessary professional help, such as a consultant, a zoning attorney, engineer, architect, surveyor, or draftsman to complete the plans for the construction phase. Line up those volunteers who have the time, expertise and commitment to do so. 2.06.2 Detailed plans showing specific dimensions and locations are needed to obtain construction permits. Construction plans should follow the usual format used by architects and engineers detailing specifications for a builder. These plans should include at a minimum a layout of the proposed range in cross section and top view. On the site plan, surrounding homes should be located and intervening distances highlighted. These plans should be drawn to scale so that they can be utilized with topographic maps or aerial photographs. All elements necessary for final site selection should be in place. To conclude the project: a. Follow through with all commitments and requirements identified in the preliminary design process. I-1-14 b. Prepare final construction plans and specifications. c. Obtain all necessary building permits and utility approvals. 2.07 Community Relations 2.07.1 To develop a successful community relations program, cultivate goodwill with neighboring residents and landowners. This can be achieved by demonstrating sensitivity to concerns for safety and health. Show them how the range design and safety plan will provide for their safety. Describe how a firearms education program will benefit the community as a whole. Enlist the support of other potential users: Boy Scouts, 4-H, Jaycees, hunter education instructors and law enforcement agencies. These groups may be approached for funding through the use of the facilities and may be a valuable source of support during zoning board meetings or other government hearings. I-1-15 ARTICLE 3. OUTDOOR RANGES 3.01 General Considerations 3.01.1 Developing an outdoor range involves these critical factors: 3.02 Site Selection a. Size - an area large enough to accommodate the appropriate disciplines and projectile containment as modified by existing topographic features, and/or additional range features. b. Location - Locate the range as convenient to the user population as possible. c. Design - Design criteria should incorporate specific range requirements along with adequate space for current use, yet provide opportunity for future expansion. d. Environment - During the planning phase, make every effort to minimize any adverse impact on the surrounding environment. It is recommended that a registered professional engineer (P.E.) be contracted to conduct an environmental assessment. Environmental impact statements (EIS), compared to assessments, are expensive and time consuming. Exercise care during the environmental assessment to address all possible concerns. If the environmental assessment is performed incorrectly or identifies any significant adverse impact on the environment, a complete EIS may be required which may be very expensive. 3.02.1 Projectile Containment 3.02.1.1 Projectile containment will vary in size and design based upon terrain features, range structures, and the chosen shooting activity. Various range enhancements have proven to be significantly effective in limiting bullet containment to the confines of a specific property boundary. Techniques for limiting projectiles to range property include: backstops, sideberms and sidewalls, baffles, target placement, mountains or rolling hills, sloping floor of the range, and utilizing the range for its intended purpose. 3.02.1.2 The distance a bullet will travel varies according to several factors: ballistic coefficient, bullet weight, muzzle velocity, caliber, bullet shape, angle of muzzle elevation, and to a lesser degree, wind speed, wind direction and relative humidity. Muzzle elevation to achieve the maximum range of a given firearm and ammunition combination will vary, but can be calculated by using Ingalls' Ballistic Tables (Hatcher's Notebooki, pages 584-625). The ballistic coefficient and muzzle velocity are the two most important factors in determining the distance a bullet will travel. The following ballistics table has been modified for use in this source book and is used with permission. Additional cartridges and newer projectiles have been added to the chart. The new cartridge data was derived by using Sierra Infinity v6ii. This chart should be used only as a quick reference to check comparative data for various calibers using specific bullet weights and velocities for planning purposes. The 30-06 (boattail) bullet, weight of 172 grains, muzzle velocity of 2,600 feet per second has been added to the chart and is shown to have a range of 5,500 yards or 3.12 miles, and does not mean that you have to own or control 3.12 miles of downrange area. Various factors can affect the maximum distance that a bullet or shot may travel. The tables below are to be considered as guidelines only. This source book does not represent or guarantee that a particular bullet or shot may not travel further than the below state distances. Remember that you will most likely be held I-1-16 responsible for the damage or injury caused from any bullet or shot that escapes the shooting range, no matter what the distance that the bullet or shot traveled. Chart A Pistol Calculated maximum ranges _______________________________________________________________________________________ Bullet Bullet Bullet wt. Assumed MV. Calculated max. range Caliber/Name Style (grs.) (fps) (yards) (miles) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- .22 Long Rifle RN 40 1150 1922 1.09 .221 Rem. Fireball PSP 50 2650 2666 1.51 .38 Special STHP 110 1320 1800 1.02 .357 Magnum JHP 158 1410 2366 1.34 .357 Sig JHP 125 1350 1928 1.09 .38 Super STHP 125 1280 2033 1.26 9 mm Luger FMJ 124 1140 1900 1.08 .40 S&W JHP 180 1015 2093 1.89 .44 Rem. Mag. JSP 240 470 2500 1.42 .45 Auto FMJ 230 945 1833 1.02 .45 Auto Rim FMJ 230 810 1633 0.93 .45 Colt LFN 255 860 1800 1.02 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------RN-Round Nose, PSP Pointed Soft Point, STHP-Silvertip Hollow Point, JHP-Jacketed Hollow Point, FMJ-Full Metal Jacket, JSP-Jacketed Soft Point, LFN-Lead Flat Nose. Table updated in 2011. I-1-17 Chart B Rifle Bullet Bullet Bullet wt. Assumed MV. Calculated max. range Caliber/Name Style (grs) (fps) (yards) (miles) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 222 Rem PEP 50 3140 2500 1.42 223 Rem FMJBT 55 3240 2766 1.57 22/250 Rem E-tip 50 3810 2933 1.67 220 Swift PEP 50 3870 2660 1.51 243 Win. PP 100 2960 4000 2.27 243 Win. PEP 80 3350 3500 1.99 250 Savage ST 100 2820 3500 1.99 257 Roberts+P PP 117 2780 3850 2.18 6.5 Creedmoor SST 140 2850 5602 3.18 270 Win. ST 130 3060 4000 2.27 270 Win. PP 150 2850 4333 2.46 7mm Rem Mag PP 175 2860 4933 2.80 280 Rem. BST 140 3040 3700 2.10 300 Win Mag. PSPCL 150 3290 4028 2.29 300 Win Mag PSPCL 180 2960 5202 2.96 308 Win. PP 150 2820 4166 2.37 308 Win BTHP 168 2680 5157 2.93 308 Win. ST 180 2620 4500 2.56 30-06 Spfld ST 150 2910 4089 2.32 30-06 Spfld FMJBT 172 2600 5500 3.12 8 mm Mauser PP 170 2360 2853 1.62 338 Win. Mag. PG 250 2650 5358 3.04 375 H&H Mag. FS 270 2670 4688 2.66 45-70 Govt. HPFN 300 1880 2453 1.39 458 Win. SP 510 2040 3385 1.92 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- PEP (Positive Expanding Point), FMJBT (Full Metal Jacket Boat Tail), E-Tip Polymer Tip Lead Free, PP (Power Point), ST (Silvertip), SST (Super Shock Tip), BST (Ballistic Silvertip), PG (Partition Gold), FS (Fail Safe), SP (Soft Point), HPFN (Hollow Point Flat Nose). Table updated in 2011. 3.02.1.3 On shotgun ranges, shot fall zones are determined by the largest size shot fired on the facility. Additional yardage must be included to compensate for the displacement of shot by adverse wind conditions, and elevations above sea level. For skeet, a nominal angle of 180 degrees from station eight is used. For trap 90 to 100 degrees are allowed for the wider target flights. Shot sizes for trap and skeet facilities are usually restricted to No. 71/2 or smaller, except on a patterning range. Shotfall zones extend to 300 yards for most shotgun ranges, but can be reduced to the maximum distance that shot travels by testing at the site. Should this method is utilized, then the range owner or operator is responsible to see that the range rules specifying specific shot sizes are adhered to. It is the range owner’s responsibility to verify the test results. At some point the data may be challenged in court. At sea level 7 ½ shot does not travel 300 yards, but at higher elevations the density of the air is less and shot will travel greater distances. I-1-18 3.02.1.4 For steel shot, Journee’s formula does not hold true. Steel has a smaller specific gravity than lead; therefore steel shot of the same diameter as lead will not travel as far. Chart C Journee's Formula, is used below to determine maximum range for round lead balls. Journee' developed this formula which stated the maximum range in yards of a smooth round lead ball is roughly 2,200 times its diameter (in inches). Maximum Range in Yards = 2,200 X Diameter in inches. Shot Diameter Journee's Shotshell Ballisticsiii Size of Shot Formula Sea 5,000 feet 10,000 Feet Inches Max Range Level Above Sea Level Above Sea Level Number Inches Yards Yards Feet Yards Feet Yards Feet 9 0.08 176 204 613 234 703 267 802 8 0.09 198 228 683 258 775 295 884 7 1/2 0.095 209 238 715 270 811 308 925 6 0.11 242 269 807 305 915 348 1044 4 0.13 286 309 926 338 1015 399 1197 2 0.15 330 347 1042 394 1181 448 1345 #1 Buck 0.3 660 606 1819 688 2064 745 2236 0 Buck 0.32 704 639 1916 724 2172 818 2453 00 Buck 0.34 748 654 1963 742 2225 837 2510 Shotshell Ballistics, a computer program developed by Ed Lowry, was used to determine the distances shot would travel at 5,000 and 10,000 feet altitude. Maximum distance is achieved when the shotgun is aimed at approximately 24 degrees above horizontal. 3.02.2 Sound Transmission 3.02.2.1 No set distance eliminates noise complaints entirely. However, studies conducted for the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) indicate noise complaints are likely when inhabited dwellings exist less than one half (2) mile from the facility. Beyond that distance, the chance of generating noise complaints is reduced. There may be federal, state or local statutes, ordinances and/or regulations prohibiting, or making criminal, activities that generate noises above a certain decibel level. Besides these penal prohibitions, such activities may, pursuant to state or local law, give a party a cause of action to sue you in civil court for noise pollution, noise nuisance, etc. You are strongly advised to engage a local attorney licensed to practice law in your state to advise you in regard to these matters. Most states have Range Protection Acts that afford ranges some protection. 501(c) (3) organizations may be able to designate their site as a sound park giving you the same privileges as a race track. NRA recommends you talk with your neighbors and see if you can create a sound park by using their property as a buffer. This can be recorded in your neighbor’s deed with their permission. I-1-19 Note: Where it is possible to do so, build a range on government owned land that will generally have the advantage of noise buffer areas. Available land areas can be located by contacting the local area offices of the Bureau of Land Management (BLM), National Forest Service (USFS), state wildlife agencies, cities, counties, parks and recreation departments in either the state or local counties. 3.02.3 Range Orientation (Direction) 3.02.3.1 After all safety and other site requirements are satisfied, consider the compass orientation of the range. Within the constraints of safety and along with other site considerations, such as, terrain, the ideal orientation is with firing conducted from south to north. This provides the earliest and latest natural target illumination and the least interference from natural light in the shooters' eyes. However, safety takes priority over convenience and the range may be oriented in any direction that provides the greatest level of safety to neighbors. 3.03 Range Distances (firing line to target) 3.03.1 Distances or ranges for rifles and pistols should conform to standard configurations as traditionally adopted for range construction unless otherwise stipulated. Refer to the NRA Rule Book for the specific discipline, Section 4, Targets and/or Section 6, Range Standards. If the discipline is from another shooting venue recommend you refer to that organizations documents for this range specific information. NRA rule books are available online at http://www.nrahq.org/compete/nra-rule-books.asp 3.03.2 The following table lists standard distances for specific shooting activities. Note: Some distances used for special competitive activities, are optional and are duly noted. When in doubt, consult the appropriate rule book. 3.03.2.1 Air Gun and BB Gun a. BB Gun - 5 meters - 5 yards, 17 inches - 16 feet 5 inches b. Air Rifle - 10 meters - 10 yards, 34 inches - 32 feet 10 inches c. Air Pistol - 10 meters - 10 yards, 34 inches - 32 feet 10 inches 3.03.2.2 Smallbore Rifle, 50 feet, 50 yards, 50 meters, 100 yards (200 yards for special competition) 3.03.2.3 Highpower (Big bore/centerfire) Rifle a. Conventional: 100, 200, 300, 500, 600 yards. (800, 900 and 1,000 yards for special long range activities) b. International: 300 meters c. Bench Rest: 100, 200 yards. Some activities are conducted at 300 and 1,000 yards, but are the exception. d. NRA Highpower Sporting Rifle: 100 and 200 yards e. Police Qualifications: 100 and 200 yards I-1-20 3.03.2.4 Pistol a. Bullseye: Indoor and outdoor 50 feet and 25 yards Outdoor: 25 and 50 yards International/UIT: 25 and 50 meters b. Police Combat: 7, 15, 25 and 50 yards c. Action Pistol: 7, 10, 25, 35 and 50 yards (different events may require different distances) d. Police Qualifications: Varies from 1 to 60 yards 3.03.2.5 Silhouette a. Air Rifle: 20, 30, 36 and 45 yards b. Smallbore Rifle: 40, 60, 77 and 100 meters c. Highpower and Blackpowder cartridge: 200, 300, 385 and 500 meters d. Air Pistol: 10, 12.5, 15 and 18 yards e. Hunter's and Smallbore Pistol: 25, 50, 75 and 100 meters f. Long Range Pistol: 50, 100, 150 and 200 meters g. NMLRA Muzzleloading: 50, 100, 150 and 200 yards 3.03.2.6 Muzzleloading a. Round ball: 25, 50, 100 and 200 yards b. Slug: 100 and 200 yards. (300, 600 and 1,000 yards special events only) 3.03.2.7 Moving Target 3.03.2.7.1 Except for international competitions, there are no set distances for running target. a. International: Air Gun: 10 meters Smallbore: 50 meters b. Informal: Rifle 25, 50 and 100 yards. Other distances may be used as appropriate. 3.03.2.8 Clay Target (Shotgun) 3.03.2.8.1 With clay targets, the distances are determined by how far a target travels before striking the ground. The actual distance at which a shooter breaks the target depends upon shooter ability and technique. a. Trap (ATA): 50 and 2 yards I-1-21 b. Trap (International/Olympic): 80 meters International Auto Trap: 75 meters c. Skeet (NSSA): 60 yards International: 65-67 meters d. NMLRA Black powder Trap: 50 yards Skeet: 60 yards e. Sporting/Hunting Clays, Quail Walk, etc. Distances vary for hunter training. Each event is designed to simulate hunting conditions. See Section II, Chapter 17, Outdoor Hunting Simulation Ranges. f. Crazy Quail/Riverside Skeet Distances may vary according to range site and preference, but would fall into a range of 40 to 80 yards. 3.03.2.9 Law Enforcement Training or Qualification 3.03.2.9.1 Law enforcement ranges vary according to local training requirements and range sites. In some instances, known distance ranges will be used, while in others firing distances are unknown. 3.04 Range Layout and Considerations 3.04.1 There are certain basic and optional considerations used to lay out ranges. Among these are: terrain features, site dimensions, type of range, soil structure, surrounding inhabitants, access and utilities. 3.04.2 General range considerations are outlined for the major types of ranges. See the technical chapters in Sections II and III for more detail. 3.04.3 Range Floor Contour (Grading) a. Material: The ground between the targets and firing line must be free of any hardened surface (smooth surfaced walkways, concrete and blacktop surfaces excepted), such as rocks or other ricochet producing materials. The surface may be sodded or planted with low growing ground cover. The floor of the range can be concrete or blacktop. When projectiles hit concrete or blacktop at shallow angles such as 20 degrees or less, they have a tendency to follow the angle of the surface or rise at about a 1-2 degree angle above the surface of the range floor. b. Configuration: Ideally, surface areas should be nearly level, sloping only enough to provide drainage. Slopes of 1-2 percent toward the targets, and 3 percent laterally, are ideal. c. Size: The overall size will be governed by the range distance and number of firing positions. I-1-22 3.04.4 Firing Positions (Points) a. Material: Positions should be hard surfaced. Surface material may be concrete; however, gravel, wood or sod are acceptable alternatives. For ranges where prone shooting is conducted, gravel or similar materials may cause problems for the shooter. Asphalt is another alternative, and may be used in conjunction with a firing line cover. For ranges with multiple firing lines, hard surfaced areas (walkways) located forward of another firing line should be recessed or shielded from bullet impact to avoid ricochets off exposed edges. Bullets striking the smooth surface of a walkway will tend to follow the walkway contour rather than ricochet in an unpredictable manner. b. Configuration: Target shooters generally prefer level firing lines, but for drainage the firing line should slope gently from front-to-rear providing a nearly level area for the shooter to stand on while shooting. Where extreme terrain features do not allow for a level firing line from side-to-side, firing line positions may be constructed at different elevations. Make allowances for radical elevation changes due to soil erosion and safety railings. c. Size: The width and depth of firing positions vary with each shooting activity. (See chart in the Appendix to this chapter). Also see NRA rule books as firing point size is normally prescribed in the rules for a specific activity. (Refer to Section 6, Range Standards, 6.2 Firing Point) For example, a prone rifle shooter requires a wider and deeper position than a standing pistol shooter. As a result, on multi-purpose ranges allowances must be made for larger firing points in the initial planning stages. Space may also be required for other areas, such as staging, smoking, spectator, lounge, etc. 3.04.4.1 Movable Barricades (Law Enforcement and Action Pistol) a. Material: Treated pine posts 4 x 4 inch or 2 x 6 inch are suitable. b. Configuration: Each post can be set into brackets or sockets at the firing line so the barricade can be easily moved to accommodate specific courses of fire including law enforcement training, qualification or competition. c. Bracket Dimensions: Made from concrete, plastic pipe or wood, the bracket/socket should extend into the ground to a depth adequate to support the barricade. This depth will vary with soil composition and bracket/socket fabrication. Plastic pipe is best and offers long, maintenance-free service while minimizing ricochets. See the chapter on Outdoor Law Enforcement for a design suggestion. Caution: Brackets/sockets should be set flush to the range floor to protect against direct hits. This will ensure proper fit when the barricade is moved as well as lessen the possibility of ricochets. 3.04.4.2 Firing Line Cover a. Material: Firing line covers should be constructed using low maintenance materials, such as concrete floors, sheet metal covered walls, treated lumber, corrugated plastics, etc. Corrugated plastic or metal roofs without insulation are unsuitable because of noise reflection. These materials can be covered with spray-on acoustical material or by applying other acoustic material. I-1-23 b. Configuration: The gable, flat, or shed roofs are best suited for firing line covers. The designs are simple and construction is relatively easy. c. Size: Roof pitch depends on local weather conditions. Where heavy snows are common, front to rear width must be designed to withstand snow and wind load factors. For this reason, many builders favor the gabled roof design, which adds strength via trusses. Other advantages of the gabled roof will be discussed under design considerations. The firing line cover in most competitive shooting events can be used only to protect the shooter from rain, snow or heat. Except for NRA Smallbore or International events, the sides and back are usually open to allow for unrestricted wind movement. For informal shooting, the firing line cover may be partially or totally enclosed. d. Firing line covers should include the use of guttering to redirect water off the front and back edges to aid the shooter's vision and comfort. This reduces splattering of water on equipment and the shooter. 3.04.4.3 Benchrests a. Material: Benchrests or shooting benches may be built of wood, steel, or concrete, and may be either permanent or movable. Specific designs incorporate maximum stability, an important factor in competitive benchrest shooting events. Precast concrete is recommended, offering long-term low-maintenance use. Support columns may be of steel or reinforced concrete. Wooden benchrests may be either permanently mounted on heavy timbers or movable. The only requirement is that benchrests be solid and sufficiently sturdy to provide a stable surface from which to shoot. b. Configuration: Designs vary according to specific use. c. Size: Overall bench sizes may vary, but height and stability must be exact for IBS or NBRSA competition. (NRA does not sanction benchrest competition.) 3.04.5 Backstop/Bullet Impact Berm Various factors can affect the course, travel, deflection, bounce-back and ricochet of bullets or shot. The distances and measurements stated below are to be considered as guidelines only. This Source Book does not represent or guarantee that a particular bullet or shot may not deflect, bounce-back or ricochet, even if the guidelines below are met. You may be held responsible for personal injury or property damage caused from any bullet or shot that escapes the shooting range or that deflects, bounces back or ricochets, no matter how well your backstop, sideberms or baffles may be constructed. 3.04.5.1 Main Backstop a. Material: Main backstops may be a natural hill or man-made earthworks, free of large rocks and debris to a depth of 18 to 24 inches. In areas where removing large rocks is impractical, steel backstops can be used or material trucked in for backstop construction. Another method used in rocky areas is to build a backstop with fill dirt or wood cribs as core material to minimize the cost of trucking in clean soil to finish the project. Any broken core material, or cribs must be covered with a minimum of 18 to 24 inches of soil and maintained to that depth. Where soil conditions permit the construction of earth backstops or side berms, discarded material such as broken concrete, rocks, asphalt, or I-1-24 bricks, may be used for the core or interior of the backstop or berm. This technique saves on the amount of clean fill required for surface treatment. All surface areas where bullets will strike are recommended to be free of large rock. Contact local agriculture agents for information on low, fast growing grasses common to the area to surface treat earthen backstops or berms. Crown vetch is a good choice in much of the United States, and it will aid in erosion control. Some areas of the country do not have enough available water to support ground cover. NRA highly recommends that ranges DO NOT use railroad ties, stacked lumber or wood products for backstops. Bullets embedded in the wood can eventually cause lead buildup sufficient in size to cause backsplatter or bounce back of projectiles or particles. Projectiles or particles can travel up to 50 yards straight back to the firing line with sufficient force to cause personal injury or property damage. CAUTION: Exposed automobile tires may cause bounce-backs where ammunition velocities are below 800 fps. Highly recommend that no automobile or truck tires be used in backstop construction. The exception would be commercial or club built backstops using ground rubber tires or chunk rubber, ¾ to 2 inches in size, is acceptable. Keep in mind that the rubber normally settles on a 30 degree angle from horizontal and is stable. Provide proper drainage for the backstop. When utilized with Geocell materials available today b. Configuration: Sides should be sloped as steep as soil conditions will allow. Shallow slopes may call for the installation of either a horizontal bullet catcher and/or a wall on top of the backstop to retain occasional ricochets. Most soils stabilize on about a 1.5-to-1 slope. Geocell materials may be used to aid with soil stabilization. c. Height: The recommended height for a backstop is 20 feet high, except where the down range area is backed up by high terrain features, such as a large hill or a mountain, or by sufficient distance, to contain occasional ricochets. Terrain and topographical features should always be considered when designing a range. This is especially true with a 50 foot range, often used by youth shooting sports programs, where 10 feet is commonly recognized as the appropriate height. Refer to your national counsels for youth activities for range construction and guidance as appropriate. Remember, where compaction procedures are not used, or do not work because of soil types, the fill material will settle, reducing the overall effective height. To counteract the condition, add additional fill as needed. 3.04.5.2 Intermediate Backstops 3.04.5.2.1 In some instances, such as in silhouette competition, intermediate backstops behind each bank of targets are required or desirable. Building these backstops for each specific distance is critical. Make every effort to contain those projectiles which strike the intermediate backstop. Provide an area where bullet strike is visible to the shooter or coach. I-1-25 a. Material: All surface areas where bullets will strike are recommended to be free of large rocks. No steel (with the exception of steel backstops), railroad ties, cribbing, or other hardened material should not be exposed to direct bullet strike. Steel plate backstops set at 45 degrees above the horizontal can be used effectively for smallbore rifle silhouette targets, except at 100 yards where bullet strikes are no longer visible. These steel backstops can be hinged, anchored in concrete, and when not in use, locked down in line with the horizontal surface of the ground. When other shooting activities are being conducted on this range, the retracted steel plates should correspond to the horizontal grade to prevent damage and prevent ricochets from occurring off exposed edges of the steel. b. Configuration: Silhouette shooting events call for target support brackets set off the ground by a minimum of 6 inches. The intermediate berms must be high enough to provide a good impact area and yet low enough to provide good downrange visibility. Slopes on intermediate berms should not be less than existing soil conditions allow usually a 1.5-to-1 slope. Earth used for these berms should be suitable for compaction in order to retain the steepest possible slopes. Where poor earth conditions exist, one may use sandbags to retain slopes. c. Size: Intermediate backstops are recommended to be a minimum of 2 feet higher than the top of the target. 3.04.5.3 Side Berms/Walls a. Material: Core material may be broken concrete, asphalt, rock-laden fill or other fill materials discarded by area contractors. Exercise caution as local soil conservation districts may restrict such use. Surface areas subjected to occasional bullet strikes should be rock and debris-free to a depth of at least 12 inches. As an alternative to earthen sideberms, masonry walls may be used. When using masonry walls, they should be grout filled unless using solid block and designed for the prevalent wind load. Precast concrete wall panels offer long-term use and ease of installation. They are generally less expensive than earthworks, and take up a much smaller footprint. Geocell materials may be used to build walls in areas where the soil is not stable such as sand. Refer to Geocell products in the Products and Services List. b. Configuration: Side berms need not be as high as the backstop, but they should have the same slope. For efficiency and cost savings, construct all berms as a single project. Install concrete walls vertically. c. Size: Earthen side berms suggested height is 8 feet. Caution: Where soil conditions present a problem with compaction, additional material should be added to compensate for settlement. Wooden or concrete walls are recommended to be 8 feet high, and designed to stop all projectiles from penetrating the barrier. 3.04.6 Baffles and Other Safety Barriers 3.04.6.1 Overhead Baffles I-1-26 3.04.6.1.1 Overhead baffles are used to contain the flight of bullets to a specified area within the range. These overhead baffles are useful in areas where space is limited. Baffles are also described in sections on particular shooting activities (See drawings A-11, A-12, A-13, and A-14). Other designs may be acceptable. a. Material: Construct baffles from a variety of materials, but make long-term low maintenance a design consideration. Reinforced concrete, steel, wood, and high- impact bullet-resistant plastics are some of the materials available. b. Configurations: Concrete panels should be pre-stressed, and a minimum of 6 inches thick. To interrupt or redirect the flight of errant projectiles, set concrete panels in place either vertically or at a 25 degree (See drawings A-13 and A-14). Width of these concrete slabs depends upon the local concrete contractor's capabilities. NRA recommends the slabs be pre-stressed and have a 5,500 psi rating, especially when using rifle calibers. c. Wood and metal used in a "sandwich" configuration, with wood facing the shooter, allows bullet penetration to the metal, yet prevents backsplatter. The off-side of the baffle panel is covered with a thin layer of wood to reduce sound generated by bullet strikes. Where sound is an issue, acoustical materials may be added to the face of the baffle. d. High impact clear plastics may be used as baffle material for some calibers in areas where light is needed to improve visibility. Baffles using this type of construction are very expensive, may only take two or three projectile impacts, and may be sensitive to UV radiation from the sun causing them to deteriorate over time. Such plastic prevents the escape of bullets and provides for natural illumination of the firing line area. e. Plywood can also be used for baffles. To do so, construct long boxes out of plywood and 2 x 6 inch lumber to be filled with a medium capable of stopping any bullet fired on the range, such as 3/4 inch crushed rock. Prior to baffle construction, select and test materials to be used in baffle construction to determine effectiveness for bullet containment. In some cases, the baffle must be designed with 2 x 8 inch or 2 x 10 inch lumber. Test every design to determine if it will stop the projectiles used at the range. If it fails, increase the baffle’s depth until you can effectively stop and contain the projectile. This will also require engineering the support structure to handle the additional load. f. Baffles designed using dimension lumber and built (See drawing A-14) are acceptable for pistol ranges. Recommend testing the baffle to ensure that projectiles will be contained. • You may add conveyor belting to the face of the baffle. This will reduce the velocity of the projectile, help protect the baffle, and will not be a reactive target for the shooter. As a projectile impacts the baffle, the remaining velocity and aerodynamic properties of the projectile change significantly. • Projectiles may travel the legal length of the property as long as they remain on property owned or controlled by the range. I-1-27 g. Size: Overhead baffles must extend the entire width of the firing line and connect to either a side wall or side berm.* Recommend concrete slabs be a minimum of 4 feet wide, 6 to 8 inches thick and 16 to 40 feet in length, and have a 5,500 psi rating. Lengths up to 40 feet of pre-stressed concrete will increase the effectiveness of the range design and give a larger open area without obstruction from support structures. Build wood/steel laminated panels 16 feet long and 4 feet wide. Thickness depends on laminations required for a specific range. Do not forget to design baffles taking snow and/or wind loads into consideration. • There are times when the earthen sideberms need to be accessible, or a road runs down range parallel to the side berm, for maintenance. In this case, the overhead baffle assemblies may not extend all the way to the side berm. The proper procedure is to construct a side baffle that attaches to the baffles and runs parallel to the side berm or perpendicular to the existing baffle assembly. In this situation, it should be designed so you cannot see blue sky from the shooting position. 3.04.6.2 Ground Baffles a. Material: Construct ground baffles from a combination of earth, steel, wood or concrete. b. Configuration: Install ground baffles vertically to coincide with overhead baffles or spaced effectively to eliminate or reduce horizontal surface areas exposed to direct fire. This reduces the possibility of ground generated ricochets. Steel ground baffles sloped toward the firing line have been used effectively to trap errant projectiles. The ground baffle's top edge or that surface exposed to direct hits must be designed to reduce even more the possibility of ricochets escaping between overhead baffles. (Refer to Typical Ground Baffle Section on drawing A-13.) Geocell materials can be utilized to build ground baffles by offering a vertical wall of earth. c. Size: Ground baffles vary in height depending on the distance between the targets and the firing line and the spacing required to reduce horizontal surfaces. d. NRA highly recommends that you do not use an earth only ground baffle, unless the earthen baffle will be regularly maintained at the steepest slope that the soils will allow. Otherwise erosion will wear the slop down and render it ineffective. 3.04.6.3 Bullet Catchers a. Material: Wood or concrete. Wood can be plywood, dimension lumber or railroad ties. b. Configuration: Install the catcher to provide maximum use of the exposed surface area. On earthen backstops, the horizontal bullet catcher is installed perpendicular (normal) to the slope. For training ranges, a horizontal bullet catcher built parallel to, and 8 feet above the ground is acceptable (see drawing A-10) but built lower on the backstop. c. Size: Extend horizontal bullet catchers across the entire width of the range and project a minimum of 6 feet out from the face of the backstop. I-1-28 d. Bullet catchers may also be diagonal set at approximately 45 degrees from vertical leaning toward the firing line. e. You may also have a vertical bullet catcher which may be a wall constructed out of a variety of materials. The purpose of these assemblies is to contain, redirect or slow the projectile, so it remains on the property. The use of Geocell materials will allow the height of the backstops to be raised providing a vertical wall. 3.04.7 Target Line (See definitions Section I, Introduction) 3.04.7.1 Target Frames/Backers a. Material: Use soft pine, metal, cardboard, plastic or a combination of these materials to build target frames and backers. (See drawing A-19) Cardboard or other material that allow bullets to pass through with minimum deflection is suitable for backing material. NRA recommends that you do not use plywood. It may leave wood splinters around the target area. b. Design: Target frames are generally rectangular or square. c. Size: Target frame size depends on the target being used. For example, for NRA bullseye pistol, the target frame must allow for a 21 x 24 inch size target; for highpower rifle, 4 x 6 feet at 200 and 300 yards; 6 x 6 feet at distances of 500 to 1,000 yards; and smallbore rifle, 14 inches wide and 42 inches high. Generally frames are sized to allow 2 to 3 inches of space around the edge of the target when a full face target is being used (smallbore rifle excepted). Important to remember: All targets should be placed at a height such that the projectile goes through the target and impacts the backstop. If a situation exists where this does not occur, re-evaluate and re-engineer your current range design. 3.04.7.2 Movable Target Holders/Carriers a. Material: Plastic (PVC) pipe, concrete, wood or metal. b. Design: Plastic pipe is commonly used for smallbore and pistol target frame holders. Two pieces are used for smallbore rifle targets, spaced 14 inches on center, centered on the centerline of the target and firing position. For pistols, each pipe is spaced 5 feet on center. c. Size: Plastic pipe may be 2 inch OD (Outside diameter), with target frames and support members constructed of nominal 2 x 2 inch lumber. 3.04.7.3 Pull-down target pits/butts 3.04.7.3.1 Where distances are too great to permit consistent spotting of bullet holes, normally 200 yards or more, target pits are constructed. Within these pits target carriers are installed and pullers pull the target mechanism down into the pit area to mark and spot shot hole locations. The I-1-29 target is then returned to its up position, shooters on the firing line can record the shot values and fire the next shot. a. Material: Construct pit walls of concrete, treated lumber, railroad ties or masonry. Pit walls must be protected with earth and therefore must be supported by deadman, (concrete block) anchors, and tieback tendons. Frames are built of soft pine, with carriers constructed from steel or wood. Frames should not contain bolts or screws, use only glue and wood dowels when you have people working in the pits. b. Design: Target pits or butts are used primarily for highpower ranges, and are built so target pullers are protected from the direct flight of well-aimed, errant or ricocheting bullets. Build a catwalk along the pit wall to allow ease of scoring and spotting shots. Target carriers are built using cantilevers, pulleys or sliding pipe mechanisms allowing the target to be withdrawn into the pits for scoring (See Range Source Book drawing A-19). c. Size: Generally target carriers are constructed to accept target frames 6 foot square, but they may be smaller, depending on range distance - 200 or 300 yards only, where smaller full-face targets (4 x 6 feet) are used. 3.04.7.4 Electronic Target Systems 3.04.7.4.1 There are circumstances where building pits may be cost prohibitive or drainage becomes a major issue especially in areas where the water table precludes building any pits. Should this occur, a secondary option of using electronic targets may provide a solution. These targets have sensing units in the target frame that uses sound triangulation to locate the impact of the projectile. This provides almost instantaneous feedback at the firing line, and the results can be printed out for each user. For matches, the scores can be published immediately without the hassle of scoring targets. Refer to Section IV, Vendors, Electronic Target Systems. 3.05 Range Control 3.05.1 Range control serves to provide rules and supervision that encourage safe, healthful and proper use of a range facility. 3.05.2 Posting Rules (Regulations and Signs) 3.05.2.1 Rules and Regulations must be established for each specific range. In addition to gun handling, administration and hours of operation, rules must address the particular circumstances or limitations of the individual range and its design. Range rules may be posted on a sign board erected at the range site. These rules should cover handling, carrying, cleaning, and instruction to include the 10 standard safety rules (see Section I, Chapter 2, Safety Plan). When you post range rules and regulations, be sure to enforce them. You may be held responsible for the personal injury or property damages caused by your failure to enforce your range rules and regulations. 3.05.2.2 Traditionally, range warning signs have been painted with red letters on white background, usually 12 x 16 inches in size with 6 to 8 inch letters, and posted at 100 foot intervals around the range perimeter. Where necessary, use dual language signs. Colors should be highly visible, such as safety yellow and black, or Scottsdale green or blaze orange. Signs may read I-1-30 Shooting Range Area Keep Out,≅ or Caution Firearms In Use, Keep Out.≅ Range Warning Signs may be ordered from the NRA Program Materials Center online at http://materials.nrahq.org, Item # NR-40710-AR-14836. There may be state or local statutes, ordinances, regulations and/or cases defining, specifying or addressing the issue of what is sufficient or effective notice to another party. This book does not represent or guarantee that the use of the NRA “Range Warning Sign” constitutes sufficient or effective notice to another party. You are strongly advised to engage a local attorney licensed to practice law in your state to advise you in regard to these matters. 3.05.3 Control Devices 3.05.3.1 Safety devices control the physical use of an outdoor range and are usually restrictive in nature. They include warning lights on traphouses and red flags (See highpower rule 6.9) or barriers to warn that someone is down range. Safety flags and signs posted at strategic points around the perimeter of the range will alert would-be trespassers, and warn intruders that going beyond a given boundary constitutes trespass and may be hazardous. Safety Flags can also be ordered from the NRA Program Materials Center online at http://materials.nrahq.org, Item #NR-40710-AR-14835. 3.05.3.2 Gunracks, mounted along range fences, building walls, or free standing on the range facility, are an added safety feature for a range. They reduce the handling of firearms. Free standing gunracks can be portable, yet sturdy enough not to collapse when full. a. Material: Treated dimension lumber, steel with wood or Trex where gun surfaces touch, or products similar to Trex®. b. Design: Build gunracks for long-guns using half-moon cutouts lined with soft padding (May not be necessary when using Trex®). Shelves along the top will aid shooters by providing an area on which to set gun or accessory boxes, etc. c. Size: Depending on range use, racks should provide ample room for all shooters. 3.06 Optional Features 3.06.1 Waiting areas provide comfort for users and facilitate a higher degree of range control. Such areas should be located away from the shooting area, preferably inside a building or in shaded areas. 3.06.2 Provide individual trash receptacles for trash and spent shell casings. Keeping the range clean helps prevent accidental falls and also improves the appearance of the range. 3.06.3 Bulletin boards provide a place where range officials can post notices, updates to range rules and regulations, and tournament scores. Bulletin boards can be updated regularly. 3.06.4 Restrooms for men and women are necessary. If the range cannot provide permanent restrooms, portable toilets will suffice. 3.06.5 A potable water supply, either from an area well, public utility, coolers or thermos containers is a valuable asset to the facility. I-1-31 3.06.6 Statistical office (building) is necessary if matches are conducted. Temporary structures may be used, such as tents or recreational vehicles. 3.06.7 Landscaping is important as a means of making the range facility attractive. I-1-32 ARTICLE 4. INDOOR RANGES 4.01 General Considerations 4.01.1 An indoor range is simply a range constructed indoors. The advantages over an outdoor range are: (1) Virtually any location will work (2) Will allow for year-round activities. While there are obvious advantages over outdoor installations, user health and safety must be considered carefully. Additionally, indoor ranges must be designed so projectiles cannot penetrate the walls, floor, or ceiling, and ricochets or backsplatter do not harm range users. The following discussion is a broad guideline from which the builder of an indoor range can begin the process (Typical floor plan is shown on drawing A-20). 4.02 Site Selection Factors 4.02.1 Site selection involves either a new structure or an existing structure. A new structure offers the advantage of original design, as well as flexibility for future needs. An existing structure and its use must comply with applicable zoning regulations. You are strongly advised to engage a local zoning attorney licensed to practice law in your state to advise you in regard to the local zoning regulations. Consider multi-use buildings carefully, particularly for noise and dust contamination. Caution: The use of existing structures often involves the removal of interior walls. Load-bearing walls should not be removed unless some provision is made for replacement support. Consult a structural engineer before you start. Installing steel backstops requires additional support or modifications to keep floors from collapsing or steel plates from buckling. Roof sections have to be strengthened to support baffles and the ventilation system. 4.02.2 Indoor ranges must incorporate walls, ceilings, and partitions capable of containing all projectiles fired on the range by containing or redirecting bullets into the backstop. Wall design may be hollow wall construction, you will have to build a building within the building to accommodate and insure that projectiles do not penetrate the walls or grout fill the existing wall. This may not be adequate for sound retention between you and the adjacent space if you are located within a multi-use structure (E.g., strip mall). NRA highly recommends you consult with an architect and an engineer that understands range design to determine costs of construction before you sign the lease or buy the building. 4.03 Range Layout and Features 4.03.1 On indoor ranges there are four main construction considerations: shooter needs, type of shooting activity, number of firing points, and number of users. Special consideration must be given to ventilation, lighting, safety baffles and backstop design. 4.03.2 Specific dimensions are outlined for indoor ranges in Section III. Some of these dimensions may change based on the type of range equipment chosen. 4.03.2.1 The following discussion dwells on certain standard basic and optional features for most indoor ranges. Air gun and archery ranges are also treated in the section, but require no I-1-33 special ventilation, illumination work, or materials, but do require a quality light source. This chapter provides the size and shape of the typical indoor range as a guide for planning. 4.03.3 Ventilation 4.03.3.1 Indoor ranges require an internal atmosphere adequate to protect the health of workers as elevated blood lead levels are a potential threat to those who work in indoor ranges. Those who design and construct ranges must understand the cause of lead poisoning, the symptoms, the consequences of over-exposure and how to prevent it. It is equally important that they understand how to design ventilation systems for a particular shooting activity (See Section III, Chapter 2). You are strongly advised to engage the services of environmental engineers, architects, etc., to advise you. You are also strongly advised to engage the services of an environmental attorney to advise you in regard to the applicable federal, state and local laws, statutes, ordinances and regulations regarding these matters. 4.03.4 Lighting 4.03.4.1 Light fixtures capable of reproducing "near daylight" conditions are best suited for indoor ranges. Modern technology makes it possible to blend light sources to reduce glare more effectively and aid in sharp vision. Proper lighting contributes greatly to the enjoyment and effectiveness of an indoor range (See Section III, Chapter 2). 4.03.5 Safety Baffles (Overhead and Side) 4.03.5.1 Safety baffles to protect lighting fixtures, ventilation and heating ducts, pilasters (Protrusions from the walls), electrical equipment, etc., may be incorporated into the overall design of the facility as needed. a. Material: The most common material is 10 gauge steel covered with wood to prevent backsplatter. This design will contain a 44 magnum. Consult your architect or engineer for baffle designs when firing rifle cartridges. b. Configuration: To contain bullets effectively and reduce damage, protective baffles should be mounted as shown on drawings A-20 and A-21. Basically baffles are mounted at 25 degrees to the vertical and horizontal depending on their application, such as overhead to protect lighting fixtures, along walls to protect protrusions (drawing A-21) and along the floor to protect exposed edges. c. Size: The size and placement of baffles depends on what surface areas require protection. Ceiling baffles (drawing A-21), for example are wider than side baffles (see drawing A-21). 4.03.6 Main Backstop 4.03.6.1 The main backstop is generally a fabricated steel plate, or series of plates, used for the purpose of stopping bullets fired on a range. In some instances backstop configurations and thickness of the plates will change according to the shooting activity or the design of the backstop. Backstop designs utilizing chunk or ground rubber materials have been on the market for over 10 years. Consult the manufacturer and your architect or engineer for specifics. I-1-34 a. Material: Steel backstops with sand or water pits are common, and are most often on old club ranges. Rubber is the newest material used in backstops; however a few of the older indoor ranges use earthen or sand backstops. Caution: Earthen or sand filled backstops may create health hazards for maintenance workers from silica and lead dust. They also cause excessive wear to the ventilation system fans. NRA recommends following the recommendations of 29 CFR 1910.10.25 OSHA’s document on lead to ensure the ventilation systems are designed to protect your employees. b. Configuration: There are many designs used for indoor ranges. Please refer to the Product & Services (Section IV) to obtain a list of range equipment manufacturers. Select your backstop carefully. Take into consideration: cost, type of material, maintenance, and the expected lifecycle. c. Size: Backstops should extend from side-to-side and from ceiling-to-floor to protect the end of the range completely from penetration by direct bullet strikes, prevent ricochets, backsplatter and splatter erosion of side walls. 4.03.7 Range Distances 4.03.7.1 Indoor range distances are based upon the type of shooting event to be held and are generally defined in rulebooks. Distances may be altered to meet the dimensions of an existing building design; however, shorter distances may not qualify for NRA sanctioned tournaments. It is also pointed out that for new construction, costs for ranges longer than 25 yards/meters are often prohibitive. Distance accuracy must be according to the NRA Rule Book for the sanctioned event. Refer to Section 6.4 of the NRA Rule Book for the specific discipline. Distances longer than the specified distance is usually acceptable, but shorter distances are not. 4.03.7.2 Most shooting activities can be conducted on indoor ranges. Many older indoor ranges were constructed for .22 caliber and air gun use only. For those who plan to build an indoor range and want to use centerfire rifle and pistols must decide if the added cost for backstops, target retrieval systems, baffles, sound abatement and ventilation is worth the effort. It will cost more to redesign and retrofit the range later, if you change your mind. 4.03.8 Range floor a. Material: The range floor should be constructed using recommendations from the Concrete Manufacturers Association. A single pour of any slab larger than 20 x 25 feet and the concrete will crack. NRA recommends you follow the recommendations of your architect or engineer to ensure the best pour for the type of surface and use you expect on the range. NRA recommends a fine uniform aggregate mix of concrete. Reinforcement: typically No. 4 steel rods placed 12 inches on center along with 6 x 6 inch 8/8 gauge welded wire fabric (WWF), but may vary according to soil conditions or requirements in the construction drawings. Very large floor areas may require two or more pours with expansion joints between each slab. Consult a concrete construction firm for guidelines. Epoxy fill all expansion joints and cracks along the side of the walls to keep green powder build up from occurring. I-1-35 b. Design: The floor ideally should be level. The floor should be no less than 4 inches thick. If you conduct training utilizing motorized vehicles, design the floor to accommodate the heaviest load expected or the floor may crack. c. Size: Size is governed by design. Remember, increases in size will result in an increase in costs for ventilation, lighting, heating systems and overall building design. Decisions are usually based on the expected number of users vs. overall cost. 4.03.9 Firing Positions/Points a. Material: Same as for range floor. Use of floor coverings, such as carpeting requires the material to be flame-retardant and is generally not recommended. Frequent cleaning is required to remove powder residue and lead dust. If carpet is used, NRA recommends using a nylon carpet as it is easier to clean. Green powder build up can occur and a flash fire could cause person injury, property damage and/ or death. b. Design: NRA recommends floor be poured level with no washouts and all joints be epoxy filled to keep green powder buildup to a minimum. c. Size: The length and width of each firing position will vary depending on each particular shooting activity. For example, a shooter in the prone position needs more space than a pistol shooter. A chart is provided on firing position sizes in paragraph 6.03.1 of the Appendix of this chapter. Allow space for administrative areas, such as staging, spectator, lounge, offices, storage, and class rooms. Competition rule books specify minimum firing position (Point) size. (Refer to Section 6.2 of the appropriate NRA Rule Book). 4.03.10 Shooting Booths a. Material: Shooting booths are best designed to contain any round used on the range and keep the projectile from entering the adjacent firing point. These can be made by the range owner or bought from a range equipment vendor. (See Section IV Range Products and Services). b. Design: Shooting booths may be set up to restrict shooter movement especially on pistol ranges. They may not be desirable for rifle ranges. Each booth should encompass the width of each firing position and extend 2 feet beyond and 18 inches to the rear of the firing line. Mount a table in each booth to restrict forward movement and for the shooter's use. This table may be hinged to provide easy access down range when authorized. 4.03.11 Walls a. Material: Poured concrete or grout filled CMU (Concrete masonry unit) is preferred, but wood may also be used. b. Design: Wall thickness must conform to acceptable engineering standards and comply with national, state, county and local building and zoning codes. Usually no less than three 3 inches thick, reinforced walls must be designed to prevent the exit of any projectile. I-1-36 Note: This specification usually requires the use of steel or similar material where wooden walls are used. c. Size: Depends upon building design, geological conditions and weather elements. Size includes height, thickness and length of running wall. 4.03.12 Ceiling a. Material: Ceiling material should be designed to reduce noise, protect lighting devices, reflect light and be impenetrable. Typically ceilings include, 10 gauge cold roll steel baffles (pistol rated), 2 x 4 foot white acoustic panels and clear light panels. For baffles where rifle calibers are used, NRA recommends contacting the manufacture of the range equipment. b. Design: A suggested maximum height of 8-9 feet above the floor level, with a smooth surface (Acoustically treated) to allow for positive air movement down range. Baffles to protect adjoining areas should be above a false ceiling or designed into the roof/safety ceiling structure. 4.03.13 Floor Guards 4.03.13.1 Floor guards are provided to protect leading edges or protrusions (E.g., drains or traps). Floor guards are designed to redirect errant bullets into the backstop area, thus minimizing damage to the range. If you are designing a new range, NRA recommends you do not install any floor drains. This will eliminate the need for floor guards. a. Material: Floor guards are typically constructed from 10 gauge steel and may be covered with wood. They may also be constructed of AR-235 to AR-500 steel depending on calibers used on the range. b. Design: Floor guards are installed horizontally along the floor surface parallel to the firing line. These guards typically slope away from the firing line and at a 25-degree angle to the horizontal. c. Size: Floor guards should extend only as high as necessary to protect exposed surfaces. 4.03.14 Target Holders/Backers a. Material: Use soft pine, metal or combinations of both for frames. Corrugated cardboard is typically used for target backing material. b. Design: Target holders can be a simple upside down "T," to which two clips are affixed to hold targets. Target holders should be durable, yet easily changeable when damaged. Target holders for "backer" targets and turning target mechanisms are required for tournament operations. c. Size: Targets used on indoor ranges usually measure approximately 10 x 12 inches for pistol and 10 x 14 inches for rifle. The holder need only provide clip spacing adequate to hold the target in place. (Note: From the firing position, the target center should be at eye level.) I-1-37 4.03.15 Shooting Tables/Benches (for pistol only) a. Material: 5/8 inch plywood, 1/4 inch masonite and 2 x 2 inch (Soft pine) dimension lumber (Typical). b. Design: The shooting table is installed with the back edge coinciding with the firing line. Maintaining an orderly table or bench contributes to an orderly firing line and a safe attitude on the part of shooters. Side screens may be added to control angles of fire, reduce noise and prevent spent cartridge cases from hitting other shooters. c. Size: Top of table/bench to be 36 inches above floor level, having a minimum surface area of 36 x 18 inches. For universal access, NRA recommends lowering the table height to accommodate a person sitting in a wheel chair. Table height would normally be no higher than 28 ½ inches. 4.03.16 Floor drains NRA recommends no floor drains be installed in the range. Use vacuums to clean floor. Floors can be cleaned and wet mopped with special cleansers that attach to the lead particulate. The water is then filtered to contain the particulate and the particulate and the filter are put in a designated 55 gallon drum as hazardous waste. 4.04 Range Control 4.04.1 Range control provides rules and supervision that encourages safe, healthful and proper use of a range. Remember, if you promulgate range rules and regulations, be sure to enforce them. You may be held responsible for the personal injury or property damage caused by failure to enforce your range rules and regulations. 4.04.2 Posting Rules, Regulations and Signs 4.04.2.1 See Section I, Chapter 2, Safety Plan 4.04.3 Control Devices 4.04.3.1 Safety devices control the physical use of an indoor range. Usually restrictive in nature, they include: warning lights, alarm bells, switch locations, etc. NRA highly recommends that you do not design any range with a door in the down range area. This is a safety issue. No one should to be in the down range area or have access to it unless they are in the maintenance mode. If you are required by local fire code to have a door down range, NRA recommends the door be secured by a mortise lock or barred from within, but should remain a fire exit. Fire codes generally prohibit bars on doors that would delay escape from a building. Make sure each door is alarmed and ensure the alarm works when the door is opened. Test the alarm often to make sure it works. Make this part of your maintenance schedule. Exception: Depending on the type of bullet trap, you may need to have access behind the trap for maintenance. Make sure door is protected and that it has an alarm should someone open the door when live fire is being conducted. I-1-38 4.04.3.2 Target carriers are primarily used for the convenience of shooters to allow them to continue shooting without delay when target changes are necessary. For indoor ranges where competitions will be conducted, target carriers and turning target mechanisms are a definite plus. From a health standpoint, target carriers serve to keep shooters out of the "high lead concentration" areas and safely behind the firing line. Target carriers are commercially available, see Reference section, in the Appendix. 4.04.3.3 Install heating units behind and above the firing position to provide a comfort zone for the shooter and protect the heating units. 4.04.3.4 Gunracks mounted along the walls behind the firing positions are an added safety feature. They reduce gun handling and serve to keep range areas orderly. a. Material: Soft pine shelving lumber or Trex®. b. Design: Build gunracks using half-moon cutouts and install soft padding where the barrel would touch the wood. For pistols, shelves above rifle racks provide the best use of space. c. Size: Depending on range use, racks should provide ample room for all shooters. Cramped space can foster accidents, such as tripping over a pistol box or rifle and may damage to the firearm or cause personal injury to the range user. 4.05 Optional Features 4.05.1 A suitable lounge area provides comfort and adds a greater degree of control for range officers. It also separates spectators from uncased firearms. 4.05.2 Provide receptacles for trash and spent shell casings. Spent shell casings represent potential revenues for range operations and should be kept separate. Keeping the range clean prevents accidental falls and reduces lead dust. Also provide a container for disposal of misfires or dud cartridges. 4.05.3 Coat racks are a good addition, especially in the winter months. Keep coat racks outside the range areas to keep them free of lead dust. 4.05.4 Special vacuum cleaners, meeting Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) specifications for dust removal are suggested to protect workers and to preserve air quality. CAUTION: DO NOT use regular household or shop vacuums. (See Vendors List vacuums) 4.05.5 Design or modify the indoor range to include restrooms. NRA recommends complying with 28 CFR Part 36 ADA Standards for Accessible Design. This will make your facility universally acceptable to all members. I-1-39 ARTICLE 5. APPENDIX 5.01 Site Evaluation Questionnaire and Appraisal 5.01.1 The following questionnaire is a guide to determining if a site is suitable for constructing either an indoor or outdoor shooting range. Bear in mind that certain legal restrictions may dictate where the facility may be located, so it is advisable to consult with an attorney. i.e. [>, greater than; <, less than] Access: Dedicated right-of-way [ ] Trail [ ] Logging road [ ] Dirt road [ ] Gravel road (All weather) [ ] Paved road [ ] Travel Distance for shooters: > 0 < 10 miles [ ] > 10 < 20 miles [ ] > 20 < 30 miles [ ] > 30 miles [ ] Utilities Available: Electricity [ ] Phone [ ] Water [ ] Natural Gas [ ] Sanitary Sewer [ ] Local Habitation < 2 mile [ ] > 2 mile < one mile [ ] > one mile < two miles [ ] > two miles [ ] Other land uses: Hunting [ ] Hiking [ ] Horse Trails [ ] Parks [ ] Other [ ] None [ ] Vegetation: Cleared [ ] Scrub brush [ ] Light timber [ ] Heavy timber [ ] Size: < 10 acres [ ] > 10 acres < 20 acres [ ] > 20 acres < 50 acres [ ] > 50 acres < 100 acres [ ] > 100 acres [ ] I-1-40 Area Geology: Clay [ ] Sand [ ] Heavy rock, i.e., [ ] Swamp [ ] Other [ ] Topography: Desert [ ] Plains [ ] Hilly [ ] Mountainous [ ] Flood Plain [ ] In Proposed Impact area: Lakes [ ] Ponds [ ] Rivers [ ] Weather: Dry [ ]; Semi-Dry [ ]; Wet [ ]; High Winds [ ]; Heavy Snows [ ]; other [ ] (please list) ____________________________________________________________________________________ Zoning*: RR 1 [ ] RR 2 [ ] C-1 [ ] C-2 [ ] Agriculture [ ] Conservation [ ] Recreational [ ] Non-Conforming Use [ ] Ownership: Private [ ] City [ ] County [ ] State [ ] or Federal [ ] * (RR-1 = Rural Residential single family homes, RR-2 = Multi-family dwellings, C-1 = light industrial, C-2 = heavy industrial and the remaining three are self-explanatory.) Note: Zoning designations will vary to some degree in each zoning jurisdiction. You are strongly advised to engage a local zoning attorney, licensed to practice law in your state, familiar with zoning laws to advise you in regard to the zoning regulations in your particular jurisdiction. 5.01.2 Considerations for construction of an indoor range. 5.01.2.1 Use of an existing building. a. In the event original drawings of the building are not available make a sketch of each floor of the building with special emphasis on load bearing walls. b. Identify type of exterior wall construction. Masonry [ ] Wood [ ] Concrete [ ] Metal [ ] Combination [ ] Other [ ] Walls, ceilings and floors must be capable of containing any bullet fired in the range area as well as aid in the reduction of sound. The ideal wall is made of poured concrete a minimum of 6 inches thick with rough porous interior surfaces, which may be further treated with sound absorbing materials. Finish concrete floors to have a non-porous surface. This will aid in range cleaning. Ceilings should be a suggested height of 8-10 feet and enclosed to reduce air turbulence created by ventilation systems. Existing buildings often require extensive modification often exceeding the I-1-41 costs of new construction; however, certain building types can be used to good advantage, such as warehouse buildings, abandoned bowling alleys, etc. c. Evaluate structural support designs of older buildings from the standpoint of the ability to withstand new loading. Original design considerations usually do not allow for installing heavy backstops and other range equipment. To decide if modifications are necessary, analyze slab buildings carefully to determine the capacity for floor loading. Original plans and design specifications are the best source of determining the composition of the floor and footings. In some instances, the entire slab may need replacement, while in others only the portion underneath the backstop area may need to be replaced. d. Electrical wiring will usually require the removal of small sized wiring and its replacement with wiring capable of handling the new electrical load both internally and externally. The added power needs for range ventilation, heating, lighting and target carrier mechanisms may require the building service to be upgraded. In most areas, this work calls for electrical permits that a licensed electrician obtains. e. Plumbing doesn't usually require any major modifications; however, heavy metals may be prohibited by area wastewater treatment collection systems. The use of a dry well system or on-site septic systems may be necessary for disposal of what may be determined as hazardous waste material, i.e., lead. It is critical that local restrictions be reviewed for compliance. Special filters and filter systems may have to be installed to capture the lead particulate allowing the cleaning crew to dump filtered water directly into the drain. f. Ceiling joists will usually require strengthening to support baffles and shielding material. In some cases the entire roof structure may need to be upgraded to handle the additional load. 5.01.2.2 New Construction a. New indoor construction projects require the same guidelines as existing buildings, but have the advantage of building a structure especially designed as a range. These advantages are discussed more fully in Section III- Indoor Ranges. 5.02 Shotfall Zones 5.02.1 Shotfall zones for shotgun ranges are also based on maximum ranges of shot and will vary according to shot size, therefore, most shotgun ranges restrict shot size to sizes no larger than No. 71/2, with the exception that larger shot may be used when patterning a shotgun. Maximum ranges according to the Journee' formula shown in Chart B under 3.02.2.2 provides a guide for range layout work. More information covering shotfall zones is provided in Section II - Outdoor Ranges. It is pointed out that Journée=s formula does not hold true for steel shot of the same dimension. Various factors can affect the maximum distance that a bullet or shot may travel. This source book does not represent or guarantee that a particular bullet or shot may not travel further than the stated distances. Remember that you will most likely be held responsible for the damage or injury caused from any bullet or shot that escapes the shooting range, no matter what the distance that the bullet or shot traveled. I-1-42 5.03 Firing Positions (Indoor and Outdoor) 5.03.1 Firing point/position dimensions: Range Type Suggested Minimum Width Length Width Length Smallbore (.22 rimfire) 5 ft. 7 ft. 4 ft. 7 ft. High Power Rifle 6 ft. 12 ft. 6 ft. 7 ft. Muzzleloading 7 ft. 6 ft. 7 ft. 6 ft. Pistol 4 ft. 4 ft. 3 ft. 3 ft. Air Gun 4 ft. 6 ft. 4 ft. 5 ft. Shotgun 3 ft. 3 ft. 3 ft. 3 ft. Archery 6 ft. 4 ft. 5 ft. 4 ft. Note: For competitive events firing point/position dimensions are specified in the appropriate NRA Rule Book under 4.0 Targets or 6.0 Range Standards. 5.03.2 Firing positions should be numbered to correspond with each target to avoid confusion. Markers, readily identifiable, should be set or painted at the left front corner of each position running in a left to right ascending order. Additional space behind and along the firing line area must be allowed for range officers, scorers, etc. Recommend consulting the NRA Rule Book for your particular discipline. 5.03.3 For detailed information on what has been discussed in this chapter see the appropriate technical chapter. i Julin S. Hatcher, “Use of Ingalls’ Ballistic Tables,” Hatchers Notebook, 1962, published by the Stackpole Co. pages 584-625. ii Sierra Infinity v6, Exterior Ballistics Software, Sierra Bullets, 2008, iii Lowery, Ed, and Garner, Keith, ShotShell Ballistics for Windows 3.1,1996 Range Services ©2012 National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section I Chapter 2 SAFETY PLAN I-2-2 I-2-3 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Assumptions 1.03 Control 1.04 Cross Reference ARTICLE 2. SAFETY PLANNING 2.01 Introduction 2.02 Planning for Safety 2.03 The Safety Plan 2.04 Gun Handling & Shooting Rules 2.05 General Range Rules ARTICLE 3. GENERAL ADMINISTRATIVE REGULATIONS 3.01 Introduction 3.02 General Categories ARTICLE 4. GENERAL RANGE COMMANDS 4.01 Purpose 4.02 Superseding Commands 4.03 Suggested Basic Range Commands 4.04 Commands and Actions I-2-4 ARTICLE 5. CROSS REFERENCE 5.01 NRA Range Safety Officer ©2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). I-2-5 ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 The primary purpose of this chapter is to address issues pertinent to the development of a safety plan for a proposed range project. It also points out that safety is a function of management and shooters together, involving a series of decisions to develop a workable safety plan. The plan must be clear, concise, and understood by all users. It must continue throughout the life of the project. A properly designed and constructed plan does not guarantee a risk-free operation, nor does a well written document spelling out safety rules and regulations create a safe environment. The human element must be controlled through a positive action plan that combines both physical and psychological aspects into a cohesive, manageable operation. It is incumbent upon range managers to understand the design principles involved in range development. 1.02 Assumptions 1.02.1 The term "safe range" is based on the assumption that all shooting takes place in the direction of the targets; that firearms are unloaded and actions open when arriving or departing a range; that firearms are always unloaded except when the shooter is in position on the firing line; and that users will use only firearms with which they are familiar, and will always use the proper ammunition. There are more, but these assumptions are the basis of a good safety plan. A range is only as safe as the manner in which it is used. 1.03 Control 1.03.1 Positive control assures that range facilities are used properly. Shooters must obey posted rules and conduct themselves in a responsible manner. Control of a facility implies that appropriate authority is bestowed upon range officers appointed to enforce the rules. Disciplinary action, such as reprimands, suspension or revocation of range privileges, may be necessary to correct errant behavior. If you do promulgate range rules, you must enforce them. You may be held responsible for the damage or injury caused by your failure to enforce your range rules. 1.04 Cross Reference 1.04.1 A general discussion of what constitutes a quality range facility can be found in Section I, Chapter 1 - General Information. Specific rules related to outdoor and indoor facilities including specific shooting activities, may be found in the corresponding chapters in Sections II and III. I-2-6 ARTICLE 2. SAFETY PLANNING 2.01 Introduction 2.01.1 The expression "safety is no accident" implies the necessity of planning. This plan is a written document with a heading, date, preamble and terms. It should be approved, signed, published, and reviewed at specific intervals and distributed to all range users. 2.02 Planning for Safety 2.02.1 All elements of the plan must fit into an integrated, package, best described as "the Four E's": EVALUATE, ENGINEER, EDUCATE and ENFORCE. 2.02.2 The first step is to EVALUATE the needs of the user and identify what specific shooting activity will be conducted on the facility. As there may be many shooting activities at your facility, evaluate each one as it relates to the proposed range site. Each shooting activity requires different design considerations, making it even more important to select the best site and configuration for a particular activity. Note: During these initial phases of the project, evaluate several sites to ensure that the site chosen is the best. Problems can occur when a course of fire is conducted on a range for which it was never designed. 2.02.3 Whatever the choice, it is necessary to ENGINEER the range specifically to accommodate the chosen shooting activity. The use of the range facility outside its design limits violates accepted engineering practices and breeches the basic concept of a safety plan. Those who control the range must understand this important concept, and must provide procedures for using the facility correctly. 2.02.4 Once the engineering phase is complete and the range is open for live firing activities, it becomes necessary to EDUCATE those who use the facility. "Few shooters know how to use a range properly" is the premise on which a user education program, including evening and weekend classes, is based. Training programs aimed at teaching supervisors and users how to use a range properly is an important part of the overall safety plan. 2.02.5 A strong relationship exists among the Evaluation, Engineering and Education processes. However, the final process, ENFORCEMENT, must be added to solidify the safety plan. A quality set of rules and regulations may be almost worthless without a means of assuring compliance by all users. This mechanism provides two types of control: Passive, meaning single shooter no supervision, or Active, meaning either a range officer is in charge or any number of instructors are on hand to maintain close control. Whatever type is utilized, formulate a comprehensive set of rules and regulations and support them with adequate enforcement procedures. I-2-7 2.03 The Safety Plan 2.03.1 The safety plan stipulates how, when, why and by whom the facility will be used. It is a document used during the planning, design, construction and the use of the facility. 2.03.1.1 The document should be written on the club or range letterhead or official stationary. 2.03.1.2 The document should indicate the date of adoption and obtain the signatures of the current officers. Highlight subsequent revisions and include a record of when and by whom modifications were made and approved. 2.03.1.3 Any revisions should specifically state (1) that they supersede and replace any previously adopted safety plan segments and (2) that previously distributed copies be destroyed. Also establish a review date, perhaps once a year, to assure the safety plan is working and remains relevant. 2.03.1.4 The document should include a preamble stating a specific purpose. For example: "This safety plan has been established to ensure the health and safety of those individuals who use or frequent this facility and the community at large. It is a plan developed to assure the continuity of a facility through a concerted public relations effort." 2.03.1.5 There should be a terminology section to define clearly terms often loosely interpreted. 2.03.1.6 The safety plan should divide rules and regulations into categories: Section I, Gun Handling Rules; Section II, General Range Rules; and Section III, Specific Range Rules (according to the type range); and Section IV, Administrative Rules and Regulations (refer to Article 3). 2.03.1.7 Any exceptions to the rules or regulations should be carefully defined to avoid confusion. Exceptions may be printed in a combined separate section, or directly after each rule to which a specific exception applies. A prime example is alcoholic beverages. Alcoholic beverages should never be allowed when live firing is in progress. However, when picnics or special outings are held on the facility, alcoholic drinks may be allowed but ONLY in moderation, in designated areas and only after shooting activities have ended for the day. There may be federal, state or local statutes, ordinances and/or regulations prohibiting, or making criminal, the sale and/or serving of alcohol without having obtained a license to do so. You are strongly advised to engage a local attorney licensed to practice law in your state to advise you in regard to these matters. 2.03.1.8 Spell out the consequences or action that will accompany any violation of the safety rules and regulations. Any disciplinary action taken should fit the offense with varying degrees of severity. Disciplinary action may range from a friendly warning to being ejected from the facility. Remember, without enforcement, the safety plan is worthless. You are strongly advised to consult with a local attorney licensed to practice law in your state to advise you in these matters. 2.03.1.9 Post the projected review date on bulletin boards and send notices to users. Everyone will now know when to check for revisions or submit recommendations for changes. 2.03.1.10 Identify specific categories of rules and regulations and publish them in order of their importance to the safety plan. I-2-8 2.03.2 Gun Handling Rules 2.03.2.1 Gun handling rules are of primary importance. They should always appear first in the safety plan and be prominently displayed on the range. Several versions exist, but as a minimum, the following rules are suggested: a. ALWAYS KEEP THE GUN POINTED IN A SAFE DIRECTION. b. ALWAYS KEEP YOUR FINGER OFF THE TRIGGER UNTIL READY TO SHOOT, and outside the trigger guard, until ready to fire or until the command "Commence Firing" has been given. c. ALWAYS KEEP THE ACTION OPEN AND FIREARM UNLOADED UNTIL READY TO USE. On a firing range this means the shooters are in position on the firing line and the range has been cleared for live firing. d. KNOW YOUR TARGET AND WHAT IS BEYOND. When on shooting ranges, be mindful also of adjacent areas and act accordingly. e. BE SURE THE GUN IS SAFE TO OPERATE. f. KNOW HOW TO USE THE GUN SAFELY. g. USE ONLY THE CORRECT AMMUNITION FOR YOUR GUN. When at a shooting range with more than one firearm, use one at a time and when finished, store that firearm and its ammunition before using the next one. h. WEAR EAR AND EYE PROTECTION as dictated by the shooting range. i. NEVER USE ALCOHOL OR DRUGS BEFORE OR WHILE SHOOTING. j. STORE GUNS SO THEY ARE NOT ACCESSIBLE TO UNAUTHORIZED PERSONS. There may be federal, state or local statutes, ordinances and/or regulations regulating the manner of firearms storage, including some that may make the failure to properly store firearms a criminal offense. You are strongly advised to consult with a local attorney licensed to practice law in your state to advise you in regard to these matters. k. Be aware that certain types of guns and many shooting activities require additional safety precautions. 2.03.3 General Range Rules 2.03.3.1 All general range rules, whether indoor or outdoor ranges, should incorporate at a minimum the following: a. Know and obey all range commands. b. Know where others are at all times. c. Shoot only at authorized targets. d. Ground level targets are not authorized without a proper backstop. See exceptions for Smallbore Rifle, Highpower and Smallbore Silhouette. Maintain the proper target height to ensure that the fired projectile, after passing through the target, hits the desired portion of the backstop. This will reduce the possibility of ricochets and projectiles escaping the property. e. Designate a range officer when none is present or assigned. f. Unload, open the action, remove the magazine and ground and/or bench all firearms during a cease-fire. g. Do NOT handle any firearm or stand at the firing line where firearms are present while others are down range. h. Always keep the muzzle pointed at the backstop or bullet trap. Never allow the muzzle to point in any direction whereby an inadvertent discharge would allow the escape of a projectile into an outer area. I-2-9 2.03.4 Specific Range Rules and Regulations 2.03.4.1 Specific range rules and regulations must be developed for each range facility and shooting activity. At a minimum they should include: a. Gun Handling Rules. b. General Range Rules. c. Regulations on the type of firearm, shooting activity, caliber, shot size or type of target to ensure range user safety. d. Establish administrative regulations regarding target supplies, target frame materials, security and equipment usage, along with buildings and grounds maintenance for safe and efficient range operations. 2.03.5 Administrative Rules and Regulations 2.03.5.1 This section of the Safety Plan contains the administrative rules and regulations that normally govern range schedules, parking, guest policies, member/user responsibilities, hours of operation, security, program development, range supervision and sign-in procedures. 2.03.6 Guarantees of Notification 2.03.6.1 The prominent posting of rules and regulations and the mailing of copies to each member or user are two approaches. The best method is to hold a series of meetings at which each user is given a copy and is requested to read it and sign, stating that it has been read, it is understood, and will be followed. As each individual is contacted, check his/her name off on a sheet. Another approach is to print the rules in each copy of the newsletter or to read them at each meeting. Regardless of the method, be certain no one uses the facility unless he/she knows, understands and will comply with the rules. 2.03.7 Summary 2.03.7.1 A safety plan links each aspect of the process - planning, design, construction and use - into an integrated program. This program is designed to reduce risks associated with the use of firearms either on or off the range. Further, the plan protects the safety and health of those who live nearby. I-2-10 ARTICLE 3. GENERAL ADMINISTRATIVE REGULATIONS 3.01 Introduction 3.01.1 Administrative regulations aid in defining who does what, when, why and for what reason. This portion of the range safety document covers the organization and operation of the facility and is a supplement to the regular safety rules and regulations. 3.02 General Categories 3.02.1 Forming a club, an organization or chartering an agency requires certain documentation, including the following: charter, by-laws, safety plan and other legal documents as required by national, state and local laws, regulations and guidelines. These documents must establish: 1. Who is authorized to use the facility (members, the public, employees, special groups, law enforcement)? 2. What method will be used to identify authorized personnel? 3. The authority of range officials to carry out the rules and regulations and to enforce penalties. 4. General use procedures of the facility. Where are targets stored? What targets can be used and for what purpose? How are targets to be used? 5. Hours of operation. 6. What shooting activities are allowed, and specifically which ones are NOT allowed? What restrictions are placed on how a firearm is to be used. 7. The scheduled use of the facility. Can it be reserved? By whom and for what purposes? Can alcoholic beverages be consumed on the property when firearms are not present? Can other organizations use the facility? 8. The transportation of firearms into and from the facility. How are they to be transported? 9. Buildings and grounds maintenance. 10. Food service on the grounds. 11. Pet policy. 12. Parking. 3.02.2 There are serious legal, accounting, monetary and tax consequences that will result depending upon which type of organizational structure your club chooses. Seek the advice of an accountant and an attorney to determine whether you should incorporate and what type of tax status to apply for. Use the services of a local attorney licensed to practice law in your state to advise you, to prepare the organizational documents, and to file documents with the appropriate state agencies. I-2-11 ARTICLE 4. GENERAL RANGE COMMANDS 4.01 Purpose 4.01.1 The purpose of range commands are to provide concise, clear and standard methods of range operation. This provides the shooters or participants with easy to understand guidelines and enhances safety. 4.02 Superseding Commands 4.02.1 All sanctioned competitions and many organizations have standardized range commands which may supersede the commands contained herein. The following are offered only as a guide in developing a range safety plan document. 4.03 Suggested Basic Range Commands 4.03.1 Any range or shooting organization that does not have prescribed range commands or does not desire to develop their own should use the commands given in the applicable rulebook as published by the NRA or other shooting sports governing body. The commands provided in Section 4.04 (Commands and Actions) are a guide from which to develop commands for a particular use. 4.03.2 The following commands are provided along with their purpose and a description of the action that should result. All commands are given by a designated range or safety official, except for cease-fire or misfire. A cease-fire may be called by anyone detecting an unsafe situation. In the event of a misfire, the shooter experiencing the difficulty should alert the range officer immediately. If a range officer is not formally assigned, then participants should mutually designate a person to perform the function. 4.04 Commands and Actions 4.04.1 To indicate EMERGENCY OR HAZARDOUS CONDITIONS a. Command: CEASE FIRE! Purpose: To stop all shooting routinely or, in case of emergency, immediately Action: Participants immediately stop shooting, continue to keep the muzzle pointed down range, remove finger from within the trigger guard, unload and clear the firearm and await further instructions from the range officer. b. Command: MISFIRE! Purpose: To notify the range officer and other participants that a round did not fire when the trigger was pulled and to alert other shooters along the line that a hazardous condition may exist. Action: (1) The shooter experiencing the misfire continues to keep the firearm pointed down range, removes the finger from within the trigger guard and awaits further instructions. (2) The range officer may or may not call a general cease-fire depending upon the situation. (3) Shooters immediately adjacent to the misfire should cease fire, unload, open and either ground or bench their firearms and step back from the line. I-2-12 (4) The remaining shooters may continue to fire as directed by a range officer or may cease fire at their option and await further instructions. 4.04.2 Preparing the range for live firing a. Command: ΑLOAD!≅ (Optional for training) Purpose: To notify participants that they can load the prescribed number of rounds. For muzzleloaders, the commands are somewhat different. The command to "Commence Firing" is given after which the participants will snap a minimum of three caps prior to loading the firearm. The command "load" is not for muzzleloading shooters. Action: Participants will load the prescribed number of rounds and stand ready for the next command. b. Command: ΑIS THE LINE READY?≅ Purpose: To determine if all shooters along the line are ready. Action: All shooters not ready should indicate their status to the range officer. Sufficient time will be allowed for the shooter to complete his preparation. c. Command: ΑREADY ON THE RIGHT!≅ Purpose: To declare that the shooters have indicated they are ready. Action: Any shooter not ready at this command may chose to either alert the line officer that he is not ready or to complete the process of getting ready before the final command has been given. d. Command: ΑREADY ON THE LEFT!≅ Purpose: To continue the command prior to giving the commence firing command. Action: Any shooter not ready at this command may chose to either alert the line officer that he is not ready or to complete the process of getting ready before the final command has been given. e. Command: ΑREADY ON THE FIRING LINE!≅ Purpose: To notify all participants that the range is about to be under live fire and that if anyone is not ready at this point, he should call a range officer; otherwise, await the next command. Action: Participants simply wait for the next command. f. Command: ΑCOMMENCE FIRING!≅ Purpose: To declare the range formally open for live fire. Action: The participants may commence the prescribed course of fire. Muzzleloaders may snap caps prior to loading. No muzzleloader may be loaded before the command to fire has been given. 4.04.3 Firing Period Firing shall continue until a predetermined time period has lapsed or until all participants have completed the prescribed course of fire. During informal shooting events, participants when finished firing should simply open the action, clear the firearm, bench or ground the firearm and step back behind the line and wait until all shooters have completed the event. After this, a mutually agreed upon cease-fire is called. I-2-13 I-2-13 4.04.4 To stop firing and declare the range safe a. Command: ΑSHOOTERS YOU HAVE (X) NUMBER OF MINUTES LEFT TO COMPLETE THE COURSE OF FIRE or SHOOTERS FIRE YOUR REMAINING ROUNDS.≅ Purpose: To alert all shooters that a general cease-fire is about to be called and to allow all shooters to complete the course of fire. Those that have completed the day's activities may put away their equipment. In the event there are rounds remaining that have not been fired, the shooter, upon the command "Cease Fire" simply unloads, clears and grounds, or benches his firearm. b. Command: ΑCEASE FIRE!≅ Purpose: To stop all firing. Action: All participants shall unload, open, remove magazines and bench or ground all firearms. And if activities are complete for the day, step back from the line or clear the area by packing away firearms, ammunition, other gear and cleaning up the area. c. Command: ΑSNAP CAPS!≅ (Muzzleloading only) Purpose: To assure that the flash hole is open and the barrel is free of any material (oil) capable of causing a hang fire. In some events, this command is also used to determine if all firearms are unloaded. In others, safety precautions require the guns to be uncapped, unprimed with hammers down prior to leaving the line. Action: All participants using percussion type muzzleloaders shall step up to the firing line, affix a primer cap, point the firearm down range and "snap" the cap. d. Command: ΑRANGE IS CLEAR!≅ Purpose: To alert all shooters along the line that travel beyond the firing line for purposes of target change or retrieval, the removal of brass and trash is approved. Action: Participants may move down range as directed or desired to change, remove targets or to clean up. The next relay shall not take up positions on the firing line until told to do so. Participants not going down range are to stand back from the firing line and away from firearms. NO firearm will be handled while others are down range. I-2-14 ARTICLE 5. CROSS REFERENCE 5.01 NRA Range Safety Officer Course and Lesson Plan available at http://www.nrahq.org/education/training/rso.asp Range Services © 2012 National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section I Chapter 3 PLANNING AND DESIGN I-3-2 I-3-3 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Introduction 1.02 Cross Reference ARTICLE 2. PLANNING 2.01 Preliminary Planning 2.02 Organization, Discovery and Implementation 2.03 How to Develop a Master Plan 2.04 Site Evaluation 2.05 Site Selection 2.06 Choosing the Site 2.07 Permit Review 2.08 Site Procurement 2.09 Site Design and Layout 2.10 Financing 2.11 How to Write a Range Loan Proposal ARTICLE 3. DESIGN 3.01 Design Considerations 3.02 Site Plans 3.03 Design Specifications 3.04 Permit Application © 2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). I-3-4 I-3-5 ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Introduction 1.01.1 Planning and design serve to educate the range builder on the fine points of building a range facility, including the reason certain procedures are established and why compliance with state, local and federal standards are recommended. A Master Plan establishes the course of action for those who wish to construct a range, and for those who will use it. 1.01.2 Starting the Planning Phase One of the most important people to be involved will be the manager. The manager may have many hats. They may be a manager, the owner, a club president or member of that club. Because of their abilities they have been chosen to manage the project. They will perform the following functions and each one is critical to the successful completion of the project. (1) Planning, (2) Organizing, (3) Commanding, (4) Coordinating and (5) Controlling the project from start to finish. Planning is the process whereby a manager defines goals, establishes strategies for achieving those goals and develops plans to integrate and coordinate the activities.i Create the plan. Generate an outline and then start filling in the blanks. This requires careful thinking, deciding on a direction, setting goals, determining the personnel needed along with their skill set and then locating working capital. In this phase of the process is it wise to invest some time and attend the NRA Range Development and Operations Conference. This is a five day intensive conference devised specifically for those people getting ready to build, operate, or maintain a shooting range facility. Visit http://www.nrahq.org/shootingrange/development.asp or call (877) NRA-RANGE (672-7264) for more information. 1.02 What should your plan be? 1.02.1 The plan will be a realistic outlook of the future. A plan should have realistic achievable goals with a 1, 3, or 5 year or more plan on what you expect and how you plan on achieving the goals. The plan provides your structure for future growth and expansion. 1.03 Purpose of a Plan 1.03.1 No two ranges are alike and neither are their plans. Each plan is site specific, fact sensitive and risk driven. The plan is part of the business and serves the major functions: (1) Allows management to focus, clarify, review, change and research the project from the beginning to the end of the project. (2) Provides a structure for development and implementation of business strategies over the three to five year period of time and contains the framework for future growth and expansion. (3) Sets a benchmark to gauge actual performance. I-3-6 1.04 Importance of the Planning Process 1.04.1 A good plan is based on the strength, weaknesses, opportunities and threats analysis (SWOT) of the business. It is extremely important to recognize hidden opportunities, avoid mistakes, analyze competitors, define and redefine your market as your business grows. One of the most important things planning provides is look into your future. You will be able to forecast where you want to go and how you plan on achieving your goals and objectives. Remember, planning is looking ahead. 1.05 Objectives 1.05.1 Objectives are desired outcomes. They provide the impetus for management to make decisions based upon results. Setting realistic achievable goals that produce results is an important part of the planning process and will affect the success or failure of the business. 1.06 Policies A policy is a course of action, guiding principle, or procedure considered to be expedient, prudent, or advantageous.ii A policy establishes general parameters for the decision maker rather that specifically stating what should or should not be done. Policies typically contain an ambiguous term that leaves interpretation up to the decision maker.iii 1.07 Essentials of planning Research your topic, then start the preparation of the plan. Clearly and concisely identify the targets or goals, these should be set by a person with authority. The goals should be specific to the facility, clearly defined, realistic to achieve, acceptable to the organization and easy to measure based on actual results. Any plan should be flexible enough to change and grow over time. 1.08 Cross Reference a. Safety Plan, Section I, Chapter 2 b. Business Plan, Section I, Chapter 4 c. Outdoor Range Design Criteria, Section II, Chapter 2 c. Indoor Range Criteria, Section III, Chapter 2 e. NRA Rule Books I-3-7 ARTICLE 2. PLANNING 2.01 Preliminary Planning 2.01.1 Planning begins with a meeting with all individuals who will be involved in the project. The next step is to prepare a master plan using the outline provided in Section 2.03. Developing a master plan allows decision makers to gather relevant information on: geographic location, building codes, environmental concerns along with others mentioned throughout this source book. 2.02 Discovery, Organization and Implementation 2.02.1 Planning involves three basic processes: (1) discovery, (2) organization, and (3) implementation. (1) Discovery means gathering information pertaining to the project. This will require a trip to the county court house or local government administrative offices to obtain literature and to discuss the project with personnel involved in zoning, building permits, soil conservation and environmental planning. Obtain copies of ordinances, zoning regulations, soil conservation standards and any other regulations which may involve the project. These documents spell out what steps must be taken to satisfy legal requirements. Carefully researching the legal codes determines the allowable use of land, a crucial element in building a shooting range. Range planners should also evaluate municipalities’ comprehensive plan and real estate development trends and projections. This identifies any land development or planned land use that would prevent range construction in a particular area. "Official notices" printed in local newspapers will indicate any public hearings for rezoning of neighboring land. The range planner/builder should abide by all applicable laws and regulations as well as accepted standards for health and safety. A zoning attorney is experienced in real estate transactions and knows how the local system works. They know the process and can obtain permits, rezoning applications and check for zoning compliance. A surveyor provides the basic site measurements needed to lay out the site plan for permit approvals. A civil engineer can conduct an environmental assessment to identify any specific concerns for the site. Architects and engineers can also provide the plans needed to obtain building permits. Retention of professionals is a wise choice that can save thousands of dollars in planning mistakes. In most jurisdictions, ordinances and zoning do not cover the construction of shooting ranges. In the event there are no legal restrictions, develop and present the plan to local authorities for their input and obtain their approval in writing. Going to these individuals before final decisions are made and work begins goes a long way in developing a good working relationship with local lawmakers and law enforcement personnel. Choose several sites to evaluate. Gather other technical information which may be relevant to the project, including zoning maps, aerial photographs, and topographic maps of the site. I-3-8 Topographical maps may be obtained by writing to: Distribution Branch, U.S. Geological Survey, Box 25286, Federal Center, Building 41, Denver, Colorado, 80225, request an index of maps for the area or visit www.usgs.gov for more information. Aerial photographs are usually available from the State or County Agricultural /Conservation /Cooperative Extension offices. Zoning maps are generally available from local County Planning Offices. (2) Organization begins with the identification of project leaders, coordinators and technical advisors. The project manager is the key person. This person is responsible for the entire project and should have the authority to act for the principal owners or club officials in all administrative matters. Those responsibilities include development of a master plan, including record keeping, selecting competent workers (plumbers, electricians, heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC) personnel, builders, engineers, etc), and working closely with those who apply for permits and request final inspections. (3) Implementation simply means to complete the project. These processes should be followed in order. Information gathered during discovery and organization will now permit the marshaling of financial resources, personnel and materials needed to finish the task. The entire project should be committed to paper in the form of a master plan. 2.03 How To Develop A Master Plan 2.03.1 The purpose of this section is to provide information on how to write a master plan for the development of a shooting facility and to explain why such a plan is important. This framework provides information on resources available and the restrictions planners must account for in the process. It is extremely important that a good deal of effort be expended in putting together a master plan for it is the key document that will be used to counter the arguments of opponents and sell the project to a community. The master plan should include the following: (1) Community Needs Analysis (2) Operational and Long Range Plan (3) Facilities and Planning (4) Site Selection Process (5) Environmental Assessment (6) Insurance (7) Funding (8) Construction Design and Range Construction (9) Closure Plan Additional information is needed to write the plan and includes the following: (1) Narrative information, supporting maps, and data that summarize the site selection process and describe the physical characteristics of a range facility. (2) Narrative information and supporting graphics that describe the proposed shooting range. (3) A site plan that shows property boundaries, proposed ranges, ancillary buildings, roads, utilities and topography. (4) A narrative and graphic explanation of the architectural styles considered for the site. (5) A narrative and graphic explanation of the landscape architecture planned for the range. (6) A preliminary estimate, indicating the costs of the construction of or the improvements to a facility. I-3-9 (7) An environmental analysis, indicating how the range facility will co-exist in a particular eco-system. (8) A needs analysis, to justify the need for such a facility. 2.03.2 Community Needs Analysis The community needs analysis section should include a breakdown of existing shooting facilities in the area as well as the current needs of the surrounding shooting community. This may be determined analysis of current shooting events, number of NRA members in your area, training needs for local law enforcement, as well as general interest in recreational shooting activities. 2.03.3 Operational and Long Range Plan Long range planning is an important and money saving program that should be started from the beginning of range development. The long range plan is designed to look down the road to see what is going to be needed in the future. Long range planning should also include aspects of population growth, growth of local shooting sports community, new shooting sports, and how to deal with issues regarding the maintenance of the overall facility. A long range plan may help ensure longevity for the facility. The elements of a long range plan are: (1) new housing projections; (2) user growth projections; (3) user program development; and (4) maintenance of the facility. By approaching the project with a view to the future, planners anticipate changes in local ordinances and the effects of population growth, both on housing developments and the demand for a place to shoot. Knowledge of future trends in an area, provide range operators the opportunity to plan for future expansion or modifications to the range. But for a long range plan to work, it should be written and updated annually. 2.03.4 Facilities and Planning The facilities plan includes not only the ranges and the facilities, but also recreation and camping areas. All of the development planned for the site should attempt to make the best use of the natural terrain with as little disturbance as possible during construction. This section of the Master Plan, however, describes the facility as it will ultimately be developed along with the necessary exhibits and drawings. The facility may be planned to accommodate as many ranges as feasible and still maintain a good plan for the total facility. Administration of each of the facilities is key. In this section explain how the facility will be administered. Provide the who, what, and when. Who is, in the end, going to make the final decisions where the facility will be built, what type shooting will be allowed and what safe guards will be in place? Will the facility be run by one person or by a group of equally influential persons? What will be the hours of operation and who can use it? Controls and regulations should also be applied to the use of the facility as needed to not only achieve a good visual form for the facilities; it is also to prevent disorder, congestion and unsafe conditions. Where needed, two or more different range-types may be superimposed onto one range. In these instances the range needs to be designed for the high percentage of use and then can be adapted for other range uses. In all cases only one type of shooting can be allowed on a given range at one time as directed by the range officer. I-3-10 2.03.5 Site Selection Process One of the most important criteria to control construction cost is to select a proper site. There must be sufficient distance behind the backstop so that sound does not affect the neighbors. You don't want neighbors to complain. Also, if a round or a ricochet gets out, it should fall within the range's non accessible fenced property. If you build in a populated area, your range should consider baffles as an option to keep rounds on site so that the range owner can demonstrate the highest level of care. Ranges are very expensive to construct. Once constructed, then must be defended into the future. Whatever the short coming the site may have once chosen, it has to be rehabilitated utilizing engineered solutions. The land area selected as the site, should exhibit the highest development potential for the range after the completion of a site evaluation study. The study should evaluate a number of sites which are narrowed from an initial list of sites. These sites should be located and numbered on a site map (provide ample drawings and exhibits). The initial requirements for the shooting facility was to locate a parcel of land in an area or county that is large enough to accommodate the facilities required for the ranges, and does not exceed a three percent grade differential at the location of the ranges. Otherwise major earth work will be necessary, and that is located in an area that exhibits low development potential and the highest margin of safety. All tracts of land in an area that meet the acreage requirements need to be located and evaluated. Based on a combination of these criteria listed above, many of the sites can be eliminated from further consideration. Parcels of land were then excluded from further consideration because of the high cost of acquisition. On-site inspections should be conducted on the remaining sites. The remaining sites should be located on a site map, and the development potential of each of these sites should be evaluated on the basis of the following criteria, but not limited to: (1) Topography (2) Drainage (3) Size (4) Location and accessibility (5) Availability of utilities (6) Existing land-use both on-site and in the immediate vicinity (7) Existing zoning both on-site and in the immediate vicinity (8) Suitability of the site for development of a shooting range 2.03.6 Environmental Site Assessment The environmental site assessment will take into consideration many factors pertaining to the identified site and its existing location. Items such as geographical setting, land ownership and use, noise and an overall site description including (1) How many acres are involved? (2) Are there any existing structures on the site? Include what and where on the site they are situated, (3) Describe other features such as fencing, gates, natural barriers to prevent people from wandering onto the land. (4) Describe what surrounds the site. I-3-11 Geological physical features should also be described in this section including features such as rivers, lakes, streams, trails and roads. Soils, vegetation, climate and utilities should also be considered. For information on conducting an environmental site assessment, contact the American Society for Testing and Materials, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O. Box C700,West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959 or visit www.astm.org and reference: ASTM: E 1527-97, Standard Practice for Environmental Site Assessments: Phase I Environmental Site Assessment Process. 2.03.7 Insurance Liability lawsuits are a common practice throughout the U.S. and are continuing to escalate. Accidents happen. Anyone could sustain an injury while on range property, even trespassers, this might result in a lawsuit against the range. Should the amount sued for be in the hundreds of thousands of dollars, the range may suffer irreparable financial losses. Protect the range with liability insurance. A range or gun club would be well advised to arrange for a good amount of liability insurance to cover any accidents occurring at the range. Most liability insurance policies require the insurance company to defend the insured (i.e., provide legal counsel and pay litigation costs). NRA affiliated clubs or Business Alliance affiliates may purchase insurance from various insurance companies through the NRA Endorsed Insurance program by calling 877-487-5407 or visit www.nraendorsedinsurance.com for more information. 2.03.8 Funding Explain in this section how the facility will be funded. A sound funding program is perhaps one of the bestselling tools a range planner can have. This section should also provide a breakdown of fundraising efforts to include loans, raffles, grants, dues, bequests, contributions and in-kind services. There may federal, state or local statutes, ordinances and/or regulations regulating various manners of fundraising (Such as raffles). You are strongly advised to engage a local attorney licensed to practice law in your state to advise you in regard to these matters. It is important to point out that having sufficient capital to start the project is fundamental to the success of the venture. Develop the funding in the early stages of planning. 2.03.9 Design and Range Construction Design and range construction should be done by professional consultant registered in the state of work and licensed contractors. Take into account public accessibility to the ranges, ADA handicapped access and all that is indicated by the Master Plan and budgeted. General steps of design are as follows: (1) Schematic Design (2) Design Development (3) Construction Drawings and Specifications. (4) Bid and Bid Award (5) Construction (6) Acceptance of Construction There are federal, state, local statutes, ordinances and/or regulations requiring standards be met such as building or facility accessible to the disabled, the Federal Americans with Disabilities I-3-12 Act requires such accessibility. Failure to comply with the ADA gives a party a cause of action to sue you in civil court for a violation of the ADA. 2.03.10 Closure Plan A good master plan will also detail how the range can be closed in an environmentally responsible manner should the business not succeed. 2.04 Site Evaluation 2.04.1 Once the master plan has been formulated, attention will then turn to final site evaluation. Once an evaluation has been completed for each site, examine each item to determine how well it fits the ideal plan. 2.04.3 Environmental issues are important, especially when there may be a potential for pollution problems to threaten wetland areas or where ecosystems support endangered species. Developers of shooting ranges must be sensitive to environmental issues and be familiar with local, state and federal legislation that affects the range environment. It is strongly recommended to engage the services of environmental engineers, architects, etc., to advise you. You are also strongly advised to engage the services of an environmental attorney to advise you in regard to the applicable federal, state and local laws, statutes, ordinances and regulations regarding these matters. 2.05 Site Selection 2.05.1 Choosing a site for a range often requires planners to decide between an outright purchase or lease. The following guidelines and the evaluation questionnaire will help with this decision. 2.05.2 Pay attention to legal restrictions, such as zoning laws. Parcels zoned incorrectly may require re- zoning or an application for special exception called a variance. Evaluate whether sites with complications should be eliminated. Locate possible sites within a qualifying zone, such as light industrial, agricultural, recreational or light commercial. Remember, land costs are a factor too. For non-profit clubs and organizations, locating on public lands may be a possibility. It is strongly recommended to engage a local zoning attorney licensed to practice law in your state to advise you in regard to local zoning regulations. 2.05.3 Special characteristics of a site are: a. Access - All-weather roads and adequate parking areas can represent expensive parts of a range project. While remoteness for indoor or outdoor ranges is an advantage, road building costs may be a disadvantage. An important point: ensure that the access route to the range is either a public road or a deeded right-of-way to the property. Right-of-way negotiations after land is purchased or leased could spell disaster. Have a qualified attorney research the title and provide documented proof that the land is clear of encumbrances and has a legal right-of-way. Be especially careful in areas where old land records are unclear or non-existent. Make notes on the route: Is it a dirt road, a trail or a logging road? Is the base firm, such as, gravel, or rock? When the ability of a road to support traffic is in doubt, hire a civil engineer experienced in road construction to do an evaluation. I-3-13 b. Utilities - an indoor range requires electricity, so look for sites where this service already exists. For outdoor ranges, except for trap and skeet where electric machines are normally used, electricity is not a necessity. It is desirable, however, for organized shooting events. Other utilities, such as water, gas and telephone are also a plus but may not be necessary. Consult an engineer or utilities professional for advice. c. Distance - Convenience is an important asset to the financial welfare of a facility. The location of a range may determine its success. Finding a site that is conveniently isolated may not be easy, but it's worth the effort. Remember, modifications, such as baffles, can make a site acceptable. d. Residential areas shown on County Comprehensive plans and aerial photographs should be plotted as the vicinity plan. The plan scale should be large enough to identify features such as residences and mark them, note intervening distances for easy assessment. Recommend using topographic maps and/or aerial photographs plotting the proposed facilities to scale on an area plan. Where residences and the range are less than 1/2 mile apart and the range does not incorporate sound suppression devices, complaints may occur. Also note, on the plan other recreational uses of the land near the proposed range (such as hiking, biking, horseback, and rails to trails, bird watching and children play areas). Such activities often make open space areas near populated areas unsuitable. Be especially careful if the site has rails to trails on the property. At any time they may decide to reopen the trail and this may cause the range to close. In most situations, they will not work with the range facility. e. Vegetation, site size, soil conditions, weather conditions, ownership and existing zoning are also important elements in the site selection process. Poor soil conditions may require special construction techniques to drain the area. Removing heavy vegetation will drive construction costs higher; however, where quality timber exists, the sale of logs, pulp wood and fire wood generates revenue. f. Extreme weather conditions, such as ice and snow, may prevent the use of building materials and limit year-round use of the facility. 2.06 Choosing the Site 2.06.1 Choosing the site is the most important decision that is made. To choose the final site, use all the information gathered during the initial planning to both preliminary and final drawings. These drawings include property lines, and the proposed range facility. When several sites are being evaluated, preliminary drawings may require the use of overlays rather than several different drawings. Overlays allow the range planners to see how a proposed range facility might fit a particular site and what modifications may be needed, if any. Be sure to encourage a vigorous, open discussion on final site selection. 2.07 Site Procurement 2.07.1 Five elements are part of a legal contract to purchase or lease: (1) There must be a mutual agreement entered into voluntarily by both parties; (2) The parties must have legal capacity to negotiate and sign the contract at the time of agreement; (3) There must be valuable legal consideration given and received; (4) The subject matter or objectives of the contract must be I-3-14 legal; and (5) Agreements for real estate transactions must be in writing, since verbal agreements cannot be enforced. The following guidelines also assist in procuring a site: a. Include all details in the agreement. Several negotiation sessions may be required to reach a good purchase or lease agreement. b. Have any purchase or lease agreement reviewed by an attorney before signing. 2.08 Site Design and Layout 2.08.1 Recommend retaining an engineer or architect to design your range. Range design is beyond the scope of non-engineer types. The cost of engineer fees will be well worth it when compared to time involved and the mistakes that will be made during site development. 2.08.2 The construction drawings will graphically illustrate how and for what purpose a particular range facility will be constructed. Local laws require these construction plans be prepared by an engineer or architect. When there is no law requiring drawings to be professionally done, they still need only be neat and accurate, so construction crews can do their job. 2.08.3 Indoor and outdoor range construction drawings will involve the use of a set of drawings and book of specifications text. The drawings show specific details such as wall sections, footings and roofs, etc. providing seismic, wind and snow loads. Outdoor facilities will require a set of drawings and specification text and including information on sections or contours, grading cuts and fills, interior details of walls, floors, footings, berms, roofs, etc. All these elements require engineering design. 2.09 Permit Review 2.09.1 Generally, before any construction permits are issued, a formal site plan or drawings of the facility should be presented to the local or county permit authorities for review and approval. 2.10 Financing 2.10.1 Financing to build a shooting range is available from a number of resources, such as bank loans, contributions, gifts, bequests, in-kind services, grants, and club member dues or assessments. 2.10.2 Before establishing a budget, make a comprehensive cost analysis to determine how much the project will cost along with projections for the operations and maintenance program. This analysis will provide the basis for a budget and a goal for fund raising. Publicize the budget and the fundraising program and encourage a team effort to the goals. Welcome suggestions for raising money and follow through on the best ideas. 2.10.3 Setting aside a portion of each member's dues is one method for accumulating capital, although it may take years. These funds may be deposited in high interest-bearing certificates of deposit, bonds, or money market funds to build the fund more quickly. 2.11 How to Write a Range Loan Proposal 2.11.1 Non-profit clubs and commercial range operations may work up their financing proposal which may also be used to convince club members and investors that the project is worthy of both labor I-3-15 and money. A well written proposal can go a long way toward answering the hard questions asked by members or investors. 2.11.2 Commercial range operations are normally restricted to commercial banking institutions for financing; whereas private clubs, operating under the volunteer officer structure have found this financing unacceptable. In any event, both private and commercial enterprises should find the suggested format helpful. 2.11.3 There are many ways to develop a loan proposal, but the one given below is excellent. It can be changed to meet the specific requirements of either a nonprofit organization or commercial venture seeking to finance a range project. Simply replace a few words like "company" with more appropriate text like "club" and complete the proposal according to the plan devised for the project. The following guidelines are reprinted with permission from BusinessFinance.com © 2010. How to Write a Loan Proposal Approval of your loan request depends on how well you present yourself, your business, and your financial needs to a lender. Remember, lenders want to make loans, but they must make loans they know will be repaid. The best way to improve your chances of obtaining a loan is to prepare a written proposal. A well written loan proposal contains: GENERAL INFORMATION • Business name, names of principals, Social Security number for each principal, and the business address. • Purpose of the loan exactly what the loan will be used for and why it is needed. • Amount required the exact amount you need to achieve your purpose. BUSINESS DESCRIPTION • History and nature of the business details of what kind of business it is, its age, number of employees and current business assets. • Ownership structure details on your company's legal structure. MANAGEMENT PROFILE • Develop a short statement on each principal in your business; provide background, education, experience, skills and accomplishments. MARKET INFORMATION • Clearly define your company's products as well as your markets. • Identify your competition and explain how your business competes in the marketplace. • Profile your customers and explain how your business can satisfy their needs. FINANCIAL INFORMATION • Financial statements balance sheets and income statements for the past three years. If you are I-3-16 starting out, provide a projected balance sheet and income statement. • Personal financial statements on yourself and other principal owners of the business. • Collateral you would be willing to pledge as security for the loan. ARTICLE 3. DESIGN 3.01 Design Considerations 3.01.1 The design prepares the construction documents so a contractor can sign a contract to build the facility on the proposed site. Design range fixtures such as target frames, control towers, communications systems, etc., by preparing detailed drawings of these items with specifications and dimensions. These drawings also preserve a history of the facility. These drawings and calculations also prove to the permitting authority that the structures will not fail. 3.02 Construction Drawings 3.02.1 Construction drawings consist of the following: a. Civil drawings b. Structural drawings c. Plumbing drawings d. Electric drawings e. Mechanical drawings f. Fire Marshal drawings g. Building or Architectural drawings 3.02.2 Civil site plans provide an aerial view of the property which shows all features: a. The survey provides property lines, giving direction (bearing) and length. b. North arrow to indicate true, magnetic or grid north. Check with the local permit office as to which is preferred: (1) True north is the direction of the north end of the axis of rotation of the earth; (2) Magnetic north is the direction the compass points, which deviates slightly from true north; and (3) Grid north is parallel to map grid lines developed by state or federal mapping agencies and deviates slightly from true and magnetic north. Many permit authorities require the use of a state grid north on plans submitted for approval. c. Location site plan shows location of buildings, with accompanying floor plan, location of ranges, fences, roadways, and easements. d. Grading site plan shows existing and finish grade at each corner of the parcel or existing and finish grade at each corner of each range. Existing and finish grade at each corner of the new building. e. Trees and other vegetation to be retained. f. Scale of the plan, generally in engineering form for site plans and architectural form for buildings (1/4 inch = 1 inch). g. Location of utilities. h. Structural drawings consider site soil conditions that may require special construction methods and should be footnoted on the plan. This requires test borings or pitting to determine soil characteristics. Soil test result are usually provided on separate sheets in the specifications k. Full topographic drawings of the facility indicating drainage contours are also developed and shown on the grading site plan. I-3-17 3.02.3 Hire a registered Engineer and Land Surveyor to survey the property and develop a topographic map. The topographic map is a valuable tool for grading operations. Federal, state and local laws protect wetland or flood plain areas. Any changes that would adversely affect wetland areas or the characteristics of a flood plain will not be approved or must have a permit. 3.02.4 Architectural floor plans for range structures are the purview of the Architect. These architectural plans will include: (1) foundation plans, with cross sections and specifications of the footings; (2) elevations, or exterior views of the structures; (3) section drawings which show specific details of wall construction, steel placement, dead man (concrete anchors) and tieback placements, and other features not shown on the plan or elevation views; (4) details of each structure. Architectural drawings shall also meet minimum requirements for structural drawings as defined by the state. Local code may also require the plans to be drawn by an architect. 3.02.5 Geologic conditions determine the type of footings upon which a building or wall is to be built. In most areas building codes require footings to rest on undisturbed earth. This may rule out building a range on a landfill area (dump site) unless special footings are used. Work closely with local building experts in areas where ground conditions may vary with seasonal changes or natural phenomena occur, such as earthquakes. 3.03 Design Specifications 3.03.1 Design specifications for a shooting range must be based on factors governing the safety of: (1) personnel who use the facility; (2) property surrounding the facility; and (3) inhabitants of the immediate area. Safety also depends upon proper operating procedures and strictly enforced rules and regulations. Design specifications include detail drawings and written requirements for a specific use. For example: (1) target butts for high-power rifle ranges require specifications on concrete retaining walls, target carriers, underground electrical and phone lines; (2) high-power rifle silhouette range specifications account for special metal targets, intermediate backstop design, and protective bunkers but may not need electricity or phone lines. In Sections II and III, each chapter contains a set of specifications that may be used as part of a construction plan. 3.03.2 Indoor ranges must be housed in a building furnished with electricity and built of impenetrable walls, floor and ceiling. More specific design details include: heating, lighting, air conditioning, ventilation, water, and sewer. All federal, state or local statutes, ordinances and/or regulations must be complied with. It is strongly recommended to engage an attorney licensed to practice law in your state to advise you in regard to these matters. 3.03.3 Specifications on building materials require an independent set of plans, detailing such specific requirements as grade of concrete used in walls, floors or walkways, steel reinforcing, ceiling materials, treated lumber, doors, joists, roof pitch, roofing materials, dimensions, backstop steel, electrical panels and wiring, plumbing fixtures, etc. 3.04 Permit Application 3.04.1 Construction permits are usually based on specific building code requirements. Codes establish standards for building construction, such as footings, earth work, electrical, plumbing and structural specifications. Each portion of the project is required to pass inspections. Almost all local jurisdictions have enacted permit requirements for construction projects. One jurisdiction may require inspections throughout the project, while another may require a final inspection only and still others will not require any inspections. Some may require a complete set of professional I-3-18 drawings to include an environmental assessment; and still others may require a full environmental impact statement (EIS). It is strongly recommended to engage a local attorney licensed to practice law in your state to advise you in regard to these matters, and to file and obtain all required applications, licenses and permits. 3.04.2 To reduce the pitfalls associated with applying for a construction permit, submit the following information: a. Prepare construction drawings detailing each phase of the project. These drawings may include: a site plan, a grading plan, soil erosion control during construction, mineral location and ownership rights, any easements, existing and finished grades, present and future watershed characteristics, navigable waterways, location of wells, water rights restrictions or air space restrictions and any other restrictions which may apply to a specific geographic area. b. The overall plan must reflect how the range will fit into the surrounding area. Include an environmental assessment on how the project will affect local land and water features, wetland areas, plant and animal life in the area. Anticipate possible objections to the range and meet each negative with a positive statement backed by facts and supporting statistics. i Robbins, S. & Coulter, M. Management 10th ed.2009. p 9 ii Webster’s II New Riverside University Dictionary, 1984 iii Robbins, S. & Coulter, M. Management, 10 ed. 2009. P 128. Range Services ©2012 National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section I Chapter 4 ORGANIZATION AND MANAGEMENT I-4-2 I-4-3 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.03 Cross Reference ARTICLE 2. ORGANIZATIONAL REQUIREMENTS 2.01 Getting Started 2.02 Legal Requirements 2.03 Operational Status, Non-Profit versus Profit 2.04 Incorporation 2.05 Taxes 2.06 Processing 2.07 Document Security ARTICLE 3. BUSINESS PLAN 3.01 Purpose 3.02 Writing the Business Plan 3.03 Ownership and Control 3.04 Image ©2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). I-4-4 I-4-5 ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 This chapter provides information on how to set up an organization for the purpose of constructing and operating a shooting facility. Topics include organizational requirements, records management, records security and fundamentals of management, how to apply for non-profit tax exempt status, benefits of incorporation and preliminary shooting program development. 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.02.1 Traditionally, shooting range operations have been organized and run informally by volunteers. With the tightening of laws, ordinances, and other legal requirements, non-profit and for-profit corporations are required to maintain accurate books, complete complicated financial reports and for non-profit operations the filing for tax-exempt status. 1.03 Cross Reference 1.03.1 The “NRA Club Officers' Guide for Affiliated Organizations” provides detailed information on organizing a non-profit club, covering topics such as club organization, election of officers, committees, how to conduct meetings, etc. This publication is available by contacting NRA Clubs & Associations at clubs@nrahq.org, by phone at (800) NRA CLUB (672-2582), or by mailing, NRA Clubs & Associations, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA 22030. A free downloadable version is also available at www.nrahq.org/clubs/officer-guide.asp THE INFORMATION IN THIS SECTION IS PRESENTED WITH THE UNDERSTANDING THAT THE PUBLISHER AND AUTHORS DO NOT RENDER ANY LEGAL, TAX, ACCOUNTING OR OTHER PROFESSIONAL SERVICE OR ADVICE. BECAUSE OF THE DIFFERENT LAWS IN DIFFERENT JURISDICTIONS, AND THE RAPIDLY CHANGING AND COMPLEX NATURE OF THE LAW, THE INFORMATION CONTAINED ABOVE IS NOT INTENDED, AND IS NOT TO BE TAKEN, AS LEGAL ADVICE OR AS A RESTATEMENT OF THE LAW. USERS OF THIS PUBLICATION ARE STRONGLY URGED TO SEEK THE ADVICE AND COUNSEL OF AN ATTORNEY LICENSED TO PRACTICE LAW IN THEIR STATE. IN NO EVENT, AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, SHALL THE PUBLISHER AND/OR AUTHORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMANGES (DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL) RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS PUBLICATION. I-4-6 ARTICLE 2. ORGANIZATIONAL REQUIREMENTS 2.01 Getting Started 2.01.1 In many respects, planning the construction of a range facility is similar to forming a business. The first requirement is a group of people committed to the project, not only in word and deed but financially as well. These investors will be the driving force of the project. Each should be assigned an area that reflects his/her interests in the shooting sports. 2.01.2 Organizational meetings are the next step. For example, you may need to elect officers, write bylaws and operations manuals, evaluate construction firms, and hire professional help and other duties. 2.02 Legal Requirements 2.02.1 Both non-profit and for-profit groups are required by law to follow certain procedures in setting up the organization. The following guidelines, although not legal advice, are offered to assist in the process. Have an attorney prepare all official organizing documents and file them with the proper authorities. If the organization receives official certificates, such as a tax license, occupancy permit, business license, etc., display them according to law. 2.03 Operational Status, Non-Profit versus Profit 2.03.1 To satisfy federal requirements or to qualify as a tax-exempt organization requires an application for a 501(c) designation (such as 501 (c) (7) corporation). The Internal Revenue Service will have more information on the rules and procedures for clubs and organizations seeking exemption from federal income tax. Call or write to the nearest IRS office or visit www.irs.gov for more information. There are serious legal, accounting, monetary and tax consequences that will result depending upon which type of organizational structure your club chooses. Seek the advice of an accountant and an attorney to determine whether you should incorporate and what type of tax status to apply for. Use the services of a local attorney licensed to practice law in your state to advise you and to prepare the organizational documents and to file them with the appropriate state agencies. Use the attorney or an accountant to file the proper tax documents with the Internal Revenue Service and with your state's taxing agency. 2.03.2 Profit making corporations operating either a private shooting club or a commercial range should make application and submit documents detailing the operation to federal, state and local firearms and other business regulatory agencies. This process is necessary to receive such credentials as: (1) federal employment identification number, (2) IRS account for withholding taxes, (3) state income and retail sales tax accounts, (4) federal firearms licenses, (5) and local business licenses, including a use and occupancy permit. 2.04 Incorporation 2.04.1 A range or club would be well advised to incorporate. Among other benefits, the main benefit is the concept of limited liability. Under general corporate law, individual shareholders (in a for-profit corporation) and members (in a not-for-profit corporation) are not liable for corporate debts. In fact, the concept of limited liability is one of the main reasons why people incorporate instead of operating a business as an unincorporated association, partnership or as a sole I-4-7 proprietorship. The corporation is also responsible for all debts and obligations incurred on its behalf by its agents, employees, directors or officers. When acting on behalf of the corporation and in the "scope of their employment," such persons are usually not liable for such corporate acts. 2.04.2 Corporate law is governed and determined by each state. Usually Articles of Incorporation are filed with the state’s agency along with a filing fee. Once the Articles are approved, then the business, range, association or gun club is incorporated. Most states ask that the corporation keep Bylaws, and hold and keep minutes of annual Board meetings and so on. This information will need to be kept on file with the corporation and does not need to be filed with the state. An attorney should be sought to incorporate the business, range, association or gun club. Or the state agency could be contacted on how to handle incorporation on an individual basis. Costs are minimal for an attorney to handle this type of procedure. 2.05 Taxes 2.05.1 All organizations, including shooting clubs, are subject to federal income tax unless they have a specific exemption under the provisions of Section 501 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1954. An organization claiming exemption from federal income tax, unless already in receipt of a determination or ruling letter from the Internal Revenue Service establishing such exemption, is required by Treasury Department regulations (Revenue Ruling 54-164) to file an application for exemption with the key district in which the organization maintains its home office. Internal Revenue Service regulations provide that, in general, a civic league or organization described in Section 501(c)(4) of the IRS Code may be exempt if: (1) it is not organized for profit; and (2) it is operated exclusively for the promotion of social welfare. An organization is "...operated exclusively for the promotion of social welfare..." if it is primarily engaged in promoting in some way the common good and welfare of the community. Consult a local attorney or tax accountant for specifics. 2.05.2 The Internal Revenue Service of the U.S. Treasury Department publishes a booklet entitled How to Apply for Recognition of Exemption for an Organization. This booklet describes the rules and procedures pertaining to clubs and organizations that seek exemption from Federal income tax. This booklet can be obtained by visiting www.irs.org/pub/irs-pdf/p557.pdf or writing to the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402. Ask for the most recent edition of Publication 557. 2.05.3 Regulations concerning state income taxes vary from state to state. In some states, the requirements follow the pattern of federal regulations, while in other states there are entirely different criteria. Information on state taxes may be obtained by writing to the income tax division of the department of revenue for your state. You should consult with your tax advisor and attorney in order to comply with federal, state and local tax laws. I-4-8 2.06 Processing 2.06.1 The corporation statute in the state code of the state in which you incorporate, and the administrative regulations passed pursuant thereto, determine the exact requirements of incorporation in that state. State incorporation statutes usually require that you file Article of Incorporation with a particular state agency along with a filing fee. Upon approval of said Articles you are usually incorporated. The statutes usually require you to also have (but usually do not require you to file) bylaws, minutes of an organizational meeting of the incorporators or initial board of directors, to hold and keep minutes of annual board of directors' meetings at which officers are elected, to hold and keep minutes of annual shareholders' meetings at which directors are elected, and to file a statement once a year with a minimum filing fee. It is strongly recommended to hire an attorney licensed to practice in the state of incorporation to incorporate your range. Alternatively, you can request information from the state agency in charge of corporations in your state as to how to incorporate the range and what actions, records and documents needed to submit or keep in corporate books. 2.06.2 It is also recommended to apply for a retail sales tax license, a requirement for any establishment making sales. Services in some states may be considered taxable and are explained in the literature available from the appropriate state and local tax agencies. 2.06.3 For non-profit corporations or organizations, application is required seeking tax exempt status from the state. Before or during this process, application should be made for federal tax exemption. States may not grant a tax exempt status unless the organization is exempt from federal tax. 2.06.4 Federal firearms licenses are applied for through the Department of the U.S. Treasury, Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, Firearms and Explosives or its regional offices. Visit www.atf.gov/ for more information or send a written request to Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, Firearms and Explosives, Office of Public and Governmental Affairs, 99 New York Avenue, NE, Room 5S 144, Washington, DC 20226 USA. In addition to any federal license, you should also obtain any required state and local firearms permits and licenses from the appropriate state and local government agencies. Contact the local (city or county) government and also the state government to determine the appropriate agencies. 2.06.5 Additional information on forming and running a business or non-profit organization club is available from local Chambers of Commerce, the U.S. Small Business Administration, local libraries, or the local state industrial planning agency. It is strongly recommended to engage a local attorney licensed to practice law in your state and to advise you in regard to these matters and to file all necessary documents and applications. 2.07 Document Security 2.07.1 Profit-making range operations may not find document security a problem since the office may be located near or in the shooting facility and the transfer of management responsibilities is infrequent. On the other hand, non-profit shooting organizations, usually operated by volunteer officers, experience a frequent transfer of records with the result that valuable records may be lost, misplaced or inadvertently destroyed. To solve this problem, take these steps: (1) Set up a central file at the range; (2) Duplicate important files and place these duplicates in a safe place; and (3) another suggestion is to maintain two complete files, updating the backup file every six I-4-9 months. Keep one at the facility and the other with a designated officer, usually the Secretary. At a minimum, the following documents need special safe guarding: a. Incorporation papers b. Ownership agreements c. Tax exemption letters d. Deeds and leases e. Deeds of trust or mortgage f. Loan papers g. Tax records h. Easement or right-of-way i. Zoning amendment decisions j. Permits, licenses, etc. k. Affiliation papers l. Business papers I-4-10 ARTICLE 3. BUSINESS PLAN 3.01 Purpose 3.01.1 All organizations, profit or non-profit, must have a reason for coming into existence. The Statement of Purpose should be written, approved and reviewed periodically by the organization. Once the purpose is decided: a. Select a name. b. Decide on the status, non-profit or profit-making. c. Determine if retail sales will be made by the organization, such as fraternal items, shooting equipment, etc. d. Determine what services the organization will provide that are different from those of competitors. 3.02 Writing the Business Plan 3.02.1 There are many ways to develop a business plan, but the outline provided below is designed specifically for use by small businesses. The following guidelines are reprinted with permission from the U.S. Small Business Administration © 2010. Writing the Plan What goes in a business plan? The body can be divided into four distinct sections: 1) Description of the business 2) Marketing 3) Finances 4) Management Agenda should include an executive summary, supporting documents, and financial projections. Although there is no single formula for developing a business plan, some elements are common to all business plans. They are summarized in the following outline: Elements of a Business Plan 1. Cover sheet 2. Statement of purpose 3. Table of contents I. The Business A. Description of business B. Marketing C. Competition D. Operating procedures E. Personnel I-4-11 F. Business insurance II. Financial Data A. Loan applications B. Capital equipment and supply list C. Balance sheet D. Breakeven analysis E. Pro-forma income projections (profit & loss statements) F. Three-year summary G. Detail by month, first year H. Detail by quarters, second and third years I. Assumptions upon which projections were based J. Pro-forma cash flow III. Supporting Documents A. Tax returns of principals for last three years Personal financial statement (all banks have these forms) B. For franchised businesses, a copy of franchise contract and all supporting documents provided by the franchisor C. Copy of proposed lease or purchase agreement for building space D. Copy of licenses and other legal documents E. Copy of resumes of all principals F. Copies of letters of intent from suppliers, etc. 3.02.2 Computer Software is also available to assist with the creation of Business and Marketing Plans. As a benefit of the NRA Business Alliance Program, a discount is available for the purchase of Business Plan Pro and Marketing Plan Pro's step-by-step guides. This software has everything you need to produce a professional and customizable business plan that gets results. For more information, visit www.paloalto.com/nra or call (800) 229-7526. 3.03 Ownership and Control 3.03.1 Have an attorney review the completed forms before submitting them for approval. 3.04 Image 3.04.1 An organization or business has an image that either strengthens or hampers the operation, depending on how it is viewed by the public. Where there are weaknesses, take steps to strengthen the image by: a. Planning an image for the organization that is recognized by members, customers and the public. b. Establish this image through a media campaign, showing how the operation will benefit the individual and the community. 3.04.2 Refer to Section I, Chapter 7: Public Relations for more information I-4-12 Range Services ©2012 National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section I Chapter 5 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE I-5-2 I-5-3 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Introduction 1.02 Cross Reference ARTICLE 2. OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 2.01 Management Guidebook 2.02 Standard Operating Procedures ARTICLE 3. RANGE OPERATIONS 3.01 Hours of Operation 3.02 Range Security 3.03 Shooting Activities Development 3.04 Tournament Operations ARTICLE 4. MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT 4.01 Introduction 4.02 Maintenance Plan 4.03 Maintenance Schedule 4.04 Equipment 4.05 Environmental Management ARTICLE 5. APPENDIX 5.01 Maintenance Checklist 5.02 Equipment Checklist 5.03 Preventive Maintenance Schedule (sample) ©2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). I-5-4 I-5-5 ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Introduction 1.01.1 Construction of a shooting facility follows a standardized process beginning with planning and design, and ending when the project is complete. During this process, operations and maintenance (O & M) may get little attention until after construction is complete. But to protect the investment, O & M programs must begin during initial planning. By developing maintenance programs before and during the planning, design and construction phases, the facility will be maintained properly. 1.01.2 The purpose of this chapter is to develop a well-planned and written O & M guide. To teach those in charge of the facility how, why and when to perform certain functions. 1.01.3 Three programs promote O & M: a. Operations management: Organizing procedures to restrict or minimize damage. b. Maintenance management: An ongoing maintenance program to maintain the facility near initial levels, including environmental considerations. c. Financial management: To have an effective O&M program, funds must be available to carry out the tasks. 1.02 Cross Reference a. Safety Plan, Section I, Chapter 2 b. Organization and Management, Section I, Chapter 4 I-5-6 ARTICLE 2. OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 2.01 Management Guidebook 2.01.1 Chart a course of action at the range by developing a guidebook. Include safety rules, administrative regulations, operations procedures and a personnel policy. Also, specify guidelines for shooting programs, fundraisers or business meetings. The following information is offered as a suggestion. a. Generally the guidebook is in loose leaf form that uses dividers to label each chapter clearly. Using transparent covers provides for easy update of material and keeps wear to a minimum. Number each chapter and date stamp the document to indicate when it was approved for the manual. As changes are made, date stamp each change and update historical files to reflect the changes. Minutes of meetings also belong in the historical file. b. Write an outline or tentative table of contents for the guidebook. c. Write an introduction stating the purpose of the guidebook, how it is to be used and what information is to be contained in it. d. Include a copy of the organizing documents, bylaws, Articles of Incorporation, etc. e. Include a copy of the Safety Plan. f. Include a copy of the Environmental Stewardship Plan. g. Include a copy of the administrative regulations and procedures. h. Include a copy of the operations policy and procedure and a financial plan. i. Include any training or shooting programs offered. j. Include disciplinary procedures. k. Include a maintenance checklist with each task rated according to priority. l. Conclude the guidebook with an Appendix listing where drawings, illustrations, forms used for operations and maintenance, and other reference materials can be found. Revise the table of contents whenever necessary. 2.02 Standard Operating Procedures 2.02.1 Key ingredients to a successful range operation are developing an atmosphere of trust and dependability by listening to the users, making appropriate changes when necessary, and promoting teamwork. 2.02.2 The following articles provide additional information on how the guidebook should be set up. 2.02.2.1 The guidebook begins with a preamble, containing the year in which the organization was founded, the principal founders and a brief biography of each, the reasons the organization was founded, and what the facility offers. 2.02.2.2 Section two contains a copy of the Articles of Incorporation and bylaws. 2.02.2.3 Section three contains an organizational chart illustrating how the facility is operated. Include a copy of the bylaws to provide information on such items as the election of officers; the progression of offices; how a member may run for office; and duties of the officers. Commercial ranges often include an operations guide on how to train management or operations personnel. 2.02.2.4 Section four contains meeting guidelines for non-profit membership organizations. I-5-7 2.02.2.5 Section five deals with the Safety Plan and contains all rules pertaining to the particular range facility, administrative regulations and/or policies covering disciplinary action. 2.02.2.6 Section six covers range operations procedures, including day-to-day details such as how to open the facility, what energy savings steps are necessary should only one person be using an indoor range, signing in or out of the range, range credentials, and securing of the facility on departure. Operational aspects of the Environmental Stewardship Plan may be included here as appropriate. 2.02.2.7 Section seven provides information on training programs, including outlines, instructor report forms and order forms for NRA materials. 2.02.2.8 The concluding section should be an Appendix, containing copies of such items as: NRA affiliation papers, copies of tax numbers (both retail and employer), copies of permits to operate (use and occupancy, business license, etc.), health department permits, any special use or variance document, lease agreement or deed, site plan, calendar of events, training programs, key contacts, etc. I-5-8 ARTICLE 3. RANGE OPERATIONS 3.01 Hours of Operation 3.01.1 In many volunteer operated organizations the frequent change of officers, (managers of commercial ranges) presents a problem. Therefore, it is suggested that organizations, operating ranges, adopt a standard operating procedures booklet, manual or guidebook that provides all members or users with information on when the range is open, and specifically when it is not. It should also include such information as to who is in charge and a means to contact this person. Include schedules of events and what the policy is use by members or users when competitive events are being conducted. 3.02 Range Security 3.02.1 Range security includes: (1) posting of signs; (2) building fences; (3) locking gates; (4) issuing range passes; (5) requiring sign-in and out procedures; (6) membership; (7) caretakers living on site ; (8) alarm systems; (9) secure electrical switches; and (10) locking mechanisms on doors and buildings. The range guidebook should detail range security by stating who can and cannot use the facility. How users are allowed access and the importance of confidentiality when combination locks are used. Vandalism is hard to protect against, but with proper security measures it can be minimized. 3.03 Shooting Activities Development 3.03.1 Depending upon the facility, training materials and brochures are available from the NRA Education and Training Division or from other shooting sports governing bodies. These materials provide guidance on how to set up youth shooter programs, basic and advanced marksmanship and instructor certification. 3.04 Tournament Operations 3.04.1 For complete information on how to set up and conduct tournament operations, visit www.nrahq.org/compete/dept-tourn-ops.asp, email tournopns@nrahq.org or request a copy of the NRA Tournament Operations Guide from the NRA Competitive Shooting Division, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA 22030. 3.05 Environmental Activities 3.05.1 Operational aspects of implementing the Environmental Stewardship Plan and properly documenting these activities should be included as part of routine range operations. I-5-9 ARTICLE 4. MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT 4.01 Introduction 4.01.1 Proper maintenance is the only way to keep a facility operating at its best. A well-designed range minimizes maintenance requirements. So plan and design with an eye toward quick, simple, inexpensive maintenance. 4.01.2 A trained maintenance staff may be an expense most non-profit clubs cannot afford. But on indoor ranges where complex pieces of equipment or systems are used, skilled maintenance help may be necessary. 4.01.3 Ranges that ship equipment back to the manufacturer or an authorized repair station for repair, should have one or two spares on hand. Another alternative is to establish a maintenance contract with companies which will provide on-site services. Having them come by regularly keep operations running smoothly. 4.01.4 Ranges with highly specialized pieces of equipment that rarely break down may find it more cost effective to bring in a specialist from the factory for repairs. Remember, manufacturer's often offer extended service contracts. 4.01.5 Maintenance programs should be divided into: (1) buildings and grounds, and (2) equipment. Recruit repair personnel for each specific task (such as electrical, plumbing, ventilation (Motors), target mechanisms, grounds equipment, targets, mechanics, etc.). 4.02 Maintenance Plan 4.02.1 A maintenance plan includes the use of floor and elevation plans, site plans and layout drawings of the facility for buildings and grounds, and detailed drawings and manuals for equipment. The maintenance plan should be coordinated with the Environmental Stewardship Plan. See the Appendix to this chapter for a sample maintenance plan. 4.03 Maintenance Schedule 4.03.1 Building maintenance involves basic housekeeping (Cleaning), periodic maintenance and repairs, including tasks such as painting, pest control, cleaning chimneys, windows, checking exterior wood for decay, replacing light bulbs, oiling hinges, replacing locks, trash removal, cleaning HVAC equipment, plumbing work, cleaning waste lines and roof repairs. A checklist showing each particular item set in sequential order could be developed. General housekeeping tasks should be outlined in an Appendix for additional guidance. 4.03.2 Grounds maintenance, usually restricted to landscaping, grass cutting, snow removal, and trash or litter removal, plays an important part in community relations. A clean well-manicured facility is an asset in winning friends. Some aspects of grounds maintenance are often key aspects of an Environmental Stewardship Plan, and these ESP activities should be coordinated with other grounds maintenance. I-5-10 4.04 Equipment 4.04.1 It might be appropriate to list each piece of equipment in a numbered system that corresponds to a metallic numbered tag attached to each. This will provide a valuable record on each piece of equipment. It could also include a parts list, including costs. 4.04.2 Such a plan gives important clues on both problems and solutions. For example, not every piece of equipment is manufactured free of defects. Trying to maintain a particular motor, machine or fixture may be more costly than simply replacing the item. 4.04.3 On indoor ranges, give special attention to lighting, ventilation, heating and target mechanisms. Lighting eventually will deteriorate because of age, dust, lamp heat, poor ventilation and voltage drops. Replace burned out lamps immediately. HVAC systems also deteriorate because of wear, abrasion, poor maintenance, voltage drops, fan motor heat, age of equipment, belt slippage and clogged filters. Properly maintained HVAC systems serve to hold energy costs down. 4.04.4 Outdoor equipment maintenance includes: repairs for silhouette targets, target frame and carriages on high power ranges, turning target mechanisms on outdoor pistol ranges, stationary target frames for small-bore, bench rest, black powder and archery. A target shed or maintenance area is usually a must on larger ranges, and should include tools to make the repairs range from hammers to welding machines. 4.04.5 Select equipment based on the best information that can be found on a product. Manufacturer's claims may not meet minimal requirements or acceptable standards. Taking the time to research a product or service pays dividends. Be an aggressive consumer. If a product fails to live up to its claims, demand a new one or a refund. 4.05 Environmental Management 4.05.1 Pro-active management of environmental issues has become an essential component of sound operation of an outdoor shooting range. Environmental challenges to ranges, related primarily to lead but also involving other shooting-associated materials, are becoming increasingly common, and involve potentially overwhelming costs, lengthy legal or regulatory processes, and major adverse publicity. The greatest incentive for a range to undertake development and implementation of an environmental stewardship plan is these potential legal, financial, and public relations liabilities possible in relation to Federal and State environmental laws and regulations. 4.05.2 As of the date of this document, there are no Federal or State environmental laws or regulations written specifically to outdoor shooting ranges, although such laws and regulations are increasingly likely. The major Federal environmental laws listed below are written to be very broad in their coverage, and thus have been applied to shooting ranges as well as a wide variety of other activities. a. Clean Water Act (CWA) b. Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) c. Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act (CERCLA or “Superfund”) 4.05.3 Under all these laws and their state counterparts ranges are responsible for knowing the requirements and for meeting the requirements. Under all these laws and their state counterparts, ranges that are alleged to be in violation face at the very least an uphill, expensive, and uncertain I-5-11 legal/regulatory and public relations battle to put an end to the allegations in some way. They are also likely to find that to a large degree they have lost control of their own destiny, and that control is largely in the hands of regulators, courts, the media, and others whose interests may not be the same as those of the range. If the situation deteriorates into a suit or formal regulatory action, the direct costs for legal and environmental services is likely to range from substantial to overwhelming, and the potential public relations, financial and legal liabilities have the potential to be equally as large. 4.05.4 The most fundamental encouragement for ranges to develop an ESP has to do with controlling one’s own destiny. Once a legal or regulatory environmental action is triggered, specific legal/regulatory processes come into play. These often result in actions selected by persons other than range managers with objectives different from those of range managers and with little concern for range activities or budgets, or even the continuing existence of the range. Pro-active development and implementation of a site-specific ESP allows range managers to identify and address issues within their budget and schedules in a way consistent with long-term range operation. 4.05.5 While development and implementation of a site-specific ESP does not guarantee that legal or regulatory action will not be taken at a range, it does decrease the likelihood of such action in several ways. Pro-active development and implementation of a site-specific ESP helps to: a. Demonstrate concern for the environment b. Demonstrate good corporate citizenship c. Enhance community relations d. Document potential environmental concerns that are not valid at the particular range e. Document valid site-specific environmental issues that have been addressed f. Document actions planned and budgeted to maintain good environmental stewardship g. Provide a strong basis for responding to legitimate environmental concerns from the public or regulators h. Provide a strong basis for responding to unfounded or exaggerated allegations of environmental impact i. Provide a basis for planning and budgeting in the context of overall range management 4.05.6 Guidance on developing a site-specific ESP consistent with laws, regulations, court decisions, and current guidance from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) can be found in Section II, Chapter 3, Article 2.04. I-5-12 ARTICLE 5. APPENDIX 5.01 Maintenance Checklist 5.01.1 Buildings and Grounds - Checklist Sample Checklist Buildings and Grounds TASK # DATE TASK DESCRIPTION FREQUENCY DUE DATE 5.01.2 Construct the chart so that it provides a complete list of maintenance objectives, including task description, frequency of maintenance, due date and date completed. Task descriptions are: cleaning floors, walls, ceiling, lighting fixtures, toilets, windows, classrooms, painting interior and exterior surfaces (Do not paint acoustical materials), pit areas; repairing target carriages, tables, chairs, and replacing various pieces of equipment like fan belts on ventilation equipment, light bulbs or lighting ballasts. Be sure to include maintenance related to environmental issues addressed in the Environmental Stewardship Plan (ESP) discussed in Section 4.05. While these maintenance needs will differ among ranges depending on the details of the site-specific ESP, they may include such items as: mowing, fertilizing, and watering grass to minimize erosion potential; removing accumulated sediment from catchment basins to maintain their efficiency; applying lime or other material to adjust soil acidity; reclaiming and recycling lead; and other maintenance activities necessary to implement the site-specific ESP. While not a buildings and grounds issue, this checklist may be a convenient place for a reminder to review the ESP and update it as appropriate (this can be done annually or other at other appropriate intervals). Notes on a separate page detail any unusual work to be performed. Finally, the date is important as a gauge of efficiency, longevity of a part or an indication that a particular problem reoccurs too frequently. 5.02 Equipment Checklist Sample Equipment Checklist TASK PART # (description) FREQUENCY DATE 5.02.1 Some variations may occur on headings for this checklist. 5.02.2 The buildings and grounds category utilizes task description, while the equipment checklist may indicate part numbers, machine numbers, and target numbers, a reason for the change or other information. Frequency intervals reflect the number of hours a particular piece of equipment is used. I-5-13 A motor, for instance, may require preventative maintenance every 10 hours of operation and special clocks might be installed to keep track of usage. Otherwise, when activities are going smoothly a bearing may suddenly freeze. For a trap or skeet range, all machines could be sequentially numbered and a maintenance log book set up. This log tracks dates of maintenance, parts used, costs and frequency of repair. For indoor ranges, the maintenance log includes lighting, and return or turning target mechanisms (especially the more sophisticated electronic versions) with a numbering system. The check list on the HVAC system should identify critical maintenance points and include filters on external intake registers to maintain a low level of contaminants. Exhaust manifolds should also be filtered to retain the larger particles. See Section III - Indoor Ranges. The systems checklist on the HVAC system should be set up to identify critical points which need frequent oiling, grease or exchange, i.e., filters, etc. 5.03 Preventive Maintenance Schedule (sample) 5.03.1 General housekeeping and preventive maintenance of administrative facilities and equipment. Facilities & Equipment PM Schedule TASK DESCRIPTION PROJECTED PM DATE FREQUENCY ACTUAL DATE 5.03.2 Housekeeping operations are important to the long-term use of certain fixtures on both indoor and outdoor facilities. A comprehensive housekeeping program controls dust accumulation. Specialized equipment for dust control is available. I-5-14 Range Services ©2012 National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section I Chapter 6 SOUND ABATEMENT ON SHOOTING RANGES I-6-2 I-6-3 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Introduction ARTICLE 2. DEFINITIONS 2.01 Sound 2.02 Noise 2.03 Terms ARTICLE 3. CONCEPTS AND METHODOLOGY 3.01 Concepts 3.02 Land Use Determinants 3.03 Land Use Compatibility 3.04 Selection of Sound Abatement Applications © 2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). I-6-4 I-6-5 ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 The purpose of this chapter is to provide a better understanding of the environmental issue of sound or "noise" pollution. Sound will be discussed as it relates to small arms shooting ranges. 1.02 Introduction 1.02.1 In the past few years, public recognition of sound and how it affects the public has prompted noise abatement programs for all sources of sound. Prolonged exposure to high levels of sound without hearing protection can result in permanent hearing loss. OSHA -- the Occupational Safety and Health Administration -- has determined that a sound level of 90 dBA is the threshold for hearing conservation programs. Because firearms easily exceed this level of sound, users must wear hearing protection. 1.02.2 Today, regulations control sound emissions of most outdoor activities. When examining recreational activities, many of the regulations from federal agencies are not actively enforced. Therefore, state and local laws have been enacted which place great emphasis on community noise from industrial and recreational activities. Most states have enacted range protection acts that have been successful in preventing prosecution of ranges in relation to sound issues. 1.02.3 Shooting ranges produce high levels of sound.i Sound waves often travel beyond the boundaries of the range property. Escaping sound waves may be perceived as unwanted community noise by neighboring property owners. It is important for range owners and operators to work with the local zoning board. Shooting ranges should be highlighted as noise parks. This designation should make the ranges visible to zoning planners and developers prior to developing neighboring properties. Range owners/operators should implement sound abatement programs into their yearly planning. These noise plans must actively pursue the goal of a sound abatement plan: preventing conflict before it occurs. These plans may entail contacting an acoustical consultant before a problem develops. This consultation may be prior to the opening of a new range, or at the beginning of the shooting season. Sound levels should be taken at the property lines during normal operation of the range, such as during competitions of day-to-day activity. These documented evaluations will be compared to future levels as changes are made to and around the range. The evaluations will also determine if the range satisfies local sound laws or ordinances. 1.02.4 Sound abatement planning also allows range layouts to change and gives the range design team the flexibility to change locations, directions, and entire sites if necessary. 1.02.4.1 Developing good public relations with the range neighbors and community at large is essential. Show the community that you are bringing in money to the community when people visit your facility and subsequently patronize sporting goods shops, hotels, and restaurants. Some ranges have made deals with these types of businesses during weekend shooting events. If you show that you are a valuable community asset, the community is more likely to support you. I-6-6 ARTICLE 2. DEFINITIONS 2.00 The following definitions will help the layman understand some of the technical terms used by engineers and others who practice in the field of acoustics, and are not an attempt to teach the reader to be an acoustical expert. It provides only the essential elements of sound and a general description of when sound becomes "noise". 2.01 Sound 2.01.1 To develop a complete description of the sound generated by gunfire, consultant’s measure and describe its frequency spectrum, its overall sound pressure level (SPL), and the variation of both of these quantities with time. Sound is the stimulus for hearing, even though not all sounds are audible to the human ear. Sound waves behave like ripples on a pond after someone throws a rock into it. The object thrown becomes the sound source, the ripples the sound pressure waves. In the pond we see a two-dimensional pattern of circular waves, but in the atmosphere sound waves are three-dimensional, spherical and far more complex. 2.02 Noise 2.02.1 Wyle Laboratories defines noise, in a publication produced for the EPA as: "Whenever unwanted sounds intrude into our environment, noise exists." An example is when someone is resting or asleep and has sleep interrupted by a neighbor mowing a lawn. To the person mowing the lawn, the sound generated by the mower is necessary and therefore unobtrusive. To the one trying to sleep, its noise. A noise can be categorized as hazardous, nuisance or objectionable. If there is a noise ordinance, look for these words. In some cases the hazardous level can be quantified in specific terms such as sound pressure levels above 125 dB, or being subjected to 90 dB for a time period of 8 hours. A nuisance level may also be quantified depending upon the ordinance. According to HUD, it is defined as 55 dB and occurring between the hours of 11:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m. The objectionable level is not always quantified. No dB level is mentioned. It is merely pervasive, unwanted, untimely, annoying, and generally irritating. It could be anything including a dripping water faucet. 2.03 Terms Absorption Coefficient: The fraction of incident sound not reflected by a surface. Values range from 0.01 for marble slate, to 1.0 for absorbent wedges used in anechoic rooms. Acoustics: (1) The study of sound, including its generation, transmission, and effect. (2) The properties of such areas as rooms and theaters, which have to do with how clearly sounds are transmitted and heard in it. I-6-7 Ambient Noise: The totality of noise in a given place and time. It is usually a composite of sounds from varying sources at varying distances. Also see residual noise. A-Weighted Sound Level (La): Sound pressure level, filtered or weighted to reduce the influences of the low and high frequency noise. It was designed to approximate the response of the human ear. Noise is measured on a dBA scale. Small arms fire is generally measured on the A weighted scale and impulse response mode. Background Noise: The total noise in a situation or system except the sound that is desired or needed. Baffle: A shielding structure or series of partitions which reduces noise by lengthening the path of sound transmission between source and receiver. Daytime: The hours between 7 a.m. and 7 p.m. Decibel (dB): In layman's terms, the unit used to measure the relative loudness or level of a sound. The range of human hearing is from 0 to 140 decibels. Evening: The hours between 7 p.m. and 10 p.m. Impulsive Sound: Noise with an abrupt onset, high intensity, and short duration typically less than one second and often rapid changing spectral composition. Inverse Square Law: The law describing the situation in which the mean square sound pressure changes in inverse proportion to the square of the distance from the source. Under this condition the sound pressure level decreases six decibels for each doubling of the distance from the source. L(eq) energy equivalent sound level (Leq): Is a measure which describes with a single number the sound level of a fluctuating noise environment over a time period. It is a sound level based on the arithmetic average energy content of the sound. L(dn): is the Leq (energy averaged sound level) over a 24-hour period. It is adjusted to include a 10 dB penalty for noise occurring during the nighttime hours (10 p.m. to 7 a.m.). Weight is given to nighttime noise in this way to account for the lower tolerance of people to noise at night. Microphone: An electroacoustic transducer that responds to sound waves and delivers essentially equivalent electric waves. Nighttime: The hours between 10 p.m. and 7 a.m. Noise: Any unwanted sound, and by extension, any unwanted disturbance within the frequency band. Sound that is loud, disagreeable, untimely or unwanted Noise Contour: A continuous line on a map of the area around the noise source connecting all points of the same noise exposure level. Noise Level Reduction: The amount of noise level reduction achieved through the incorporation of noise attenuation in the design and construction of the structure. I-6-8 Peak Sound Pressure: The maximum instantaneous sound pressure (a) for a transient or impulsive sound of short duration, or (b) in a specific time interval for a sound of long duration. Reflection: The throwing back of an image, of the original sound, by a surface. Refraction: The bending of a sound wave from its original path, either because of passing from one medium to another or because (in air) of a temperature or wind gradient. Residual Noise Level (ambient): The residual noise level is the level of the unidentifiable noise which remain after eliminating all identifiable noises. Shielding: Attenuating the sound by placing walls, buildings or other barriers between the sound source and the receiver. Sound: A vibratory disturbance in the pressure and density of a fluid or in a solid, with frequency in the approximate range between 20 and 20,000 htz, capable of being detected by the organs of hearing. Sound Level: The weighted sound pressure level obtained by use of a sound level meter having standard frequency-filter for attenuating part of the sound spectrum. Sound Level Meter: An instrument, comprising of a microphone, an amplifier, an output meter, and frequency-weighting networks. Sound level meters are used for the measurement of noise and sound levels in a specific manner. Sound Pressure: (1) The minute fluctuations in the atmospheric pressure which accompany the passage of a sound wave. The pressure fluctuations on the tympanic membrane are transmitted to the inner ear and give rise to the sensation of audible sound. (2) For steady sound, the value of the sound pressure averaged over a period of time. Sound Pressure Level (SPL): In dB, 20 times the logarithm to the base 10 of the ratio of the pressure of this sound to the reference pressure. The reference pressure shall be explicitly stated. The following reference pressures commonly used are: (1) 20 micropascals (2x.0001 microbar) [20 micro newton/meter squared] (2) 1 microbar (3) 1 pascal Sound Transmission Coefficient: The ratio of transmitted to incident energy flux at a discontinuity in a transmission medium. Sound Transmission Loss (TL): A measurement of sound insulation provided by a structural configuration. Expressed in decibels, it is ten times the logarithm to the base ten of the reciprocal of the sound transmission coefficient of the configuration. Yearly Day-Night Average Sound Levels (DNL): The 24-hour average sound level, in decibels, for the period from midnight to midnight. Day night averages are obtained after the addition of ten decibels to sound levels for the periods between midnight and 7 am and between 10 pm and midnight, local time, as averaged over a span of one year. It is the standard metric of the Federal Aviation Administration for determining the cumulative exposure of individuals to noise. I-6-9 ARTICLE 3. CONCEPTS AND METHODOLOGY 3.01 Concepts 3.01.1 The National Rifle Association has developed the information in this chapter to provide a general discussion on sound, its potential effects and sound abatement technologies suited for use on ranges. This will be helpful to ranges which may be required to install sound abatement materials or where future land use criteria deems it necessary. The information pertains to outdoor ranges more than indoor ranges. 3.01.1.1 Any observer may or may not consider "sound" generated by a given source to be "noise". Therefore, in most recreational activities, especially with small arms, planners of ranges must consider what effect sounds generated will have on the nearby environment. 3.01.1.2 "Noise" exposure is the integrated effect, over a given period of a number of different sound levels and durations. The integration also includes specific weighting factors for the events during certain time periods in which sound affects the environment more severely, such as when people are trying to sleep. The national quiet time is considered to be between 10 p.m. and 7 a.m. The various scales for "noise" exposure in use throughout the country differ by the methods of integration or summation, time period weighting factors and frequency weightings. 3.01.1.3 That certain types of noise can affect human health and safety is well documented. Adverse effects depend on their loudness and frequency spectrum. Generally, sounds generated on ranges will have little, if any, effect on the physical or psychological health of inhabitants of the surrounding area. Where they do, it is noted for inclusion in a "noise" plan. 3.01.1.4 From the first planning meeting to the last nail driven during construction, it is important that the master plan include a sound mitigation program. Failure to adopt such a plan can result in financial losses for the range owners or operators, or the termination of an otherwise quality range operation. (1) Develop concepts and methods to abate sound for eventual use on planned ranges. Although the physics of sound is the same everywhere, each range will be different from others. (2) Conduct research on materials that may be suitable for use on a particular type range such as bench rest, pistol, small-bore or high-power. Specific applications can then be determined. (3) Develop specifics on: a. Terrain features b. Soil and surface geology characteristics c. Hydrology and vegetation d. Existing land uses and utilities e. Population densities f. Other environmental considerations, such as air quality, prevailing wind conditions, temperature changes and humidity fluctuations I-6-10 3.02 Land Use Determinants 3.02.1 Master Plan 3.02.1.1 Developing a master plan for a specific site may seem to be a lot of unnecessary work in some cases, but its smart planning. The master plan outlines sound abatement technology and involves a study of the following: (1) Any sound abatement program must meet the standards of existing regulations, ordinances or laws. In most instances, existing laws will specify a sound level for a particular land use. To determine if the facility will meet the standards, measurements must be taken to determine what if anything must be done to mitigate any problem. Sound level measurements for small arms will use the fast or impulse detector response mode as identified on a Precision Integrating Sound Level Meter and Analyzer. Sound measuring devices must meet ANSI standards and have a factory calibration date within one year of the date when testing is to be conducted. All meters used for testing must be designed to allow for field calibration with field calibrators having a factory calibration certificate validated each year. (2) A complete description of the proposed site and surrounding areas including site maps to aid in determining if the land use is compatible with current and projected land uses around the proposed site. In addition, it is advisable to conduct an environmental analysis, a part of which would be the development of a "noise" profile as discussed in this chapter. (See Section I, Chapter 3, Paragraph 2.14 for guidance and procedures for conducting an environmental analysis.) (3) A study of the economic impact the proposed range will have on the area surrounding or in close proximity to the proposed site. (4) A complete description of the range facility including detailed drawings. Have a consultant draw a "noise" profile overlay and include it in the sound abatement program. Include in this portion of the document solutions to the identified existing or potential problems. How much will they cost? How effective will they be? Are they politically and socially possible? (5) A complete description of the community and neighboring properties. Include: existing use, planned use, safety and other environmental considerations. (6) A sound survey of the area. This will provide information on which future plans will hinge. It will also provide a vehicle whereby public input can be obtained towards the construction of a project. It will also provide time to educate the community on the benefits of the project. Where results of these surveys show significant levels, public opposition may exist. The master plan must include sound abatement strategies that will answer opposing arguments. 3.03 Land Use Compatibility 3.03.1 Area 3.03.1.1 Land use as it relates to existing conditions is but one facet of the study and is directly linked to what future conditions may exist at a site. Regulation of land use in some areas is so stringent that any other than what already exists may be rejected. When a range locates in an area the one factor seldom considered is the community and its role as a regulatory body. Should a noise I-6-11 complaint arise as a result of range operations and the proper approvals have been received, the noise problem is no longer a problem the range facility must face alone. The community must also become involved and assist in resolving the conflict. In other instances, even with full knowledge of the presence of a range, adjoining parcels have been rezoned for new housing developments, giving little, if any, forethought to future consequences. 3.03.1.2 One of the primary yet often overlooked considerations in developing a range project is the economic impact the facility will have on the community. How it affects the community should it locate nearby, or if it is forced to move to another site are critical issues. Local economies are important. Even though shooting is a recreational activity, the range becomes part of the local business community. Outside activities, such as tournaments, bring outside money into the economy thereby playing an important political role in the local community. 3.03.2 Existing Conditions 3.03.2.1 What are the existing conditions at the proposed or existing site? Study the environment to determine what impact is occurring. This is the reason an environmental analysis (EA) is necessary. Conducting an EA requires a thorough review to determine if there is any reason to implement a major and costly sound abatement program. It requires a complete description of what may or may not occur if the range is built. (See Section I, Chap. 3, paragraph 2.14 for guidance and procedures for conducting an environmental analysis.) 3.03.3 Future Conditions 3.03.3.1 As a general guide, the following categories were developed by the NRA based on field and text book work: (1) Unacceptable: If the sound level exceeds 90 dB (A) for 1 hour out or 24 or exceeds 85 dB (A) for 8 hours out of 24 and the receiver is less than 1/4 mile from the sound source. (2) Discretionary: Normally Acceptable, if the level exceeds 80 dB (A) for 8 hours out of 24 or if there are "loud" impulsive sounds (referring to sonic booms, artillery, etc.) on site and the distance from the property boundary and the receiver is one mile or more. (3) Discretionary: Normally acceptable if the level does not exceed 75 dB (A) at the property boundary more than 6 hours out of 24 hours and distance from the boundary line and the receiver is over 2 mile. (4) Acceptable: If the sound levels at the receiver do not exceed 65 dB (A) more than 8 hours out of 24 or activities do not extend into the nighttime hours of 10 p.m. through 7 a.m. Active shooting is to take place during the daytime hours of 7 a.m. to 10 p.m., with curtailed, but not necessarily discontinued activities during evening hours of 7 p.m. to10 p.m. Shooting activities should not continue into nighttime hours, between 10 p.m. and 7 a.m. unless needed for mandatory low light training by law enforcement personnel. 3.03.4 Regulatory Controls 3.03.4.1 Governmental planning organizations offer services to local agencies to assist them in developing goals and policies for community "noise" control. They also provide general land use, environmental protection and open space recommendations. In July 1981, the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency developed a Community Noise Assessment Program designed to assist communities to assess, control and improve their noise environment. Even though this I-6-12 document focuses on larger more densely populated areas, it does provide some valuable tips for the range planner. 3.03.4.2 A number of states have laws relating to noise. Most of these noise laws are concerned with motor vehicle, snowmobile, or boating sounds. A few, such as Connecticut, Illinois, and New Jersey, have very clear noise laws relating to impulse sounds. Some laws include definitive methods for measuring the sound, and clearly defined acceptable levels. Others are very vague. Connecticut, for example, states that Αno one shall cause or allow the emission of impulse noise in excess of 80 dB peak sound pressure levels during the nighttime to any Class A: Noise Zone. Peak sound pressure level, Lpeak, means the absolute maximum value of the instantaneous sound pressure level occurring in a specified period of time. The noise laws of Illinois, on the other hand, use maximum levels. Maximum sound pressure level, Lmax, is defined as the maximum root mean square value of the instantaneous sound pressure level 61 dBA, depending on time of day and the class of neighboring property. These different state laws, like local laws, vary greatly. It is important for range developers/operators to be familiar with the requirements and restrictions of laws applicable to their facilities. Most states have range protection acts that may help ranges. 3.03.5 The Community and its Role a. Develop a noise control program and goals. b. Develop details of an acoustical survey, before, during and after. c. Develop details for an attitudinal survey. d. Gather existing complaint data. e. Present the program design, and its implementation costs. f. Make noise measurements. The standard criteria to be used when taking noise measurements are: (1) At the property line, and in direct line with the receiver. (2) Select measuring points that are clear of interfering objects (other than naturally occurring ones, such as trees) or terrain. (3) Describe the surface area over which the sound travels. Certain surface area configurations, such as a good grass cover affects the rate of decay for sound. The intervening distance between a point source and a receiver is also an attenuating factor. As a rule, each time the distance is doubled the sound pressure level is reduced by one-half, or reduced by about 6 dB. Take note of any walls, buildings, signs, people or other barriers normally between the point source and the measuring point. These obstacles serve also to attenuate the sound pressure levels. A hard surface does not add much to attenuation but distance, thick grass and heavy shrubbery do. Significant terrain features are also important, for example a noise source in a depression is provided barriers that will redirect sound and is not as serious as one at a higher elevation. Therefore, a range located in a valley presents less of a problem than one at the same general elevation as the surrounding area. Ranges elevated above a receiver will have the advantage of atmospheric attenuation, with additional components attenuated via wind. Atmospheric and wind attenuation is a function of temperature, wind speed, humidity and frequency. Atmospheric attenuation has a greater effect on high frequencies such as the supersonic crack of a bullet. Wind and temperature together affect propagation of sound in a variety of ways, but one of the more important is called a temperature inversion, but are normally directional. A wind I-6-13 gradient tends to cause a sound wave traveling with the wind to slope or bend toward the ground and appear to be louder. A sound wave traveling against the wind will bend upward and away from the earth, hence developing a sound shadow very near the source. This is one reason it is difficult to hear upwind from a source. Another reason is the masking effect of wind noise around the ears. (4) Note noise reflecting off surface areas, such as trees, bodies of water, overhead firing line covers, hillsides, hard surfaces such as pavement can have a marked affect as well. Information needed on the field data sheet should include: a. The time the receiving property is occupied. b. What are the characteristics of the home? 1. Is it air conditioned? 2. Do they have a stereo? 3. Is the room most used in the house closest to the range? 4. Are there large pane windows facing the range? 5. How thick are the walls? 6. Is the house insulated? 7. The elevation of the house in relation to the range? c. Conduct attitudinal survey. d. Review complaint data. e. Review noise survey results. A review of the survey results will now permit a fuller understanding of the situation. Once the data collection is complete, break it down into categories for analysis. There are three sources for solutions to a noise problem. (1)What the range can do to abate sound levels over what existing laws allow (2) Measures available to the complainant (3) The role of the community in the matter f. Apply strategy analysis for development of "noise" abatement alternatives. g. Compile alternatives and recommendations for "noise" abatement. 3.03.6 Government 3.03.6.1 County: In many jurisdictions, the county will be the governing agency. County planning boards assist in planning general land use and often develop long range plans. These plans are helpful in determining how future development will impact a planned range. 3.03.6.1.2 State: In most instances, states rely on the county and local agencies. However, in some instances, state agencies will have jurisdiction (Range Protection Acts). 3.03.7 Populations 3.03.7.1 Information on population characteristics such as density, growth rates for previous periods and projected future growth rates also provide valuable information. A range builder can use this data to determine how growth rates will add or detract from the proposed facility. Population growth provides additional resources for the properly sited facility, and potential problems of encroachment for an improperly sited one. 3.03.8 Noise profiles I-6-14 3.03.8.1 During the site selection process, have a consultant develop a sound "noise" profile for each proposed site to determine what abatement procedures, if any, will be needed on each. Remoteness has, in the past, been the accepted norm used to select a site. By using modern technological advances in acoustical materials, outdoor ranges can be sited near population centers. Developing a noise profile requires the services of an engineer practicing in the field of acoustics or someone thoroughly familiar with sound testing equipment and sound abatement methodologies. 3.03.9 General considerations 3.03.9.1 Cooperation with other range operations, community groups, educational institutions, recreational related organizations and others can gain needed support when justification is being put together. Early cooperation will show other groups how the facility will benefit the local community. 3.03.10 Noise Abatement Programs 3.03.10.1 Noise abatement programs are necessary on all ranges from the standpoint of the user. Hearing protection should be a requirement for all users who are within 50 feet of the firing line. 3.03.10.2 Sound abatement shields or barriers should be installed on ranges where neighbors are within 1/4 mile of the facility unless significant natural barriers exist. Any fixtures or terrain features must serve either to redirect or capture sound. Exact configurations depend upon site characteristics. 3.03.11 Noise Measurement Standards 3.03.11.1 Select equipment based on the following: (1) Must meet all ANSI specifications. (2) Select multi-directional microphones. (3) Position microphones 4-5 feet above the ground on a tripod. (4) Select test sites at property boundaries or according to existing statutes. (5) Use a wind screen in all outdoor conditions. (6) Average wind speeds must be less than 12 mph. (Wind noise at higher speeds will invalidate data.) (7) Set sound level meter on tripod or stand and use a 5 foot extension for the microphone. (Use an extension on the microphone when necessary.) (8) Calibrate sound level meter and other recording devices before, during (every hour) and after sampling. (9) Have equipment factory calibrated once each year. 3.04 Selection of Sound Abatement Applications 3.04.1 Sound levels can be significantly reduced through good design. Sound usually travels from the source to the receiver via multiple paths (e.g. direct and reflected paths). By blocking line of sight, propagation paths, or the direct path from the firearms to the receiver, the major component of the sound is minimized. Diffraction, refraction, the bending of sound waves, and reflection of sound waves will still allow sound to propagate to the receiver. 3.04.2 What are some practical examples of noise control on outdoor ranges? The most common type of sound abatement used on shooting ranges is barriers. Since a firing line cover provides shelter I-6-15 for the shooters, it is a common starting point in noise control. Across the country, cover designs vary greatly. They range in height from 7 to15 feet. Some have flat roofs, some slanted, and others gabled. Many are made with 4x4 posts, while others use metal poles or I-beams. Roofing materials range from corrugated metal to a full wooden-shingle construction. Corrugated metal roofs have a limited number of attachment points and are very resonant. This means that the material is likely to ring when excited, either by a stone hitting it or a pressure pulse from discharging firearms (e.g. a giant drum). A more damped firing line cover made from typical roof material (e.g. wood and shingles) is desirable. 3.04.3 To eliminate the direct source-to-receiver path of noise, construct a barrier, berm or wall. To eliminate the direct path to this side of the range, another barrier should be constructed extending from the back wall forward 10 to 20 feet beyond the firing line, or long enough to block the line of sight from the other end of the firing line to the concerned receiver. These walls should be physically coupled to the firing line cover, if possible. If cracks exist between these two structures, sound will be able to propagate away from the range in those directions. The mass of the barrier is also critical. The more massive the wall, the better the transmission loss will be, i.e., more sound reduction. 3.04.4 The effect of enclosing a range with barriers is to direct all of the sound from the firearms in the forward direction and away from the noise-sensitive area. Sound will still propagate to the neighboring community due to diffraction and reflections from downrange obstacles (e.g. the hillside, berms, and trees). Insulation added to the walls and ceiling of the firing line cover will reduce the impact of the sound reflected onto the shooter or range user. Insulation will also help reduce the sound pressure levels being projected forward of the firing line area by absorbing the sound energy instead of reflecting it. Insulation can be added to the firing line cover in many forms. Attaching batting to the underside of the firing line cover, using blown-in insulation, or installing a drop ceiling with attaching insulation board have all been used successfully on shooting ranges. 3.04.5 Another solution to fixed point firing ranges is the tube range. This design consists of one or two sections of 36 inch or greater class III drain pipe. The pipe should be concrete -- not metal. Metal pipes tend to ring loudly even when partially buried in the ground. The ends of the tube are capped; these caps are typically made of plywood with holes cut into each cap just large enough to handle the firearm and have an unobstructed view of the targets. In this manner, the tube acts like a large silencer. Some tube designs include internal baffles to break-up the sound waves as they propagate down the tube. This design is generally used for bench rest shooting only. Three-position shooting is possible on this type range if trenches are dug at the front of the tube and adjustable platforms constructed for other positions. 3.04.6 What about shotgun ranges where the targets can vary 180Ε horizontally and vertically? Barriers can be utilized in some situations with limited success. Because of the movement of the firearm, enclosing the range is difficult. For example, an enclosed trap or skeet range is not commonplace but could be done in a dome-like structure. For these situations, landscaping appears to be the only solution. Sound control by landscaping employs three processes: ground impedance, natural barriers, and to a lesser extent, increasing the noise of the environment. 3.04.7 Cook and Haverbeke (Tree and Shrubs for Noise Abatement, Nebraska Agricultural Experimental Station Research Bulletin\#246, July 1971, CN: DNAL 100-N27-(3)) studied the effect trees and other forms of vegetation had on transmission of sound. They planted trees and shrubs in the form of shelter belts and wind-breaks, and measured sound levels of traffic noise I-6-16 and pure tones. They found that 65-100 foot wide stands of dense trees and shrubs are needed to reduce noise. For optimum results, the trees should be close to the source as opposed to close to the receiver. Trees, with uniform vertical foliage, should be planted as close as possible to form a continuous, dense barrier. Sparsely-planted trees offer little resistance to propagating sound. Where year-round screen is desired, evergreens or deciduous varieties which maintain their leaves are recommended. i Scott D. Hansen. Outdoor Range Source Book: Sound Abatement Techniques and Defending Yourself Against Noise Complaints. National Rifle Association publications. P59-69. 1997 Range Services ©2012 National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section I Chapter 7 PUBLIC RELATIONS I-7-2 I-7-3 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Cross Reference ARTICLE 2. PUBLIC RELATIONS PLAN 2.01 General Information 2.02 Audience Selection 2.03 Spokesperson Selection 2.04 Special Events ARTICLE 3. COMMUNICATION VEHICLES 3.01 Press Release 3.02 Broadcast Public Service 3.03 Public Speaking Events 3.04 Other Public Relations Resources ARTICLE 4. PROMOTING FOR RANGE USAGE AND MEMBERSHIP 4.01 Promoting for Range Usage 4.02 Promoting for New Members © 2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). I-7-4 I-7-5 ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 Public relations includes ongoing activities to ensure the organization has a strong public image. Public relations activities include helping the public to understand the organization and its products. Similar to effective advertising and promotions, effective public relations often depends on designing and implementing a well-designed public relations plan. The plan often includes description of what you want to convey to whom, how you plan to convey it, who is responsible for various activities and by when, and how much money is budgeted to fund these activities. Similar to advertising and promotions, a media plan and calendar can be very useful, which specifies what media methods that are used and when. Often, public relations are conducted through the media, that is, newspapers, television, magazines, etc. Publicity is mention in the media. Organizations usually have little control over the message in the media, at least, not as much as they do in advertising. Consider advertising, collaborations, annual reports, networking, TV, radio, newsletters, classifieds, displays/signs, posters, word of mouth, direct mail, special events, brochures, neighborhood newsletters, etc. (Public and Media Relations © Copyright Carter McNamara, MBA, PhD, Authenticity Consulting, LLC.) 1.01.2 The basic public relations plan that follows is an outline and series of suggestions from which specific efforts can be developed. The intent is to provide a basic tool that can be customized locally to meet the unique needs of a specific range. 1.02 Cross Reference 1.02.1 The “NRA Club Officers' Guide for Affiliated Organizations” provides detailed information on organizing a non-profit club, covering topics such as club organization, election of officers, committees, how to conduct meetings, etc. This publication is available by contacting NRA Clubs & Associations at clubs@nrahq.org, by phone at (800) NRA CLUB (672-2582), or by mailing, NRA Clubs & Associations, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA 22030. A free downloadable version is also available at www.nrahq.org/clubs/officer-guide.asp. I-7-6 ARTICLE 2. PUBLIC RELATIONS PLAN 2.01 General Information 2.01.1 A range may need a public relations plan to raise funds, recruit members, combat zoning or other government restrictions to its operations or simply to enhance its overall image. Whatever the need, it is important the plan be worked out in detail before any action is taken. Each individual involved in the plan's implementation must fully understand the goal(s) to be achieved and what their responsibilities are in relation to such goals. Every step of the plan must be fully documented to prevent any misconception and to provide a well defined course of action. 2.02 Audience Selection 2.02.1 When your goal has been determined, you must define the "public" you are trying to reach. The benefits of a well-conducted public relations program are numerous. A good program can help erase misunderstandings about guns and can show the sport of shooting as a healthy, constructive activity for the whole family. Establishing a friendly working arrangement with the local news media will promote understanding and cooperation in the community, and help attract new members. 2.03 Spokesperson Selection 2.03.1 Who should handle public relations for the range? Your public information director should be someone who is sincerely interested in range activities and should be able to gain the respect of newspaper, radio, and TV people. The person must also have good oral and written communication skills. When you have chosen your public information director, he or she should be invited to participate in all club or range activities at the top level. This person should be present at the board meetings and other policymaking discussions so that they are well informed on every aspect of club or range operations. Your public information director should seek to establish cordial relations with local newspaper staffers, plus radio and television people. Outdoors writers, news commentators, sports writers, and feature editors will most often be receiving material and deciding on its use. 2.04 Special Events 2.04.1 Social and special events can be effective elements in certain types of public relations plans. Due to the nature of the issues surrounding firearms, organizations are advised that such events should not include alcoholic beverages if the event takes place at a range or if firearms are present. 2.04.2 Special events can be used to enhance your public image, raise funds and support membership recruitment or general range usage by the public. 2.04.3 Invite the media to visit the club, especially when there are interesting events taking place. Offer the use of the range facilities and, where appropriate, send complimentary passes. Whenever the media shows an interest in the range activities, a good public information director will be prepared to develop this interest. I-7-7 2.04.4 Community involvement is very important. The more the public knows about what goes on at a range, the less they fear it. If you have the resources, offer to hold a competition that is designed to raise funds for some local charity or related activity. Plan events that will promote media coverage of a positive nature. I-7-8 ARTICLE 3. COMMUNICATIONS VEHICLES 3.01 Press Release 3.01.1 The backbone of every public relations effort is the press release. Writing a release is not particularly difficult, but there are some basic points to remember. The most important is to tell the media "Who, What, Where, When, Why and How". Write only the facts. Keep the story brief. Don't editorialize or use extra adjectives or superlatives. Remember, news editors don't like cute grammar. Avoid all jargon -- it is absolutely imperative that you use non-technical language to make your story easily understood by the editor and the general public. 3.01.2 The following events or activities are a good base for sending out a news release to your local media: • A range public service project, such as hunter safety classes, a Hunter Sighting-In Day, or junior instruction classes. • An interesting meeting or speaker program. • The opening of a new shooting range. • An upcoming competitive shooting match. • Match results when a club member does well in a match. • When there is a good human interest story, such as an exceptional junior shooter, a novelty shooting match, or an unusual firearm being used. 3.01.3 A point of contact must be supplied on the release and this person must be available to respond to the media within a reasonable time. Reporters operate on deadlines and any range seeking to use the media to disseminate information must adapt realistic media deadlines. 3.01.4 The media carries a news story for two basic reasons: (1) it is a matter of sensational and/or controversial impact; and (2) it is a current point of interest and information for the reader, viewer, or listener. Much as we might wish it otherwise, the degree of sensationalism and urgency (or current activity) usually dictates whether the story will be used. No one can guarantee the printing of a story in the daily press. But the chances of having coverage of your event will be improved if you follow the steps in this guide. While there are many friends of the shooting sports in the public media, there are also many persons who are not sympathetic toward our cause. Your personal attention to journalists will help overcome that attitude. 3.01.5 WRITING THE STORY Always write at least one rough draft to use as a working copy. When you are ready to submit your final version to the media, be sure to submit a clean, typed (double-spaced), and complete version. Almost everyone is familiar with the Five W's (and one H) formula that news journalists follow: who, what, when, where, and why (plus how). Editors will look for these basic elements in your story. These elements need not be in any specific sequence, but it is important that they all appear in your story. When you have finished your first draft, read it thoroughly to make sure that all these elements are in the story: I-7-9 Always remember to observe the following guidelines: a. Type your story double-spaced on one side of plain 8 " x 11" white paper. Never submit a story in longhand. Furnish a digital copy of your story via email or on CD to accompany your printed version. b. Use at least 1 inch right and left margins. (This space is useful for editing purposes.) c. In the upper right-hand corner, give the name of your club and the name, address, and phone number of the person who should be contacted for information and assistance. d. Always give a dateline (place of origin of the event) and a "slug" headline that will attract the editor and will indicate the content. e. Be prepared to furnish additional background information if the news media should call. In all cases, respond promptly and courteously to every request from the media for additional information or assistance. 3.01.6 PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE STORY Editors will require high quality photographs. Try to submit digital photos in a .jpg format with a minimum resolution of 300 DPI and measurements of 3”x 5”. The photos should have definite news or human interest value, and action should be emphasized. Always try to show people who are doing something, not just standing around looking at the camera! If your club has an experienced photographer, fine. If not, ask your local newspaper editors about securing the services of a good photographer. Always include a caption with each photo. The caption should explain what is taking place in the photo, and should be no more than a few lines in length. Identify each person in the photo, and be sure to identify your contact person at the end of each caption. 3.02 Broadcast Public Service 3.02.1 Public Service Announcements (PSA's) on radio and television are excellent ways to reach the public. Although some broadcasters still use 30 second PSA's, most are now 10 or 15 seconds. Your local television station will have a person in charge of public service. They will work with you to produce a finished announcement. Radio stations generally prefer copy they can read live on the air. 3.02.2 The open and close of a PSA are the most important parts. The average viewer or listener retains 12% to 15% of what they hear or see. Your script needs to get their attention immediately or the audience will mentally tune you out. The close is the portion of the PSA the audience will be most likely to recall, so be sure to state your case and who you are at the end of the announcement. 3.02.3 When writing for broadcast, you can expect the average 30 second announcement to contain 75 words. Shorter PSA's are proportionate in their length. 3.02.4 When trying to get a local radio or television station to broadcast your announcement, it is best to make contact by telephone, send them a letter of introduction with the script, then follow up with a personal visit. Although this takes time, it helps to set-up a working relationship and I-7-10 establishes your credibility. After the station has aired your PSA, remember to send them a thank you letter for their files. 3.03 Public Speaking Events 3.03.1 Establishing a good working relationship with members of the media is vital, as is providing the media with appropriate, well-written news stories. But an effective club public relations program will also include dealing directly with the general public. Ranges need the understanding of both the non-shooting and shooting portions of the community. Telling the townspeople about your range activities is an excellent way to promote good community relations. Interesting, informative talks presented by your range will help to give townspeople a favorable impression of your range activities. 3.03.2 It takes work to prepare a talk. Ranges need to develop members who are adept at making speeches or organizing presentations for the public. Accepted length of time for a speaker is usually 20-30 minutes. Movies and slides are wonderful visual aids in a speech. The speaker can also plan a brief period to answer questions from the audience. 3.03.3 Be sure to choose interesting topics. For example, you may have an outstanding shooter in your club who can demonstrate safe, but intriguing, shooting. The shooter might perform demonstrations of accuracy while also explaining and emphasizing the safe handling of firearms. In presenting such demonstrations, remember -- safety first.... always! This type of presentation can be entertaining and educational to those unfamiliar with shooting practices, and may even encourage persons to enroll as members of your club. 3.03.4 If you want to speak to a specific organization, be sure to contact that group's program chairperson. He or she can tell you what topics and length of time are appropriate for the group. Be sure to provide the program chairperson with a brief, but complete, summary of your range history and activities. Also include appropriate contact information for your range. When you select a speaker, be sure to provide the group's program chairperson with information about your speaker, including name, occupation, other organizations to which your speaker belongs, honors and awards received, etc. 3.03.5 Remember that any speech or presentation on behalf of shooting and the right to bear arms will be important for the shooting sports and for our country as well. Educate the public and they will be more likely to support your programs! 3.04 Other Public Relations Resources 3.04.1 Technology today makes it easier than ever for people to find your information. If your range does not currently have a website, now is the time to start developing one. This is the easiest way for you to market your range and the services your range provides to the shooting community. Items of interest to consider making available on a range website include: range location and contact information; hours of operation; upcoming shooting events; articles on past shooting events; membership information, etc. Some ranges even produce a monthly or quarterly newsletter. This may also be an item to consider making available in an electronic format online and emailing to a list of all of the members of your range on a monthly or quarterly basis. 3.04.2.1.1 Take advantage of free resources available online. Register your range with the NRA National Registry of Places to Shoot. This is an online tool that will allow for NRA members and the I-7-11 general public to search for your range. The National Registry of Places to shoot lists range location, contact information, hours of operation, and range facilities. You may sign up today by visiting https://www.nrahq.org/shootingrange/addrange.asp or by calling NRA Range Services at (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). 3.04.3 The NRA Business Alliance program is also a valuable resource for shooting ranges and other types of businesses. Membership benefits include a directory listing on the online NRA Business Alliance directory along with a number of other benefits including discounts on insurance, credit card processing, shipping, telecommunications, software discounts for advertising, human resources, business planning, and more. Join today by visiting www.nraba.org or by calling (800) 672-2582. I-7-12 ARTICLE 4. PROMOTING FOR RANGE USAGE & MEMBERSHIP 4.01 Promoting for Range Usage 4.01.1 Promote the use of your range. The more people who participate in the shooting sports, the more support you will have in your community. Shooting in general should be presented as a safe, fun, challenging and legitimate activity. 4.01.2 You must take the changes in the nation's population into consideration when you promote. There are fewer youth and they are becoming more difficult to reach, yet they remain very important to the future of the shooting sports. Working with established shooting programs through Boy Scouts, 4-H and other youth organizations will prove beneficial. Tailor your promotions to reach your target public. Remember that promoting shooting for the entire family can overcome many potential obstacles. 4.01.3 As a part of your promotion, take an objective look at your range. Work to keep the facility clean and in good repair at all times. A bad first impression is likely to be the last impression you will get a chance to make when the public visits your range for the first time. 4.02 Promoting for New Members 4.02.1 Recruiting new members is the life blood of any organization in order to keep it viable. Build on a general promotion of range usage if possible before beginning a membership drive. This will enable you to capitalize on a foundation of being familiar and accepted in the community before you attempt to recruit members. 4.02.2 It is important to remember to stress the benefits of membership rather than the features. For instance, a feature may be that every member gets priority treatment at the range. The benefit of this priority treatment is that they save money through reduced fees, gain faster access to the firing line and are offered a discount on targets. People want to know, "what's in it for me?" Be sure you tell them. Range Services ©2012 National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE RESOURCE BOOK Section II Chapter 1 GENERAL OUTDOOR RANGE INFORMATION II-1-2 II-1-3 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.03 Cross Reference ARTICLE 2. SAFETY AND PERSONAL HEALTH 2.01 General Outdoor Safety 2.02 Health ARTICLE 3. RANGE DESIGN 3.01 Elements of Plans and Specifications ARTICLE 4. PROJECT PLANNING 4.01 Planning Details 4.02 Material Lists 4.03 Cost Estimates 4.04 Budget Projections ARTICLE 5. CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES 5.01 Construction 5.02 On Site Layout 5.03 Procurement of Manpower, Materials and Equipment ARTICLE 6. APPENDIX 6.01 Cost Estimate Outline 6.02 Sample Sheet Index ©2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). II-1-4 II-1-5 ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 This chapter provides general guidelines for outdoor ranges - from 10 meter air gun to long range high-power rifle. It also provides a link with the general information in Section I. 1.01.2 Nothing in the information that follows should be considered as Αrequirements or Αstandards of NRA. The informational items provided are suggested guidelines. A range designer, owner, operator may, or may not choose to act on any or all of these guidelines. It should not be interpreted by anyone that a failure to accept and/or implement any of the guidelines set forth herein is evidence of a Αcavalier attitude≅ regarding health and/or safety. A range operation may otherwise be very safety and health conscious without having to conform to any or all of these suggestions. 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.02.1 Range construction generally has followed a "How I did it" approach, with little emphasis on the engineering principles involved with range construction. Through this source book, the National Rifle Association confirms its commitment to its members' need for shooting ranges. The Source Book offers up-to-date information on both indoor and outdoor ranges with details of range planning, design and construction. 1.03 Cross Reference a. Introduction b. General Information - Section I, Chapter 1 c. Safety Plan - Section I, Chapter 2 d. Planning and Design - Section I, Chapter 3 e. Organization & Management - Section I, Chapter 4 II-1-6 ARTICLE 2. SAFETY AND PERSONAL HEALTH 2.01 General Outdoor Safety 2.01.1 Safety and health play an important role during the planning, design, construction and use of a facility. No set of rules is comprehensive, safety is not guaranteed by compliance with this source book. Individual range organizers should take affirmative steps to ensure safety -- even if that means taking action not necessarily outlined in this source book. 2.01.2 The following guidelines are offered for outdoor ranges shooting activities. These safety rules are guides and do not fulfill all requirements. Outdoor ranges can differ so much that rules for one range will not necessarily fit other applications. For each range, apply specific rules. (See Section II, Chapters 4-18.) The following list, guidance in the safety plan, and specific rules contained in each technical chapter form the basic guide for a plan for each facility. 2.01.3 General Safety Rules for all Outdoor Ranges a. Know and obey all range commands. b. Do not go forward of the firing line unless a cease-fire is called and the range declared safe. c. Require eye and ear protection. d. Conduct no live fire activities closer than 10 yards from a backstop, unless the backstop is designed to prevent back-splatter or is modified with back-splatter shields, such as curtains. e. Require each user to clean up the area after completing firing. 2.02 Health 2.02.1 Protecting the personal health of the user may require the addition of special fixtures or equipment. On outdoor ranges the primary considerations are: a. HEARING PROTECTION: The user should provide hearing protection. Hearing protection devices should also be made available at the facility. Select hearing protectors that will provide quality protection according to the shooting activity. For shotgun fields PVC polymer foam ear plug may be adequate, but for rifle or pistol shooting under a firing line cover, both plugs and over-the-head muffs may be desirable. Be careful in selecting hearing protection. b. EYE PROTECTION: Require adequate eye protection while on the range. Make available eye protection for those who do not have their own. Polycarbonate lenses are suggested as probably the best buy. They are inexpensive, provide good protection, and are available commercially. c. Inhalation (breathing) and ingestion (swallowing) of airborne particulate lead is also a health issue to be aware of when on a shooting range. Protecting yourself through common sense and good personal hygiene is your responsibility. After working or shooting on a shooting range, ALWAYS wash your hands, arms, and face before smoking or eating. If you fail to do this, you may be putting lead dust directly into your mouth. 2.02.2 Other health hazards include poison plants such as poison oak and ivy, poison insects and animals, mosquitoes, bees, and poisonous reptiles. Control measures are important. II-1-7 a. Insect control: Federal and state environmental regulations prohibit certain insecticides. Be sure that what is used is legal. b. Weather: Firing line covers and sunscreens may be necessary in Sunbelt areas to protect shooters from over exposure to the sun. Provide potable water at the facility, especially in hot weather. Other precautions against extreme heat are restricting hours of firing or allowing personal shelters such as umbrellas. II-1-8 ARTICLE 3. RANGE DESIGN 3.01 Elements of Plans and Specifications 3.01.1 Design work is the result of combining all the information gathered during the planning phase of the operation. It includes what is needed, what is wanted, and what is possible into one package. Written information, drawings, and site plans are merged into a set of construction drawings that include specific schedules of completion, material lists, floor plans, special notes, index of symbols, scales, table of contents, sheet index, electrical fixture layouts, target mechanism drawings, elevations, sections, and individual framing or layout plans. Typical schedules on each of these are set up in chart form in the Appendix. 3.01.2 Preparing site and layout plans for construction purposes requires the identification of minimum requirements. Site and construction plans are generally required only to be readable, properly dimensioned, and to provide enough information to get the job done. 3.01.2.1 Each range project will differ in the number of pages for design drawings and specifications. One page may suffice for small range, yet for a large complex, there may be 20 or more. A typical set of construction plans will include: a dust cover, page index, specific drawings for parking areas, building location, driveways, landscaping, boundaries, floor plans, firing lines, wall sections, elevations, thickness, types of material, relative location of material, connectors, drainage networks, foundation details, electrical schematics, etc. Specifications will include all types of materials, sizes, strength, etc. How the range is constructed, how it works, and how much is required to maintain it in its original state are included in the design documents. 3.01.3 Retain a local engineering firm familiar with construction techniques and standards. If an engineering college or university is nearby, junior or senior-level students may gain practical experience to supplement in-class training by adopting the range as a project. However, these students should not replace professional services. Private consulting firms also provide services, such as feasibility studies, preliminary reports, on-site studies, environmental assessments, the drawing of site plans and negotiations with state, county or local officials. II-1-9 ARTICLE 4. PROJECT PLANNING 4.01 Planning Details 4.01.1 The following is a step-by-step process for developing a planning document. They are: (1) elements of a set of drawings and specifications; (2) how to develop a materials list; (3) how to estimate construction costs; and (4) where and when to use professional services. 4.02 Materials Lists 4.02.1 Materials lists are broken into categories such as masonry, steel, dimension lumber, millwork, interior wall and ceiling materials, miscellaneous hardware, etc. Each category provides the range builder with an itemized list that corresponds to specific suppliers and shortens the time needed to gather information for the cost analysis. 4.03 Cost Estimates 4.03.1 Estimating construction costs is one of the most important parts of the project. Where contractors are used, this function is their responsibility. To assure cost effectiveness, an estimate should still be made by the project engineer or by the club. Generally, there are two methods for estimating costs: (1) Develop a detailed list of materials, administrative costs, labor costs and incidentals (2) Estimate from construction experience. 4.03.1.1 Because ranges are not common construction projects, experience may be non-existent, leaving only the detailed method. This involves what is known as a "take-off and cost sheet" and is a standard used by many contractors. To complete the form, the following six steps are involved: a. Make a list (take-off) of materials as shown on the drawings. b. From specifications, determine the quality of the materials and any other requirements not shown on the plans. c. Determine the amount and type of labor necessary. d. Determine the amount of hours and type of equipment necessary. e. Establish unit costs for materials, labor and equipment, and calculate total costs. f. Identify other costs, such as permit fees, liability insurance, overhead, contingencies, design fees, electricity, travel, blueprints, materials waste, and professional fees charged by surveyors, engineers, consultants and attorneys. 4.04 Budget Projections 4.04.1 Once the six steps above have been completed, the construction budget framework is complete. Total the amount and include that information in the overall plan. Now the organization has the necessary information with which to develop an operating budget that is necessary to the construction and operation of a facility. 4.04.2 The following five rules are the basis for preparing an operating budget: a. Base the budget on attainable goals. b. Principal organizers of the operation should participate in the budget preparation. c. All members or users should be informed of the budget goals. II-1-10 d. Complete the budget prior to the start of the fiscal or calendar year covered by the plan. e. Budgets should be flexible, permitting changes during the budget year due to unforeseen events. 4.04.3 The objective of any well-planned budget is to balance expenditures with available revenues, plus provide back-up reserves. The basic step in developing the operating budget is to begin with "revenue and expenditure forecasts," which is calculated as income sources against which expenditures are budgeted: Revenue forecasts: 1. Projected member/user fees or dues a. Annual b. Initiation fees c. Other special membership/user fees 2. Range fees a. Hourly b. Daily c. Weekly, etc. 3. Fundraisers a. Raffles b. Tournaments c. Dinners d. Sales of fraternal items e. Assessments f. Other programs Expenditure forecasts: 1. Fixed expenses a. Rent or mortgage b. Maintenance c. Electricity d. Phone e. Water and sewer (utilities) f. Mailings (postage) g. Printing h. Maintenance i. Supplies (tournament and casual operations) j. Insurance k. Personnel 2. Discretionary expenses and income a. Shooting activity development b. Additions to the facility c. Training activities d. Competitive activities II-1-11 3. Variable expenses a. Preventive maintenance b. Target supplies c. Target frame materials d. Parts and tools 4. Semi-variable expenses a. Routine maintenance b. Electricity c. Office supplies d. Printing expenses e. Expense reimbursement 4.04.3.1 The following charts show the basic ingredients for an operating budget. Under expenses, the categories are offered as basic guidelines from which a detailed breakdown can be constructed. Additionally, revenues may also range from one or two categories to multiple accounts based on the complexities of the operation. As an example, many clubs operate with only one membership category, while others have several. Similarly, the complex range operation using sophisticated equipment may need to expand the list of items contained on the expense sheet so that all items, even the incidental, will be listed. Annual Revenues Work Sheet 1. Memberships a. Annual @ b. Two year @ c. Three year @ d. Life @ e. Other @ 2. Range Fees a. Trap /round b. Skeet /round c. Tournaments /entry d. Range badges each e. User fees (public) -- hourly -- daily -- weekly 3. Fundraisers - earnings per entry a. Raffles b. Tournaments c. Dinners d. Assessments e. Training f. Sighting-in days g. Fairs, etc. Projected Actual Difference II-1-12 Annual Expenditures Work Sheet 1. Fixed Expenses a. Electricity b. Phone c. Rent/Mortgage d. Maintenance 2. Discretionary Expenses a. Program Development b. Additions to the facility c. Training Programs d. Tournament Operations 3. Variable Expenses a. Preventative Maintenance b. Target Supplies c. Target Frame Materials 4. Semi-Variable Expenses a. Regular Maintenance b. Electricity c. Office Expenses d. Printing Expenses e. Expense Reimbursement Projected Actual Difference II-1-13 ARTICLE 5. CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES 5.01 Construction 5.01.1 Before construction begins, property boundaries must be identified and staked out, site plans completed and approved, and contract bids let or the assembling of volunteer workers begun. Construction workers and volunteers work from blueprints to determine what materials will be used, so the construction plans must be clear. 5.01.2 Equipment can be obtained from three major sources: (1) tool rental companies; (2) area contractors who specialize in renting heavy equipment; and (3) successful bidders on the project. Those who do the work themselves may want to locate skilled individuals within the organization. Often this will substantially reduce costs. 5.02 On Site Layout 5.02.1 Once the boundaries are marked, the actual layout of the facility begins. The use of surveying equipment helps to set elevations and to define cuts and fills for grading operations. A transit will aid in setting corner locations for structures, firing lines, target lines, etc. Range layout is a time consuming task and requires patience. Constant checking and rechecking of critical points are important, even a small error can result in additional expenditures. 5.03 Procurement of Manpower, Materials and Equipment 5.03.1 Procurement of manpower, materials, and equipment falls under three separate categories, each with advantages and disadvantages. (1) In-house or in-kind services: This involves volunteer workers, donated equipment, and in-kind services for future access to the facility. Many ranges have constructed shooting facilities using this technique successfully. Sometimes members of clubs are professional engineers or construction specialists and offer their services in return for membership in the club or access to the ranges. A major disadvantage of choosing this approach is that it is based on available time from the volunteers. Work is often limited to nights and weekends, while contractors work daily and finish the project within a relatively short time. In addition, clubs have members who are willing, but do not possess the knowledge, to complete the task. This can result in a disappointing and costly end product. The project manager must organize the construction operation by determining manpower, materials and equipment needs before the start date. This is accomplished by preparing materials lists, cost projections, and a time frame for completion. Information about this process is found in the Appendix to this Chapter. Organizing the work force includes: contacting area electricians, plumbers, brick masons, concrete workers, carpenters and equipment operators, and setting up a coordinated plan so that both workers and finances are used effectively. As another source of personnel, contact persons with range construction expertise who might consider range time as payment for their services. In areas where military ranges are not available, National Guard or Reserve units, through their local or state engineering battalion, may consider joint use as payment for their services. The Reserve Unit gains a facility on which to qualify and practice, the club gains the work at little or no cost. Apply for this assistance through the state Adjutant General's office. Another valuable II-1-14 resource may be local technical schools. Students studying the construction trades often seek on-the-job training to supplement classroom activities and may be willing to work for low wages to gain the experience. Hiring unemployed workers from the different trades is another technique to supplement volunteer labor. A resource commonly overlooked, these tradesmen may be contacted through local unemployment offices or at union halls. Electricians, plumbers, carpenters, steel workers, machine operators and others may be available. Volunteers can be used effectively in clean-up operations, movement of materials and site organization. (2) Subcontracting: Consists of hiring professional or licensed companies to perform parts of the project. Subcontractors could do such jobs as: the footing work; construct trap and skeet houses; install storm drains; build roads and parking lots; and construct buildings. To use subcontractors effectively the project manager must pull the project together and be available daily to supervise the operation. (3) Use of a General Contractor: Larger clubs may opt to contract the entire project to an independent general contractor. The disadvantages are the cost and that the contractor may not have previous experience in range construction. One advantage of working with a general contractor is his knowledge of how to put a job together and get it done. Invite several general contractors to bid on the contract. II-1-15 ARTICLE 6. APPENDIX 6.01.1 Cost Estimate Outline 6.01.1.1 The following outline is offered as a guide to preparing a detailed cost estimate. Use this outline with a cost sheet. 1. Administrative (a) Plans, site and detailed drawings, design fees (b) Building permits, fees, bonds, etc. (c) Utilities, electricity, phones, water, etc. (d) Insurance (e) Other business expenses 2. Earth work (a) Excavation, grading operations (calculated in cubic yards) 3. Concrete and masonry (a) Concrete (precast and poured-in-place) (b) Masonry (brick and block) 4. Structural steel and miscellaneous hardware (a) Steel, angle iron, beams, flat stock, plate, etc. (b) Hardware, nails, hinges, latches, braces, etc. 5. Lumber and mill work (a) Dimension lumber, rafters, joists, plywood, (treated or untreated) (b) Millwork, doors, window frames, cabinets or shelves 6. Electrical (a) Electrical wiring and fixtures 7. Plumbing (a) Plumbing, water and sewer pipes, septic tanks, etc. 8. Heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC) 9. Landscaping (a) Shrubbery (b) Sod 10. Roofing (a) Roofing material (b) Flashing material (c) Guttering 11. Miscellaneous (a) Floor coverings, kitchens, fireplaces, protective barriers for indoor modifications, etc. II-1-16 6.01.2 Sample chart for preparing a detailed cost estimate. Project Name ___________________________ | Cost Data | Item # Item ID Quantity. Unit Unit Cost Labor Material Equip. Total Cost 1 Plans 10 ea 2 Permits 6 6.02 Sample Sheet Index 6.02.1 On the second page of the construction drawings, an index is provided to aid the builders in easily locating a page pertaining to a particular feature. A typical index might look like this: Page 1. Site plan, general requirements 2. Foundation details 3. Foundation plans 4. Exterior elevations 5. Framing details 6. Roof plan (framing and details) 7. Floor plan 8. Interior elevations 9. Finish schedule 10. Building sections 11. Plumbing schedule 12. Electrical plan 13. Lighting plan 14. HVAC plan 15. Ceiling plan 16. Finish schedule 17. Wall schedule (barriers) 18. Storm drain plan 19. Baffle schedule 20. Firing line cover plan 21. Site work, finish notes 22. Concrete schedule Range Services ©2012 National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section II Chapter 2 OUTDOOR RANGE DESIGN CRITERIA II-2-2 II-2-3 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. INTRODUCTION 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Cross Reference ARTICLE 2. RANGE FACILITY COMPONENTS 2.01 Firing Line and Cover 2.02 Target Lines 2.03 Pits 2.04 Backstop 2.05 Side Berms, Walls 2.06 Safety Baffles ARTICLE 3. ADMINISTRATIVE STRUCTURES 3.01 Club House 3.02 Range Buildings 3.03 Storage Sheds 3.04 Parking Areas and Roadways ARTICLE 4. MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS 4.01 Flags and Poles 4.02 Benches and Chairs 4.03 Trash Collection and Disposal 4.04 Gun Racks 4.05 Walkways II-2-4 ARTICLE 5. UTILITIES 5.01 Electricity 5.02 Restrooms 5.03 Water Resources © 2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). II-2-5 ARTICLE 1. INTRODUCTION 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 This chapter provides information on outdoor range design criteria. 1.02 Cross Reference a. General Information, Section I, Chapter 1 b. Safety Plan, Section I, Chapter 2 c. Planning and Design, Section I, Chapter 3 II-2-6 ARTICLE 2. RANGE FACILITY COMPONENTS 2.01 Firing Line and Cover 2.01.1 Firing line and firing line cover design include: (1) Wooden structures covering a firing line on natural turf. Covering the firing line protects the shooter and allows activities to be held regardless of weather. On ranges with several firing lines, the cover generally is installed at the longest firing distance. (2) Open firing lines on natural turf are used on most ranges. However, a firing line can be paved with concrete, covered or not. (3) A dark sunscreen to protect shooters from the direct rays of the sun during shooting activities also may be desirable. These sunscreens are portable and inexpensive compared to permanent structures. (4) Firing line covers made from wood products, along with artificial surfaces for the firing line, most often are found on ranges having only one firing line. (5) International (UIT) range structure rules require protection of the shooter from the wind, sun and inclement weather. Build temporary structures or ones that are easily converted, as complete protection is not allowed for most other shooting activities. 2.01.2 Firing line dimensions vary, depending upon the space needed per firing point or position. The combined width of the firing points usually equals the width of the range, but is not necessarily the entire width of the firing line. The depth of the firing point is determined by the shooting activity. Rifle shooting, for example, requires more depth than does pistol. The minimum depth of the firing point is the area required for the shooter and his equipment, and scorer and coach if appropriate. (For example, a pistol range with 10 firing points might have a firing line approximately 40 feet in length and from 6 feet to 10 feet in depth, while a rifle range would have a 10 point firing line approximately 60 feet in width and up to 20 feet deep.) This variation is based on available space, type of shooting, size of target frames and carriers and the spacing of target frames or carriers. On highpower ranges, the width of the firing point is set at a minimum of 6 feet. On silhouette ranges, spacing of firing line length is dictated by the spacing requirements for each bank of targets, as defined in the rulebook. On pistol ranges, the spacing is determined by the stated shooting activity, such as conventional bullseye, action pistol or pistol silhouette. International ranges require the metric system of measurement. Measurements for each firing point are printed in the NRA rulebooks under Rule 6.0. 2.01.3 Materials for firing line covers include wood, concrete, steel and plastic. Most covers are constructed from wood products using a shed or gable roof design. In some cases, corrugated metal or fiberglass roofing material can actually increase sound levels at the firing line and in areas around the range. To reduce sound, do not use corrugated metal or fiberglass roofing material unless it is acoustically treated. Design the structure to include: a. A shed roof with a 6 inch cavity filled with fiberglass insulation (or equivalent) and enclosed on the bottom with 3/8 inch plywood or insulation board. While this will not provide a completely effective sound barrier, sound waves will strike and penetrate the inside layer of plywood, and the sound will be reduced. b. A plywood shed roof with a 6 inch hallow core enclosed with a small grid mesh screen and a 6-mil polymer barrier to retain the insulation with the intervening space filled with insulation (blown in) will also trap sound waved and reduce the drum effect of an open roof. II-2-7 c. A gable roof offers a large hollow area above the joists, but will require the installation of additional sound damping materials to reduce the drum effect and the sound pressure level, as they are reflected onto the firing line area. The underside of the roof surface will require insulation to fill in between the rafters (4 inch thickness minimum) along with the installation of insulation (3 inches minimum) above the ceiling and between the joists. These will reduce the drum effect caused when sound waves strike surface material such as corrugated metal and will absorb a portion of the reflected sound waves. 2.02 Target Lines 2.02.1 Target lines are laid out parallel to the firing lines at specific distances from the firing lines. Targets set along the target line may be in stationary target frames or target pits using target carriers. Other types of ranges may not use the traditional target line. Target lines or individual target placement can be built according to specific shooting activities, such as action pistol, hunter simulation ranges and archery. 2.02.2 Target line dimensions are based on the dimensions of the target and its frame, as well as the width of each firing point. For example, smallbore rifle target frames are built to hold targets 14 inches wide; pistol frames are built to hold targets 21 inches wide and highpower rifle frames are built to hold targets that are up to 6 feet wide. 2.02.3 All target frames used for smallbore rifle, air gun, sighting-in, highpower rifle and action pistol should be built using soft lumber. Steel frames may be used for pistol target frames, but the use of steel should be minimized. Target stands for silhouette targets, excluding air gun, are constructed using heavy steel of such hardness as to resist damage from bullet strikes. These target stands are generally supported on legs made from heavy pipe or angle iron. Target holders for international ranges may incorporate individual bullet traps constructed to withstand bullet strikes. 2.03 Pits 2.03.1 Target pits, primarily used on highpower rifle ranges, are set up so the face of the target is located the proper distance from the firing line. Target pits are generally constructed below existing grade; however, when soil conditions or water tables will not allow this, they are constructed on the surface of the existing ground. 2.03.2 Target carriers spacing for highpower ranges is determined by the size of the carrier used, and may vary from a minimum of about 8 feet up to a maximum of 12 feet. Spacing target carriers further apart than about 12 feet (center to center) is likely to make the firing line too wide for good control, introduce other operational problems and use valuable space needlessly. 2.03.2.1 Steel carriers must be protected behind the pit walls to prevent a bullet from striking any metal surface on the carrier. To provide this protection, the carrier is positioned no more than 4 feet from the pit wall, and a cantilevered overhang is installed on top of the wall which extends 2 feet toward the carrier at an angle of 95 degrees to the vertical wall. This angle allows water to run off into a drain pipe or ditch. A walkway (sometimes called a catwalk) may be installed along the pit wall, the surface of which is to be a minimum of 7 feet below the cantilevered overhang, to allow pullers to operate the carriers and score targets more easily. II-2-8 2.03.2.2 Concrete wall construction must conform to existing soil conditions. In areas where soil conditions do not present a significant hydraulic condition, concrete walls may be only 6 inches thick. However, where soils retain a significant amount of moisture and create heavy loading factors on wall areas, thickness will increase requiring tieback tendons, and drainpipe covered with up to 18 inches of wash gravel along the bottom edge of the wall foundation. 2.03.3 Target pits may be built several ways. On some ranges, the retaining walls are built from railroad ties or heavy timbers, while most use concrete. Construction materials depend on: a. life expectancy of the facility b. level of use c. monetary resources d. soil conditions 2.03.3.1 While it is possible to construct a target pit area for temporary or long term use, temporary use requires materials easily removed and hauled away. Permanent facilities require materials such as concrete walls, catwalks, walkways, foundations, leveling pads or cantilever roof projections. Where pits are used for highpower rifles, the spacing between the toe of the backstop slope and the target pits should be no less than 60 feet. 2.03.3.2 Steel tie-back tendons are used with precast deadmen in areas where hydraulic pressures cannot be significantly reduced. Such tendons are made from American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM) A-36 steel bars, and upon installation, are surface coated to prevent deterioration. 2.03.3.3 Target carriers are anchored either to concrete leveling pads or to the foundation by anchor bolts or weld plates cast in the foundation. Such anchor bolts and weld plates are extended into the concrete a minimum of 8 inches. (See drawing A-19) Whatever method is used to bolt target carriers down, remember that design must account for wind. Wind can exert considerable pressure on elevated targets, and the mounting bolts or method used must be able to withstand the force exerted. Anchor bolts and weld plates are to conform to ASTM A-36 requirements. 2.03.3.4 Leveling pads (Named for their use in leveling each target carrier along a set grade line) or target carrier foundations are both constructed of concrete having a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,000 pounds per square inch (PSI), a slump of 3-4 inches, air entrainment of 4 percent and be cured in accordance with ASTM or area standards or code. Levels on leveling pads and/or target carrier foundations must be held to plus or minus 1/4 of an inch for the entire length or span. If you need to put a heavier load on the concrete within 24 hours recommend you consider utilizing 5,500 psi concrete. 2.03.3.5 Reinforcing bars must conform to ASTM A615-81-SI, grade 60 and welded wire fabric installed in precast wall panels, deadmen, floors, walkways, roof panels. Firing line slabs must conform to ASTM A185, and have minimum yield strength of 65,000 pounds per square inch. 2.04 Backstop 2.04.1 The backstop provides a primary impact area for the bullets after being fired at the targets, keeping them from leaving the range proper under normal conditions. The most common outdoor backstop is a man-made earth embankment, or a natural hill of appropriate size and shape to meet the requirements of a particular site. Other manufactured backstops may be used when appropriate. Common backstops are: a. Natural occurring hill or mountain sides II-2-9 b. Earthen, constructed from clean fill material c. Earthen, constructed from broken materials (concrete and/or asphalt and covered with d. clean fill dirt) e. Earthen, constructed from clean fill and stabilized internally f. Fabricated, using steel or wooden cribs g. Sand or soil with small rocks no larger than 3/4 inch in diameter h. Geocell fabric, filled with sand or earth 2.04.1.1 Backstop height can vary according to a particular site or use. General dimensions specify the overall width of the backstop to have a minimum extension of 5 feet beyond the end target as measured from the top of the berm. Exceptions to this are: (1) If the range has high side berms, walls or other barriers installed along the sides of the range, then overall width may be reduced accordingly. Where side berms, walls or their barriers are used, the distance from the outside edge of the last target to the tow of slope of the berm, or edge of the barrier, must be no less than 5 feet. (2) If the range is adjacent to another where shooting is conducted at greater distances and side berms are not used, the overall width may have to be increased so that the shorter range is outside the longer range=s direct fire zone. 2.04.1.2 Foundation construction, when necessary, for the backstop calls for the natural grade to be cut and compacted level for a width and length equal to or exceeding the base dimensions as required by the proposed backstop dimensions. Site investigations (Soils analysis by a soils engineer) include a procedure for determining surface and sub-surface conditions in the area of proposed construction. Various soil conditions influence backstop phase. For example, can the soil support construction equipment? Should vegetation be transplanted and where can the removed material be deposited? Another consideration is the foundation area, and whether it will support the added weight of the backstop. Soils which have poor weight bearing capacity may require removal of the poor soils and replacement with more suitable material. 2.04.1.3 Refer to Section 1 Chapter 1 3.04.5.1. 2.04.1.4 A natural hill that has the recommended height and slope may be used as a backstop. The natural slope is recommended to be a ratio of 1.5-to-1 slope or 1.5 foot run to a one foot rise in elevation or about (33-34 degrees) and the height from the toe of the cut slope to the visual crest should be at least that specified for a man-made backstop. Target centers should be positioned commensurate with the shooting discipline. Special techniques can be used to stabilize both the cut area and any fill material used on site. A horizontal bullet catcher at the top of the backstop may be useful where the downrange are is limited and should be installed above the cut area to avoid a significant loading factor along the berm face sufficient to cause the soil to shear, slump or slide. This is especially important in areas where the ground is frequently saturated by heavy rains. Construction procedures should include techniques to support the horizontal bullet catcher. Where the cut area is backed up by high terrain features, such as a mountain, or where occasional ricochets are easily contained, horizontal bullet catchers may be omitted. The initial site evaluation should help in making this determination. 2.04.1.5 To reduce ricochets, the facing surface is recommended to be free of large rocks and debris to a depth of 18-24 inches. Fill material for backstop construction should be taken from a borrow pit located on-site, if possible. Surface material for backstop and berm construction is recommended to be free of large rocks or other items that could cause ricochets. In rocky soils, when the face II-2-10 of a hillside is cut to provide a better angle, the cut must be over-excavated and clean fill placed in the cavity to provide an impact area free of any material large enough to create ricochets. 2.04.1.6 In poor soil area, stabilizing materials may be required for slope retention. Gabions or riprap may be used on the off side of the backstop. Nets, designed specifically for intermediate slope retention may be used until vegetation grows to add strength to the soil. These materials include biodegradable burlap or netting saturated with fertilizer and grass seed. Suitable grass mixtures include rye, fescue and crown vetch. Recommend you consider the newer Geocell materials for slope retention. Before selecting slope retention methods, the possibility of earth shift or sliding should be investigated. This is best done by an experienced soils engineer or by the Soil Conservation District Office. 2.04.1.7 Wooden cribs may be used for the core of a backstop with additional earth placed on the facing side. Where the supply of clean soil is limited, the crib can be constructed with special vertical panels which are then used as target backers. These panels are constructed from soft pine and must be frequently removed and replaced. A good technique is to provide channels for several panels and, as deterioration results, clean out debris and place an additional panel in front of the damaged one along with additional fill material, if necessary. After several panels have been shot up, remove all the damaged panels, clean out excess material for lead recovery, insert new panels and begin anew. The one major disadvantage of a crib backstop is the deterioration of the wood caused by bullet impact. The wooden crib backstop is not recommended unless its use absolutely cannot be avoided. Where this backstop must be used, the minimum height is suggested to be 15 feet. 2.04.1.8 Steel backstops are also an option and may be used in those areas where fill dirt is inadequate, or to aid in the lead recovery process. The main drawback with steel backstops is the initial cost. To meet minimum widths, foundation work is needed to support the backstop system. However, should a substantial amount of shooting occur on the facility, some of the cost may be recoverable through the sale of reclaimed lead. Steel backstops should be inclined at an angle not greater than 45 degrees from the horizontal, in the same manner as on an indoor range. Recommend using commercially available traps where possible. 2.05 Side Berms, Walls 2.05.1 Protective barriers may include: earthen berms, precast panels, masonry walls, wooden cribs, washed (pea) gravel, crushed rock, and poured concrete walls or panels. Utilization of Geocell fabric, which can be filled with earth or sand, is another option. Their use depends on the available space, the type of range being built and the relative cost. 2.05.1.1 Construction methods for earthen side berms parallel those for the earthen backstop, but installation of concrete panels calls for limited on-site work to build the foundation. Concrete panels are either tipped in place or set in place with a crane. Masonry walls require skilled block layers, and a substantial foundation to prevent settlement cracks or major damage due, to ground shifts. In all cases, an experienced engineer or concrete company should be used, especially in areas where earthquakes occur. 2.05.1.2 Concrete walls, both precast panels and poured-in-place, should conform to the ASTM standard specification of: ΑMinimum 28-day compressive strength of 4,000 psi. Precast wall panels are to be manufactured with a concrete slump of 3-4 inches and have an air entrainment of 4 percent to 6 percent by volume. The water cement ratio is not to exceed 0.50. Cement must conform to II-2-11 ASTM C150 Type I. Poured-in-place wall panels may be poured with a concrete slump of 4-6 inches and have an air entrainment of 4 percent by volume.≅ 2.05.1.3 Since earth moving equipment must be used to install the main backstop, keeping the equipment for a few days longer to construct earthen side berms is often cost-effective. Earthen side berms are constructed in the same manner as a backstop, but vary in dimensions according to the specified purpose. For example, should the side berms be used as a backstop, as is true for the Flying M events, the side berm is considered part of the main backstop. The overall height, therefore, must be the same as for the main backstop. 2.05.1.4 Side berms, walls or barriers are suggested to be 8 feet high. Side berms may be used on ranges which extend to 1,000 yards, but are expensive. Such berms are used to allow shooters and range personnel to shoot on different firing lines on adjacent ranges. 2.05.1.5 Masonry walls are an alternative, but because of the expense and durability, they should not be selected over precast or tip up walls. Repair work for a damaged masonry wall is often both labor intensive and expensive, whereas a precast panel can be removed and replaced with minimal effort. 2.05.1.6 Wooden side baffles filled with selected materials may be used, but are not easily constructed, repaired or maintained. Concrete and steel may be a better choice in some areas. Designs for baffles depend upon local site conditions and available materials. Most baffle designs, especially the wooden box type, must be tested before being built and installed. (See drawings A-13 and A-14) 2.05.1.7 Precast concrete panels set at angles, on each side of a range, may be used to prevent projectiles, regardless of the angle fired, from escaping the range. Commonly referred to as side baffles, these look like overhead baffles, except for size. Generally, the panels are manufactured on site and tipped into place. These barriers withstand most bullet strikes without major damage; however, any inadvertent direct bullet strikes must be minimized by stringent range control. One way this can be done is to install side panels alongside each firing position. No firearm can be fired at an angle that would intercept the wall. 2.05.1.8 Side berms may be constructed of 95% sand and 5% concrete mixture. 2.05.2 Earthen side berm recommendations are as described in Section 1, Chapter 1, 3.04.5.3, with the exception of wooden cribs that are used to maintain slopes need not be covered with earth. Concrete panels must have a smooth surface facing the range interior, and a 28-day compressive strength of 3,000 psi. Where wall surfaces must be continuous, interlocking edges must be flush to prevent ricochets from, or damage to, the panel edges. Panel weight must conform to machine lifting requirements, and be set using 8 inch industry standard lifts. 2.05.2.1 Masonry walls, using voided concrete block, are often used on pistol, smallbore, law enforcement, and light rifle facilities to separate different functions. As the wall is constructed, the voids are filled with concrete to add strength and impenetrability to the structure. These walls will sustain most direct bullet strikes with minimal damage. For highpower rifles, a direct 90 degree bullet strike in the block web could cause major damage and might even exit the range. Masonry walls should be protected against any inadvertent bullet strike. II-2-12 2.05.2.2 Side baffles or panels can also be made from wood in a thin box arrangement. The minimum inside dimension would be 32 inches or the nominal width of a 2-by-4. Materials used to fill this box must be tested before use, and should include a test of all types of ammunition that might be used on the facility. Construct a test panel according to dimensions and materials shown on drawing A-13. 2.06 Safety Baffles 2.06.1 The term safety baffle defines a structure used to restrict bullets to a smaller area than would be possible without them. Safety baffles differ from sound baffles, which are designed to absorb or redirect sound waves, in that safety baffles are more or less impenetrable. The basic concept is based on a Αblue sky gap,≅ meaning that baffles are set up so that the shooter, regardless of shooting position, cannot see any blue sky down range. These fixtures may be overhead, on the ground, on top of the backstop, in the roof of a firing line cover, in the form of an elongated box or as a completely enclosed tunnel. The principle behind the design is to equip a range with baffles so that a bullet may leave its confines, but will fall to earth within a smaller, more predictable area. 2.06.1.1 If designed or installed incorrectly, overhead baffles can cause major problems. For any range on which overhead baffles may be used, carefully analyze the application beforehand and seek professional advice. General specification for overhead baffles: (1) Must be impenetrable for calibers used on the facility (2) Must be a minimum of 4 feet high (vertical baffles) (3) Must be relatively maintenance-free (4) Span lengths are site specific to the range but may be up to 40 feet. (Span length between columns is a product of design and overall range width. Baffles properly constructed may span 40 feet with minimal deflection, depending upon the specific materials and thicknesses required on a particular range. A conceptual design drawings are provided (A-11, A-12, and A-14). 2.06.1.2 Dimensions: Vertical overhead baffles are a standard 4 feet high with the bottom edge set 6.5 to 7 feet above the horizontal surface of the facility. Width dimensions are the entire width of the range and connection to either side berms or walls. For baffles constructed from plywood and filled with high density material, use 3/8 inch marine plywood on the firing line side, 5/8 inch on the down range side and build into a box with an inside dimension equal to the width of a standard 2-by-4. Again, fill materials must be tested before use. Baffles may be built by laminated baffles using plywood and 10 gauge steel, and require a lamination thickness of 3 sheets of plywood with two sheets of steel sandwiched between the sheets of plywood, nominally 2 ½ inches thick. Slanted overhead baffles are 9 feet in width and set at a 25 degree angle to the ground as measured from the front edge, are a minimum of 3 inches thick, are pre- stressed slabs, and must pass 3,000 pound, 28-day compressive strength test. 2.06.2 Ground baffles reduce the ground surface area a bullet might strike. Properly designed and installed, ground baffles do reduce ricochets. When viewed from the firing line, a shooter will not see the range floor, only the ground baffles. Generally ground baffles are: a. Impenetrable b. Minimum height to correspond with placement and the surface area size c. Relatively maintenance-free, ground baffles are designed to meet the needs of a particular facility. II-2-13 2.06.2.1 Dimensions: Ground baffles should be a minimum of 3 inches thick if made of wood and should be backed up by an earthen berm. 2.06.2.2 Materials: Materials used for ground baffles may be concrete, pressure treated wood, steal, earth or a combination. 2.06.3 Horizontal Bullet Catcher 2.06.3.1 Horizontal bullet catchers are sometimes used on backstops to contain ricochets. The horizontal bullet catcher is designed to retain only those ricochets that occur on the face of the backstop. These devices are installed perpendicular to the backstop face to an extension of 6 feet from the slope. The base of the catcher should be 6 feet from the top of the backstop so bullets will not impact directly onto the catcher (see drawing A10). To prevent rapid deterioration and maintain integrity of design, overhead baffles should be used to protect the horizontal bullet catcher from direct bullet strikes. The horizontal bullet catcher should be impenetrable to ricochets. Thickness of the catcher is a function of range use, and may be as thin as 2 inches for smallbore rifle to as thick as 4 inches or more for a highpower rifle. The horizontal bullet catcher extends from side-to-side and should be incidental with side walls, barriers or berms. 2.06.3.2 Materials: Horizontal bullet catchers may be built from similar materials used for other range barriers, but should incorporate surface treatment that will not allow the redirection of a bullet out of the restricted area. One method is to install the supporting framework when the backstop is under construction, with the final installation of panels afterward. (See drawing A-10.) II-2-14 ARTICLE 3. ADMINISTRATIVE STRUCTURES 3.01 Club House 3.01.1 Shooting activities on most ranges may be one to several days in duration, and requiring many hours of statistical work such as checking scorecards, posting scores and producing results bulletins. A range building should ideally incorporate a meeting room, classroom and statistical office. Some overlap of usage can be expected, so more than one room is may be needed. Any floor plan should allow for expansion. A good range building can be used to raise funds by renting it to local groups. It is also possible that costs can be shared by several groups on a scheduled basis. Explore each alternative. 3.01.1.1 Dimensions: A clubhouse is generally the focal point for the facility and often serves as an all- purpose building in which range equipment is housed, meetings conducted, targets scored, classes taught, records stored, equipment repaired or stored, and other administrative chores are conducted. Minimum space requirements depend on the number of users, and other uses, which may occur simultaneously. The following is a brief description of the suggestions for range buildings. a. The club house constructed as a meeting hall is often a one room building 20 by 40 feet or more in size. It may be desirable to include features such as restrooms, kitchens, meeting or classrooms, and a lounge. b. The size of the clubhouse should be based on the number of users as projected by using area populations and according to local, county or state fire codes. Meeting room restrictions are often set by fire code. Where memberships are restricted, building sizes may be adapted accordingly. The population of a given area may dictate both the size of the building, and the size of the range and its supporting facilities. Another factor which must be considered is national, regional, or state level activities where individuals outside the local area will be attracted. Commercial or public facilities should be developed in stages of expansion to compensate for special events. c. Construction specifications are often based on ease of construction and lower initial costs, but long term maintenance costs can easily double the initial costs very shortly. Plan according to the geographical area. Materials not suited to a moderately wet climate may be ideal in dry country. Selecting lumber, for example, doesn’t mean that every piece must be the highest quality or the best grades; it simply means that each part of the building could require a different type. Wood preservatives or treated lumber generally simplify the task. Another concern for the range building is the fire hazard and security problems with frame dwellings, especially in remote areas. 3.01.1.2 Materials: Window should be screened for insect control during summer months and protected against vandalism with heavy wooden shutters on windows and doors that are reinforced with steel mesh. Doors should be solid core with metal covering and equipped with two dead-bolt locks. II-2-15 3.02 Range Buildings 3.02.1 Buildings are not always a requirement, unless use is great or competitive activities are held. Then a building may be needed for equipment repair and storage, in addition to the main building. 3.02.1.1 Dimensions: The size of range buildings varies depending on space requirements for storage or workshop area. For small ranges, buildings may not be needed, but on large range complexes, large sheds or buildings up to 40 by 80 feet may be required. For example, on large trap and skeet ranges storage buildings are needed for a semi-controlled atmosphere to protect targets. A machine repair building large enough to house the equipment for cleaning, lifting and working on trap and skeet machines is also required. Additionally, a facility in which buildings and grounds equipment can be stored and maintained is needed. On highpower rifle ranges, including silhouette, buildings are required for target storage. On a highpower range where there are 25 or more targets, the building should be capable of storing three target frames per target point with room for target repairs and range equipment. Silhouette ranges may need a building large enough to handle the equipment for transporting heavy metallic targets to and from the range. 3.02.1.2 Materials: Materials include concrete block, brick, dimension lumber, roofing materials, windows, concrete floors, acoustical tiles, UL approved electrical wiring and fixtures, etc. 3.03 Storage Sheds 3.03.1 Storage sheds for some materials may be necessary on larger facilities, but are generally incorporated in the single range building on the smaller range. The metal Butler or Allen buildings or ones of masonry construction may be acceptable for storage. 3.03.1.1 Dimensions: Dimensions for storage sheds depend on specific use. For example, when a tractor trailer load of clay targets must be handled, the size would be 600-1,000 square feet, including areas for moving about with a fork lift or range vehicles used to transport targets to the fields. Tool sheds are customarily no larger than 10 feet by 20 feet. However, size may be reduced or expanded. Target storage buildings (sheds) for highpower rifle targets are often as large as 20 feet wide by 40 feet long. This space is necessary due to the large size of the target frames. Cheap storage structures may made by utilizing used conex boxes (Container freight modules) 3.04 Parking Areas and Roadways 3.04.1 Relationship with Range Components 3.04.1.1 Parking lots and roadways should be constructed in areas outside the range so that neither parking areas nor roadways fall within the shooting range area, with the exception of access routes to target pits or silhouette target stands. For access routes needed down range, locate routes alongside the range or in areas protected by side berms or walls. Additionally, handicapped parking areas nearest the facility should be included and designed to meet specific needs of handicapped shooters, such as space large enough to allow for off-loading ramps from vans and travel lanes from the parking areas to the range. 3.04.1.2 Parking areas and roadways should be constructed for all-weather use. Depending on soil conditions, specifications for soil removal and replacement will vary. One method used in wet climates is to elevate the roadbed with drainage ditches alongside and below the road surface. II-2-16 Grading operations should take into consideration slope on the surface of the roadway to prevent infiltration of water. Roadbed materials include crushed stone and gravel topped with available soil and capped with 3-6 inches of asphalt or a crushed stone aggregate. Drainage around the parking areas will help to stabilize the soil and often includes the installation of storm sewers, ditches or swales, special pipes or drain channels. 3.04.1.3 Dimensions: Dimensions for parking lot areas should be based on 1.5 parking spaces per firing point. Parking areas should be planned according to the facility size and growth potential. Parking spaces should conform to the local requirement. Where there is no local ordinance, it is suggested that parking spaces contain 180 square feet, at a 9 x 20 feet dimension. Parking lots would then be 63 feet wide for a double set of spaces, giving a 23 foot turning and passing area. 3.04.1.3.1 Roadways should be a minimum of 25 feet wide. The depth of the parking or roadway surface material depends upon soil conditions. In stable soils, surface treatment should be a minimum of 2 inches of crushed stone to 4 inches of asphalt. 3.04.1.4 Materials: Materials used for parking lots and roadways will vary according to soil conditions. Consult an engineer familiar with soils engineering and construction of parking lots and roadways. At a minimum, parking areas should be built using crushed stone to stabilize the surface. II-2-17 ARTICLE 4. MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS 4.01 Flags and Poles 4.01.1 Range flags are used for two purposes, safety and for reading wind direction and velocity. Flag poles should be installed at each end of the pit area (Target line) and at each end of the firing lines. Should there be major obstructions (trees) which will disrupt wind currents and change its effects on range flags, the use of unobstructed wind flags should be considered. A wind sock (Used at airports) is suggested to provide shooters a reference point by which to judge wind direction and velocity. Flags will vary from 2 feet square to more than 18 feet long and 3 feet wide at the mast. Most range flags are a triangle made from red cotton bunting. Ranges having 600 and 1,000 yard capabilities often use the largest flags available, colored red. (Visit the NRA Program Materials Center at http://materials.nrahq.org, item # AR14835, range flag.) 4.01.1.1 Range flags made from cotton bunting provide a means of communicating with shooters and those who frequent the area. Range flags should be located so they are visible from most vantage points, entrances or access drives, target areas, range floor (Ground) and from the perimeters of the facility. In addition to flags, red flashing lights can be mounted on the same poles for night firing. 4.01.1.2 The height of flag poles varies from 20 to 50 feet, depending on the surrounding terrain. Flag poles are available commercially, in anodized aluminum, but are quite expensive. A less expensive flag pole is often a surplus telephone or electric pole donated and installed by the power or phone company. 4.02 Benches and Chairs 4.02.1 Seating arrangements are an important addition to the facility, and provide a place for shooters to relax. The number of seats is determined by the number of users expected on a given day. As the facility expands, this will change. Initially seating should by based on a number exceeding expected turn outs. Benches should be situated either under shade trees and 20 to 30 feet behind the firing line area. On highpower ranges, benches should be located in the pits for target pullers between relays and behind the longest range firing line. 4.03 Trash Collection and Disposal 4.03.1 Trash collection and disposal for ranges should be a primary consideration because much waste material is generated during a match. On-site burning of cardboard and framing materials may be an alternative, if there are no local ordinances against open burning. 4.03.2 Adequate trash containers should be located at convenient intervals, (Every 3 to 5 firing positions) along the firing lines and at each end of the target line. 55 gallon drums serve well, are portable enough to move from place to place, and can be chained in place to prevent removal by vandals. Another alternative is to bring dumpsters that are emptied under contract after an event and on a regular basis. 4.04 Gun Racks 4.04.1 Gun racks provide a place for firearms during breaks or while waiting for their turn on the line. Adequate rack space depends upon the expected use of the facility and the number of firing II-2-18 positions. For example, for a range with 20 firing positions, 40 rack spaces may be needed for periods of peak use. Locate these racks several feet behind the firing position evenly along the entire line. On trap and skeet fields, racks typically are located on the fences and inside the clubhouse. The ratio for shotgun fields is generally two rack slots per position. Racks are usually free standing on rifle ranges and on benches for pistol ranges. One method of gauging the number of slots is to provide two for each firing point on a rifle range, and benches or tables large enough to hold two pistol boxes per point on a pistol range. 4.05 Walkways 4.05.1 Walkways provide routes onto, between and across ranges. They should be of non-slip surfaces and provide easy access for the handicapped. Walkways may be constructed from crushed stone, lumber, asphalt or concrete. Construction calls for the removal of top soil and several inches of underlying soil and replacement with crushed stone for drainage topped with limber, asphalt, concrete, large stones or decorative rock and concrete combined. Concrete (broomed finish) walkways are preferred. Should finances not allow for concrete or asphalt, gravel walkways (provisional base for paved walkways) may be installed first with paving added later. Walkways on the range proper should be recessed slightly below ground (Grade) level to prevent any serious damage to the walkway from grass mowing or bullet impact and to reduce the possibility of ricochets. Specifications should state that all concrete sidewalks shall be a nominal 3 inches thick, reinforced with 6 x 6, 10/10 gauge woven wire fabric and pass a 2,500 pound compressive strength test after curing for 28 days. Broom finish all concrete surfaces with break lines every 3 feet and edges beveled. Exposed aggregate may be used as a decorative finish to the walkways. Asphalt surfaces for walkway areas should be avoided where shooters or spectators stand for any period of time because the dark surface absorbs heat. Should walkways be protected from the sun=s rays, the surface temperature will not rise above the comfort zone and asphalt would then be an alternative. Handicapped ramps and slopes on the walkways are needed to provide easy access for handicapped shooters or spectators. II-2-19 ARTICLE 5. UTILITIES 5.01 Electricity 5.01.1 Electricity is not an absolute must for a range, except when using public address systems either on the line or in the pit area, or where range operations require the use of turning targets. The cost of having electricity brought into a facility may be a deciding factor, especially in the early part of the project. Portable generators can be used effectively during the construction phase, with regular service being brought in as finances permit or the need justifies. In the initial site selection process, locating a site near power lines may not be practical; however, make every effort to do so. 5.02 Restrooms 5.02.1 Restrooms are a necessity. To reduce the number of breaks or range changes to a minimum, such facilities should be provided both in the pit area and behind the firing line area. Restrooms can range from the portable types to more comfortable (and expensive) facilities. An important feature for any restroom facility is accessibility by all shooters including the handicapped. Various configurations are possible: a. Tapping into a city sewer system b. Septic systems may be possible, but local ordinances may require a test to determine if water will pass through the soil properly. Where soil conditions provide for a good percolation test, septic systems may be installed. This calls for the installation of both a tank and drain fields, often located some distance from the range building. Septic fields and tanks may not be installed under the floor slab for the range building. Piping is usually run from the building to the system. Should a potable water source (A well) be needed, the septic system must be lower on the hydraulic gradient relative to the well. c. Pit toilets are an alternative in areas where the soil will not pass a percolation test. d. Portable toilets rented or purchased from commercial outlets are another alternative. 5.02.1.1 In some areas, and for large facilities where city sewer systems are not available, the installation of a treatment facility may be required along with settlement lagoons. This alternative is often more expensive than running several miles of sewer main to reach city services. A complete analysis is needed to determine the most effective method. The Environmental Protection Agency has a number of publications concerning inexpensive and effective means of treating sewage. 5.03 Water Resources 5.03.1 In remote areas, the drilling of a well for potable water may be possible, provided water rights are not restricted and an adequate underground aquifer is available. Geological maps may be used to help determine if water resources exist and the appropriate depth. Consult with local well drillers to determine financial feasibility. Well drilling can be extremely expensive, so reduce the associated risks by conducting thorough research of the ground-water hydrology in the area. Generally well drilling companies are familiar with most areas and their recommendations are often best. In addition, potable water supplies may be governed by the local health department. II-2-20 Range Services ©2012 National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section II Chapter 3 OUTDOOR RANGE OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE II-3-2 II-3-3 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.03 Chapter Organization 1.04 Cross Reference ARTICLE 2. OPERATIONS 2.01 Operations Guidebook 2.02 Operations Guide 2.03 Personnel Handbook 2.04 Environmental Management Guidance ARTICLE 3. MAINTENANCE 3.01 Maintenance Guide 3.02 Maintenance List 3.03 Equipment List 3.04 Maintenance Schedule © 2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). II-3-4 II-3-5 ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 This chapter provides suggested details on how to develop an operations and maintenance (O&M) guide, including suggested checklists for each particular range facility. These guidelines will help establish a step-by-step procedure to keep the facility operating. All ranges should establish a solid program of O&M based on a preventive rather than a reactive plan. 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.02.1 Many ranges over the past half century have been operated informally - without the benefit of manuals, guidebooks or documentation. Informal operations may have served well when siting ranges required little more than walking out the back door, setting up a bench and a target, but today operations manuals combined with education and training programs, are often necessary. By developing sound operating procedures, a constant renewing of the organization occurs. 1.03 Chapter Organization 1.03.1 This chapter is organized into three sub-sections, (1) General information; (2) Operations; and (3) Maintenance. 1.04 Cross Reference a. General Information, Section I, Chapter 1 II-3-6 ARTICLE 2. OPERATIONS 2.01 Operations Guidebook 2.01.1 Establish an outdoor range operation along formal lines of management which can be documented in a "Range Operations Guide." This guidebook expands on the information in the Range Source Book. Some of the material may need modifying to meet the needs of a particular application; therefore, tab each section in the notebook for ease of identification and make copies for each of the officers or operatives. Your Range Operations Guide should include at least the following sections: Note: For additional guidance use those chapters identified in parenthesis. a. Organization Records (Section I, Chapter 4) b. Safety Plan (Section I, Chapter 2) c. Organization Structure (Section I, Chapter 4) d. Planning Guide (Section I, Chapter 3) e. Maintenance Guide (this chapter) f. Personnel Handbook (this chapter) g. Long Range Plan (Section I, Chapter 3) 2.02 Operations Guide 2.02.1 An operations guide can provide sufficient information to allow qualified individuals to run the operation in the event the range master is not available. Traditionally, and in many non-profit clubs, one person often assumes the responsibility for range operation and frequently does all the work alone. The problem when that person leaves is that no one is trained to fill the void. 2.02.1.1 A range operations manual is a well-organized written plan that provides a step-by-step procedure on how to run the day-to-day operation. It includes listing who is responsible for keys, tools, range fixtures, whom to call for what reason, how to sign up new members, check in users or shooters in a tournament, how to turn on the lights and other seemingly insignificant details. By providing a concise check-list of things to do and conducting training sessions on how the range operation proceeds, the guide will minimize problems when others are called on to run the facility. 2.03 Personnel Handbook 2.03.1 A personnel handbook offers several major advantages. The primary one is a fair and equitable policy of personnel management. The objective of the handbook is to promote harmony among workers and to provide those responsible for the overall operation a means of delegating tasks. To set up and run a major event without a personnel guide that details the number of workers and a description of their duties can result in a disorganized effort. 2.03.1.1 The table of contents of the handbook should cover at least the following items: a. Recruitment b. Operations procedures c. Worker's duties and responsibilities 2.03.1.2 When recruiting volunteers, remember that people will commit themselves to a task in which they see a win-win relationship. The organization wins and they win. Use even-handed policies II-3-7 when dealing with workers and assign tasks that parallel their capabilities, training or experience. Try not to depend too heavily on one or two willing workers. 2.03.2 Precise operating procedures help to eliminate confusion. Describe tasks in detail to eliminate any chance of misinterpretation. Operating procedures should include a schedule of events, hours of operation, who is authorized to use the facility, who is in charge, emergency procedures, applicable rules and disciplinary procedures. Provide an Appendix to contain such items as a schedule of events, hours of operation, information on how someone can join the club or use the facility, range use restrictions (the firearms that can be used), an organizational chart and phone numbers for those who are responsible for overseeing the operation. 2.04 Environmental Management Guidance 2.04.1 Pro-active management of environmental issues has become an essential component of sound operation of an outdoor shooting range. Environmental challenges to ranges, related primarily to lead but also involving other shooting-associated materials, are becoming increasingly common, and pose potentially overwhelming costs, lengthy legal or regulatory processes, and major adverse publicity. To prepare for and help minimize the potential consequences of an environmental challenge, ranges should pro-actively develop and implement a site-specific Environmental Stewardship Plan (ESP) for managing shooting-associated materials. 2.04.2 An ESP is a written guide or “road map” for planning, implementing, monitoring, and documenting the progress of environmental management and improvements at your shooting range. A site-specific ESP is the best and most cost-effective way for a range to minimize the potential for serious consequences from environmental issues. Developing and implementing an ESP tends to: a. discourage (but not prevent) legal and regulatory actions b. aid in systematically gathering and evaluating the information necessary to determine whether there are legitimate environmental concerns at your range c. document the fact that no legitimate environmental issues are identified, or help identify effective and appropriate ways to resolve any legitimate environmental concerns that may be identified d. demonstrate the need for action to members and/or shooters e. assist in making prudent and cost-effective environmental management decisions help avoid potentially huge costs, long-term liabilities, legal uncertainties, and adverse public relations of dealing with environmental allegations 2.04.3 All ranges should have a site-specific ESP. Existing ranges that do not yet have an ESP should initiate ESP development and implementation promptly. Ranges in the planning or construction process should take advantage of the opportunity to coordinate ESP development and implementation into the design and construction process for maximum efficiency and so operations can begin with best environmental practices. Existing ranges planning expansions should integrate revision of their ESPs into expansion plans. 2.04.4 The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) has developed lead management guidance for outdoor ranges in consultation with the NRA. The National Shooting Sports Foundation (NSSF) also developed guidance that is compatible with the EPA guidance. The guidance documents from these organizations are mutually complimentary, and together constitute a complete package of guidance and recommendations for environmental management of outdoor shooting ranges consistent with national laws, regulations, and policies. The NSSF guidance discusses II-3-8 development of an ESP addressing a comprehensive suite of major environmental actions, including periodically reclaiming and recycling lead and management to minimize potential lead mobility between reclamation activities. The EPA best management practice for lead focuses on lead reclamation and recycling with management between recycling events to minimize lead mobility. The EPA guidance provides considerable detail on many aspects of reclaiming, recycling, and related topics. It also addresses legal requirements and court rulings prior to its date of publication, and discusses the regulatory context for environmental management at outdoor shooting ranges. Important resources for developing a site-specific ESP include: a. EPA. 2001. Best Management Practices for Lead at Outdoor Shooting Ranges. EPA-902-B-01-001. U.S. EPA Division of Enforcement and Compliance Assistance, RCRA Compliance Branch, 290 Broadway, 22nd Floor, New York, NY 10007-1866. January 2001 (revised June 2005). www.epa.gov/region2/waste/leadshot. b. NSSF. 1997. Environmental Aspects of Construction and Management of Outdoor Shooting Ranges. Facilitates Development Series No. 2. National Shooting Sports Foundation, Facilities Development Division, 11 Mile Hill Road, Newtown, CT 06470-2359. 1997. c. NRA Range Department Email, mail, or fax your letter of request to: NRA Range Services 11250 Waples Mill Road Fairfax, VA 22030 Telephone: (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264) FAX: (703) 267-1011 2.04.5 Development of an ESP is best approached in a series of sequential steps as follows. Following these steps will help overcome initial hurdles and provide the range with a useful initial ESP and the capability of revising and refining the ESP over time. a. The first step is to take a formal action committing to development and implementation of an ESP consistent with the EPA guidance, (vote of the directors, decision by owners, etc) and record the action in some “official” way to establish the date of formal initiation of ESP development. b. The second step is to identify the personnel who will develop the ESP and assign them to the task. c. The third step, and the first thing these personnel should do, is to read the EPA and NSSF guidance carefully in light of the conditions, environmental setting, and possible environmental issues at their range. The process outlined in the next few paragraphs assumes general familiarity with the EPA and NSSF guidance, and is intended to encourage and assist range personnel that may have little experience and perhaps little capability in environmental assessment or management in developing an ESP consistent with the environmental conditions, financial capabilities, and public relations needs specific to the particular range. This process will lead to development of an initial ESP that is complete, reliable, and useful, although there may well be areas in which it may be appropriate to add details and make refinements as experience is gained through implementation. 2.04.6 Those responsible for development of an ESP should decide whether the range should develop the ESP itself or have it developed professionally (in which case the responsible personnel should work closely with the professional throughout development of the ESP). II-3-9 a. Self development of your ESP involves one, and preferably more, staff, members, or shooters interested in the topic, and will take a few to many months. Once a complete draft is developed, those responsible may well realize they can do a better job now that they are familiar with the topic, and will develop several iterations before they are comfortable staking the future of the range on the ESP. This process usually results in a helpful ESP and provides “buy-in” among shooters and members as the developers talk about their work as it progresses, and is inexpensive. However, it takes an unknown length of time, often many months, before a satisfactory ESP is available. Even then, a self-developed ESP may not provide the confidence that a professionally developed ESP offers. b. Professional development of your ESP involves location of a qualified professional experienced specifically in developing ESPs for outdoor shooting ranges. The NRA Range Department can provide invaluable assistance in locating such a professional. For more information, contact NRA Range Services at (877) NRA-RANGE or email range@nrahq.org A qualified professional will provide a state-of-the-practice ESP consistent with current guidance and science/engineering, and can do so within a few weeks, if necessary. The cost of a professionally developed ESP varies with the variety of shooting activities addressed and the complexity of the environmental setting within which they take place. Professional development of an ESP is usually advisable if: i. accumulated shot, targets, wads, or bullets are found at any point on the range property boundary ii. bullets, shot, wads or targets fall into water or wetlands iii. the range is on property previously used in a way that may have resulted in contamination of soil, sediment, surface water or groundwater, or is down gradient of property previously or presently used in such a way iv. any portion of the range property containing shot, targets, wads, or bullets contains, or provides critical habitat for, any listed State or Federal threatened or endangered plant or animal species v. any portion of the range property containing shot, targets, wads, or bullets is up gradient of a nearby drinking water well or a nearby surface water body used for potable water vi. there is any reason to put a state-of-the-practice ESP in place quickly 2.04.7 Preparing an ESP involves six interrelated steps. Whether a range develops its ESP itself or has it professionally developed, the range personnel responsible for the ESP will be involved with the following general steps. During ESP development the emphasis is on the first four, with consideration of the last two. During ESP implementation the emphasis is on the latter two, which requires consideration of the first four. a. evaluation of existing conditions b. identification of site-specific environmental issues c. identification of appropriate management actions d. preparation of the ESP e. ESP implementation f. periodic ESP evaluation and updating 2.04.8 Whether the ESP is developed by the range or by a professional, it should consider the following general outline and brief illustration of topics to be addressed in a site-specific ESP. This outline has been adapted and updated from the EPA and NSSF guidance. II-3-10 a. Introduction. General overview of the property and the shooting activities that occur there. b. Purpose and Goals. Summary of the purpose of the ESP and the goals that its implementation will achieve. c. Site Assessment. Description of the environmental setting of the range, including a summary of previous uses of the property that may affect environmental conditions, considering such things as: i. types, intensity, and history of shooting activities ii. topography and drainage iii. surface water and wetlands iv. soil type and characteristics that may affect shooting-associated materials v. geology and groundwater vi. vegetation and habitat for birds and wildlife vii. special site-specific considerations d. Plan of Action. Description of specific actions to be implemented to achieve the purpose and goals of the ESP in the context of the site assessment. This section will describe specific management actions in conjunction with design features and site characteristics to manage and minimize consequences of shooting-associated materials in the environment, considering such things as: i. periodic lead reclamation/recycling ii. retention of bullets, shot, wads, and targets on range property iii. minimization of potential for lead to dissolve in surface of ground water iv. minimization of physical mobility of lead v. human and wildlife exposure to lead vi. other relevant topics specific to the site e. Measuring Success. Guidance on documenting accomplishment of the Plan of Action items, such as: i. purchase records ii. dated before-and-after photographs iii. work logs iv. etc. f. Appendices. Appendices can be used to provide supplemental information to aid in implementing key Plan of Action items. Topics such as the following might helpfully be addressed in appendices: i. implementation schedules ii. information about lead reclamation companies iii. records of lead reclamation iv. soil pH monitoring records v. items identified above under “measuring success” II-3-11 ARTICLE 3. MAINTENANCE 3.01 Maintenance Guide 3.01.1 Maintenance guidebooks may be one page or complete multi-page documents filled with schematics, drawings, parts lists, maintenance requirements and guidelines for overhauling pieces of equipment. Maintenance guidance should incorporate appropriate aspects of the range’s Environmental Stewardship Plan (See Section 2.04). Develop the maintenance guide during the planning, design and construction of a project and include a complete list of materials used in building the facility. This guide should document how the facility was designed and how it is to be maintained. It will include information on maintenance of grounds, facilities and equipment. The elements are: (1) Maintenance lists (2) Equipment lists (3) Maintenance schedules 3.01.2 A maintenance list may be no more than a large laundry list of things to do, when to do it and what is required for the record books after it has been done. An equipment list is generally an inventory of all pieces of equipment needed to keep the facility functioning and the list is broken down into parts lists, maintenance and replacement schedules. Maintenance schedules should categorize the facility into buildings, grounds and equipment, broken down further into individual tasks. A schedule of these tasks could be posted in a conspicuous place in chart form with blocks where those who perform a task can initial that it is complete and note the date. This provides members a means of doing small jobs when they are at the facility, lessening the need for organized work details. 3.02 Maintenance List 3.02.1 Include all items in the maintenance checklist that will require periodic maintenance. The following are examples: a. Communications equipment, P.A. system, telephones, etc. b. Mowing grass, trimming operations on firing lines and general landscaping work c. Painting d. Target systems: return target mechanisms, target carriers, moving target mechanisms, metallic targets, trap machines, frames, target backers, etc. e. Restrooms, including pit toilets, etc. f. Roof inspection, termite inspection g. Parking lots, driveways, roads h. Lighting systems i. Environmental maintenance 3.02.1 The maintenance list schedules tasks and takes advantage of certain climatic conditions. For example, conducting a roof inspection or replacing roofs should be done in the cooler months. In others, lighting systems, especially on trap and skeet facilities or indoor ranges require regular, periodic maintenance to keep light levels at or near their design levels. When these facilities are used only part of the year, for example, winter use of an indoor range, maintenance work should be completed several weeks prior to start up. This will allow for dry runs to be sure the facility is operational before activities are started after being suspended during the off-season. II-3-12 3.02.1.1 Sample maintenance checklist. TASK # DATE TASK DESCRIPTION FREQUENCY DUE DATE 1. 2. 3.03 Equipment List 3.03.1 Equipment lists should show each piece of equipment and each job required for its maintenance. One piece of equipment may require several maintenance jobs during the year that are identified according to a numbered sequence. A piece of equipment, for example a skeet machine, may be identified as machine number one requiring six different maintenance tasks to keep it operating at peak efficiency. Each particular task is identified as either preventive or routine maintenance on a chart posted in the skeet house and on the equipment checklist. As shown on the sample form, there are spaces to list parts used, description of the job or part, indicate if scheduled or unscheduled, frequency that regular (Routine) maintenance should be performed and a date on which the work was actually completed. When developing a checklist for a particular facility, it may be expanded to include additional information, especially on larger ranges. This list is a tool which range operators can use to keep equipment maintenance up-to-date, track maintenance costs and control inventory. The equipment list identifies each piece of equipment according to a specific numbering system, where it is located on the facility and a maintenance history that identifies problem areas. EQUIPMENT # TASK # PARTS DESC. SCH/UNSCH FREQ. DATE Machine # 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 Machine # 2 1 2 3 4 3.03.2 Good maintenance records can save on maintenance costs. Waiting until a part or unit breaks, wears out or burns out may cause damage to other parts, resulting in higher repair costs. Electrical problems often cause high temperatures that may damage or destroy other parts or cause a fire. A notable example is fluorescent light ballasts. Improper maintenance on flickering lamps and burned out bulbs can cause excessive overheating of the ballast and could result in an electrical fire. II-3-13 3.03.2.1 Protect the investment made in the range facility by developing and practicing a good operations and maintenance program, including environmental activities. Such a program will ensure the facility is maintained at or near it original level. 3.04 Maintenance Schedule 3.04.1 See Section I, Chapter 5, paragraph 5.03 for a sample maintenance schedule. Alter its format according to specific needs, including environmental maintenance activities consistent with the ESP (See Section 2.04). II-3-14 National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section II Chapter 4 OUTDOOR AIR GUN Range Services © 2012 II-4-2 II-4-3 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.03 Chapter Organization 1.04 Cross Reference ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.02 Rules for Air Gun Ranges ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.02 Range Dimensions ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.02 Maintenance 8 2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). II-4-4 II-4-5 ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 This chapter outlines some possible methods for building outdoor air gun ranges. Building an air gun range is less complicated than building other ranges and less expensive. The limited maximum distance of air gun shots, and low sound levels of air guns greatly reduce potential complications. 1.01.2 NRA air gun competitive and training activities include BB gun, 3 and 4 position air rifle, silhouette (rifle and pistol), international rifle, and air pistol. International air rifle, 3P air, and pistol are not usually fired outdoors. 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.02.1 Since the 1500's air guns have played an important role in the history of shooting. Leonardo da Vinci is credited with inventing the first air gun. That air gun used bellows and a strong spring housed in the stock for power. Air guns were used as military weapons by the Austrian army in the late 1700's and early 1800's against Napoleon. During the mid 1800's, air rifles, quite similar to todays, became popular at shooting galleries. 1.03 Chapter Organization 1.03.1 This chapter is organized into four sections: (1) General information; (2) Safety; (3) Technical specifications; and (4) Equipment operations and maintenance. 1.04 Cross Reference 1.04.1 NRA Range Resource Book References a. General Information, Section I, Chapter 1 b. General Outdoor Range Information, Section II, Chapter 1 c. Safety Plan, Section I, Chapter 2 d. Outdoor Range Design Criteria, Section II, Chapter 2 1.04.2 NRA Rule Books (available online at http://www.nrahq.org/compete/nra-rule-books.asp) a. NRA Precision Air Rifle Position Rule Book b. NRA International Style Pistol Rule Book c. NRA International Style Rifle Rule Book d. NRA Sporter Air Rifle Position Rule Book II-4-6 ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.01.1 Despite their popularity as gifts for youngsters, air guns must be handled with the same care and respect as a firearm. Junior camps use the versatile air gun for camp shooting programs. Families use air guns for plinking activities and competition shooters shoot air guns at the Olympic Games. The following rules are offered as a guide for range operators to use. Safety rules must also be based on planned use. Rules once written and adopted, become part of the safety plan. Give copies to each user. 2.02 Rules for Air Gun Ranges 2.02.1 a. Always keep the gun pointed in a safe direction. b. Always keep your finger off the trigger until ready to shoot. c. Always keep the gun unloaded until ready to use. 2.02.2 BB Gun Rules a. Eye protection is highly recommended for all shooters and spectators while firing is in progress. b. BBs must not be fired at steel, masonry, rubber, wood, or any other material likely to cause bouncebacks. c. Use only approved BB traps designed to retain the projectile. Inexpensive traps can be constructed easily using multiple layers of cardboard inside a cardboard box. 2.02.3 Rules for CO2 Powered Air Guns a. Never change CO2 cylinders when the air gun is loaded. b. In the event of a malfunction due to a discharged (puncture type) cylinder, clear the barrel before installing a new cylinder. c. Before removing a puncture type CO2 cylinder, discharge the remaining gas according to the manufacturer's instructions. d. Install new CO2 cylinders according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2.02.4 Multi-pump Air Gun Rules a. For Multi-pump air guns, do not exceed the manufacturer's ratings and recommendations for the number of pumps to be used. II-4-7 ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.01.1 Firing Line to Target Line 3.01.1.1 For fixed bullseye target shooting, there is one target for each firing point. The firing and target lines are parallel to each other and the direction of fire is perpendicular to both. The firing point centerline should be on-line with the center point of the target. The center-to-center spacing of the firing points and the targets is determined by the wider of the two. For example, with fixed bullseye targets used for air gun events, the firing point is generally the wider. For silhouette, the target area and the point usually correspond in width. 3.01.1.2 For silhouette, the firing point to target relationship varies from shot to shot. A shooter will fire at angles to the right and left of center. The spacing of the firing points and targets is governed by the width of the target area. 3.01.2 Distance 3.01.2.1 The distance between the firing line and the target line is determined by the course of fire to be shot. Generally, air gun ranges vary from 5-to-40 meters in distance. The distance should never be less than that specified by the course of fire. It is better to exceed the specified distance than to fall short. For international events, the specified measurements must be metric and close tolerances are required. 3.01.3 Direct Fire Zone 3.01.3.1 The direct fire zone includes all directions of fire from the left side of the far left point to the right side of the far right point. 3.01.4 Firing Line Area 3.01.4.1 Firing Line 3.01.4.1.1 Firing lines must be parallel to the target line. They must be clearly marked to warn against any movement forward during firing. Should the range facility be set up on a temporary basis, the firing line should be easily recognized. Permanent ranges should mark the firing line along its entire length for ease of identification. 3.01.4.2 Firing Points The firing points must be wide enough to accommodate the shooter, equipment, and if appropriate, a coach, spotter or instructor. In addition, they should be elevated 6-to-12 inches above the surface of the range to provide better target visibility and allow drainage. All firing points should be clearly marked with a number in the left front corner. a. Firing points for informal shooting should be a minimum of 4 feet wide and 7 feet deep, including BB gun activities. b. NRA 3- or 4- position firing points should be a minimum of 4 feet wide and 7 feet deep. II-4-8 c. Silhouette (metallic) shooting firing points should be a minimum of 5 feet wide, the width of the widest bank of targets (rams), and 4 feet deep. 3.01.4.3 Firing Line Length 3.01.4.3.1 The firing line length is determined by the combined widths of the firing points. On some silhouette ranges, the length will be equal to the combined width of the target areas. 3.01.4.4 Ready Area 3.01.4.4.1 All ranges should provide ready area, a clear walkway behind the firing points, to allow unimpeded movement of range officers, other shooters, coaches. For international events, there must be an additional area directly behind the shooting firing point for the judges. Ramps suitable for wheelchair access should also be provided in conjunction with the walkways. The walkway should be at least 4 feet wide. 3.01.4.5 Support Areas 3.01.4.5.1 Space for other support facilities may be provided behind the walkway. These may include gun racks, equipment tables and seating arrangements for the next squad or relay. These facilities are optional and should be provided as needed. 3.01.4.6 Spectator Areas 3.01.4.6.1 Spectator seating should be arranged so it does not interfere with normal range operations. This is usually accomplished by adding at least a 15 foot buffer area between the shooting area and the spectator area and dividing it off with a temporary fence (rope or ribbon). The size and positioning of this area will vary according to the event and space available. 3.01.4.7 Firing Line Cover 3.01.4.7.1 A firing line cover is normally an optional feature, but most international events require enclosures. Firing line covers are generally a roof structure, designed to protect shooters from inclement weather. 3.01.4.7.2 For general range use, a firing line cover that adds the capability of enclosing the sides is best for the air gun range. Such a cover should extend 24 inches forward of the firing line, a minimum of 5 feet behind the line and be a minimum of 6.6 feet high. International air gun ranges are generally indoors, but outdoor ranges can be used for practice or competition. Most European local ranges are outdoor. For outdoor ranges temporary enclosures may be used to shield the shooter from the wind only in international air gun competition. 3.01.5 Target Line Area 3.01.5.1 Frames 3.01.5.1.1 Target frames and holders for regular air gun activities need to be long enough to mount two targets side by side or 22 inches wide. They are similar to the frames for smallbore rifle targets. Corrugated cardboard is generally the best backing material. It provides a surface for the targets thin enough to allow the pellet or BB to pass through easily, yet stable in windy weather. II-4-9 3.01.5.2 Multiple Target Lines 3.01.5.2.1 Depending on the courses of fire to be fired on a range there may be more than one target line. A target line is parallel to the firing line and the specified distance away from it. Place the targets so the front edges are on the target line. The targets are prescribed by the course of fire and are mounted on holders or backers which may be attached to fixed or movable frames. Fixed frames are installed permanently on ranges where the target line remains constant. For ranges where there are several target lines, removable or fold down frames are desirable. 3.01.5.3 Number Boards 3.01.5.3.1 Target frames should be equipped with a number board large enough to be read with normal vision and corresponding to the firing point. Numbers should be alternating contrasting colors (i.e. black background and a white number, then a white background and a black number). 3.01.5.4 Target Assembly 3.01.5.4.1 Air gun target areas may include stationary pellet/BB traps set up directly behind the targets. These may also serve as a frame or backer on which to hang the target. Permanent impact areas and pellet traps may be located behind the target line, farthest from the firing line. This would require adjustment of the intermediate target lines to maintain impact into the main backstop. 3.01.5.5 Backstop 3.01.5.5.1 Traps or backstops are not necessary when the range has enough clear space. 3.01.5.5.2 A backstop can be either a man-made or natural obstacle that serves to stop pellets or BBs. Backstops may include steep hillsides, man-made earthen embankments, or other object capable of stopping and holding the projectile. For BBs the backstop may be made from a heavy drapery material such as old carpeting. A backstop is not needed if the entire down range area is unoccupied. This is feasible because of the limited maximum range of air guns. The backstop should be wider than the target line to stop pellets or BBs that miss the target. a. Informal range backstops or traps can be made out of corrugated cardboard and assembled in a box-like affair with layers of newspapers or cardboard to stop the pellet or BB. Backdrop material to catch the errant pellet or BB is often made of carpeting or canvas. b. Formal ranges built specifically for air gun generally use a plywood backing surface covered with insulation board offset from the plywood to absorb the strike of the pellet or BB. These are constructed for ease of replacement. The process calls for a wall behind the trap to protect adjacent areas. Drapery material also works well as a shield panel and is less expensive. 3.01.5.5.3 Pellet Traps/Impact Areas a. Temporary - If an open field is large enough for the full safety fan, then no trap is required. If not, a temporary trap can be built from cardboard boxes, sheet medal, newspapers or other materials. b. Basic: 10 or 12 gauge steel plate angled at 45 degrees or less from the horizontal for BBs and pellets may be used behind the target. Use an impact mat or plastic, if a temporary range, on the floor to protect against bouncing BBs or pellets. You can mount the steel vertical for pellets. Pellets hit and drop to the bottom of the target frame. II-4-10 c. Permanent - A natural hill, man-made earth embankment, or permanently installed steel backstop may be used. Any earthen embankment should be free of any items that might cause bouncebacks or ricochets. 3.01.5.6 Side Berms 3.01.5.6.1 The height of a side berm is determined by the degree to which adjacent areas must be protected and by the width of the range. The best alternative for pellet or BB gun ranges is to install plywood panels. Place these panels between firing points (similar to shooting booths). Begin the panel wall 1 foot behind the firing line and extend it forward far enough to prevent any shot from leaving the range area. The suggested height of side berms, walls or other artificial devices is 8 feet. 3.01.5.6.2 Walls 3.01.5.6.2.1 Walls used in place of side berms or used to separate the range into sections can be built of dimension lumber and plywood covered with soft material (building insulation board, etc.) to trap any stray pellet. 3.01.5.7 Baffles 3.01.5.7.1 Baffles for air gun ranges require materials sufficient to stop any pellet or BB fired on the range. Generally drapery material or carpeting is hung so pellets are trapped. 3.01.5.8 Target Return Mechanisms 3.01.5.8.1 Target return mechanisms can be used on the 10 meter air gun range. They are helpful in reducing the time it takes to conduct training or competitive events. 3.01.5.9 Moving Targets and Frames 3.01.5.9.1 Moving target mechanisms are available commercially. Making these mechanisms is practical and often much less expensive. 3.01.5.10 Wind flags 3.01.5.10.1 Wind flags or windmills may not be used by the shooter in international air gun competition or in silhouette competition. See NRA Rule Books. Range officials in international air gun competition may place wind flags midway between the firing line and targets. If used by shooters, they may be placed on the firing line at the front of the firing point. In any case these devices must not be placed in any position where the movement or operation interferes with another shooter. 3.01.6 Administrative Facilities 3.01.6.1 Scoring Areas 3.01.6.1.1 A shed or building large enough to house staff is important as an aid to administrative functions. 3.01.6.2 Restrooms II-4-11 3.01.6.2.1 Restroom facilities can be anything from portable units to fully equipped modern conveniences, but they are essential. 3.01.6.3 Buildings 3.01.6.3.1 Range buildings to house maintenance and range equipment can also house targets, target stands and other equipment, eliminating the need to carry these materials to and from the facility. 3.01.6.3.2 If the major emphasis is on training, space requirements will include a classroom, statistical area and storage areas for targets and equipment. 3.01.7 Communications 3.01.7.1 Communications on conventional tournament and training ranges are a plus. 3.01.7.2 Radios 3.01.7.2.1 Radios may be used, but information other than general operating procedures should be transmitted by phone. Radios may also provide emergency communications. 3.01.7.3 Public Address Systems 3.01.7.3.1 Public address systems are necessary on ranges with a large number of firing points. Not only is a quality public address system necessary from a safety standpoint, it also allows the shooter to hear line commands more clearly, thereby assuring a smooth operation. 3.01.7.4 Control Towers 3.01.7.4.1 Control towers are a part of range communications and should be located at the centerpoint of the firing line and offset to prevent any interference with shooters. For small ranges, towers or control booths may not be necessary. Control towers should be constructed high enough to allow observation of all firing points. Caution: Where firing line covers are used, they must not obstruct the view of the firing line from the tower. 3.01.8 Other Considerations 3.01.8.1 Grade 3.01.8.1.1 The ground surface should be relatively flat and level. A firing line to target slope, ideally, should not exceed 2 percent to 3 percent in elevation. Likewise, a side-to-side slope. If the range is not enclosed by barriers, such as fences, berms, etc., the areas adjacent to the range should be open for at least 50 feet. This prevents someone from walking onto the range area into the line of fire. 3.01.8.2 If the air gun range is set up in an open field, adjacent to other activities, barriers may be required along the sides. These barriers may be solid fences, blank building walls (no windows or doors), a natural hill or man-made barrier. Plywood or particle board in sheets can be erected to form a series of angled side baffles. Enclosures are not permitted in silhouette competition. II-4-12 3.02 RANGE DIMENSIONS 3.02.1 Firing Distances 3.02.1.1 Informal Training a. 5 meters (16 feet 3.85 inches) 3.02.1.2 Air Pistol Silhouette a. Five gallina (chicken) targets at 10 yards b. Five javelina (pig) targets at 12.5 yards c. Five guajalote (turkey) targets at 15 yards d. Five borrego (sheep) targets at 18 yards 3.02.1.3 Air Rifle Silhouette a. Five gallina (chicken) targets at 20 yards b. Five javelina (pig) targets at 30 yards c. Five guajalote (turkey) targets at 36 yards d. Five borrego (sheep) targets at 45 yards 3.02.1.4 BB Gun a. 5 yards (15 feet), all positions 3.02.1.5 International Air Rifle and Air Pistol a. NRA targets AR 5-1 (single bullseye), AR 1/10 (12 bullseyes). These are the international air rifle targets used for firing at 10 meters (33 feet). The shooting distances for international events must be accurate to within plus or minus 0.05 meters for 10 meters. b. NRA target B-32, international 10 meter air pistol target, for firing the air pistol course at 10 meters (33 feet). The shooting distance must be accurate to within plus or minus 0.05 meters. 3.02.2 Numbering Scheme 3.02.2.1 Firing points are numbered sequentially from left to right. The number is located in the center of each target and at the left front corner of the firing point. For silhouettes each bank of five targets is numbered. See NRA Rule Book. 3.02.3 Miscellaneous a. Gun rack capacity is 1.5 slots per range user. b. Equipment tables should be one table per 2.5 firing points. c. Ready lines generally are located 10 yards or more to the rear of the firing line. A barrier should be used to identify the ready line. This area is reserved for those shooters who are next up on the firing line. d. Statistical areas should be away from the range area to discourage traffic. 3.02.3.1 Ideally, the range ground cover should be grass, which reduces heat on a range. 3.02.4 Firing Line Area II-4-13 a. Temporary firing lines may be marked off by a rope, heavy cord or surveying tape held in place by tent pegs or 8 inch aluminum gutter nails. Another method is to highlight the firing line with a line marking machine, commonly used to mark football fields or baseball diamonds. b. Firing lines laid out on grass or other materials may be designated by a series of small markers at the left front corner of each firing point and in a straight line. c. Permanent firing line markers and identification may be installed even with the horizontal grade to allow easy range maintenance. Firing lines may be made of concrete or other artificial material. On artificial surfaces paint a red line along the forward edge where the firing line is to be located. Asphalt is not recommended as a surface material for a firing line. d. Strict adherence to measurements as shown on the drawings in this source book assure compliance with NRA rules. e. NRA rules define international firing points. Please refer to the appropriate NRA Rule Book available online at http://www.nrahq.org/compete/nra-rule-books.asp II-4-14 ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.01.1 Knowledge of proper equipment operation and adherence to maintenance schedules are necessary to maintain range efficiency. Training programs should include all users so that each person knows and understands the function of each piece of equipment and its care and maintenance. 4.02 Maintenance 4.02.1 Maintenance requires constant checking of the equipment for wear and damage from use. This means replacing worn or damaged items, frequently changing backing materials, painting, and applying lubricants to moving parts. Maintenance also includes stocking parts for range machinery, lumber for new target frames, and tools to do the work. 4.02.2 Target carriers, either electrical or manual, require occasional replacement of parts, especially the cords which carry the target to and from the backstop. Pulleys and belts are also subject to wear and require frequent checking. These belts break easily and replacements should always be on hand. 4.02.3 Moving target mechanisms require a higher level of maintenance because wear on the wheels and track can cause drag as the mechanism travels between pit houses. Any binding or drag applied to the mechanism tends to overheat motors, strain cables and maintenance costs increase. Tracks and wheels should be checked according to a scheduled maintenance plan (based on the level of use) to keep friction to a minimum. 4.02.4 Pellet traps will usually not require any maintenance other than routine removal of spent pellets from the container. The backing material behind the traps will require changing as deterioration warrants. 4.02.5 Frames and holders usually require the most maintenance. Extra pieces of lumber should be on hand for frame replacement. Additional frames and holders should always be on hand. With pellet and BB guns, frames will generally last for several years with only a few coats of paint and daily removal of staples. Cardboard backers require replacement from time to time and extra cardboard should always be on hand. 4.02.6 Manufacturer's warranty and service manuals offer tips on how to keep each piece of equipment in top operating condition. These manuals should become a part of the maintenance manual established for each facility. National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section II Chapter 5 OUTDOOR MUZZLELOADING Range Services © 2012 II-05-2 II-05-3 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.03 Chapter Organization 1.04 Cross Reference ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.02 Safety Rules ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.02 Range Dimensions 3.03 Materials ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.02 Maintenance 8 2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). II-5-4 II-5-5 ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 Muzzleloading shooters are usually a "do-it-yourself" group and generally do not spend much for range construction, preferring to maintain a more primitive atmosphere on the range. This chapter places special emphasis on economical solutions for the development of muzzleloading ranges. The underlying philosophy is innovation -- of making do with available materials and land areas to construct a muzzleloading range. 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.02.1 Muzzleloading firearms, dating back to the first pilgrimages to the new world, are owned by collectors, shooters and hunters and used extensively by such groups as the North- South Skirmish Association, Civil War Skirmish Association, National Muzzleloading Rifle Association and United States International Muzzleloading Committee (governing body for international muzzleloading shooting in the United States), and others. 1.03 Chapter Organization 1.03.1 This chapter contains four sections: (1) General Information; (2) Safety; (3) Technical specifications; and (4) Equipment operations and maintenance. Cross references are given to aid the user in finding related information throughout the remainder of the source book. 1.04 Cross Reference a. General Outdoor Range Information, Section II, Chapter 1 b. Safety Plan, Section I, Chapter 2 c. Outdoor Range Design Criteria, Section II, Chapter 2 1.04.1 Other Information Resources a. National Muzzleloading Rifle Association Rules b. U.S. International Muzzleloading Committee Rules c. North-South Skirmish Association Rules d. Muzzleloading Bench Rest Rules e. Civil War Skirmish Association Rules f. NRA Education & Training Division g. NRA Muzzleloading Rifle, Pistol and Shotgun Rule Book (available online at http://www.nrahq.org/compete/nra-rule-books.asp ) II-5-6 ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.01.1 Design criteria alone do not guarantee a safe facility, since a range is only as safe as the manner in which it is used. For muzzleloading firearms, the same rules apply as to other types of firearms, with some additional requirements due to the lack of a self-contained cartridge. 2.02 Safety Rules 2.02.1 The following rules supplement the general rules for pistols and rifles and are to be included in the overall range safety plan for muzzleloading. 2.02.2 Safety rules for Muzzleloading Firearms Ranges a. Range commands must be obeyed at all times. b. Smoking is prohibited, except in designated areas. c. Loading tables must be a minimum of 8 feet to the rear of the firing positions. d. Never discharge muzzleloading firearms over or near a loading table. e. Load muzzleloading firearms only with blackpowder or Pyrodex 7. f. Designated spectator areas should be located at least 6 feet in back of the loading area. g. Do not prime or cap any muzzleloading firearm until in position on the firing line and until after the command ΑCommence Firing.≅ h. Once a muzzleloading firearm is primed or capped, the muzzle must be pointed at the target area. i. In the event of a hangfire, keep the firearm pointed down range for at least a minute and then notify a range officer. j. Wearing adequate eye and ear protection is strongly recommended. k. The barrel should be swabbed with a damp patch between shots in an attempt to kill any live sparks that may remain in the bore. l. When a cease-fire is called, all shooters must obey immediately. Upon the command, "All shooters fire into the backstop", all firearms will be fired. The command, "Snap a cap," followed by all shooters snapping a cap, is required to demonstrate that all firearms are unloaded. 2.02.3 Muzzleloading Pistol Rules a. Pistols are fired on ranges up to 50 yards. b. Upon the command, "Cease Fire," all pistols must be benched. c. Prior to any general cease-fire, shooters should be allowed sufficient time to fire all remaining shots or adequately clear the pistol, before anyone goes down range. 2.02.4 Rifles using Round Ball Bullets a. Round ball shooting is generally restricted to events of 100 yards or less. b. All targets must be placed so that bullets impact in the bottom half of the backstop. 2.02.5 Rifles using Minié ball (elongated bullets) or blackpowder cartridges. a. Muzzleloading or breechloading rifles using bullets of the Minié, maxi7 or elongated version are to be used only on ranges suitable for use by highpower centerfire cartridges. 2.02.6 Primitive/Skirmish Ranges II-5-7 2.02.6.1 Primitive ranges are ranges where the shooter must carry all materials. No modern conveniences are allowed. This includes loading tables, etc. a. Powder must be loaded into the firearm by means of a single charge dispenser. The pouring of powder into the barrel from a flask, horn or other large container is prohibited. b. To avoid sparks from the firearms of other shooters, all loading is to be done away from the firing area. c. After loading, shooters will return to the firing line before capping or priming the firearm. d. Caution: A loaded firearm may fire, uncapped, by a spark created by the hammer striking the nipple when residue from a cap remains. Also the flint striking a frizzen of a flintlock even with an empty flash pan may cause the firearm to discharge. II-5-8 ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.01.0 Muzzleloading ranges vary from the informal backwoods or gravel pit with three or four positions to the more formal, modern range with numerous firing points, covered firing lines, range buildings, restrooms and other facilities. Ranges for muzzleloading firearms should be designed to handle all types of blackpowder firearms, both short and long range. More important, however, are adequate down range areas in which bullets can impact harmlessly. Informal muzzleloading ranges should not be set up over dry grass, since sparks may cause a fire. 3.01.1 Firing Line to Target Line 3.01.1.1 The firing line, composed of several firing points, must be parallel to the target line. Target positions are established along a centerline projected perpendicular to the firing and target lines and include all bullseye and fun type targets. Targets should be placed the same distance apart as are the firing points. 3.01.1.2 Distance 3.01.1.2.1 Distances at which targets are placed on muzzleloading ranges may extend from 25 to 1,000 yards in length. Muzzleloading pistol ranges are generally 25 to 50 yards with international events measured in meters. Muzzleloading benchrest events are conducted at 200 and 300 yards and some 1,000 yard events are occasionally held. The majority of shooting will probably be conducted at 100 yards or less. Distances should be held to a dimension of plus or minus 1 percent accuracy at all ranges. These ranges include those used for hunter sighting-in, training programs and competitive events. 3.01.1.3 Direct Fire Zone 3.01.1.3.1 The direct fire zone is determined by the target-to-firing-point relationship. For silhouette events where target engagement angles warrant, the direct fire zone may include additional areas. 3.01.2 Firing Line Area 3.01.2.1 Length 3.01.2.1.1 The length of a firing line is determined by the number of firing points required for a facility. Informal ranges usually provide firing lines sufficient in length to accommodate up to five shooters, while competitive ranges may incorporate firing lines several hundred feet in length to accommodate larger groups. Determining the overall size of a facility is a function of planning and design and is based on the amount of use planned. 3.01.2.2 Depth 3.01.2.2.1 Adequate space for each shooter is based on several factors, including safety, type of firearm, firearm characteristics and accompanying equipment. With muzzleloading activities, space is based primarily on safety in the handling of blackpowder. Minimum depth should be 10 feet. II-5-9 3.01.2.3 Firing Points 3.01.2.3.1 Firing points should be clearly identified by numbers and placed at right angles to the firing line and on each of the corresponding numbered target frames. Numbered frames and firing points will help prevent cross-fires and are mandatory if target numbers are assigned in competition. Competition numbers require alternating colors (i.e. black background with white numbers, and then white background with black numbers). Another aid in helping to identify the proper target is to paint the background of the number with alternating colors. In addition, firing points must be large enough to provide for all conditions. Flintlock rifles and pistols present a special problem on the firing line. The touch hole emits hot gases and burning powder residue, sometimes extending several feet to the side. The most common way to avoid this problem is for flintlock shooters to inform other shooters that a shot is about to be fired by exclaiming, "Flintlock!" or "Fire-in-the-hole!" This warns others to move, to stand clear. Muzzleloading ranges, regardless of firing position dimensions, should also require that shields (referred to as spray shields) be installed when flintlocks are being fired. These shields are installed by hanging them on ceiling hooks, or stapling them on a post next to the shooter. It is also a good idea to have extra shields on hand. Flash guards may also be attached to the firearm. 3.01.2.4 Administrative Space 3.01.2.4.1 The area between the firing point and loading area should be kept free of excess movement to limit interference with shooters and maintain safety. Keeping this area open will aid range officers in responding to problems along the line. 3.01.2.4.2 Support Areas 3.01.2.4.2.1 Where scoring details are used, support areas separate from the shooting areas are needed. These areas may be as simple as a tent or as elaborate as a separate, fully equipped building. 3.01.2.4.3 Loading Area 3.01.2.4.3.1 The loading area should be set up a minimum of 8 feet behind the firing line. This will provide adequate room for the loading process and provide a safety zone to protect against sparks igniting powder containers. Ignition of even a small amount of blackpowder could cause damage. Since most muzzleloading shooting is unsquadded and firing is conducted at random during a specific time interval, the loading area or firing line should not become crowded. It is safer to load in the loading area rather than on the firing line. Some variations in loading procedures are permitted for special events, such as skirmishes and primitive (mountain man) shooting events. Skirmishers, for example, use premeasured charges, carried in special vials, while primitive, mountain man shooters generally use powderhorns to fill a powder measure while on the line. 3.01.2.4.4 Loading Table 3.01.2.4.4.1 In the loading area, a loading table is always a great convenience and almost an absolute necessity. For training and general purpose muzzleloading ranges, it is merely a table upon which a shooter may lay out his equipment and against which the firearm may be leaned. Regardless of what is used, the loading table should be sturdy enough to hold up under adverse conditions, weather-related or otherwise. It should also have notches or slots built in where a rifle can lean without falling. Notches or slots are cut into the edges of the table top, at a depth and width sufficient to support a rifle. II-5-10 3.01.2.4.5 Spectator Areas 3.01.2.4.5.1 Spectator areas should be provided behind the loading area and separated by a fence or other physical barrier to restrict access into the loading area. 3.01.2.4.6 Firing Line Enclosure 3.01.2.4.6.1 Where it is practical and affordable, a covered firing line is a welcome addition, although few muzzleloading ranges have them (see drawing A6). A covered firing line must be high enough to clear the ramrod of the longest rifle being loaded, with perhaps a foot or two to spare. The roof may also slope downward just forward of the firing line to act as a safety baffle where appropriate. The downslope of the roof will increase sound levels on the firing line, but acoustical treatment will reduce sound levels. Enclosures should have a minimum ceiling height of 10 feet 6 inches, extending the entire length of the firing line with the roof overhand extending a minimum of 2 feet forward of the firing line and 6 feet behind the back edge of the firing position. A firing line cover using minimal requirements for 20 firing points would measure 140 feet long and 12 feet wide, as shown from an overhead view. The height of the firing line cover may need to be increased depending upon the types of muzzleloaders used to ensure clearance for ramrods. 3.01.3 Target Line Area 3.01.3.1 Targets at each target line should be positioned so that bullet strike will occur in the lower half of the backstop. By using this design, the majority of bullets fired on the range will impact harmlessly in the backstop. The occasional bullet escaping by ricochet or inadvertent discharge will be contained within the down range area. Portable target frames can also provide for use of the range for international matches if provisions are made for setting the targets at both standard and metric distances. 3.01.3.2 Frames 3.01.3.2.1. For target frame construction, soft pine should be used to reduce ricochet potential. One method of constructing target frames calls for the permanent installation of poles along the target line with wooden stringers placed along the tops and somewhat lower to accommodate the target backing material. Picture frame brackets may be attached to each stringer to provide for easy placement or replacement of backing materials, such as cardboard or soft insulation board. A similar method calls for wire instead of boards, with targets pinned to both upper and lower wires. This method does not work well in windy conditions but is an alternative that costs little. The disadvantage of a single firing line is the lack of flexibility for events using different distances. One solution has been the construction of permanent targets at all firing distances used, but with hinges allowing the target frames to be lowered out of the view of shooters while events at other distances are in progress. Dimensions for each target frame are based on the firing distances. For example, target frames for 50 yards need not be as large as those used at 100 yards. Target frame height will vary and must be built so that bullet trajectories end in the backstop. This calls for targets to be mounted on frames with the center of the target placed 6 feet above the ground at 25 yards, 5.5 feet above the ground at 50 yards and 5 feet above the ground at 100 yards. Exact heights at each distance must be determined for each range facility because of ground slope, length and firing positions, such as prone, standing or sitting. In addition, target heights for 100 yards would differ from those needed for a 200 yard range as will those for a 50 yard or 50 foot range. Where ground contours vary, frames must be constructed II-5-11 accordingly. In areas where impact areas are restricted, care must be taken to ensure that all bullets are contained within the restricted area. Target frames should be evenly spaced with the firing points. 3.01.3.3 Target Attachment 3.01.3.3.1 Targets should be attached to the frame in a way that provides ease of change, stability and reduced maintenance costs. Several methods can be used. One used at a number of ranges involves individual, portable, wooden frames that can be moved from one distance to another as the specific match or shooter dictates. This placement allows the shooter to remain on one firing point until he completes several matches or finishes his shooting activities for the day. In addition, this method is advantageous to ranges of limited firing line space in that it provides for maximum use of all points. 3.01.3.3.2 Targets come in all sizes, shapes and designs. They range from the standard round bullseye targets to those shaped like animals, bold letter Xs, bottles and other designs. They may be printed on paper or constructed from steel in the form of silhouettes. Then there are the fun targets -- more targets which provide many dimensions and forms. The only rule of making target frames for this wide variety of targets is to be flexible in whatever is selected. 3.01.3.4 Backstop 3.01.3.4.1 Properly constructed backstops are designed and used as a primary impact area, but are not designed specifically to catch ricochets or high shots. A fully baffled range, using overhead, ground and side baffles may be required to restrict bullets to a specified area. A backstop of sufficient dimensions is one of the more important features of a quality range. It can also be an expensive feature in the event natural features such as a hill or a significant rise in elevation do not exist. For those constructing ranges, especially in areas where a significant amount of uninhabited land exists in the down range area, a backstop or berm may not be needed. There are advantages to having a backstop, even in areas where one is not needed. One such advantage is the opportunity to recover bullets. This provides additional revenues in the sale of reclaimed lead, and may justify the construction of a steel backstop to provide a more efficient means of lead recovery. Where a backstop is necessary, design it utilizing existing topography to your advantage. In flat, open country, backstop height of 20 feet is recommended, but remember, height is not a determining factor for safety. Build it with as steep a face as practical considering the local soil characteristics. The utilization of Geocell materials can aid with the construction of the backstop. (Refer to Section IV Range Products and Services). Sand, for instance, will require some form of cribbing (Use of sandbags) or by other means that do not increase ricochet potential the newer Geocell products will allow steeper angles. Equipment used to construct the berm will also have a bearing on how steep the slope can be. 3.01.4 Administrative Facilities 3.01.4.1 Communications 3.01.4.1.1 Public Address Systems 3.01.4.1.1.1 Public address systems provide communications along the firing line. They are necessary to maintain safety and provide communications to all shooters, especially during firing when sound levels may exceed the capacity of an unaided human voice. Clear distinct instructions must be transmitted between control tower operators, range officers and shooters. For small II-5-12 ranges, specialized communications equipment may not be necessary. However, for large ranges where voice commands are not audible all along the firing line, a public address system is necessary. 3.01.5 Other Considerations 3.01.5.1 Grade (Surface areas) 3.01.5.1.1 The range surface area should be relatively level, although a gently sloping area either uphill or downhill presents few problems. In fact, some gradient is beneficial from a drainage standpoint and is an aid to safety if the slope is toward the targets. Gradients, depending on range layout, may result in less earth work needed in building a backstop, but may also contribute to a ricochet problem. The range floor, and especially the area where targets will be positioned, should be graded to reduce ricochet problems. Where further steps are necessary, specially designed barriers can be installed. Ideally surface grade on the range facility should not exceed plus or minus 2 percent, but, where grading operations call for extraordinary earth moving operations, significant variations in grade between the level of the targets and the firing position can be compensated by building up the firing or target line areas. Slope on the range surface should be both toward the targets and to each side. 3.01.5.2 Drainage 3.01.5.2.1 When designing the ground contour for a muzzleloading range, the firing line, the loading area and other well-traveled areas should be elevated and contoured to allow for drainage. 3.01.5.3 Side Berms 3.01.5.3.1 Side berms are used as a physical barrier along the sides of a range and may be needed to aid in protecting adjacent areas. They restrict the side angles by which bullets could leave the range and, according to specific design, may reduce sound transmissions. Side berms are built similar to backstops. There are alternatives which may serve in place of earthworks: cast-in-place or tip-up concrete walls; concrete block; wood-metal laminate; railroad tie cribs; other composite structures. Designs correspond to each particular shooting activity. Side walls are used to contain occasional errant bullets but are not designed to contain constant repeated hits. Tests to determine bullet retention are based on a single impact. Such specifications allow for less cost, yet maintain effectiveness. Suggested height for earthen side berms is 8 feet from ground level. They are used to protect areas adjacent to the range. Planning and design staff must consider all external factors concerning safety and sound when considering the installation of side berms. The utilization of Geocell materials can aid with the construction of the sideberm allowing construction of vertical walls saving needed space between ranges. (Refer to Section IV Range Products and Services (Geocells)). 3.01.5.4 Baffles 3.01.5.4.1 In addition to backstops and side barriers, both overhead and ground baffles are designed to prevent bullets from leaving a specified area of the range. Baffles or partitions alongside a firing point may also be used to protect adjacent shooters from muzzle blast and high levels of sound, II-5-13 but can, if designed incorrectly, increase sound levels. Baffles are used to reduce the area needed for a range. Baffles for muzzleloading ranges require use of materials sufficient to stop all types of bullets authorized on a muzzleloading range. Penetration tests must be made on materials to be used. 3.01.5.4.2 Baffles may be constructed in several configurations, as shown on drawings (A11, A12, and A14). None are inexpensive, but for each particular application costs will vary. For example, at one location the range may require several baffles while on others only one may be needed. Overhead and ground baffles must extend the entire width of the range and connect either to side berms or walls. The lower edge of the overhead baffles should be located 6.5 to 7.0 feet above the horizontal surface of the range to accommodate the standing position, and spaced according to the requirements as determined for a particular site. To determine placement for a specific site, the entire site must be evaluated. Drawing (A11) illustrates baffles required in a geographic area where at least 1,000 yards of uninhabited land exists down range. Drawing (A11) illustrates baffle placement when all bullets must be contained to the range proper. 3.01.5.5 Trash receptacles 3.01.5.5.1 Maintaining a shooting facility includes the collection and disposal of trash. Trash containers should be placed in appropriate areas around the shooting complex, with special receptacles attached to each end of the loading tables. Readily accessible trash receptacles are great labor savers for those who are responsible for range maintenance. 3.02 RANGE DIMENSIONS 3.02.1 Firing Line Area 3.02.1.1 Width 3.02.1.1.1 The firing line width is determined by the number of points required for a particular facility, with each point a minimum of 7 feet wide. For a 10-point range the firing line length would be 70 feet. 3.02.1.2 Depth 3.02.1.2.1 The depth of the firing line should provide a minimum of 5 feet for each shooter and 10 feet for the loading area. This allows sufficient space between the firing line and the loading area to reduce the risk of sparks. 3.02.1.3 Firing Points 3.02.1.3.1 Firing points for the muzzleloading range are somewhat different than those used on other ranges. Safety with muzzleloading firearms, due to the burning characteristics of the powder, percussion caps and flintlocks with flash pans, involves more factors than with modern firearms. Firing point dimensions must include sufficient space to move about with firearms much longer than modern ones, loading areas to prevent the inadvertent ignition of a can of powder and room to allow other shooters space to stand clear as flintlocks are fired. Firing points should be a minimum of 7 feet wide and 5 feet deep (Back to front). There should be a minimum of 7 feet from center-to- center of firing points, even though sometimes less is acceptable on an all offhand position firing line. Where shooting benches are used or the cross-stick position is II-5-14 employed, additional space may be required. This is especially true when a bench is built for both left and right-handed shooters, and both are allowed to fire from it at the same time. 3.02.1.4 Numbering Scheme 3.02.1.4.1 Each firing position should be clearly marked with stakes or a number located at the front left corner or center of each firing position and in an ascending order from left to right. Numbers used on stencils should be a minimum 2 inches high and painted on stakes or concrete firing line areas in contrasting colors. Where firing line covers are used, number boards may be installed directly above the firing line. 3.02.1.5 Administrative Space 3.02.1.5.1 Support Areas 3.02.1.5.1.1 An area (Preferably 10 feet by 20 feet room area) should be provided as a staging area in which shooters will sign up and be squadded (Assigned a target). This is important for both the informal training range and tournament operations. 3.02.2 Target Line Area 3.02.2.1 Number Boards 3.02.2.1.1 Target number boards should be a minimum of 1 foot square for 50 yard/meter targets with 10-11 inch numerals painted thereon in contrasting and alternating colors, such as black on white, white on black. 3.02.2.2 Target Assembly 3.02.2.2.1 Target backers may be cut from corrugated cardboard in sections 4 feet by 4 feet square or as target frame dimensions dictate. Targets may be either glued or stapled to the face. Cardboard need not be treated with wax to withstand weather. The use of regular cardboard works well and in wet weather can be replaced with spares as deterioration occurs. In areas where heavy rains occur, deterioration occurs quite rapidly. Tying materials should be available to secure the backers to frames during high wind conditions. 3.02.2.3 Targets 3.02.2.3.1 Targets can be attached to backing materials affixed to the target frames with the center of the target a minimum of 60 inches above the ground. Muzzleloading targets, as standardized by the National Muzzleloading Rifle Association (NMLRA), includes a 6-bull target generally shot offhand at 25 yards and from a bench rest at 50 yards. The 100 yard target is shot offhand at 50 yards and from the bench at 100 yards. Buffalo targets, both the single and double bullseyes, are superimposed on the design of a bull buffalo. The double bull target is most popular and is shot from the cross-sticks position at both 50 and 100 yards. Two bullseyes exist on each target permitting the shooter two shots at one target and three shots at the remaining target. This was made necessary as firearm and shooter proficiency improved to the point that all five shots were going through one ragged hole, sometimes making it impossible to determine if five shots were actually fired. More recently, a 5-bullseye target has been designed to permit only one shot per bullseye. An NMLRA rule is "if the individual shot holes are not visible, those shots which cannot be seen will not be scored". The standard 6-bullseye muzzleloading target will require a II-5-15 backing board 24 inches by 24 inches, while the standard 100 yard target, with accompanying practice target, requires a backing board 24 inches by 32 inches. Therefore, it is wise to build the target frame to hold the larger targets or about 32-to-34 inches wide. The backing boards may be tacked to the target frame and changed periodically or clips can be supplied to hold the backing board. 3.02.3 Walls 3.02.3.1 Walls used in place of side berms or used to separate the range into sections should be 4 inches thick and 8 feet high. Special care should be taken during the design phase to determine materials for these walls. See Materials section. 3.03 MATERIALS 3.03.1 Firing line to Target line 3.03.1.1 Soil characteristics are important to consider. Materials selected for the range surface area are not of as much concern as are the characteristics of the soil found on the site. Soil characteristics to consider are: (1) Suitability for both shallow and deep foundations (2) Drainage requirements (3) Compressibility (4) Earth (hydraulic) pressures on retaining walls (5) Stability of unsupported slopes (6) Field procedures for compacting each soil type (7) Availability for berms, backstops and elevated firing or target lines (8) Load or weight bearing ability (9) Natural angle of repose 3.03.2 Firing Line Surface Area 3.03.2.1 The firing line surface area may vary from natural turf to a concrete slab finished smooth. Materials for the firing line area on muzzleloading ranges are not limited because the standing position is generally the only one used. Concrete and natural turf are the best choices. II-5-16 ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.01.1 For muzzleloading ranges, the equipment necessary for smooth operations is limited to devices which, when damaged, are simply replaced. Equipment operation is generally restricted to the hanging of targets. 4.02 Maintenance 4.02.1 Safety on ranges is not restricted to the act of shooting. Equipment maintenance is designed to prevent injuries caused by malfunctioning equipment, protruding staples, nails or splinters. Safety must be a part of each activity, whether target handling, mowing the grass, using staple guns or any other. National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section II Chapter 6 OUTDOOR SMALLBORE RIFLE Range Services © 2012 II-6-2 II-6-3 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. INTRODUCTION 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Chapter Organization 1.03 Cross Reference ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.02 Safety Rules for Smallbore Rifle ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Design Information ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.02 Maintenance (c) 2012, The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). II-6-4 II-6-5 ARTICLE 1. INTRODUCTION 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 This chapter deals with smallbore rifle (.22 caliber rimfire) activities as they relate to ranges for bullseye or paper targets competition, firearms training, and informal shooting (plinking). 1.02 Chapter Organization 1.02.1 This chapter is organized into four sections: (1) Introduction; (2) Safety; (3) Technical specifications; and (4) Equipment operations and maintenance. Cross references are given to aid the user in finding related information throughout the remainder of the source book. 1.03 Cross Reference 1.03.1 Range Source Book References a. General Range Information, Section I, Chapter 1 b. Outdoor Range Design Criteria, Section II, Chapter 2 c. Safety Plan, Section I, Chapter 2 d. Planning and Design, Section I, Chapter 3 1.03.2 Program/Competition Rules 1.03.3 NRA Rule Books (available online at http://www.nrahq.org/compete/nra-rule-books.asp) a. NRA Smallbore Rifle Rulebook b. NRA Basic Marksmanship Training Programs c. NRA League Handbook II-6-6 ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.01.1 Safety is more than a set of rules. Gun owners must accept the responsibility for self-education and for teaching other shooters about safety. The following rules, used with the Safety Plan and the general Outdoor Range Rules, form the smallbore rifle range safety plan for the specific range. 2.02 Safety Rules for Smallbore Rifle a. The only ammunition allowed for smallbore is .22 caliber rimfire, designated short, long, or long rifle. (.22 caliber rimfire magnum and .22 caliber centerfire ammunition are prohibited.) b. The only authorized targets for the smallbore range are paper targets positioned on a target frame or holder. The frame or holder is specifically designed for such use. Any other target must be approved before its use. (Silhouette shooting information is included in Section II, Chapter 10.) 2.02.1 Smallbore Plinking Ranges a. Targets for plinking should be designed to reduce the need for down range movement. Examples are permanently mounted, metal swinging or spinning targets, gongs, etc.. Cans and bottles are prohibited. b. Metal targets which erode or become pockmarked, cratered, chipped or bent must be replaced or repaired promptly. c. Shooting at targets thrown into the air is prohibited. d. Plinking on target ranges is permitted only in accordance with established range policies. II-6-7 ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Design Information 3.01.1 Smallbore rifles can be fired on most outdoor ranges, including highpower, muzzleloading, pistol or silhouette ranges. The range may be either permanent or temporary. Most smallbore rifle ranges are set up as part of a multipurpose facility, except where usage or safety factors require exclusive use. The smallbore range is fairly simple in design, since only one firing line is needed and target frames can be identical for all distances if 50 to 100 yards. 3.01.2 Firing Line to Target Line 3.01.2.1 Firing lines must be parallel to the target line and marked for easy identification, so as to warn against any movement forward of the line during firing. The firing line must be marked by stakes at the front left corner of each firing point. After the stakes have been installed and marked with a numbering system, highly visible (red or blaze orange) plastic ribbon may be strung the full length of the line and attached to each stake. On permanent ranges the firing line can be marked with a 3 inch wide stripe painted a bright, noticeable color along the entire firing line, with firing point number markers located at the left front corner of each firing point. The firing line is measured at the point closest to the shooter. Users must be taught the proper use of a firing line, which not only establishes the distance to the target, but also maintains a positive safety control during firing. Shooters must maintain position uniformly behind the firing line. 3.01.2.2 Distance 3.01.2.2.1 Distances prescribed for smallbore ranges are set according to official competition rules. Standard events are measured in yards, international events in meters. Official distances for all events must be strictly observed. NRA Official Rulebooks may be ordered through the NRA Sales Department at (800) 336-7402. 3.01.2.2.2 The firing distances can range from 50 to 200 yards, depending on the activities planned for the range. Outdoor training ranges are usually only 50 yards, and a full competition range will extend to 100 yards with target holders placed at intervening distances to accommodate the various types of shooting to be done. 3.01.2.3 Direct Fire Zone 3.01.2.3.1 The direct fire zone is defined as that area into which all shots are fired during a normal course of fire. The direct fire zone includes all directions and angles of fire used on a range while shooting at a specific target corresponding to a specific firing point. 3.01.3 Firing Line Area 3.01.3.1 Length 3.01.3.1.1 The firing line length is determined by how many targets and firing points are planned for the range. 3.01.3.2 Depth II-6-8 3.01.3.2.1 The depth of the firing line, from the front to back, should be sufficient to allow unimpeded use by shooters, range officials and coaches or instructors. 3.01.3.3 Firing Points 3.01.3.3.1 Firing points are the part of a range provided exclusively for the shooter immediately behind the firing line, from which firing takes place. Firing points give the amount of space needed by a shooter to shoot safely in any of the four positions allowed. Crowded firing points can significantly increase risk factors, especially when the range is used for training. The rule for establishing the size of firing points is to allow sufficient room for each shooter to move freely and not interfere or be interfered with by other shooters or line personnel. 3.01.3.3.2 Acceptable materials for a firing line surface range from natural turf to a monolithic concrete slab finished smooth. The variety of materials used for the firing line area on smallbore rifle ranges is limited only by the shooting positions used. For prone, the surface area should be comfortable for the shooter. Gravel or crushed stone would not be suitable. Concrete or natural turf are preferred. 3.01.3.4 Space (Administrative) 3.01.3.4.1 Clearance 3.01.3.4.1.1 Clear space behind the firing position is needed for line personnel and other shooters preparing to move to the firing line. The amount of space needed may vary to a small degree, depending on the purposes for which the range will be used. Sacrificing space will generally prove disruptive to both shooters and range personnel, especially to line officers who need a clear view of the entire line for control and safety. 3.01.3.4.2 Support Areas 3.01.3.4.2.1 Support areas such as a classroom or statistical area, are important for the informal, training or competition range. In addition, food preparation areas are often nice to have, especially in remote areas. When there is an emphasis on training, include a classroom. Statistical (Target scoring) area and storage areas for targets and equipment are important for all ranges. The statistical area for smallbore rifle must be considerably larger than for other shooting activities because targets are scored there rather than on the range. The area should be equipped with several large tables so that targets can be laid out properly for scoring. Fluorescent magnifier lamps on each table aid scorers. 3.01.3.4.2.2 An area (Preferably a room) about 10 feet by 20 feet should be provided as a staging area in which shooters will sign up and be squaded (Assigned a target). This area is important for both the informal training range and tournament operations. 3.01.3.4.2.3 A shelter for the storage of targets and target frames should be provided to protect them from weather damage. Having appropriate targets and frames available will encourage the users to use them and reduce the incidence of shooting at unauthorized targets. 3.01.3.4.3 Spectator Areas 3.01.3.4.3.1 Spectator areas should be cordoned off and separated from the firing line area to reduce interference with the shooters and range operations. Spectators should be close enough to see II-6-9 what is going on, but not so close that loud talking can be distracting to the shooters. This is important for safety reasons. For example, shooters distracted by loud voices may miss an important command or instruction. 3.01.3.4.4 Firing Line Cover 3.01.3.4.4.1 The firing points of outdoor smallbore ranges may be covered and enclosed on three sides, open toward the targets. There must be ample room for range officers and spectators to move freely to the rear of the shooter. This does not preclude the construction of ranges within areas surrounded or partially surrounded by safety walls. Smallbore rifle ranges generally have a single firing line, and where international events are conducted, firing line covers are required. On some smallbore ranges the firing line cover is constructed with movable walls installed to protect the international shooters from wind, rain or sun. The cover may also be used during winter months to provide for all-weather shooting and removed during warm weather. Firing line covers may be nothing more than a roof structure, or they may be a complete building with dividers between each firing point and enclosed for heating during the cold months. Artificial lighting may be needed for firing line covers; however, when electricity is not available, install sky lights or translucent clear panels in the roof. 3.01.3.4.4.2 When built, enclosures should have a minimum ceiling height of 7 feet, extending the entire length of the firing line with the roof overhang a minimum of 2 feet forward of the firing line and 6 feet behind the back edge of the firing position. A typical smallbore range firing line cover having 20 firing points would measure 110 feet in length and 12 feet front to back as shown from an aerial view. 3.01.4 Target Line Area 3.01.4.1 Frames 3.01.4.1.1 Target frames for all smallbore rifle range operations (from 50 feet to 100 meters) height must be adjusted so that shots that pass through the target strike the backstop. 3.01.4.2 Number Boards 3.01.4.2.1 Fasten numbers to the target frames corresponding to firing points: (1) large enough to be seen easily, under normal shooting conditions; (2) of alternating and contrasting colors; and (3) must be clearly visible throughout an event, whether the targets are exposed or concealed. 3.01.4.3 Target Assembly 3.01.4.3.1 Target assembly for the smallbore rifle range is simply the attachment of the specified target to the frame by clips or staples. Special backing material is seldom used on the frames. Training range operators may find that gluing the targets to corrugated cardboard makes them easier to handle in windy conditions. 3.01.4.4 Targets 3.01.4.4.1 Official targets should be attached to the frames at the height the shooting position requires. (Example: offhand or prone at the 50 foot distance.) At greater distances the target is mounted at the height that allows bullets passing through to strike the backstop. Targets may be attached to the target frame by clips or staples to accommodate ease of removal for scoring. Official targets II-6-10 are listed in the NRA International and Smallbore Rifle rulebooks and are available from NRA licensed target manufacturers. 3.01.4.5 Backstop 3.01.4.5.1 Minimum backstop heights are determined by the requirements at each site and are measured from the range floor. Some ranges have existed for years without a backstop of any kind; however, remember the down range area in these instances must be uninhabited and inaccessible. In areas where the safety area has been encroached upon, backstops, side berms and baffles may be needed to contain the bullets fired on the general range area. Should the selected site face future encroachment, incorporate these fixtures during the initial design process. The utilization of Geocell materials can aid with the construction of the backstop. (Refer to Section IV Range Products and Services). 3.01.4.5.2 Side Berms 3.01.4.5.2.1 Side berms are necessary where adjacent areas need to be protected and where there is not sufficient unoccupied land to accommodate projectile containment. Side berms can be constructed similar to a backstop, but may be omitted in favor of walls, side baffles or other artificial barriers that require less space. The recommended height for side berms is 8 feet high. The utilization of Geocell materials can aid with the construction of the sideberm allowing construction of vertical walls saving needed space between ranges. (Refer to Section IV Range Products and Services). 3.01.4.5.3 Baffles 3.01.4.5.3.1 Overhead and ground baffles may be required on ranges to ensure projectile containment or where sound problems exist. Because of the limited ammunition and distances used on smallbore rifle ranges, baffle designs need not incorporate extraordinary measures to stop high velocity bullets. 3.01.4.5.3.2 Baffles may be built in several designs as shown in drawings A-11, A -12, and A-14 in the Appendix, but the least costly would be the vertical baffle 4 feet high, extending the entire width of the range. The lower edge of the baffle should be located 6 feet to 7 feet above ground to accommodate the standing position and spaced according to drawing A-10. 3.01.4.5.4 Walls 3.01.4.5.4.1 Walls used instead of side berms should be designed to stop .22 caliber rimfire ammunition. (See wall sections, drawing numbers A-17 in the Appendix.) 3.01.4.6 Return Target Carrier Mechanisms 3.01.4.6.1 Return target mechanisms, which are commercially available, can be used on shorter smallbore rifle ranges and are beneficial in reducing the time it takes to conduct training or competitive events. 3.01.5 Projectile Containment II-6-11 3.01.5.1 Since smallbore ranges generally do not exceed 100 yards (But can go to 200 yards), projectile containment may be aided by constructing a firing line cover with the forward roof portion designed to stop bullets. Special fold up or down devices may be used for the prone position. This requires the use of 16-gauge sheet steel surface covered with soft wood nominally 2 inches thick. The off or roof side is covered with 5/8 inch plywood and standard roofing material. This forward roof portion extends 10 feet to 12 feet forward and down in front of the shooter to a point that the maximum possible muzzle elevation will not allow a bullet to follow a direct path over the backstop. 3.01.6 Administrative Facilities 3.01.6.1 Communications 3.01.6.1.1 Control towers can be considered a part of range communications and are located at the centerpoint of the firing line and offset to prevent any interference with shooters. For small ranges, towers or control booths may not be necessary and are left up to the discretion of the organization. Control towers should be built high enough for observation of all firing points. They will vary in height according to range width. For better control, smallbore ranges should not exceed 100 firing points or 500 feet in length. This will enhance safety and will also allow the range tower talker to determine quickly if proper procedures are being followed and where a line officer may be needed. Caution: Where firing line covers are used, install them so that they do not obstruct the view from the tower. 3.01.6.1.2 Communications on ranges are a must. A good loudspeaker system will satisfy most demands. 3.01.6.1.3 Radios 3.01.6.1.3.1 Two-way radios may be used for routine communications, but to transmit information other than general operating procedures, use a phone system. Radios should supplement other forms of communications, not take the place of them. 3.01.7 Other Considerations 3.01.7.1 Grade (Surface areas) 3.01.7.1.1 Surface grade on the facility should be relatively level between the firing line and target lines. With limited space needed for a smallbore rifle range, grading operations should not be a major expense. Some slope is necessary to provide drainage, especially where soil may be water laden and evaporation is slow. 3.01.7.2 Wind Flags 3.01.7.2.1 Competitors can have individual flags at their firing points. In International shooting, only wind flags provided by the sponsor are allowed. Wind flags do not eliminate the requirements for range safety flags. They may be made from cotton bunting or other material light enough in weight to respond to noticeable wind movement. II-6-12 ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.01.1 Where equipment is restricted to smallbore rifle activity using either the electrically controlled target mechanisms or the standard target frame, a training manual should be written. This manual should explain how the equipment works and provide drawings of the equipment along with procedures that serve to keep the equipment in operating condition. Include target frame repair, construction and replacement and describe how each user is responsible for this aspect of the operation. 4.02 Maintenance 4.02.1 Maintenance on range equipment and fixtures should be the responsibility of each user. Provide maintenance checklists in the range buildings so that anyone who wants to help with maintenance will have a guide. Arrange for those who know how to use the equipment to teach others. Cross reference other sections within the range source book to find manufacturer's suggested maintenance tips that come with the pieces of equipment. Range Services © 2012 National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section II Chapter 7 OUTDOOR HIGHPOWER RIFLE I-7-2 I-7-3 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. INTRODUCTION 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.03 Chapter Organization 1.04 Cross Reference ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.02 Safety Rules ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.02 Range Dimensions 3.03 Materials ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.02 Maintenance ARTICLE 5. APPENDIX 5.01 Exterior Ballistics Table 8 2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). II-7-4 II-7-5 ARTICLE 1. INTRODUCTION 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 The phrase "high power rifle range" often defines ranges on which a variety of centerfire rifle ammunition is used. For the purposes of this chapter, this definition includes training, competition, hunter sighting in, benchrest and blackpowder activities, even though muzzleloading is the subject of another chapter. To the range builder, the stated purpose is to plan, design and construct a range that fits the needs of the user while at the same time protects the surrounding environment. This chapter also defines the use, design and specific requirements for constructing of high power rifle ranges. Range types will be divided into two categories: (1) without target pits and (2) with target pits. 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.02.1 The primary reason for the founding of the National Rifle Association was the concern of the founders about the lack of marksmanship skills by Union soldiers during the Civil War. The founders of the NRA established marksmanship programs to train civilians before their enlistment in the Armed Forces and to improve the marksmanship skills of citizen soldiers in state National Guard units. The NRA's first range was the famous Creedmoor Range on Long Island. It was a high power rifle range extending to 1,000 yards. Since these early beginnings, other shooting programs have been developed and new organizations (Sanctioning bodies) have been organized. The 300 meter rifle events, governed by the ISSF, were part of the Olympic program from 1876 to 1972 and are still World Championship events. Benchrest shooting in its infancy was designed for firearms testing and as a means of developing accurate ammunition. This objective has not changed significantly over the years, except that those activities have evolved into the more advanced sport of competitive benchrest shooting. Once restricted to 100 yards or so, benchrest shooting now involves shooting distances of 100, 200, 300 and even 1,000 yards. Another example is the NRA's high power sporting rifle program, designed primarily to attract the occasional shooter or hunter to improve overall shooting skills. 1.03 Chapter Organization 1.03.1 Organized into five sections, this chapter includes: (1) Introduction; (2) Safety; (3) Technical specifications; (4) Equipment operations and maintenance; and (5) an Appendix. 1.04 Cross Reference 1.04.1 a. General Outdoor Range Information, Section I, Chapter 1 b. Safety Plan, Section I, Chapter 2 c. Planning and Design, Section I, Chapter 3 1.04.1.1 Related Ranges with common range components a. Outdoor Smallbore Rifle, Section II, Chapter 6 b. Outdoor Moving Target, Section II, Chapter 15 c. Outdoor Silhouette, Section II, Chapter 10 d. Outdoor Muzzleloading, Section II, Chapter 5 II-7-6 1.04.2.1.1 NRA Rule Books (Available online at http://www.nrahq.org/compete/nra-rule-books.asp ) a. NRA High Power Rifle Rule Book b. NRA High Power Sporting Rifle Rule Book ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.01.1 A safety consideration for high power rifle ranges is based on the maximum range of ammunition authorized for use on the facility. This dimension provides a guideline for selecting the site and will serve to identify any restriction needed to reduce the size of the impact area. Should barriers be installed to limit bullets to a specific area, each user must be made aware of these limitations and the reasons for them. 2.02 Safety Rules 2.02.1 The uses of outdoor ranges often differ to such an extent that rules for one type of shooting may not necessarily fit another. For each different application, specific rules must apply. The following list is a basic guide and should be modified to conform to actual range use: 2.02.2 Rules for All High power Ranges (1) Range commands and controls must be obeyed immediately. (2) No one is allowed forward of the firing line, unless a cease-fire has been called or the range is clear. A special sign, flag or flashing light should be installed to indicate personnel are in the pits. (3) Use of any unauthorized target material, like cans or bottles, is prohibited. (4) Eye and ear protection are strongly recommended. (5) Shooting a rifle from an unstable position, like shooting from the hip, is prohibited. (6) When loading, keep the rifle pointed in a safe direction. (7) Loaded rifles must remain pointed down range until such time as they have been unloaded, and then the muzzle should always be pointed in a safe direction. (8) During a general cease-fire and at the conclusion of any shooting, all rifles are to be unloaded, actions opened and grounded or cased. (9) Rifles are to be loaded and fired single shot, except when firing or practicing for competitive events requiring multiple shot strings. 2.02.3 Rules for High power (Centerfire) Rifle (1) Tracer or any ammunition considered to be incendiary or explosive is strictly prohibited. (2) The use of ammunition having black or carbon steel cartridge cases is prohibited. Exception: When such ammunition is of recent manufacture, such as European manufactured sporting ammunition. 2.02.4 No set of safety rules is comprehensive, safety is not guaranteed by compliance with this source book, and that individual range organizers should take affirmative steps to ensure safety -- even if that mean taking action not necessarily outlined in this source book. II-7-7 ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.01.1 Firing Line to Target Line 3.01.1.1 For high power rifle bullseye or benchrest target shooting, the firing point is set up one per target. The firing line and target line are parallel and the direction of fire is perpendicular to both. The centerline of the firing point should be on-line with the centerpoint of the target. The spacing of the firing points and the targets (Center to center) are usually the same and are generally determined by the width of the target. Where target width dimensions are smaller than those needed for a firing point, the width of the firing point governs spacing of targets. 3.01.2 Distance between Targets and Firing Line 3.01.2.1 The distance between the firing line and the target line is determined by the course of fire to be conducted on a particular range. Distances vary from 100 to 1,000 yards. The distance as measured from the firing line to the face of the targets should be as exact as possible. Firing distances must be within plus or minus 1 percent of the specified distance, such as plus or minus 6 feet for 200 yard range. Refer to NRA Highpower Rulebook for NRA Sanctioned Shooting Events (http://www.nrahq.org/compete/RuleBooks/HPR/hpr-book.pdf). For international 300 meter events, a tolerance of plus or minus 1 meter is allowed. No specific tolerances are mentioned in the International Benchrest Shooters (IBS) or the National Benchrest Shooters Association (NBRSA) rule books. The assumption must be made that benchrest range distances must be as exact as possible. 3.01.3 Direct Fire Zone 3.01.3.1 The direct fire zone is defined as that area into which all shots are fired during a normal course of fire. The direct fire zone includes all directions and angles of fire used on a range while shooting at a specific target corresponding to a specific firing point. 3.01.4 Firing Line Area 3.01.4.1 Firing Line Width 3.01.4.1.1 The width of the firing line is generally determined by the combined widths of the firing points, but there are exceptions. There is no hard and fast requirement for firing lines and target lines to have exactly the same dimensions. 3.01.4.2 Depth 3.01.4.2.1 The firing line depth as measured from front to back of the firing point must be sufficient to accommodate the shooter, his equipment and, if appropriate, a coach, scorer or instructor. The depth of the firing line area may be established by combining the maximum required depth of a firing point with additional space for administrative support, such as staging areas for team activities. Another factor in firing point depth is whether the firing line area is substantially elevated above the range floor. When the firing line is elevated, sufficient amount of level areas must be provided for ease of movement to and from each firing point. II-7-8 3.01.4.2.2 The firing points should have enough depth behind the firing line to allow for the specific shooting positions used on each type facility. The point should also be large enough to accommodate benches if it is used for benchrest shooting. In addition, the firing points should be elevated 2 feet to 3 feet above the natural contour to provide better target visibility, especially in areas where heavy mirage exists and to allow for drainage. 3.01.4.3 Firing Points 3.01.4.3.1 All firing points should be clearly marked at the front left corner to maintain uniform separation between shooters, and in an ascending order from left to right. 3.01.4.4 Open Space 3.01.4.4.1 All ranges should provide a clear area behind the shooter to allow for unimpeded movement of range officers, other shooters and coaches. For international events (300 meter rifle), There must be sufficient space behind the firing points for the range officials and the Jury to perform their duties. 3.01.4.4.2 Space for support activities should also be provided behind the firing line. These may include gun racks, control towers, equipment vehicles, equipment tables and seating arrangements for the next relay. These facilities are optional. 3.01.4.4.3 Spectator areas or seating should also be arranged so as not to interfere with normal range operations. This is usually accomplished by adding a 10 yard-to-15 yard buffer area behind the ready line area and set off behind a temporary fence (Rope or ribbon). The size and shape of this area will vary according to the event or amount of activity. 3.01.4.4.4 A firing line enclosure or cover is usually an optional feature on high power ranges, with most ranges having none. An enclosure that keeps shooters shielded from prevailing winds is not permitted in NRA high power rules, although a firing line cover is. On most high power ranges, such a cover is not practical, except at the longest distance. Firing line covers are, in general, nothing more than a roof structure supported on posts and designed to protect shooters from inclement weather. They need not be elaborate. For international 300 meter events, enclosures, even temporary, are required. The area used by shooters on rifle and pistol ranges must be protected from sun, wind and rain. This protection must be such that no obvious advantage is given to any firing point or part of the range. 300 m ranges should have at least 290 m open to the sky. 3.01.5 Target Line Area 3.01.5.1 Pits 3.01.5.1.1 Target pits are generally necessary on ranges 200 yards and longer, allowing targets to be pulled and scored, thus reducing range time. Pit walls and foundations are generally constructed using concrete, masonry, wood or other materials, with concrete preferred. They may be either above or below existing or proposed grade. Pit areas are designed specifically for target carriers that allow the target to be exposed for live fire, retracted and scored, and to protect the target puller. Designers must consider the bullet trajectory from the longest distance. Special shields may be installed to provide additional safety. Construction includes excavating, grading and compaction of soils, installation of retaining wall and target carrier foundations, walkways, construction of retaining walls, precast deadman (Concrete anchors), II-7-9 tieback tendons, drainage systems, and the placement and compaction of fill material. (See drawings A -2 and A-3.) 3.01.5.1.2 Target pits, primarily used on high power rifle ranges, are set up so that the face of the target is located the proper distance from the firing line. Target pits are generally constructed below existing grade; however, when soil conditions or water tables will not allow this, they are constructed on the surface of the existing ground. 3.01.5.1.3 Target carriers spacing for high power ranges is determined by the size of the carrier used, and may vary from a minimum of about 8 feet up to a maximum of 12 feet. Spacing target carriers further apart than about 12 feet (Center to center) is likely to make the firing line too wide for good control, introduce other operational problems and use valuable space needlessly. 3.01.5.1.4 Steel carriers must be protected behind the pit walls to prevent a bullet from striking any metal surface on the carrier. To provide this protection, the carrier is positioned no more than 4 feet from the pit wall, and a cantilevered overhang is installed on top of the wall which extends 2 feet toward the carrier at an angle of 95 degrees to the vertical wall. This angle allows water to run off into a drain pipe or ditch. A walkway (Sometimes called a catwalk) may be installed along the pit wall, the surface of which is to be a minimum of 7 feet below the cantilevered overhang, to allow pullers to operate the carriers and score targets more easily. 3.01.5.1.5 Concrete wall construction must conform to existing soil conditions. In areas where soil conditions do not present a significant hydraulic condition, concrete walls may be only 6 inches thick. However, where soils retain a significant amount of moisture and create heavy loading factors on wall areas, thickness will increase, requiring tieback tendons and drainpipe covered with up to 18 inches of wash gravel along the bottom edge of the wall foundation. 3.01.5.1.6 Target pits may be built several ways. On some ranges the retaining walls are built from railroad ties or heavy timbers, while most use concrete. Construction materials depend on: (1) life expectancy of the facility (2) level of use (3) monetary resources (4) soil conditions 3.01.5.1.7 While it is possible to construct a target pit area for temporary or long term use, temporary use requires materials easily removed and hauled away. Permanent facilities require materials such as concrete walls, catwalks, walkways, foundations, leveling pads or cantilever roof projections. Where pits are used for high power rifles, the spacing between the toe of the backstop slope and the target pits should be no less than 150 feet. 3.01.5.1.8 Steel tie-back tendons are used with precast deadmen in areas where hydraulic pressures cannot be significantly reduced. Such tendons are made from American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM) A-36 steel bars, and upon installation, are surface coated to prevent deterioration. 3.01.5.1.9 Target carriers are anchored either to concrete leveling pads or to the foundation by anchor bolts or weld plates cast in the foundation. Such anchor bolts and weld plates are extended into the concrete a minimum of 8 inches. (See drawing A-19) Whatever method is used to bolt target carriers down, remember that design must account for wind. Wind can exert considerable pressure on elevated targets, and the mounting bolts or method used must be able II-7-10 to withstand the force exerted. Anchor bolts and weld plates are to conform to ASTM A-36 requirements. 3.01.5.1.10 Leveling pads (So called for their use in leveling each target carrier along a set grade line) or target carrier foundations are both constructed of concrete having a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,000 pounds per square inch (PSI), a slump of 3-4 inches, air entrainment of 4 percent and be cured in accordance with ASTM or area standards or code. Levels on leveling pads and/or target carrier foundations must be held to plus or minus 1/4 of an inch for the entire length or span. 3.01.5.1.11 Reinforcing bars must conform to ASTM A615-81-SI, grade 60 and welded wire fabric installed in precast wall panels, deadmen, floors, walkways, roof panels and firing line slabs must conform to ASTM A185 and have a minimum yield strength of 65,000 pounds per square inch. 3.01.5.2 Target Carriers 3.01.5.2.1 Retractable target carriers are used to raise targets up out of the pits, and when hit, retract into the pit area for scoring. There are several basic designs for target carriers, all of which are based on one of two primary considerations: ease of operation and cost. The designs contained in this source book incorporate construction specifications that emphasize ease of operation and reduced maintenance. Costs are considered only as a guide, simply because the least expensive designs may be the most expensive to maintain. The designs are: (1) military; (2) sliding pipe; (3) cantilever and (4) as built by American Target Co. (See drawing A-19) 3.01.5.3 Target Frames 3.01.5.3.1 Stationary target frames are generally the rule on ranges with maximum distances of 100 or 200 yards, although many 200 yard ranges incorporate pit operations. The basic concept of target frame construction is to provide a framework on which to paste or staple targets corresponding to each firing point. For formal competition, the target frames should be constructed so that all targets can be aligned at the same height along a single line parallel to the surface of the firing line. Frames should be removable for storage, with one or two remaining in a permanent point for occasional use. 3.01.5.4 Target Number Boards 3.01.5.4.1 Target number boards, with numbers corresponding to each firing point number, are painted with alternating and contrasting colors. This aids the shooter in identifying the target and reduces cross firing. Number boards may be located either above and behind, or below and in front of, the targets. For recessed pits, the number boards should be installed above the targets either on steel cables or mounted on top of the backstop. For surface pits installed behind a protective berm, the number board should be located in front of the berm. Number boards can also be attached to fixed target frames. Number boards may be square, rectangular or triangular, so long as they are clearly visible at the most distant firing line and painted for easy identification with black numbers on a white background or white numbers on a black background. (See Dimensions table, paragraph 3.02.2.4.1.) 3.01.5.5 Target Assembly II-7-11 3.01.5.5.1 Target assembly areas include paste and work tables along with supplies from which to assemble frames, paste targets or make repairs. Paste and work tables for high power competition targets should have the table edges recessed to allow the target frame to fit around and into the recess. This provides an even bearing surface on which the cardboard or cloth backer will be supported during target assembly and pasting operations or when new cardboard or cloth is affixed to the frame. For other high power activities, such as hunter sighting in, informal shooting, etc., and when stationary target frames are used, targets are generally affixed with staple guns. On some, targets may be glued to cardboard backers and affixed to the frames with large paper clips, tacks, and staples or simply hung on stationary hooks. Table tops for target assembly should be smooth, flat and constructed from either marine plywood or plywood treated for exterior use. All dimension lumber should be pressure treated pine. 3.01.5.6 Benchrest Moving Backers 3.01.5.6.1 Moving target backer mechanisms may be made in a shop or purchased commercially. Backer targets can also be designed to move as shots are fired in the course of a benchrest event. 3.01.5.7 Backstop 3.01.5.7.1 A backstop is either a man-made or natural barrier that serves to stop bullets. These may include hillsides or man-made earthen embankments or a combination of both. 3.01.5.7.2 When backstops must be constructed, the requirement is to provide a primary impact area that is capable of stopping all bullets striking its surface. Backstop construction must meet certain specific criteria: be wider than the target area; provide a larger surface area than that required by the targets; provide clean earthen surface material to a minimum depth of 18-24 inches; and be built at a slope that does not generate ricochets. (See drawing A-9) The utilization of Geocell materials can aid with the construction of the backstop. (Refer to Section IV Range Products and Services). 3.01.6 Administrative Facilities 3.01.6.1 Areas for statistical work should be set up away from the range area. Buildings need not be very large, unless activities of major proportion are scheduled. 3.01.7 Other Components 3.01.7.1 Surface Grade 3.01.7.1.1 The ideal terrain is relatively flat to gently sloping with a mountain down range. Ranges in rolling hills and mountainous areas when there are extreme variations in elevation between the target and firing lines, require grading operations to bring the elevations to within a few degrees of being on a common horizontal plane. The terrain between the targets and firing line areas, therefore, does not need to be flat and may vary considerably. 3.01.7.2 Side Berms 3.01.7.2.1 Side berms may be needed for ranges where adjacent areas are in use. The utilization of II-7-12 Geocell materials can aid with the construction of the sideberm allowing construction of vertical walls saving needed space between ranges. (Refer to Section IV Range Products and Services). 3.01.7.3 Baffles (Overhead, Ground and Side) 3.01.7.3.1 Overhead, ground and side baffles are barriers used to keep errant bullets confined to a restricted area of the range property. These devices are often made necessary due to encroachment or the building of residential areas, commercial parks and other land development inside or very near the range. Adding these barriers is often expensive, but properly installed they can reduce acreage requirements. Baffling ranges over 300 meters in length is not practical. 3.01.7.4 Walls 3.01.7.4.1 In place of side berms or earthworks, concrete, wood and crushed rock, washed gravel and masonry walls are often used on shooting facilities to reduce the space needed to protect adjacent ranges or inhabited areas. Such walls serve not only to contain bullets, but may also reduce sound levels, in areas behind them. 3.01.7.4.2 New outdoor ranges should be constructed in such a way that the sun is behind the shooter as such as possible during the competition day. Care must be exercised that there are no shadows on the targets. 3.02 RANGE DIMENSIONS 3.02.1 Firing Line to Target Line 3.02.1.1 Distance Chart Range Distance and Minimum Firing Point Dimensions TYPE DISTANCE(S) WIDTH DEPTH RELATION NRA 100/200/300/500/600 8 Feet 7 Feet 1:1 800/900/1000 yards SIGHTING-IN 100 yds 6 Feet 6 Feet 1:1 300m 300 meters 1.6m 2.5m 1:1 IBS 100/200/300 yds/mtrs 6 Feet 6 Feet 1:1 NBRSA 100/200/300 yds 6 Feet 6 Feet 1:1 NOTE: Abbreviations NRA - NRA Sporting and High power Rifle 300m - ISSF 300 meter Rifle IBS - International Benchrest Shooters II-7-13 NBRSA - National Benchrest Shooters Assn. 3.02.1.2 Firing point areas should be graded and maintained level from side to side and from front to back for the areas specified in this chart. All other areas should incorporate minimal slope for drainage. Note: Firing point width dimensions for 1,000 yard ranges will generally correspond with the target carrier placement (Center to center); however, for those who plan to build a new facility, the minimum width should be 8 feet, with target carrier spacing to correspond. 3.02.1.3 Firing Point Numbering Scheme 3.02.1.3.1 Firing points should be identified by either a temporary or permanent marking system and numbered according to the corresponding target. Install markers at the left front corner of each firing point. Such markers are best made of concrete and recessed to grade level. Concrete test samples, taken from large building or highway construction sites to test compressive strength, are usually discarded after successful testing and may be free for the asking. A posthole digger, a tamping device, a paint roller, a gallon or two of paint, a few stencils and a can of spray paint are usually the only items needed to do a first class job. Another idea, should test samples be unavailable, is to use quart or half gallon cans as molds. Simply fill each can with concrete, engrave numbers, paint and install to grade. The one problem with markers set to grade is the frequent edging required to keep the numbers visible. Another option is movable concrete number markers set above grade. 3.02.1.4 Spectator Areas a. Spectator areas should be located a minimum of 10 yards behind the firing line area. This will allow room for ready lines and range operations. b. Seating arrangements for spectators should be benches or chairs located in shaded areas or under portable canopies. 3.02.1.5 Firing Line Cover a. Informal ranges generally do not use firing line enclosures or covers because of the expense of construction. b. For general range use, a firing line cover protects the shooters from the sun and inclement weather, but are not a necessary part of a high power range. On most ranges extending beyond 200 yards, firing line covers generally are not desirable. The cover should extend 24 inches forward of the firing line, extend a minimum of 10 feet behind the line with the ceiling a minimum of 8 feet high. Some range covers must necessarily be constructed higher to accommodate shooting positions like standing or particularly for Muzzleloading which calls for using a ramrod. c. International ranges require a minimum roof height of 2.2 meters. If the firing point is exposed to excessive wind, additional protection for the shooters must be provided by screens or other means. When it is necessary to install dividing screens on the 300 m firing line, they should be made of transparent material on a light frame. Screens should extend at least 50 cm forward of the firing line, and be approximately 2.0 m high. On new ranges, wind breaks forward of the firing line are not recommended, but steps should be taken to ensure that weather conditions are as equal as possible throughout the range. d. Walkways may or may not be an option on a range. For example, on a benchrest facility, walkways are usually installed behind the shooting benches, but on 1,000 yard rifle ranges, walkways are not installed. On most shooting facilities, walkways are used to support foot traffic to and from the target area and from the firing line to parking lot areas. Walkways may be constructed of crushed stone, asphalt or concrete. Caution: Asphalt II-7-14 should not be used in areas where surface temperatures will exceed the comfort zone for foot traffic. When this problem exists, a rubberized light reflective paint may be added to reduce heat absorption. One word of caution on walkway installation; walkways should be installed alongside the range to reduce the risk associated with inadvertent impact on the hardened surface from high velocity bullets. Walkways used on the range proper should be recessed or even with existing grade to protect against bullet strike or impact on exposed edges. 3.02.2 Target Line Area a. Any target system may be used, provided it guarantees the necessary degree of safety, accurate control of timing, and efficient, accurate and rapid scoring, and changing of the targets. 3.02.2.1 Pits 3.02.2.1.1 For ranges extending 200 yards or more, target pits are necessary to reduce the time needed to go down range for target scoring. Dimensions require a minimum height of 7 feet from the walkway to the protective roof or shield. Surface pits require an earthen embankment to protect the pit wall and either a cantilevered roof or shield to protect against the direct strike of a bullet on the metal surfaces of the target carrier. 3.02.2.1.2 Height of Target Center for 300 meter ranges. The center of the targets must be within the following heights when measured from the level of the floor of the firing point: Standard Height Variation Allowable 3.00 m +/- 4.00 m 3.02.2.2 Carriers 3.02.2.2.1 Target carriers may be made in a shop from steel angle iron and plate conforming to the requirements of ASTM A-36 with the top edge recessed a minimum of 1.0 feet below the retaining or protective wall. On 1,000 yard ranges, where the bullet trajectory could allow a bullet to strike a metal target carrier, additional protection is provided by: (1) building a roof or overhang extending to within 1 foot of the vertical plane of the target frame; (2) recessing the target carrier deeper in the pit; (3) building a higher retaining wall; or a combination of all three. (See drawings A -3 and A-19.) To protect against rust, all metal surfaces are either coated by using a hot galvanized dip process or painted with rust-inhibiting paint. Mechanical devices, pulleys, sprocket wheels, chains, cables, bolts should also conform to acceptable ASTM standards. 3.02.2.2.2 Spacing between target carriers, edge-to-edge must be no less than 1 foot 3 inches nor more than 2 feet. Target frames used with target carriers must be constructed from soft, pressure treated, pine or other soft wood. Dimensions for target frames must conform to the size of a full-face target used for long range (6 feet x 6 feet square), thereby requiring a change in counterbalance weights for short range targets or constructing short range frames to compensate for the weight difference. Target frame wooden uprights are generally constructed to compensate for weight variations, but will vary according to the weather. (See drawing A-19.) II-7-15 3.02.2.3 Stationary Target Frames 3.02.2.3.1 Stationary target frames are generally used on 100 yard ranges and may be used on 200 yard ranges. Various designs have been developed and may be permanently installed or portable. (See drawing A-19.) For benchrest shooting, target frames are installed on permanent uprights set in cement. 3.02.2.4 Number Boards 3.02.2.4.1 Table of Dimensions Range Distance Number Board Size Number size ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 100/200/300 (IBS)* 7 x 7 inches 6" high - 4" wide 100 yards (NRA) 14 x 14 inches 10" high - 6" wide 200 yards 2 x 2 feet 24" high - 12" wide 300 yards 3 x 3 feet 36" high - 15" wide 500-1000 yards 6 x 6 feet 66" high - 32" wide NOTE: See drawing A-29 for number dimension details. * IBS rules require 16 gauge metal, painted with white enamel and black numbers. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3.02.2.5 Target Assembly Tables 3.02.2.5.1 Target assembly tables are generally constructed for high power competition ranges when large target frames are used. These tables are built with smooth tops with recesses around the edges in which the wooden skeleton of the frame is placed. These tables hold the frame in place when target backing materials are being attached (Cardboard) or when full-face targets are being pasted on the cardboard. For a standard 6 foot by 6 foot target, the overall table size is 6 feet 4 inches square and 30 inches high. The height is selected for ease in reaching to the center of the target when applying full-face targets, or repair centers. 3.02.2.6 Backstop 3.02.2.6.1 See Section II, Chapter 2, Paragraph 2.03. 3.02.3 Administrative Facilities 3.02.3.1 For scoring areas for benchrest competitive activities, two items are necessary: a bulletin board 4 feet by 8 feet behind the firing line for posting benchrest targets for inspection and a special room or area set aside for scoring personnel. This area should be well lighted and equipped with tables and chairs. For regular high power ranges, bulletin boards are also used for posting of scores during tournament operation. 3.02.3.2 Communications 3.02.3.2.1 A quality communications system allows distinct instructions to be transmitted between line and pit officers, especially useful at long distances. On conventional and international high power ranges, with pit areas, two types of communications are available: two-way radios and public address systems. Radios are generally restricted to the range officer, block officials and pit officers. Public address systems are used both on the line and in pit areas to provide II-7-16 communications from the line and pit officers to the shooters and target pullers. Whatever system is used, clear communications during peak noise levels, like rapid fire events must be maintained. 3.02.3.2 A control tower (see drawing A-8) for range communications is located at the centerpoint of the firing line and pit area and offset to the rear to prevent any interference with either shooters on the line or target operations in the pit. For relatively small ranges, towers are not necessary. The control tower should be constructed high enough from the ground surface to allow observation of all firing points. Height will vary according to range width. Control towers for multiple firing line ranges must be designed so that they are easily moved to and from each firing line with a minimum of disruption. One effective method is to construct the tower on a small trailer, enclose the sides from the observation deck down and use the enclosed space for storage of line and pit materials, such as targets, pasters, telephones, flags, trash cans, spotters, and other maintenance tools or materials. 3.02.4 Other Considerations 3.02.4.1 Surface Grade 3.02.4.1.1 Surface grade is established using an imaginary line projected from the top of pit wall to the ground at the firing point. This imaginary line should ideally be established as a maximum plus or minus 3 percent grade. 3.02.4.1.2 Surface grading preparation depends upon: (1) existing drainage patterns; (2) proposed drainage plans; and (3) whether the proposed facility is located in a floodplain area as defined under federal statute. Grading operations in floodplain areas are under the jurisdiction of the local Agricultural/Conservation/Cooperative Extension office and approval must be obtained before grading operations begin. In federally managed flood plain areas, any grading operations that significantly change the drainage pattern require a special permit. In mountainous areas when grading operations require extensive alteration, the ideal grade between the firing line and target can be accomplished by elevating the firing lines, the pit area or both depending on the situation. Information on drainage prepared by a soils engineer is critically important to construction activities, especially when foundation work is needed for target carriers, walls, buildings and parking areas. To ignore this requirement may result in the collapse of pit walls, target carrier foundations, and even cause severe damage to masonry or concrete dividing walls. Attention to construction specifications prevents this. 3.02.4.2 Side Berms 3.02.4.2.1 The height of side protection (side berms) is determined by the extent that adjacent areas must be protected and by the width of the range, the firing line and target heights above the horizontal plane. Recommended height for side berms is 8 feet, but depending upon adjacent land use and topography, higher side berms may be desirable. Side berms may be in the form of earthen embankments, concrete walls or wooden crib/earth embankment combinations. The utilization of Geocell materials can aid with the construction of the sideberm allowing construction of vertical walls saving needed space between ranges. (Refer to Section IV Range Products and Services). 3.02.4.3 Walls II-7-17 3.02.4.3.1 Walls used as dividers between ranges should be built to conform to the recommended height requirements for side berms. (See drawing A -17.) 3.02.4.4 Wind Flags (international and benchrest ranges) 3.02.4.4.1 Wind flags are strips of cloth affixed to the top of a stake which is approximately target height; these flags should be provided by the range operation, since personal wind flags are not allowed in international events. Wind flags must be placed as close to the bullets’ flight path as possible without interfering with the bullets’ flight or the shooter’s view of the target. On 300 meter ranges these flags are erected between the firing lanes of each fourth point. The flags should be approximately 20 centimeters wide by 75 centimeters long. Rectangular wind flags, which indicate air movements on the range, should be made of cotton type or polyester material weighing approximately 150 g/m². The color of the wind flags must be in contrast to the background. Dual color or striped wind flags are permitted and recommended. Note: For IBS, wind flags must be a minimum size, 1 2 inch by 24 inches. Rules of the National Benchrest Shooters Association are not specific. Wind flags do not eliminate the requirement for range safety flags. 3.02.4.5 Benches (Seating) 3.02.4.5.1 Benches for shooters and spectators should be provided in the target pits and behind the most distant firing line. 3.03 MATERIALS 3.03.1 Firing Line to Target Line 3.03.1.1 Ideally, the range floor or ground surface should be sodded or seeded with a quality grass mixture. Grass reduces heat on a facility and enhances range appearance. At a minimum, the firing line landscaped area should extend 5 feet in front of and 5 feet behind the physical limits of the firing point. This area should be either sodded or planted with a healthy grass mixture suited to the area. Note: Remember, in arid climates this calls for irrigation or other forms of landscaping. This may not be feasible in some areas. 3.03.2 Firing Line Surface Area a. Temporary firing lines may be nothing more than existing surface areas with no attempt to change existing contours or materials. b. Semi permanent firing lines are generally constructed, using existing materials to develop a more suitable contour. c. Permanent firing lines may be constructed using existing on-site materials, or existing materials may be removed and replaced with more suitable materials, such as concrete, gravel, or quality soils capable of sustaining a healthy growth of grass. 3.03.2.1 Firing Points a. Temporary firing points may be set up by placing tarp, carpeting or shooting mats on the ground. Elevated points can be devised by using solid top wood pallets on which to place tarps, carpeting or shooting mats. II-7-18 b. The most basic of firing points should be constructed level. Natural turf is best, but where drainage may be a problem, gravel may be used. c. Semi permanent firing points may be constructed using pressure treated lumber, nominally 2 inches thick with 3/8 inch air gaps between boards, supported by nominal 2 inch by 6 inch stringers on concrete blocks or foundation. d. Permanent firing points are usually identified by numbers constructed from a variety of materials. Firing points may be laid out on concrete slabs, with painted lines to identify not only the firing line, but also the exact boundaries of the entire firing point. In addition ready lines are also laid out for purposes of safety and control. Lines should be (3 inches wide) and painted with a highly visible color like international orange indicating warning. Shooters should be instructed to step behind the line and remain behind it until told to move to their firing points. Concrete should be a standard ASTM Αclass A concrete mix achieving a 28 day compressive strength of 3,000 pounds per square inch. Concrete designed for light paving use is best and should have a slump of 1-to-5 inches and air entrainment of 6 percent.≅ e. International range firing points are defined under ISSF rules. (Dimensions shown in chart see 3.02.1.1.) II-7-19 ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.01.1 Proper and efficient range operations are vital to the success of any shooting facility whether it is used for casual shooting programs or more formal competitive programs. A well-planned calendar of events can also help avoid dissatisfied users. To set up the operations program properly, conduct basic and advanced schools to familiarize users with new equipment, new ideas, new programs, line commands, procedures to open and close the range and how to set up and conduct a tournament. For private clubs, include all members in this training program, regardless of whether they will be called on to conduct any of the activities. In the range facility library, include copies of all NRA shooting program guidelines, rule books and booklets. Should tournaments be planned, include a copy of the NRA's Tournament Operations Guide. 4.01.2 Equipment Operations 4.01.2.1 Equipment operations include the use of target carrier operation, public address systems, flags, radios, opening and closing procedures, and target preparation. Proper use of equipment has a great effect on how long it will last. Users must be trained in operating carriers and equipment properly. For example, always remove and place in appropriate containers all staples used during daily activities. A few pairs of pliers can save a user from a serious cut to the hands during target handling operations. Another equipment operation which requires training is the operation of target carriers. A target carrier should be operated smoothly with a minimum of slamming. Rough handling can cause damage and render a carrier inoperable in the middle of a tournament. 4.01.2.2 Sufficient supplies including parts and equipment should always be on hand for any planned activity, including pasters, paste, paste applicator brushes, spindles, spotters, extra sheets of cardboard, staple guns, staples, nails, hammers, chalk and tying material to hold target frames on supports. Cloth strapping material (old bandoleer straps) is preferred for tying target frames in place and can be obtained at local hardware or military surplus outlets. 4.01.2.3 Other items that may be needed include a public address system, microphones, target carriers, target frames, cell phones, radios, control towers, lawn mowers, weed whips, chalkboards, scoreboards (pit operation only), paste tables, scoring plugs, hammers, screwdrivers, wrenches, staple guns, paste buckets, boxes for supplies (old military ammunition cans provide weather proof protection), paste brushes, paint sprayers, shovels, axes, and so forth. 4.02 Maintenance 4.02.1 Range maintenance includes grass cutting, trimming grass, painting, cleaning up litter, repairing sand bags, restoring berm and backstop contours, cleaning storm water systems, repairing electrical systems, painting parking lots, edging sidewalks, maintain buildings. 4.02.2 To guarantee long-term use of range equipment, especially items subject to weather related deterioration, a preventive maintenance program is required. General maintenance starts when the facility is planned. An example is the requirement that all steel used in constructing target carriers be hot dipped galvanized or painted with rust preventive paint. Such measures will ensure long-term, low maintenance use. Other specifications may require grease fitting or applicators at all wear points. Installation of underground electrical cables inside PVC pipe II-7-20 allows easy removal and replacement. Proper maintenance of buildings and grounds, equipment and fixtures protects the long-term investment. 4.02.3 Target carrier maintenance often consumes a great deal of time in a maintenance program. When carriers are poorly designed, the result is often frequent and expensive repairs. Therefore, before an event or during routine activities, any dirt or rust should be removed from the wear points, tighten loose fittings, weld or replace any broken parts. To reduce problems associated with wear, the carrier designs offered in this source book have been modified to incorporate ball bearings on spindles, weight distribution devices or sprocket wheels and chains to reduce wear. They also provide for grease fittings on parts subject to wear. Materials for new target frames include dimension lumber, sheet metal fasteners and cardboard for backers. Sufficient quantities of these items are to be kept on hand to make immediate repairs. A good rule for volunteer organizations is to conduct maintenance chores regularly, rather than just before an event. Perform small tasks each time the range is used rather than wait until major repairs are needed. Post a maintenance checklist in the clubhouse and outline checkoff blocks, so members can indicate that they have completed a specific task. In addition, a flyer with this same checklist could be mailed to each member or published in the club newsletter. This checklist should also point out where tools and materials are stored at the facility. II-7-21 ARTICLE 5. APPENDIX 5.01 Exterior Ballistics Tablei Calculated maximum ranges for representative center-fire rifle cartridges. Caliber Bullet Weight Bullet Assumed Calculated Elevation of (Grains) Style Muzzle Velocity (yards) Muzzle in degrees (Feet per second) Assumed Standard Atmospherics of 78% humidity, 59ºF and a Pressure of 29.53 in/Hg, Altitude above mean sea level 1,500 feet. 22 Hornet 45 SP 2690 2148 26 222 Rem 50 PSP 3140 2803 27 223 Rem 55 FMC 3240 3759 29 22/250 Rem 55 PSP 3680 3163 30 220 Swift 50 PSP 3870 2942 26 243 Win 80 PSP 3350 3782 28 243 Win 100 PP 2960 4673 30 250 Savage 100 ST 2820 3614 29 257 Roberts+P 117 PP 2780 3447 29 25WSSM 115 ST 3060 5538 31 270 WSSM 150 BST 3120 6019 31 270 Win 150 PP 2850 4506 30 270 WSM 140 FailSafe 3275 4980 30 280 Rem 150 PP 2860 4693 30 7mm Rem Mag 175 PP 2860 5252 31 30-30 Win 150 PP 2390 3091 29 308 Win 147 FMJ 2800 5125 31 308 Win 168 BST 2670 5530 31 308 Win 168 HPBT 2680 5354 31 30 Carbine 110 FMJ 1990 2578 29 30-06 Springfield 147 FMJ 3000 5281 30 30-06 Springfield 168 HPBT 2700 5011 31 30-06 Springfield 175 HPBT 2600 5572 31 300 H&H Mag 180 Fail Safe 2880 4713 31 300 Win Mag 180 Fail Safe 2960 5196 31 300 Rem U Mag 180 Scirocco 3250 6135 31 8mm Mauser 170 HSSP 2360 2944 28 325WSM 180 BST 3060 5462 30 II-7-22 338 Win Mag 250 Partition Gold 2650 5560 31 375 H&H Mag 270 Failsafe 2670 4856 31 416 Rem 400 A-Frame 2400 4475 31 458 Win Mag 510 SP 2040 3501 30 460 Weatherby 500 FNJ 2600 3934 30 50 BMG 750 LRS Solid 2700 9502 34 Table calculcated using Sierra Blastics Infinity Suite Six i Sierra Bullets. 2008. Infinity Five Exterior Ballistics. V 6. National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section II Chapter 8 OUTDOOR BULLSEYE PISTOL Range Services ©2012 II-8-2 II-8-3 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Chapter Organization 1.03 Cross Reference ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.02 Dimensions and Materials ARTICLE 4. APPENDIX 4.01 Ballistics Table 8 2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). II-8-4 II-8-5 ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 This chapter provides guidance on how to plan, design and construct both a conventional and international pistol range, provided the range is for pistol calibers commonly used in bullseye shooting, such as .22 caliber rimfire and .45 caliber centerfire. (See the ballistics table located in the Appendix to this chapter.) 1.02 Chapter Organization 1.02.1 This chapter is organized into four sub-sections: (1) general information: (2) safety; (3) technical specifications subdivided in two sections, technical considerations and dimensions and materials and (4) Appendix. Cross references are given to aid the user in finding related information throughout the source book. 1.03 Cross Reference 1.03.1 Range Source Book References 1.03.1.1 Planning and Safety a. General Information, Section I, Chapter 1 b. General Outdoor Range Information, Section II, Chapter 1 c. Safety Plan, Section I, Chapter 2 d. Planning and Design, Section I, Chapter 3 II-8-6 ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.01.1 Outdoor pistol ranges differ to some extent so it may be necessary to modify the safety rules to conform to actual range conditions. The following is a guide for developing a safety plan for the various pistol facilities. No set of rules is comprehensive, safety is not guaranteed by compliance with this source book. Individual range organizers should take affirmative steps to ensure safety -- even if that means taking action not necessarily outlined in this source book. 2.01.2 Pistol Range Rules a. When a range officer declares the range safe, shooters may load the amount of ammunition prescribed by the course of fire. After the course of fire is completed a cease- fire is called to allow for target change or repair. During informal firing activities, cease-fires must be called at intervals to allow target changes. b. After firing is complete, all firearms must be placed on the bench, with slides back, magazines out, cylinders open and unloaded. Some pistols may require a blocking device to hold the cylinder or slide open. c. Upon the command "Cease Fire," shooters comply immediately by opening, unloading and benching all firearms. Then they step back from the firing line to indicate compliance with the cease-fire. d. After completing firing activities, shooters who wish to proceed down range to check or change targets should take necessary items to paste, staple or change a target. When they leave the firing line, no one is permitted on the firing line and absolutely no one may handle firearms while target change operations are underway. e. When target changes are complete, a range officer remains down range until all shooters are behind the firing line. The range officer makes one final check and then moves to the area behind the firing line. f. A designated range officer gives the command, "commence firing," when everyone is back behind the firing line and the target area and range are once again clear for live firing. g. Always point pistols in a safe direction. h. Fire only at authorized targets set up according to range procedures. These procedures normally require paper targets centered on backing material and properly installed in or on the proper target frame. i. Shooters are authorized to use the 50 yard target range according to posted guidelines. j. "Quick drawing" or the firing of a pistol from the holster is strictly prohibited. k. Magnum pistols may be fired from designated positions only. This rule protects other shooters from the effects of louder - than - normal muzzle blast. 2.01.3 Smallbore Pistol Rules a. On ranges designed for .22 caliber rimfire only (Not including .22 caliber rimfire magnum), all shooting activities are restricted to firearms using ammunition designated short, long or long rifle. II-8-7 ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.01.1 Pistol ranges can be built with one firing line and several target lines or, with a single target line and two or more firing lines. Target frames may be designed to be used interchangeably at each target line. Permanent 50 yard frames are often mounted on hinge pins to allow them to be lowered from view. The simple layout provided on drawing A-5 may be altered to suit local requirements. 3.01.2 Distance 3.01.2.1 Distances prescribed for conventional and international pistol ranges are set according to competition rules. NRA conventional events are set up in yards, while international events are in meters. Proportionately reduced international targets are also available to permit those events to be set up on conventional ranges. 3.01.3 Firing Line Area 3.01.3.1 Width 3.01.3.1.1 The firing line width is determined by the number of targets and firing positions planned for the facility. One formula is to use minimum space requirements as shown in the firing position space chart multiplied by the number of targets needed for the range. (See chart below.) 3.01.3.2 Depth 3.01.3.2.1 The depth of the firing line is based on minimum requirements for firing position dimensions and is outlined in the rulebook as follows: Firing Position Width (side to side) Depth (front to back) Conv. Pistol 4 feet 5 feet Int'l. Rapid Fire 1.5m (59 inches) 1.5m (59 inches) Int'l. (Other 25m) 100cm (39 inches) 1.5m (59 inches) Int'l. Free Pistol 1.6m (63 inches) Minimum 1.5m (59 inches) Note: Allow additional space for range officers, other shooters, referees, judges and jury members to move about freely. 3.01.3.3 Firing Lines 3.01.3.3.1 The firing line must parallel the target line and be marked for easy identification to warn against any movement forward of the firing line during live firing. On most conventional pistol ranges, a bench in front of the firing line serves as a barrier. If a permanent bench is not available, portable tables should be provided for the shooter to lay out his gear. Permanent benches are suggested on permanent ranges. II-8-8 3.02 Dimensions and Materials 3.02.1 Firing Distances and Allowable Variations Conventional Pistol: 25 and 50 yards plus or minus 3 inches at 25 yards, and plus or minus 8 inches at 50 yards. Int'l Free Pistol 50 meters plus or minus 0.2 meters (about 8 inches) (reduced targets are available for use at 50 yards). Int'l. Rapid Fire Pistol: 25 meters plus or minus 0.10 meters Pistol (about 4 inches) (reduced targets are available for use at 25 yards). Air Pistol 10 meters (32 feet 10 inches) plus or minus 0.05 meters (2 inches). 3.02.2 Benches 3.02.2.1 Firing line benches should be built along the entire firing line with openings provided at regular intervals. The bench openings should be secured with a hinged door, which becomes a part of the bench top when closed. 3.02.3 Firing Positions 3.02.3.1 Firing positions must conform to the specifications for firing line widths (Front to back) and lengths (Side to side). UIT rules require the following equipment at each firing position: (1) a bench or table approximately 50 centimeters (About 20 inches) wide by 60 centimeters (about 24 inches) long by 70-100 centimeters (About 27-39 inches) high and should be adjustable or removable; (2) one chair per shooter; (3) a desk or chair for each scorer placed so as not to disturb the shooter; (4) a small scoreboard to post unofficial scores for spectators; and (5) spotting scope for scorers. 3.02.4 Firing Line Surface Area 3.02.4.1 Natural turf or smoothly finished concrete slabs are examples of the variety of materials that can be used to construct firing lines. Materials for the firing line area are not limited by the shooting position as they would be for ranges where the prone position is used. For instance, crushed or wash gravel would be unsuitable for ranges where the prone position is used, but these materials are generally acceptable for the standing position. Concrete and natural turf are the norm, however. 3.02.5 Firing Line Cover 3.02.5.1 Firing line covers allow shooting activities during inclement weather and protect the shooter from the sun. (See drawing A-7.) A disadvantage of a firing line cover is that multiple target lines may be necessary. On some ranges the firing line cover is built with movable walls for use in the colder months. International rules state that the shooter must be protected from the wind, rain and sun. Firing line covers may be a simple roof structure or a building complete with four walls, shooting ports and dividers between firing positions. Such a building may be heated in cold weather and air conditioned in hot weather. Artificial lighting may be needed for firing line covers; however, where electricity is not available, sky lights may be installed in the roof. II-8-9 3.02.6 Target Line Area 3.02.6.1 Frames 3.02.6.1.1 Target frames for conventional pistol ranges, both training and competition, are built to hold identical size target backing materials. Target frames for 25 meter international events must conform to UIT or NRA international rules. 3.02.6.1.2 Target frames may be constructed from soft pine and treated for exposure to weather, or angle iron of such size and dimension as to reduce ricochet potential. Wooden strips 1 inch by 2 inches are sufficiently rigid to hold stationary targets during windy conditions, but these cannot withstand the stress imposed by a turning target mechanism. 3.02.6.1.3 Outdoor type (25 and 50 yards/meters). Use fixed frames 2 feet by 2 feet with the height of the target center a minimum of 55 inches above the floor (International included). Mount frames at the 25-yard line for either a manually or electrically operated turning target mechanism. Turning targets are desirable for timed and rapid fire stages in conventional pistol tournaments and are required for registered events. Turning target frames are optional for training ranges. International rapid fire target frames may be bought commercially or made on site. According to international rules, target frames must be placed along an imaginary line through the centerline of the firing position and perpendicular to the firing line. Spacing is 4 feet on center for most conventional pistol ranges. International rapid fire target frames are arranged in groups of five with a distance between target centers of 75 centimeters (About 29.5 inches) plus or minus 10 millimeters. When the rapid fire event is conducted at 50 feet, the distance between target centers is 45.7 centimeters (About 18 inches). The same spacing applies to center fire, sport pistol and standard pistol events. For international rapid fire events, divide the range into sections, each composed of two groups of targets. 3.02.7 Turning Target Mechanisms 3.02.7.1 Turning target mechanisms may be purchased from commercial sources or may be made using guidelines on drawing A-19. International turning target mechanisms require precision timers for operation and are available commercially. 3.02.8 Target Assembly 3.02.8.1 Cut target backers from corrugated cardboard in a 2 feet by 2 feet square or as target dimensions dictate. Then glue targets to the cardboard face. The cardboard need not be coated to withstand wet weather. Regular corrugated cardboard works well and can be replaced as it deteriorates. During wind storms and rainy weather tie the cardboard within the frames by use of large rubber bands or string. 3.02.9 Targets 3.02.9.1 Attach targets to backing materials affixed to the target frames along a horizontal line a minimum of 55 inches above the ground. Target designations may be found in the individual rulebooks published by the NRA and UIT. Targets listed in NRA rulebooks are available from various supply houses. A complete list of target manufacturers is also available from the NRA Competitions Division, (800) 672-3888, extension 1450. Range standards for training, conventional and international competition require all targets on a range be placed at the same II-8-10 height, with each target corresponding to a given firing position except in international rapid fire. The target system must ensure safety, and with turning targets, must provide accurate timing control, efficient scoring and target changes. The targets must be fixed securely so that even in high winds, targets will not move enough to distract the shooter. 3.02.10 Backstops 3.02.10.1 Backstops are necessary in areas where natural terrain does not provide a bullet stop. Refer to Section 1 Chapter 1 section 3.04.5.1. This does not mean, however, that all backstops must be 20 feet high. To determine backstop height for a particular site range planners must consider terrain features, length of the range and safety features. Note: Some ranges have existed for years without a backstop of any kind. However, the down range area in these instances is uninhabited or inaccessible. In areas near housing developments, backstops, side berms or walls and baffles may need to be utilized for safety. Should there be a possibility that urban development will threaten the site in the future, incorporate these features in the early design process. 3.02.10.2 Backstop Material: Material used in backstop core construction may vary from broken concrete, asphalt, large rocks to specially designed cribbing. Surface areas where bullet strikes occur must be covered to a minimum depth of 18" - 24" of compacted clean earth. Use sod or other stable material to stabilize surface areas. Unstable soil types, like sand, may require special stabilizing measures on steep slopes, such as the use of sand bags. Steel backstop: Manufactured or made by the club or organization, backstops are used on outdoor pistol ranges. The thickness of the steel varies according to caliber and type of shooting conducted at the range site. Rubber backstop: Chunk rubber and shredded rubber tires are used on outdoor ranges. See vendor list in Section IV for a list of manufacturers. Geocell backstop: The utilization of Geocell materials can aid with the construction of the backstop. (Refer to Section IV Range Products and Services). 3.02.11 Direct Fire Zone 3.02.11.1 The direct fire zone is defined as that area into which all shots are fired during a normal course of fire. The direct fire zone includes all directions and angles of fire used on a range while shooting at a specific target corresponding to a specific firing point. 3.02.12 Other Considerations 3.02.12.1 Grade (Surface areas) 3.02.12.1.1 Surface grade on the facility should be fairly level between the firing line and target lines. This will not be possible at all range sites without a large expenditure of capital that most clubs do not have access to. Some slope is necessary for drainage. Surface grade on the range facility ideally should not exceed plus or minus 2 percent; however, when grading calls for major earth moving operations, compensate for significant variations in grade between the II-8-11 level of the targets and the firing position by building up the firing or target line areas. The suggested slope on the range surface should be toward the targets and to each side or as permitted by topography. 3.02.12.2 Side Berms 3.02.12.2.1 Side berms are necessary near residential areas or in areas not large enough (Except hilly or mountainous areas). Side berms are built similar to a backstop, but may be replaced by walls, side baffles or other artificial barriers to conserve space. Earthen side berms should be 8 feet high, but this also depends upon the width of the range and whether the surrounding areas are ever occupied by people. Therefore, while 8-feet-high side berms are recommended for ranges adjacent to other inhabited areas, particular geographic areas may also require the installation of other safety barriers to supplement side berms. Range planners must consider all of the external factors concerning safety and sound as they relate to the surrounding area. The utilization of Geocell materials can aid with the construction of the sideberm allowing construction of vertical walls saving needed space between ranges. (Refer to Section IV Range Products and Services). 3.02.12.3 Baffles 3.02.12.3.1 Overhead and ground baffles may be necessary on ranges where land masses are not large enough for normal projectile containment. Because of the limited target distances and the types of firearms used on a pistol range, baffle designs may be comparatively simple and inexpensive. 3.02.12.3.2 Baffles for pistol ranges must be made of materials sufficient to stop those calibers authorized for a given facility. On some it will only be required to stop .22 caliber rimfire while on others, up to the .44 caliber magnum. Make penetration tests on available materials in a particular geographical area to establish minimum requirements. (See drawings, A-11, A- 12 and A-13, and A-14 details of baffle construction.) These is not the only methods used for baffle construction, you may also consult engineers, architects, or design your own. However, NRA highly recommends you test the system to ensure that it meets the needs and use of the range. 3.02.12.3.3 Baffles may be built in several designs, but must be designed according to specific requirements for a site. A site evaluation should be conducted to determine what design and spacing will work. In some instances baffle design calls for containment of all bullets, while at others sites the requirements will not be as restrictive. Again, only a thorough site evaluation will determine the exact installation of safety devices. 3.02.12.4 Walls 3.02.12.4.1 Walls used in place of side berms must be designed to stop the most powerful pistol ammunition allowed on the facility. Penetration ability information of a given type of ammunition can be found by the ammunition manufacturer. This requirement does not include the rifle or high velocity calibers allowed in long range pistol silhouette shooting events that should be fixed on ranges specifically designed for pistol silhouette shooting. II-8-12 3.02.12.4.2 Walls are recommended to be 4 inches thick and 8 feet high, but again, wall design depends on each particular application. (See drawing A-24.) 3.02.12.5 Projectile Containment 3.02.12.5.1 Projectiles must be contained on property. To meet this objective, you may have to install overhead and/or ground baffles. (See drawings A-13, and A-14) 3.02.12.5.2 For conventional or international competition, high velocity ammunition is not used but non-competition uses may be different. Therefore, design the range to accept any pistol up to and including the .44 caliber magnum unless range rules strictly limit use to certain cartridges. Since conventional and international pistol ranges do not exceed 50 meters, the safety requirements may be reduced significantly by constructing a firing line cover with the forward roof built to contain any misdirected bullets, including the .44 magnum calibers, even at a distance of 5 feet from the muzzle. This requires a 10 gauge steel surface covered with soft wood about 2 inches thick. The roof side may be treated with ε inch thick plywood and standard roofing material. This forward roof should extend forward and down in front of the shooter so the muzzle elevation will not allow a bullet to follow a direct path over the backstop. (See drawing A-7) 3.02.12.6 Number Boards 3.02.12.6.1 Target number boards should be a minimum of 1 foot square for 50 yard (or meter) targets painted with 10-11 inch numerals in contrasting and alternating colors, such as black on white, white on black. 3.02.12.6.2 Target number boards must be affixed to the target frames corresponding to firing point numbers. The numbers must be: (1) large enough to be seen easily, under normal shooting conditions by shooters with normal vision at the appropriate distance; (2) alternating and contrasting colors; and (3) clearly visible throughout a competitive event, whether the targets are faced or edged. 3.02.12.6.3 Number Boards: Materials used for number boards include sheet metal, plastic, masonite and plywood. 3.02.12.6.4 Firing positions and targets should be numbered from left to right. The firing line number should be located in the center of each position and on top of the firing line bench. The target number may be located below or above the target. 3.02.12.7 Control Towers 3.02.12.7.1 Control towers may be constructed as a permanent or temporary fixture. For movable towers, use materials that permit easy transport, especially where multiple firing lines are used. On ranges where the firing lines are permanent, consider a permanent tower. Refer to vendors list in Section IV for manufacturers. 3.02.12.8 Support Areas II-8-13 3.02.12.8.1 Support areas are important both for training and competition and may range from a temporary setup to a full-scale building complete with classrooms, lounge areas and administrative offices. 3.02.12.9 Spectator Areas 3.02.12.9.1 Spectator areas should be cordoned off or separated from the firing line and support areas, but should be close enough to allow spectators to observe activities. Spectators must not distract shooters. 3.02.13 Administrative Structures 3.02.13.1 Buildings 3.02.13.1.1 A shed or building 10 feet by 20 feet or larger is sufficient to house staff to run some events and is an asset to the range. Provide space for buildings and grounds equipment and range supplies, such as targets, target stands and other equipment. 3.02.13.2 Scoring Areas 3.02.13.2.1 In conventional NRA pistol competition, targets are normally scored on the target frames at the firing line. Most of the scoring in international events is done in the statistical office. 3.02.13.3 Wind Flags (International only) 3.02.13.3.1 Wind flags for International Free Pistol (50 meter range) are placed 10 meters and 30 meters from the firing line. These flags are to be spaced between the firing lines at least every fourth position and must not interfere with the shooter's line of sight. These flags may be made from cotton bunting or other material lightweight enough to respond to wind. Wind flags are generally not used for conventional pistol ranges. 3.02.13.4 Communications 3.02.13.4.1 A communications system on pistol competition or training ranges is a plus. However, on international ranges communication is essential between the firing line and the target line except in air pistol. 3.02.13.5 Phone Systems 3.02.13.5.1 The phone system must be free of distortion, interference or static so communications can be transmitted clearly. 3.02.13.6 Radios 3.02.13.6.1 FM radios may be used, but transmissions may disturb shooters. Reserve radios for use during cease-fires and emergency situations; use the phone system at other times. 3.02.13.7 Public Address Systems 3.02.13.7.1 Quality public address systems are necessary for safety and for assuring that line commands are clearly understood by all shooters. II-8-14 II-8-15 ARTICLE 4. APPENDIX 4.01 Ballistics table Chart A Pistol Cartridgesi Calculated maximum ranges _______________________________________________________________________________________ Bullet Bullet Bullet wt. Muzzle Calculated max. Elevation Angle Caliber/Name Style (grains) Velocity (fps) Range (yards) Reference Angle 0º Humidity 78%, Temperature 59ºF, and pressure 29.53 in/Hg. Firing Altitude 0 feet above sea level ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 221 Rem. Fireball V-max 50 2995 3420 29 38 Special STHP 110 945 1839 31 357 Magnum JHP 158 1235 2173 30 .357 Sig JHP 125 1130 1976 29 380 Auto JHP 90 1000 1086 27 38 Super+P STHP 125 1240 1860 28 9 mm Luger FMJ RN 124 1140 1896 29 40 S&W JHP 180 990 1952 30 41 Rem Mag JHP 210 1300 1832 29 44 Rem. Mag. JHP 240 1180 2163 31 45 Auto FMJ RN 230 850 1610 30 45 Colt LFN 255 860 1739 31 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- RN-Round Nose, STHP-Silvertip Hollow Point, JHP-Jacketed Hollow Point, FMJ-Full Metal Jacket, JSP-Jacketed Soft Point, LFN-Lead Flat Nose, V-Max, - Polymer Tipped. Sierra Infinity Suite V was utilized to develop this table. II-8-16 Chart B Rim Fire Cartridgesii Calculated maximum ranges _______________________________________________________________________________________ Bullet Bullet Bullet wt. Muzzle Calculated max. Elevation Angle Caliber/Name Style (grains) Velocity (fps) Range (yards) Reference Angle 0º Humidity 78% , Temperature 59ºF, and pressure 29.53 in/Hg. Firing Altitude 0 feet above sea level ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17 Mach 2 V-Max 17 2010 1939 31 17 HMR TNT 17 2550 2008 26 22 Short LRN 29 1095 1535 29 22 Long LRN 29 1215 1329 27 22 Long Rifle LRN 40 1150 2000 29 22 Long Rifle LRN 47 1280 1942 29 22 Win Mag JHP 34 2120 1713 26 22 Win Mag JHP 40 1910 1778 27 22 Win Mag LFN 45 1300 1838 28 V-Max, - Polymer Tipped, LRN – Lead Round Nose, JHP - Jacketed Hollow Point, LFN - Lead Flat Nose i Sierra Bullets. 2008. Infinity Five Exterior Ballistics. V 6. ii Ibid. National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section II Chapter 9 OUTDOOR ACTION PISTOL Range Services © 2012 II-9-2 II-9-3 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Chapter Organization 1.03 Cross Reference 1.04 General Considerations ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 Safety Rules ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.02 Range Dimensions 3.03 Materials ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.02 Maintenance ARTICLE 5. APPENDIX 5.01 Target Specifications Chart 5.02 Range Control and Commands 5.03 Ballistics Table 8 2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). II-9-4 II-9-5 ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 This chapter provides the latest information on the design and construction of an action pistol range. 1.02 Chapter Organization 1.02.1 This chapter is organized into five sections: (1) General information; (2) Safety; (3) Technical specifications; (4) Operations and maintenance; and (5) Appendix. 1.03 Cross Reference 1.03.1 NRA Range Source Book References a. General Information, Section I, Chapter 1 b. General Outdoor Information, Section II, Chapter 1 c. Safety Plan, Section I, Chapter 2 d. Outdoor Range Design Criteria, Section II, Chapter 2 e. Outdoor Bullseye Pistol, Section II, Chapter 8 f. Outdoor Moving Target, Section II, Chapter 15 1.03.2 NRA Rule Books (available online at http://www.nrahq.org/compete/nra-rule-books.asp ) a. NRA Action Pistol Shooting Rule Book 1.04 General Considerations 1.04.1 Introduction 1.04.1.1 In response to a growing interest in all types of shooting, not limited to conventional bullseye, NRA adopted action pistol shooting. It is a combination of some of the aspects of police revolver with international practical pistol shooting (IPSC), international pistol and others common only to action pistol. The shooting and target engagement techniques used in action pistol require a different approach in the design of safety barriers and range equipment. In addition, rules stipulate that the minimum caliber must be 9 millimeter (.355 diameter). Ammunition must meet or exceed a minimum "power floor" specified in the rules and determined by using a chronograph. The formula, bullet weight (in grains) times muzzle velocity (in feet per second), must be not less than 120,000. Direct fire zones are determined by using the maximum range of authorized ammunition. (The ballistics chart in the Appendix specifies a maximum range of 1.42 miles.) Target engagement angles, along with the drawing of firearms from a holster, are also factors that affect range design and control. A fundamental concept in action pistol is that different events require different ranges. For example, for a complete facility a minimum of four different layouts are needed. (See drawing C-10 for sample site layout.) 1.04.1.2 Since any action pistol facility will probably be used for practice as well as training and tournaments, it should be laid out so that each event requires a minimum number of range changes. Three basic range types should be set up independently by installing dividing walls, II-9-6 berms or wide separation of each particular range. These range types, based on minimum space requirements, are: Type A: A 50 yard range will accommodate los alamitos, international rapid fire, advanced military, practical, barricade and tyro events. A width of 50 feet allows for three banks (five targets per bank) for international rapid fire, four banks (three targets per bank) for los alamitos, advanced military, barricade and tyro events, and five banks for the practical event (refer to rulebook for specific stages in each event). Type B: A 25 yard range with a width of 75 feet is needed for the moving target event. Type C: A 25 yard range with a width of 60 feet allows for one flying M event set-up, one speed event set-up and four falling plate set-ups. 1.04.2 Environmental Issues 1.04.2.1 See site selection criteria for guidance. (See Section I, Chapter 1.) II-9-7 ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 Safety Rules 2.01.1 The following guide is offered as a basis for developing a set of safety rules for an action pistol facility. These rules may be modified for individual range conditions. 2.01.2 General Safety Rules for Outdoor Pistol Ranges a. Obey range commands immediately. b. Do not go forward from the firing line unless a cease-fire is called and the range is declared safe. c. Require shooters to provide and wear adequate eye and ear protection. d. No live firing is allowed closer than 7 yards from a backstop or impact berm, unless the backstop or berm is specifically designed to prevent back splatter or is modified with back splatter shields. Use clean earth or install curtain-like material to prevent back splatter. e. Shooters must clean up their assigned area after firing is complete and place refuse or brass in designated containers. 2.01.3 Action Pistol Safety Rules a. NRA Action pistol rules must be complied with at all times. b. Firearms must not be loaded until the shooter is in position on the firing line and the command to load has been given by the range officer (rule 18.9). c. Except when engaged in competition, all firearms must be unloaded, holstered or cased, hammer fully down and magazines removed from semiautomatics. d. Holsters used on action pistol ranges must comply with current NRA action pistol rules. e. The maximum number of rounds to be loaded must conform to rules governing each event. 2.01.4 Safety Enhancements a. The firing line must be clearly marked and have signs posted prominently indicating that no movement be made forward of the firing line during firing (dry or live) exercises. b. Firing points must be clearly marked and properly sized. c. Any fixture set up on the range must not obstruct or disturb the shooters nor interfere with or obstruct range operations. d. Spectator areas should be a minimum of 20 feet to the rear of the rear firing area, so as not to interfere with either the shooter or range operations. e. Wood used in target frames should be soft pine. f. The face of steel plate targets must be flat and smooth. Chipped, dented, cratered, dished or pock-marked plates must be repaired to meet acceptable standards or replaced. II-9-8 ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.01.1 Firing Line to Target Line 3.01.1.1 The action pistol range incorporates one-to-one, one-to-multiple and multiple-to-multiple placement of the targets with each firing point. Target lines are set up parallel to the firing line with the exception of speed and flying M targets. (See drawing C-10.) 3.01.1.2 Distance 3.01.1.2.1 Distances vary according to each particular event, such as international rapid fire, moving target, etc. (See NRA Action Pistol rulebook for specific description for each course of fire.) 3.01.1.3 Direct Fire Zones 3.01.1.3.1 Direct fire zones for each range type vary according to the event, such as moving target, flying M, barricade, etc. Each requires a different direct fire zone as defined by the angles of target engagement. A direct fire zone is defined as that area into which all shots are fired during a normal course of fire. The direct fire zone includes all directions and angles of fire used on a range while shooting at a specific target corresponding to a specific firing point. 3.01.2 Firing Line Area 3.01.2.1 Width 3.01.2.1.1 The firing line width for a flying M, barricade, falling plate or moving target varies from a single firing position to a standard firing line running the complete width of a range. (See drawings A/C-12, C-11, C-12, C-14, and C-15.) 3.01.2.2 Depth 3.01.2.2.1 Generally, firing lines are laid out 12 feet deep, but may be expanded to allow room for the shooter to move about without interference. 3.01.2.3 Firing Points 3.01.2.3.1 Firing points for most events are fixed in relation to the target. In some events shooters will be required to use different firing points and different distances according to each stage of the event. 3.01.2.4 Administrative Space 3.01.2.4.1 Allow adequate space at the rear of the firing line area, as a staging area or ready area and for spectators. Action pistol events, especially tournaments, appeal to spectators. Spectator areas should be placed close enough for good visibility, yet far enough away so as not to interfere with range operations. 3.01.2.4.2 Buildings II-9-9 3.01.2.4.2.1 Buildings or temporary housing for administrative functions should be planned for any facility used for competitive events. For routine practice and training, such facilities may not be necessary. 3.01.2.4.3 Firing Line Cover 3.01.2.4.3.1 Firing line covers for action pistol ranges are allowed. However, action pistol events call for shooters to move quickly from one place to another while shooting some events. Therefore, a roof structure may not be suitable. 3.01.3 Target Line Area 3.01.3.1 Frames 3.01.3.1.1 Build target frames from soft pine or material which lessens the possibility of ricochets or back splatter. (See drawing A-39.) Target frames used on the moving target event, for example, should provide stability yet allow easy bullet passage through the material. Turning target mechanisms may also be built out of soft pine, but may not withstand the stress exerted as the target is turned. 3.01.3.2 Number Boards 3.01.3.2.1 Number boards are generally not used on action pistol ranges. However, they may be incorporated on the target frames for the D-1 targets set up on a one-to-one relationship with the firing position to allow easy identification of assigned targets. Number boards should be of sufficient size to allow shooters to see them. Number boards for 50 yard targets, for example, should be 1 foot square with letters 8 inches high. 3.01.3.3 Target Assembly 3.01.3.3.1 Target assembly for the action pistol facility includes both paper and metallic targets. Paper targets are assembled by pasting target faces on corrugated cardboard or other suitable material. Metallic targets, may be assembled on-site or purchased from commercial outlets. (See References to products and Service in the Appendix.) 3.01.3.4 Backstop 3.01.3.4.1 A backstop may not be necessary in areas where terrain features are adequate. Refer to Section 1 Chapter 1 section 3.04.5.1. The utilization of Geocell materials can aid with the construction of the backstop. (Refer to Section IV Range Products and Services). 3.01.4 Projectile Containment 3.01.4.1 Because of wide variation in angles of fire, projectile containment must be laid out in a half circle (180 degrees.) Where terrain features such as hills or mountains are prominent, or where barriers limit the effective distance a bullet may travel, the amount of land needed can be reduced considerably. A backstop, side berms, with overhead and ground baffles appreciably reduce land requirements. During site evaluation consider the use of these features to reduce the amount of land needed. II-9-10 3.01.5 Communications 3.01.5.1 Shooters on the line must have clear, distinct instructions. For action pistol activities, a range officer generally accompanies each shooter, eliminating the need for a public address system. Range officers should, therefore, be sure that verbal commands are understood. Radios may be used for communications between ranges. 3.01.5.1.1 Control towers are usually not built on an action pistol range because each range is small enough to allow voice commands. When large range operations are planned, towers (see drawing A-26) may become a necessary part of range communications. When such use is necessary, they should be located at the centerpoint of the firing line and offset to the rear away from the shooters. Control towers should be built high enough to allow visual observation of the entire firing line. The use of firing line covers generally eliminates the use of a range tower. Range width determines the height of the tower. For better control, action pistol ranges should have one tower per range and each range should be limited in size. 3.01.6 Other Considerations 3.01.6.1 Surface Grade 3.01.6.1.1 Surface grade on the range facility should be as level as possible and still allow proper drainage. When grading requires extraordinary earth moving operations, build up the firing or target line areas to compensate for significant variations in grade between the elevation at which the target is set and the firing point. The area between firing lines and targets should be crowned and sloped toward the targets if possible to provide good drainage. 3.01.6.2 Side Berms 3.01.6.2.1 Side berms used for the action pistol facility are similar to and part of the backstop. The angles of fire used on an action pistol range require that side berms become part of the main backstop, especially on the flying M facility. Side berms may also help reduce sound and increase safety. The utilization of Geocell materials can aid with the construction of the sideberm allowing construction of vertical walls saving needed space between ranges. (Refer to Section IV Range Products and Services). 3.01.6.3 Baffles 3.01.6.3.1 Baffles for action pistol ranges are installed based on vertical angles of fire and target placement. For example, vertical overhead baffles, installed parallel to the firing line, are not acceptable for a flying M facility, falling plate, and speed target events. Baffles for these facilities must be rearranged to include ricochet guards in conjunction with the baffles. Baffles sloped 25 degrees to the horizontal, like indoor range baffles, are recommended for this range set up. (See drawings C-24, C-25 and C-26). 3.01.6.4 Walls II-9-11 3.01.6.4.1 Walls used instead of side berms, or used to separate the range into sections, should also protect adjacent areas. (See drawings A/C-3, A-24, B/C-4) Materials used for walls will be determined by expected use and the degree of protection required. (See materials section for specific types of materials used for wall construction.) 3.02 Range Dimensions 3.02.1 Firing Line to Target Line 3.02.1.1 Firing Distance 3.02.1.1.1 Distances required for practice and competition are 7, 10, 15, 20, 25, 35, 50 yards and 25 meters. (See drawings C-11. C-12 and C-14.) 3.02.1.2 Direct Fire Zone 3.02.1.2.1 The direct fire zone is defined as that area into which all shots are fired during a normal course of fire. The direct fire zone includes all directions and angles of fire used on a range while shooting at a specific target corresponding to a specific firing point. 3.02.2 Firing Line Area 3.02.2.1 The firing points are to be clearly marked or built so shooters will have no difficulty in identifying them. The firing points must be so constructed that they do not obstruct or disturb the shooters or obstruct the activities of range officers. Firing point dimensions are 3 feet square for all events except for the barricade, advanced military and falling plate events. For the barricade event shooters stand in an area behind the barricade that is 2 feet wide by 3 feet deep (see drawings A-39, A-48, and C-57.) For advanced military and falling plate events, a conventional firing line is laid out at the appropriate distances. 3.02.2.2 Width 3.02.2.2.1 The firing line width depends upon the various shooting events. For example, the moving target and barricade events use a single firing point per installation. The flying M uses an 8 foot area across which a shooter must walk to reach the firing point. Other events use a conventional firing line configuration with firing points up to 15 feet on center. 3.02.2.3 Depth 3.02.2.3.1 Depth should be determined from both a shooting and safety standpoint. Where firing points must be precise, mark off the points according to dimensions shown on the drawings. Methods used vary from using concrete slabs to paint or nylon ropes. Firing points for the falling plate event should be a minimum of 7 feet deep to allow for prone positions. Note: All events may be fired from prone except where a shooting box, such as in the barricade event, is dictated. (See Rule 5.12.) Where artificial surfaces are used, allow additional space for range officers. 3.02.2.4 Firing Line Placement II-9-12 3.02.2.4.1 Firing line placement on Type A ranges (see par. 1.04.1.2) must be parallel to the target line. On Type B ranges the targets are not placed along a common line but must face the firing point fully. 3.02.2.5 Firing Points 3.02.2.5.1 Firing points must be arranged at distances of 7, 10, 15, 20, 25, 50 yards and 25 meters from the targets. Mark firing points for easy identification. For a permanent facility, concrete slabs should be recessed to ground level. Where flexibility is necessary for target and range set up, firing points should be appropriately marked with lime, stakes, or highly visible ribbons. Each of the 13 action pistol events calls for different engagement angles. Specific guidelines on firing point placement for each event are illustrated on drawings C-12, C-14. and C-15. 3.02.3 Target Line Area 3.02.3.1 Frames 3.02.3.1.1 Build target frames from either soft pine or 3/8 inch round stock (steel) to hold the D-1 or 50- yard targets. The frame used for the moving target is best built for targets mounted on cardboard and inserted in a holding mechanism along the bottom edge. Another system is with the target held at the top with a clamp attached to a cable and the bottom edge held in place between two parallel cables or strings. The former method removes any resistance to bullet impact and reduces the chance for ricochets. The attachment device is similar to a vise with two clamping thumbscrews. Frames for 50-yard targets may be built similar to those for conventional pistol targets, with the exception of frame height; the D-1 target has a vertical dimension of 30 inches and a horizontal dimension of 18 inches. (See drawings A-39 and 3/C-15.) 3.02.3.2 Targets 3.02.3.2.1 Targets used on action pistol ranges include: falling plates (steel), speed targets (steel), NRA D-1 (Bianchi) or D-2 (paper) when reduced for 50 feet. The B-24 target is used for 50 feet combat events; the B-18 for full-distance combat events. The falling plates (see drawings M-8, M-9 and M-10) are 8 inch round discs made from .375 (3/8) inch thick steel and must conform to American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) A-321 requirements for plate steel with a minimum surface hardness of 400 BHN. The speed targets (see drawings M-11 through M-14) are also to be made from .375 (3/8) inch thick steel and must conform to the same specifications given for falling plates. The NRA D-1 (Bianchi) targets may be made from paper or cardboard with all scoring lines of low visibility. These targets are available under the trademark "Bianchi Target" (cardboard) or from NRA licensed target manufacturers under the designation of NRA D-1 (paper). Specifications for metallic target frames or support mechanisms must also meet ASTM A-321 requirements, especially the surfaces exposed to direct bullet strike. 3.02.3.3 Moving Target Mechanisms 3.02.3.3.1 Targets must be mounted on a carrier system designed to move freely at a rate of 10 feet per second, to stop easily and to reverse for the second run. The operation should be relatively silent, with well lubricated rails and silent (mercury) electrical switching so that a competitor cannot anticipate target movement. The target carrier must be wide enough to stabilize the moving target. Heavy target frames should be discarded in favor of lightweight material, such as cardboard, which allows the bullet to pass through with little resistance. Barriers designed to II-9-13 protect the carrier mechanism must also be capable of protecting the surface over which the carrier must move. 3.02.3.4 Lighting 3.02.3.4.1 Artificial lighting of ranges is authorized according to the NRA rulebook. Ranges of 50 yards or shorter are easiest to light. Use metal halide or a combination of metal halide and high pressure sodium lamps. The type of lamp will vary with the range, depending on the target, surface colors, angle of target engagement and firing line covers. It is suggested that a lighting plan be developed by an illumination engineer. 3.03 Materials 3.03.1 Firing Line to Target Line 3.03.1.1 Existing soil is the most common material used for the range surface areas. Grading may be necessary at the firing and target line areas. Concrete is often used on firing line areas to maintain stability of the surface. Take precautions during grading operations to slope surfaces, if possible, toward the target area to reduce ricochet potential. 3.03.2 Firing Line Area 3.03.2.1 Shooters generally prefer natural turf along the firing line area. However, in areas where drainage is a problem or natural surfaces require stable materials, consider artificial surfaces. Concrete, crushed stone, washed gravel, asphalt or a combination of these materials are suitable for all positions except prone. On firing lines where prone shooting is allowed, natural turf is preferred, although other materials may be used. Note: Asphalt is not desirable for firing point surface material. 3.03.3 Target Line Area 3.03.3.1 Materials for the target line area are limited to natural soils and clean fill for the backstop area. Remove any materials containing heavy rock or debris. Materials used to replace eroded areas or to retain slope angles on the backstop must be clean fill only. 3.03.3.2 Number Boards 3.03.3.2.1 Tempered masonite or sheet metal are good materials for number boards. Plywood will require frequent maintenance or replacement due to weather-related deterioration. 3.03.3.3 Targets 3.03.3.3.1 Corrugated cardboard is a good choice for backing on which to paste target faces. Caution: Use only quality steel for speed and falling plate assembly. It is expensive but will last longer. Do not use steel with unknown characteristics. 3.03.4 Administrative Structures 3.03.4.1 At permanent range facilities, a building for target storage, maintenance and range operations enhances the overall facility. Sheds or flat roof buildings are excellent because construction II-9-14 need not be complicated. Materials for such buildings depend on design, use and available maintenance funds. Concrete block, brick, stone or precast concrete offer long-term, low- maintenance service, yet cost more than wood frame construction. Wood frame buildings generally cost less initially, but more in maintenance over the years. 3.03.4.2 Control Towers 3.03.4.2.1 Materials for control towers vary according to the use for the tower. For example, on ranges where shooters move to different firing lines, the tower must be portable. On fixed firing line ranges, the tower may be permanent. Open wood framing is best for the portable tower, while concrete construction is best for permanent installations. 3.03.5 Other Considerations 3.03.5.1 Natural turf is suggested where soil conditions are sandy and do not offer proper footing. For action pistol events, use artificial surfaces or other soils to stabilize the surface. Shooters must have sure footing to perform safely. Consider concrete or crushed rock. Do not use asphalt, unless other materials are not available. 3.03.5.2 Side Berms 3.03.5.2.1 Side berms for action pistol ranges are recommended to meet the same standards as backstops. Clean fill or sandbag-supported earth is suggested as one alternative. Where soil conditions require special considerations to retain slope, surface areas where bullets will strike must remain free of any hardened material capable of causing ricochets. Utilization of a Geocell product will help with the stabilization of the sideberm construction. (refer to Products and Services listing Section IV Chapter 1for contact information 3.03.5.3 Baffles 3.03.5.3.1 Materials for baffles must follow the specifications given on drawings A-24, B/A-20, and C-8. 3.03.5.4 Walls 3.03.5.4.1 Walls are best constructed using smooth surface concrete but may be built from wood, wood and steel laminate, or wood and gravel combinations. (See drawings A-24, AC-3, and B/C-4.) For wood and steel laminate, 10 gauge steel is set between two layers of wood. T he wood covering the side where bullets may strike must be a minimum of 1 inch thick. To preserve wood, paint all surfaces with an exterior flat, buff-color paint. Shingle stain may also be used. Walls built with wood and gravel should be constructed according to details provided on drawing A-24. 3.03.5.4.2 Panels used to change the regular event to the "modified" version must be either portable or built on rollers. This will allow the panel to be moved easily. II-9-15 ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.01.1 Equipment for the action pistol range need not be complicated. However, when equipping a range, consider long-term use and ease of operation. Time spent in selecting or building quality equipment will pay long-term dividends and reduce maintenance costs. Build metallic targets from quality steel, using proper cutting and welding techniques so as not to damage the surface or alloy characteristics. 4.02 Maintenance 4.02.1 Maintenance includes repairing or replacing metallic targets, target stands, motors and gears on the moving target mechanisms, turning target mechanisms, barricades and wooden target frames. Regular upkeep assures that the facility works dependably. Attention to maintenance often spells the difference between successful range events and the loss of shooters to a better facility. Plan for future needs by stocking spare parts, ample supplies of targets, replacement target frames and new metallic targets. Above all, plan for maintenance by designing equipment for ease of replacement. For example, a one-piece through-pin holding all five falling plates is harder to remove to replace a broken center target than is a single hinge pin for each target. Wooden target frames on which the paper targets are mounted should be duplicated; that is, a spare for each target with the appropriate number stenciled thereon for easy identification. A good rule is to replace a broken target or target frame within the week following an event. Good routine maintenance means no last minute work parties before an event. 4.02.2 Buildings and grounds maintenance also protects the investment in the facility. A well-kept range is a sign of pride in the shooting sports. II-9-16 ARTICLE 5. APPENDIX 5.01 Target Specifications Chart Event Type Target Spacing Min. width Distance Name Target Edge to Edge of range vs. or Range number of number of y = yds targets banks m = meters --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Los Alamitos D-1 12 in/ 3 45'- 4 7, 10, 25 y Intl. Rapid D-1 18 in/ 5 45'- 3 25 m Adv. Mil. D-1 36 in/ 3 45'- 4 10, 25, 50 y Adv. Mil. NRA-B6 none / 1 45'- 0 50 y Barricade D-1 6 ft/ 2 45'- 4 10, 15, 20, 25 y Tyro D-1 36 in/ 3 45'- 4 10 y Practical D-1 36 in/ 2 45'- 5 10, 15, 20, 25 y Flying M D-1/F 2 D-1/1 FP 60'- 2 7, 10, 15 y Falling Plate 8"disc 12 in/ 5 60'- 4 10, 15, 20, 25 y Speed Event Steel 36 in/ 5 60'- 1 10 y Moving Tgt (M) D-1 none / 1 75'- 1 10, 15, 20, 25 y Moving Tgt D-1 none / 1 75'- 1 7, 15, 25 y Combat Event B-24 none / 1 ? 7, 25, 50 y 5.02 Range Control and Commands The safety of competitors, range personnel, spectators and the public requires constant attention to careful handling of firearms and caution in moving about the range. Range officers are entrusted with enforcing the rules, assisted by members and users. (1) Loud or abusive language is not permitted. (2) Users must clean up their assigned firing positions. (3) A range officer repeats the chief range officer's commands when those commands cannot be clearly heard by competitors under his supervision. In the absence of a range officer, any member or user must relay the command when it involves safety, such as cease-fire, etc. (4) When an event is being conducted, the following commands are used: STAND BY! - Alerts the shooter to indicate that firing is ready to begin. If the shooter isn't ready, the official delays the next command briefly. READY! - Indicates the shooter is prepared to engage the target. COMMENCE FIRE! - Use an audible or visible signal or some other means called for by the event program to signal the start of shooting on the line. II-9-17 5.03 Ballistics table Calculated maximum ranges. Bullet Bullet wt. Bullet Assumed MV. Calculated max. Range Caliber/Name (grs) Type (fps) (yards) (miles) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Pistols .22 LR HV 37 Lead 1255 1895 1.08 .22 Long Rifle 40 Lead 1150 1922 1.09 .32 S&W Long 98 Lead 705 1213 .69 9 MM 115 FMC 1155 1907 1.08 9 MM 124 FMJ 1120 1935 1.10 9 MM 147 HP 1010 2288 1.30 .38 Special 110 JHP 995 1908 1.08 .38 Special 148 WC 710 747 0.42 .38 Special 158 LHP 890 1797 1.02 .357 Magnum 158 JSP 1235 2004 1.14 40 S&W 150 JHP 1140 1736 0.99 40 S&W 180 JHP 985 1940 1.10 10 MM 150 JHP 1325 1743 0.99 10 MM 180 JHP 1030 1969 1.12 40 Mag 180 JHP 1610 1849 1.05 44 Mag 240 JHP 1180 2492 1.42 45 ACP 185 JHP 950 1914 1.09 45 ACP 230 FMJ 850 1624 0.92 II-9-18 National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section II Chapter 10 OUTDOOR SILHOUETTE Range Services ©2012 II-10-2 II-10-3 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.03 Chapter Organization 1.04 Cross Reference ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.02 Silhouette Range Rules ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 General Range Layout 3.02 Range Dimensions ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.02 Maintenance ARTICLE 5. APPENDIX 5.01 Target Setting Table 8 2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). II-10-4 II-10-5 ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 This chapter defines range construction, target specifications, and berm construction for silhouette ranges. NRA has several silhouette programs which stem from the original high power version of Siluetas Metalicas. These are: long range pistol silhouette, hunter's pistol and smallbore hunter's pistol, smallbore pistol, black powder cartridge rifle, air pistol, high power rifle, smallbore rifle and air rifle. 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.02.1 The modern form of silhouette shooting had its beginnings in Mexico in the 1950s and was introduced north of the border in the 1960s. Since being brought to the United States, silhouette shooting has grown from the original high power rifle version to include virtually all types of firearms and air guns. 1.03 Chapter Organization 1.03.1 This chapter is organized into five sections: (1) General information; (2) Safety; (3) Technical specifications; (4) Equipment operations and maintenance; and (5) Appendix. 1.04 Cross Reference 1.04.1 NRA Range Source Book References a. General Information, Section I, Chapter 1 b. General Outdoor Information, Section II, Chapter 1 c. Safety Plan, Section I, Chapter 2 d. Planning and Design, Section I, Chapter 3 e. Organization and Management, Section I, Chapter 4 f. Operations and Maintenance, Section I, Chapter 5 g. Outdoor Range Design Criteria, Section II, Chapter 2 h. Outdoor Range Operations and Maintenance, Section II, Chapter 3 1.04.2 NRA Rule Books (available online at http://www.nrahq.org/compete/nra-rule-books.asp ) a. NRA Pistol Silhouette Rule Book b. NRA Rifle Silhouette Rule Book II-10-6 ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.01.1 With each individual type of silhouette shooting, be it rifle or pistol, range design requirements change. While all silhouette shooting activities may be fired on the same piece of ground, special precautions must be taken during the site selection process to guarantee that a multiple use range will work as intended. It is important that the use limitations, if any of firearms, (Such as prohibiting rifles which are capable of exceeding the defined boundaries for a pistol range) be defined and enforced. On silhouette ranges, perhaps more so than on others, there is the potential for use outside design specifications. This must be addressed directly in the range rules, as well as in planning and design. (See Section I, Chapter 2, Safety Plan for guidance.) 2.02 Silhouette Range Rules 2.02.1 General: a. Range rules and commands must be obeyed immediately at all times. b. Firearms, ammunition, target type and range layout must be compatible. c. Targets must conform to specific tolerances and agree with specifications suited to each activity. d. Dented, bent, cratered, dished or rough surfaced targets must be replaced. e. Silhouette stands must be constructed to minimize ricochets and splatter. 2.02.2 Air Guns a. Up to .22 caliber lead pellets are allowed. BBs are prohibited. BBs damage targets and can bounce back. II-10-7 ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 General Range Layout 3.01.1 All silhouette ranges have the same basic requirements: they must provide for the four different types of targets: chickens, pigs, turkeys and rams. Targets may be spaced according to the tables provided in the Appendix to this chapter. For high power and long range pistol ranges, a typical layout includes bunkers behind each target line berm to protect range personnel who remain down range to reset targets. 3.01.2 Distance 3.01.2.1 Targets are normally set at known distances as provided in the NRA silhouette rules, but may be set at shorter ranges by proportionately scaling the target size down to meet the available distance at a particular site. For example, if 500 meters are not available but activities include high power rifle, targets are simply scaled to the available distance, but not less than 200 yards. 3.01.3 Direct Fire Zone 3.01.3.1 The direct fire zone is defined as that area into which all shots are fired during a normal course of fire. The direct fire zone includes all directions and angles of fire used on a range while shooting at a specific target corresponding to a specific firing point. 3.01.4 Firing Line Area 3.01.4.1 Width 3.01.4.1.1 The minimum firing line width is determined by the number of firing points (Minimum of four, one for each bank of five targets). The minimum width for concrete pads poured for each firing point should be 6 feet and spaced 10 feet on center. This will allow a space of 4 feet between concrete pads thus providing separation of shooter areas. It is suggested that construction of target banks be set up to include a minimum of 5 feet between each bank of targets, but may be less depending upon other use criteria. For example, spacing between banks of targets can be as small as two feet where a gong or suspended sighting target is installed. 3.01.4.2 Depth 3.01.4.2.1 Depth of firing line is determined by space requirements for the shooter, the spotter and a scorekeeper. A suggested minimum for the firing line depth is 6 feet for the standing position and 8 feet where prone shooting is allowed. 3.01.4.3 Firing Points 3.01.4.3.1 Firing points are laid out according to the maximum dimension of the target bank. Where banks of targets are small, such as air gun or smallbore rifle, a minimum width and depth of 6 feet is suggested. For high power rifle the same dimension is suitable; for Long Range Pistol and Hunter's pistol, where the prone or Creedmore position is used, the depth of the firing line slab or shooter area should be a minimum of 8 feet. II-10-8 3.01.4.4 Administrative Space 3.01.4.4.1 All ranges must provide adequate space for freedom of movement by the shooter, scorekeeper and spotter. Design the range to include areas for all shooting activities, such as support areas in which statistical or other work can be conducted. Support areas may include a ramada or shed type roof to provide protection from the sun and weather, a barbecue pit, range buildings or simply an area for temporary support facilities. Dimensions for support areas depend on how many shooters are to be accommodated at one time. Planning, therefore, is an important aspect in deciding on what support facilities will be needed. 3.01.4.4.2 Spectator Areas 3.01.4.4.2.1 Set up spectator areas away from the firing line and shooter control areas. Set up special barriers to control range movement and provide seating arrangements. Covering the spectator area should also be considered, especially in hot climates. 3.01.4.4.3 Firing Line Cover 3.01.4.4.3.1 Firing line covers are an added feature that aid the comfort of shooters, but are not required. Firing line covers must not provide a wind break. (See drawing A -7) 3.01.4.4.3.2 Gun racks should be built in units based on two slots per firing position. Depending upon usage factors, this may be increased to accommodate more shooters. Gun racks should be located a minimum of 10 feet behind the firing line. 3.01.4.4.3.3 Shooting stands built to hold ammunition and firearms are constructed 3 feet high and with a top surface 1 foot wide and 18 inches long. Special U shaped brackets are attached to those used on rifle ranges to cradle a rifle during the time shooters are preparing to fire or during cease-fires. For pistol ranges, the surface area may be increased to provide additional room. However, the size mentioned above is generally sufficient. Also refer to product and services listing in the Appendix for manufacturer of molded shooting stand tops. 3.01.4.4.3.4 Scoring stands when used are set up to provide a place for the scorer to stand or sit. They are equipped with a clipboard and chair. 3.01.5 Target Line Area 3.01.5.1 Frames and Stands 3.01.5.1.1 Silhouette targets are placed on stands while frames are used for hanging gongs. Target stands should be set two to three feet above the ground so that targets will fall free of the stand when hit. Stands must be designed and built to provide sufficient stability to withstand bullet strikes and high winds. A frequent misconception is that materials used to build target stands and frames need not meet the same requirements as the targets. To gain long service life out of stands, design specifications must include the use of quality steel. Target stands and frames must conform to ASTM A-36 requirements for angle iron and ASTM A-321 requirements for metal surfaces exposed to direct hits. Materials used must also offer maximum stability to prevent bullet strikes from toppling the remaining targets. This design reduces maintenance and aids in ricochet and splatter control. II-10-9 3.01.5.1.2 Numbers or other identifiers are required to designate the bank of targets by placing a board above or below the center of each bank of targets (Rule 6.6). Firing points are generally marked by a small wooden silhouette of the target type being fired upon with a number for easy identification. This small silhouette may be mounted on a post or gun rest located on each firing point. The dimensions of these signs vary. 3.01.5.2 Target Assembly 3.01.5.2.1 If targets are made on-site instead of purchasing commercial targets, two factors must be evaluated: (1) cost of specialized equipment needed to cut certain types of steel plate as opposed to the cost of commercial targets; and (2) the life expectancy of these targets. These two factors must be carefully evaluated because often the tendency is to purchase bulk steel of unknown qualities. Using bulk steel may work for smallbore rifles and pistols, but not for centerfire rifles and pistols. In most instances, those who opt for on-site target construction have found that these targets often do not provide a satisfactory service life. Quality targets can be made on-site, but care must be taken in not only selecting the steel, but in the cutting and welding as well. 3.01.5.3 Targets 3.01.5.3.1 Targets must conform to ASTM A-321 requirements for plate steel. The surface must be abrasion free, and the feet must be welded to the target using the "stinger bead" method. Targets for high power rifle are 2 inch thick for chickens and pigs and δ inch thick for turkeys and rams. The same thicknesses are used for full-size and half-size long range pistol targets. Smallbore rifle targets must be no less than 3 inch nor more than 2 inch thick for chickens and no less than 3 inch for pigs, turkeys and rams. Hunter's pistol takes two thicknesses, one for smallbore hunter's pistol and one for hunter's pistol. Smallbore hunter's pistol uses δ inch thick steel for chickens, 3/16 inch for rams and 3 inch for turkeys and pigs. Hunter's pistol targets are δ inch thick. Note: Hunter's pistol chickens must be made of steel having a minimum hardness of 360 BHN. Example: U.S. Steel T-1A-AR360. Smallbore pistol targets are δ inch thick for chickens, 3 inch for pigs and turkeys and 3/16 inch for rams. All air gun targets are to be made of 3/16 inch cold rolled steel and heliarc welded to feet, 2 inch wide and 1 inch long, of the same material. 3.01.5.3.2 The "feet" upon which the silhouettes rest are to be made from the same type steel as the target. For High power rifle and Long Range pistol dimensions for the feet are 3 inches wide by 4 inches long for the chicken; 2 inches by 4 inches for each leg of the pig; 3 inches wide by 8 inches long for the turkey; and 4 inches wide by 5 inches long for each leg of the sheep. For Hunter's Pistol and Smallbore Hunter's Pistol, all feet are to be 2 inches wide by 4 inches long. It is permissible to weld the pig’s legs to one single piece of steel rather than two. On the one-fifth scale targets used for Smallbore Rifle, all feet are 1 inch wide by 2 inches long. 3.01.5.3.3 Silhouette target steel must have a surface hardness of between 250 BHN to 500 BHN, depending upon the calibers used. High power rifle targets must meet very rigid requirements to last beyond the first few hits. High power rifle silhouette targets must be manufactured from steel plate meeting ASTM A-321 requirements for steel plate, have a surface hardness of 400 BHN to 500 BHN and a surface that is abrasion resistant. Quality steel, although more expensive than some types, will provide years of use with minimal maintenance. II-10-10 3.01.5.4 Backstop 3.01.5.4.1 Backstops behind each bank of targets are desirable, but are not required by the rules, except for national championships. The primary purpose of these is to allow shooters and spotters to observe bullet impact. Natural terrain features may be used instead of man-made embankments. Earthen berms built in front of the targets protect the stands and reduce maintenance costs. Backstop heights vary according to the target used. 3.01.5.5 Bunkers 3.01.5.5.1 For high power rifle and long range pistol, where target setters remain down range, install bunkers behind each berm to protect target setters. This requirement is usually a real necessity on high power and long range pistol silhouette ranges, where a significant amount of time is needed to reset targets should target setters have to go downrange each time. Bunkers are protected by earthen berms behind each bank of targets. The bunker doorway must face away from the next longer range bank of targets. 3.01.6 Projectile Containment 3.01.6.1 Projectile containment techniques for silhouette ranges will change somewhat from those used for conventional ranges because of silhouette target placement or spacing on the stands. Instead of shooting at one target directly down range, silhouette shooters shoot at five different targets set at slightly varying angles right and left of the target bank centerline. 3.01.7 Administrative Facilities 3.01.7.1 Buildings 3.01.7.1.1 To aid in administration, a shed or building large enough to house operations personnel can be a factor in obtaining sufficient volunteer help. Investing in an enclosure to provide observation of shooting activities, with clean restrooms and rest areas, is an added feature to any range facility. Storage buildings are a plus and can be used to store targets, target stands and other equipment. 3.01.7.2 Communications 3.01.7.2.1 A quality communications system is one way to provide clear, distinct transmissions along the line linking control tower operators, range officers and target setters. To provide such communications on silhouette ranges, three types of communications are available: (1) two way radios; (2) telephone systems; and (3) public address systems. Radios are normally restricted to the chief range officer, block officials and tower operators but may also be used to communicate with target setters. Hard-wired telephones are usually used for communications between the target setters and the line officer. They are needed most on high power rifle ranges where travel from the firing line down range to reset targets would involve a significant delay in shooting activities. Public address systems are used on the line to provide communications during range operations. Radios should be used to supplement other communications, not to replace them. 3.01.7.2.2 Control towers (see drawing A-8) can be considered a part of range communications and are usually located at the centerpoint of the firing line and offset behind the firing line to prevent any interference with shooters. For small ranges, towers may not be necessary. Control II-10-11 towers should be built high enough to allow observation of all firing points, and will vary in height according to range width. CAUTION: Where firing line covers are used, install them so they do not obstruct the tower operator's vision. 3.01.8 Other Considerations 3.01.8.1 Surface Grade 3.01.8.1.1 Surface grade on the silhouette range can be completely natural. Therefore, any grading operations should not call for extraordinary earth moving operations. Significant variations in grade between the level of the targets and the firing point can be alleviated by elevating the firing line or the target line. Where drainage is inadequate, some grading may be necessary or in extreme cases, storm swales may be required. 3.01.8.2 Side Berms 3.01.8.2.1 Earthen side berms are required where adjacent areas are used. Side berms may also help reduce sound levels and can be a worthwhile option in areas where nearby residential areas exist. Note: Where projectile containment areas are restricted, range design should include side berms used in conjunction with other safety barriers, such as overhead and ground baffles. Side berms alone are not adequate to reduce the projectile containment area. The utilization of Geocell materials can aid with the construction of the sideberm allowing construction of vertical walls saving needed space between ranges. (Refer to Section IV Range Products and Services). 3.01.8.3 Baffles 3.01.8.3.1 Baffles may be needed on silhouette ranges to enhance projectile containment. Exact design requires planning and design work to determine how they might be installed on a particular site. Baffles must be designed (see drawings A-11, A-13and A-14) to contain both direct and indirect bullet strikes according to the placement of targets on a range. Vertical baffles as shown in drawing A-13 may not be the best design for most silhouette range applications and may require redesign. Other designs are available, but must be evaluated for suitability before use. (See drawing A-29) For air gun silhouette ranges, baffles can be constructed very simply from drapery materials, but must also be tested according to site requirements. 3.01.8.4 Walls 3.01.8.4.1 Walls may be used in place of side berms to protect adjacent areas or divide ranges into manageable sections. Walls may be constructed from materials selected for their ability to absorb direct bullet impact. Remember, walls are used to protect adjacent areas only. Walls alone will not the reduce projectile containment area. II-10-12 3.02 Range Dimensions 3.02.1 Distances 3.02.1.1 The following chart provides distances commonly used on silhouette ranges: Long Range Pistol: 50, 100, 150 and 200 meters Hunter's Pistol: 40, 50, 75 and 100 meters or yards Air Pistol : 10, 12.5, 15 and 18 yards High power Rifle: 200, 300, 385 and 500 meters or yards Black powder Cartridge Rifle: 200, 300, 385 and 500 meters or yards Smallbore Rifle: 40, 60, 77 and 100 meters or yards Air Rifle: 20, 30, 36 and 45 yards 3.02.1.2 When laying out these distances, a plus or minus 1 percent variation is permissible. Where available range distances do not permit targets to be placed at their maximum specified distances, targets may be proportionately scaled down to the available range; however, under no circumstances may high power and black powder cartridge rifle silhouettes be fired on at less than 200 yards; smallbore rifle silhouettes be fired on at less than 40 yards; long range pistol at less than 50 yards; and hunter's and smallbore pistol at less than 25 yards. II-10-13 ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.01.1 Equipment for the silhouette range includes targets, target stands, target frames, a welder, telephone communications and perhaps a couple of two-way radios. Telephones are best used where bunkers are used to protect target setters. It is important to set up this communications network with individual lines running to each of the four bunkers, with a single control panel located at the firing line command point. The reason for the individual line is that clear, distinct communications with each individual target setter is imperative. Party lines could pose a safety hazard. A panel located at the firing line must be equipped with an electronic warning light that automatically turns on a light or audible alarm when a target setter leaves his assigned bunker prematurely. 4.02 Maintenance 4.02.1 Equipment maintenance should prove minimal, provided quality target material is obtained and proper welding techniques are used. The equipment checklist includes such items as targets, target frames, communications lines, telephones and safety alert systems. By installing the telephone and electrical wiring in PVC pipes underground, removing and replacing this material is easy. Target maintenance should be evaluated after each event and any bent, cratered, pockmarked or broken target must be replaced immediately. Pockmarks can be welded full and ground smooth, broken targets can be welded back together and again ground smooth. Bent targets are usually replaced, although it is possible to heat the metal, straighten the target and then re-temper it. The best alternative is to take the targets to a professional welder for repairs. II-10-14 ARTICLE 5. APPENDIX 5.01 Target Setting Tables ALLOWABLE TARGET LINE WIDTH VARIATIONS FOR A SET OF 5 TARGETS MINIMUM TO MAXIMUM Chicken Pig Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Long Range Pistol 10'6" 22'2" 16'6" 34'10" --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Hunter's Pistol & Smallbore Pistol 5'3" 10'6" 8'3" 17'5" --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Air Pistol 1'0" 2'3" 1'8" 3'6" --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Turkey Sheep Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Long Range Pistol 14'3" 30'1" 24'0" 50'8" --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Hunter's Pistol & Smallbore Pistol 7'12" 15'2" 12'0" 25'4" --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Air Pistol 1'5" 3'0" 2'5" 5'1" Chicken Pig Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- High power, Black powder, Cartridge Rifle, and Cowboy 10'6" 22'2" 16'6" 34'10" Lever Action --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Smallbore Rifle 2'1" 4'5" 3'4" 7'0" --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Air Rifle 1'0" 2'3" 1'8" 3'6" --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Cowboy Pistol Cartridge 5’3” 10’6” 8’3’ 17’5” And Smallbore II-10-15 Turkey Sheep Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- High power, Black powder, Cartridge Rifle, and Cowboy 14'3" 30'1" 24'0" 50'8" Lever Action --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Smallbore Rifle 2'10" 6'0" 4'10" 10'2" --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Air Rifle 1'5" 3'0" 2'5" 5'1" --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Cowboy Pistol Cartridge 7’1” 15’1” 12’ 25’4” and Smallbore II-10-16 Range Services ©2012 National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section II Chapter 11 COMPETITION SHOTGUN II-11-1 II-11-2 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.03 Chapter Organization 1.04 Cross Reference ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 ATA and International Trap Fields 3.02 NSSA and International Skeet 3.03 Sporting Clays 3.04 Shotgun Field Dimensions ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.02 Maintenance ARTICLE 5. APPENDIX 5.01 ATA Traphouse Dimensions 8 2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). II-11-3 II-11-4 ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 This chapter provides information on the design, layout and construction of competition trap, skeet and sporting clays fields. Subjects include how to build international trap bunkers and convert NSSA skeet fields to meet international rules. 1.01.2 Some information contained in this chapter will be repeated several times since various shotgun fields share many similarities. For example, shotfall zones are identical in length, but shot dispersion varies according to each shooting activity. (See drawings A-22, A-23, and A-26) 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.02.1 The original shotgun competitions were developed by hunters seeking to sharpen their off-season skills. Today, however, a majority of targets are thrown for practice or competition, prompting the hunter to keep searching for shotgun activities that simulate field conditions. Hunters found sporting clays attractive, but the new game quickly became a competitive sport governed by specific rules. Trap shooting is a popular sport with a long distinguished history. The first mention of the sport occurred in 1793 in an English publication titled "Sporting Magazine." The first record of trapshooting in America dates to 1831 in Cincinnati, Ohio, and the first National Championships was held in 1900 in Queens, Long Island, N.Y. Trapshooting, too was originally designed to provide training for shotgunners to maintain their skills during the off-season. Today the sport is one of the largest shooting activities in America. International trap first appeared in the Olympics in 1908, with skeet introduced in 1968. 1.03 Chapter Organization 1.03.1 This chapter is organized into five sections: (1) General; (2) Safety; (3) Technical Specifications; (4) Equipment Operations and Maintenance; (5) Appendix. 1.04 Cross Reference 1.04.1 Range Source Book References (a) General Information, Section I, Chapter 2 (b) Construction Guidelines, Section II, Chapter 1, Article 6 (c) Safety Plan, Section I, Chapter 2 (d) Planning and Design, Section I, Chapter 3 (e) Miscellaneous Shotgun, Section II, Chapter 12 (f) Outdoor Hunter Simulation, Sect. II, Chap. 17 (g) Outdoor Informal Training, Sect. II, Chap. 14 1.04.1.2 Related Ranges with Common Range Components (a) International Trap and Skeet 1.04.2 Program and Competition Rules II-11-5 1.04.2.1 NRA Rules and Program guidelines (a) Leagues (b) Training Programs (c) Competition Rules 1.04.2.2 Other Related Rules/Programs (a) Amateur Trapshooting Association (ATA) (b) National Skeet Shooting Association (NSSA) (c) National Sporting Clays Association (NSCA) (d) ISSF – International Shooting Sports Federation (e) USA Shooting (USAS) (U.S. International Rules) II-11-6 ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.01.1 Each trap and skeet field may be operated and supervised by a field operator, referee or puller. Each field operator, new and experienced, should participate in continuing education programs. Through such programs, safety can be greatly enhanced. Activities on shotgun fields are generally fast moving. Therefore, field operators must be trained to solve problems quickly and properly. The field operator monitors shooter activity on his assigned field and sees to it that shooters follow range rules and procedures. Referees and pullers also monitor shooter activity, but the important difference is that these individuals may not be trained to perform the full duties of a field operator. The following rules are suggested as a guide when shotgun facilities managers develop training programs and safety manuals. Basic training programs, for example, should include: how to load, how to stand on a station, how to hold a shotgun, how to track a moving target and when to shoot. 2.01.2 Safety Rules for All Shotgun Facilities (a) Obey range rules and commands at all times -- immediately. (b) In the event of a malfunction, when a live round remains in the gun, the shooter must keep the gun pointed in a safe direction and seek assistance. All shooting on the affected field ceases until the condition has been corrected. In case of a hangfire or misfire, do not open the gun for at least 30 seconds. (c) Only firearms designed to use shotshells and designed to be fired from the shoulder are permitted. (d) When used by competitive shooters, shotguns equipped with release triggers are permitted, in some disciplines. (e) Novice shooters must be accompanied by an experienced shooter at all times. (f) Except for patterning, all shooting must be at clay targets thrown from approved machines. Patterning must be restricted to a separate area. (g) Shot size for patterning may exceed the restrictions for target shooting, and sizes may be further limited depending upon the shotfall zone dimensions. (h) Guns must be unloaded and the actions kept open at all times except when the shooter is on a firing station. Loading is permitted only when it is the shooter's turn to shoot. Break action shotguns may be closed for storage in a gun case or rack, but must be opened immediately upon removal from the rack or case. (i) All firearms must be opened immediately after shooting and before the shooter turns to leave the shooting station. Firearms must be carried pointed in a safe direction. Firearms carried over a shoulder must have the barrel pointed forward. (j) Only one shell is loaded at a time, unless doubles are thrown. Note: Two shells are allowed for international trapshooting and are required on station 4 (singles) in International Skeet. (k) Picking up empty shotshells during a round of shooting is prohibited. (l) No one is allowed past the firing line or the most forward shooting position at any time while the field is in use. (m) Damascus or twist steel barrels should be permitted only for blackpowder guns. (n) A range officer may inspect ammunition and reject its use if it does not conform to range rules or the rules of the shooting activity being conducted. (o) The practice of tracking targets with an unloaded gun is prohibited, unless the shooter is on a station and ready to shoot. II-11-7 2.01.3 SKEET SAFETY RULES (a) Shot sizes are limited to a maximum of No. 71/ 2 and a minimum of No. 9 (NSSA Rule 1B-1F) and shotguns must not be larger than 12 gauge. (b) Only target loads are to be used. High velocity or magnum loads are prohibited. Shotshell loads must not exceed 1 χ ounces of shot and 3 Grams equivalent of powder in 12 ga. Maximum shot wt. in: 20 ga = 7/8 oz, 28 ga = ¾ oz, and .410 bore = ½ oz. (Exception: international shotshells, see USAS rulebook.) (c) No one is allowed to enter the field past the high house or the opening in the low house when live firing is underway on that particular field or on adjacent fields. (d) No one is allowed to pick up spent shotshells across the base chord line (The line between stations 1 and 7) until firing has ceased on that field and adjacent fields. (e) Shooters on a firing station must not leave the station or change positions until the gun is unloaded and the action is open. 2.01.4 TRAP SAFETY RULES (a) Shot sizes are limited to a maximum of No.7 1/2 and shotguns no larger than 12 gauge. (b) Shotshell loads must be standard trap loads. High velocity and magnum loads are not permitted. Shotshell loads must not exceed 1 χ ounce of shot and 3 dram equivalent of powder. (Exception: international shotshell loads. See USAS rulebook.) (c) Except for field operators and maintenance personnel, no one is allowed to enter the field forward of the 16-yard line during the course of a round, even though firing has stopped. (d) Shooters on a station are not allowed to change stations or leave a station unless the shotgun is open and unloaded. Exception: In international trapshooting an over and under shotgun may be broken open with shells remaining in the chambers between stations (Except when moving from station 5 to station 6 which is behind station 1). (e) In handicap shooting there shall be no more than 2 yards difference between adjacent shooters in the squad, and no more than a total difference of 3 yards in a squad. (f) Picking up unbroken clay targets is permitted only when range operations are completed. 2.01.5 SPORTING CLAYS RANGE RULES (a) Shot sizes are limited to a maximum of No. 71/ 2. (b) Shotguns 12 gauge and under are permitted. (c) Hand traps may be used, provided throwing positions are designed to protect the trap operator. (d) Competition targets must only be thrown from designated positions and in directions or elevations required for safety. (e) Only range personnel are authorized in the down range area and only after a cease-fire is called and firearms are open and unloaded. II-11-8 ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 ATA AND INTERNATIONAL TRAP FIELDS 3.01.1 In ATA trap a round consists of 25 targets and the round is shot from five different stations, five shots per station. When the number five shooter has fired his fifth shot, the field operator commands "Move" and each shooter proceeds to the next station. Three separate events are conducted in ATA trapshooting, 16-yard singles, handicap and doubles. Singles and doubles events are shot at 16 yards, while handicap shooting is shot from 18 to 27 yards. In handicap shooting, the principle applied is that the further back a shooter stands, the greater the difficulty in breaking targets. 3.01.2 Automatic Trap (Alternate to Olympic Trap) 3.01.2.1 Automatic trap is a modified trap that oscillates in both horizontal and vertical directions. To qualify for competition, the traphouse roof must be on the same horizontal plane as the shooting stations, with minimal roof slope for drainage. Automatic trap uses a single trap machine modified to throw targets at all angles, elevations and distances. These modifications call for installing a stronger throwing arm spring and a vertical angle change motor for elevation changes. Harder international targets must be used since regular trap targets designed for shorter throwing distances will break under the added throwing arm acceleration. These modifications will not prevent the machine from being used for ATA trap. By reducing tension on the throwing arm spring and turning the vertical change motor off, along with a few other minor adjustments, the machine can be returned to regular service. 3.01.2.2 A combination traphouse designed for multiple use requires special modifications to conduct both ATA and international events. Build the traphouse so that the concrete pier or machine mounting platform, above ground walls, and attachment hardware can be converted for each activity. (See drawing A-28.) 3.01.2.3 International Trap 3.01.2.3.1 International trap is shot on a 15 trap bunker that must be constructed according to UIT specifications. International and automatic trap consists of 25 targets each with six shooters on a squad. Having six shooters allows one shooter to be walking from station 5 to station 6 (Behind station 1) at all times. Shooters move to the next station after firing at one target. Shooters may shoot two shells at each target. A target is scored dead whether hit with the first or second shot. 3.01.3 Shotfall Zones 3.01.3.1 Shotfall zones for trap fields are laid out to include all angles common to trapshooting, providing ample space exists for shotfall zones. *Note the recommended depth for the shotfall zone is 300 yards or 900 feet. However, these shotfall zones can be reduced, if the range controls type of ammunition and the size of the shot. (See drawing A-23 for an illustration of the shotfall zones.) 3.01.4 Firing Stations 3.01.4.1 Firing stations for ATA trap fields extend from 16 to 27 yards, as measured from reference point located on the "normal line.≅ The reference point is located at the intersection of the normal line II-11-9 and the centerline of the trap house. The normal line is located 1.5 or 2.5 feet back from the front edge of the trap house roof. The Normal line is depicted as Baseline ΑA.≅ (See drawing A-23.) 3.01.4.2 Firing stations on international trap installations are laid out parallel to and 15 meters behind the inside edge of the front wall of the traphouse. These shooting stations, 1 meter square, may be included in the walkway, but must be identified by painted lines, movable mats or grooves etched in the concrete. 3.01.5 Target Area 3.01.5.1 Target areas for ATA trap are defined by the angle limitations of the trap machine. For singles trap, current ATA rules require the maximum lateral target angles to be at least 17 degrees left and right of straightaway. Most trap clubs opt to keep traps set at that limitation although targets up to 27 degrees left or right of straightaway are still “legal” ATA targets. For doubles trap, the flight of the two targets is fixed to throw one target 17 degrees to the left and one 17 degrees to the right. 3.01.5.2 Target areas for international trap are determined by the widest left and right angle targets allowed from the left and right banks of machines. Target angles and heights are provided in international trap rulebook, tables 1 - 9. In automatic trap, the targets are set to provide varying angles up to 45 degrees left and right laterally and for varying vertical target paths from 1.5 meters to 3.5 meters above ground level measured 10 meters in front of the trap. 3.01.6 Targets 3.01.6.1 Targets for competition are manufactured to specifications defined by the ATA, USAS or ISSF rulebooks. Target color does make a difference, especially for visibility against different backgrounds. Range managers setting up for tournaments should determine what colors are used by other clubs in the area and conform to the standard. In ATA trap and NSSA skeet the same targets are used. For automatic and international trap, international targets must be used. International targets are made larger and harder than domestic targets to withstand heavier throwing stress. 3.01.7 Trap Houses 3.01.7.1 Trap houses are built to the dimensions of the technical drawings for each type of shooting (Appendix of this chapter for ATA trap). Variations are not permitted for competitive events; therefore, it is suggested that standard dimensions be used to avoid expensive modifications should activities convert to competitive trap. 3.01.8 Shotfall Zones 3.01.8.1 Shotfall zones extend the same distance 300 yards directly in front of each field for all shotgun ranges. Target angles will vary according to the shooting activity, and shotfall zones will differ in width, but not depth. 3.01.9 Scoring Stands 3.01.9.1 Scoring stands used on trap fields must not interfere with shooting activities. For 16-yard shooting the stand is usually set at the 20-yard line, high enough to provide the field operator or II-11-10 puller with a clear view of the entire field. For handicap shooting the stand is placed 3 to 4 yards behind the squad. Although not required, scoring stands are useful in tournament operations. 3.01.10 Primary Site Planning 3.01.10.1 Surface Grade 3.01.10.1.1 Unlike other shooting facilities, shotgun fields must be built level with only minimal slope for drainage. Levels must be maintained from station to station and from the stations to the traphouse as well. Allowable variation, is plus or minus 2 inches. Where terrain contours vary considerably, individual fields may be constructed at different elevations (Like stair steps), but the levels on each field from station to station must remain constant. Check the ATA rulebook for specifics. 3.01.11 Lighting 3.01.11.1 Lighting a trap field is not necessary. However, lights lengthen the number of hours a range can be used. While registered shoots are generally run during the day, shoot-offs often extend beyond daylight hours, metal halide lighting systems make it possible to illuminate trap fields almost to daylight conditions. Good lighting permits night training classes, night leagues and night practice. Even though the cost per unit is higher than the traditional quartz fixture, metal halide lamps save enough energy to offset the cost of installation within the first few months. The following chart provides a comparison between quartz lighting systems and metal halide. One 1000 watt metal halide lamp produces light equivalent to three 1500 watt quartz lamps. Lamp life for the metal halide is 10,000 hours, opposed to just 2,000 for the quartz. For operations seeking to replace existing lighting systems, the two systems should be carefully evaluated both from a maintenance and energy savings standpoint. A 10 field facility could expect, depending on the number of hours used, to recover the cost in a period of time varying from 1 2 to 3 years. (See drawings A-34 and A-33 for lighting details) Comparison Chart Type fixture Lamps Watts Total Watts KVA Lumens Lamp Life Quartz 8 1,500 12,000 12 35,800 2,000 Metal Halide 4 1,000 4,360* 4.36 110,000 10,000 * Ballast consumption 3.01.12 Combination Fields 3.01.12.1 A common method used to save space is to overlay a trap field on a skeet field. This is called a combination field. The one serious drawback is that while the field is being used for one game, the other must remain idle. Combination fields should be built only where space is limited. To construct combination fields properly, incorporate the trap stations within the skeet station layout, allowing the crossing stake for the skeet fields to remain visible and any lighting system used to be usable for both systems. (See drawing A-24) II-11-11 3.02 NSSA and INTERNATIONAL SKEET 3.02.1 Introduction 3.02.1.1 Skeet had its origin in the United States in 1915 in Andover, Massachusetts. The word "skeet" is derived from the English spelling of the Scandinavian word "shoot." The original skeet field, which was a complete circle with a center station, was set up to duplicate field shooting in the off-season. After a short time, the circle was cut in half with shooting directed away from inhabited areas. This led to the adoption of the standard 180 degree half circle. The U.S. National Governing Body for skeet is the National Skeet Shooting Association (NSSA). Current rules can be found on their website at www.mynssa.com. 3.02.1.2 All skeet fields are identical, whether shooting is sanctioned by NSSA or USAS. International skeet requires two changes: (1) heavier springs on the machines so target trajectories will meet UIT rules; and (2) built-in random timing delay devices (From 0 to 3 seconds) in the electrical circuitry to vary the target release. International skeet targets must travel 81 feet beyond the boundary markers while NSSA targets must travel 48 feet beyond. International targets must meet ISSF rules and be capable of withstanding additional stress exerted by the throwing arm. (See drawing A-22) 3.02.1.3 International Skeet Field Layout (In metric) 3.02.1.3.1 (NOTE: USAS or ISSF skeet fields are identical in dimension with NSSA fields.) The following metric dimensions are provided for fields which are being laid out and the metric system is required. An international skeet field contains a high and low house with a skeet machine in a fixed position in each. The target thrown from the high house must emerge at a point located 91 centimeters behind station marker 1 and 3.05 meters above the horizontal ground level. The target thrown from the low house must emerge at a point located 91 centimeter behind station marker 7, 76 centimeters exterior of the base chord line and 1.07 meters above the horizontal ground level. Targets released properly must pass through an imaginary circle 91 centimeters in diameter, the center of which will be 4.57 meters above the target crossing point. The target crossing point must be set at the same horizontal elevation as the centermost point of station 8. In calm weather the target must carry a distance of not less than 65 meters or more than 67 meters. To assist in setting target trajectories, build a special device using a piece of one inch pipe 4.115 meters long and a steel hoop 91 centimeters in diameter made from a piece of ε inch reinforcing steel. The hoop is then welded to the top of the pipe. This device is set on the crossing point marker and targets are thrown through the center of the hoop, fast enough to achieve the prescribed distance. 3.02.1.3.2 Boundary markers are set at points along the flight line as determined by drawing a horizontal line from a point at the base of the skeet house, coinciding with the point where the target emerges, through the target crossing point and ending 40.23 meters from either the high or low house. These points should also coincide with an imaginary line drawn parallel to the face of each skeet house and perpendicular to and projecting outside the base chord line. Place painted markers at these points to identify boundaries. To assist range officers in setting targets, place similarly painted markers at the maximum distance to which either domestic or international targets must be thrown. (See drawing A-22) II-11-12 3.02.1.4 Shotfall Zones 3.02.1.4.1 Shotfall zones, defined by a 180 degree arc with a radius of 300 yards coinciding with and projecting outside the base chord line, are the same for both NSSA and international skeet. (See drawing A-22) 3.02.1.5 Firing Stations 3.02.1.5.1 Stations for skeet fields, 1 through 7, are a square area 91 centimeters on a side, with two sides parallel to the radius (19.2 meters) as measured from the target crossing point to the front edge of each station. Station 8 is a rectangular area 91 centimeters wide by 183 centimeters long with the center most point located on the intersection of the base chord line and a line drawn from the target crossing point stake to the center of station 4. The long sides of station 8 are parallel to the base chord line. The base chord line runs directly through the center of stations 1, 8 and 7. 3.02.1.6 Target Area 3.02.1.6.1 Target areas are basically restricted to the target flight path. Machines must be adjusted frequently to maintain correct target trajectories. 3.02.1.7 International Targets 3.02.1.7.1 Targets used for international shotgun events are larger, thicker and stronger than the regular domestic targets. To meet USAS or ISSF specifications the targets must meet precise specifications and withstand the stress exerted on the target by the throwing arm. The machines sometimes must be modified to accept these larger targets. (See USAS international shotgun rulebook for complete description on target dimensions.) 3.02.1.8 Skeet Houses 3.02.1.8.1 The most important dimensions are those which determine the placement of the trap machines. Other skeet house dimensions (except on international) may vary to fit local needs. All dimensions must be exact if competitive events are included in the overall action plan. Informal fields should also incorporate standard dimensions, since these facilities may become full-time operations. Sides of skeet houses facing into the shooting area should be painted a light pastel color to help shooters see the target as it emerges. Off-white or beige are good choices. 3.02.1.8.2 A variety of skeet machines are on the market. Some are capable of controlling target trajectory to within a square foot area at the crossing point. 3.02.1.9 Shotfall Zone 3.02.1.9.1 Shotfall zones extend the same distance for all shotgun fields. However, target angle trajectories require a complete half circle shotfall zone with the diameter coinciding with the base chord line and having a radius of 300 yards. (See drawing A-22) 3.02.1.10 Administrative Structures II-11-13 3.02.1.10.1 Scoring Stands 3.02.1.10.1 Scoring stands on skeet fields are only necessary for seating flankers, observers stationed on either side of the range during international tournaments to determine if a target goes beyond the boundary stake before being broken. These stands may be either folding chairs or specially built observation chairs. 3.02.1.11 Lighting 3.02.1.11.1 (See paragraph 3.01.1.9.2. and drawings A-33) 3.02.1.12 Side Walls 3.02.1.12.1 Side walls on skeet fields separate each field. These walls are used primarily for safety. The walls must be impenetrable by shotgun pellets even at close range. Protective walls are also used in front of the skeet houses to protect personnel on adjacent fields, especially where combination fields are used, or where skeet and trap fields are placed next to one another. 3.02.1.13 Target Guards 3.02.1.13.1 Target guards installed on the trap machine windows are designed to protect the shooter from being struck by broken target fragments. Window guard sizes have increased over existing standard sizes because of proven inadequacies. For existing facilities window guards should be replaced during routine maintenance operations. 3.03 SPORTING CLAYS 3.03.1 Sporting clays as a shooting game was introduced in the United States from Europe several decades ago but has only recently gained recognition. Originally designed to simulate hunting field conditions more closely than trap and skeet, the game now incorporates many different field layouts and flight angles, and has evolved into a formal competitive shooting sport. Design work calls for a vivid imagination and a thorough understanding of engineering principles for shotgun fields. The U.S. National Governing Body for sporting clays is the National Sporting Clays Association (NSCA). Complete current rules can be found on their website at www.mynsca.com. 3.03.2 Shotfall Zone 3.03.2.1 Shotfall zones for the sporting clays facility will be much the same as for trapshooting. The main difference is that target elevations vary from field to field. Trap machines are set at a given elevation, while sporting clays fields may have target flight angles varying from low ground skimmers to high overhead targets thrown from towers. Depending upon each field layout, the angles encompassing the shotfall zone may be restricted further by use of shotgun swing stops, especially where space is limited. 3.03.3 Firing Stations 3.03.3.1 Firing stations should be identified with a marking system that allows the area to remain in a natural state. For example, wood chips or natural turf is used instead of concrete pads. II-11-14 Boundaries for each firing station must be identified and marked appropriately. Install safety devices at all station areas where shooting is from an elevated surface, such as from the top of a trap house. 3.03.4 Target Area 3.03.4.1 Target areas for the sporting clays facility may differ dramatically from those used on regular trap fields. Precautions must be taken to provide adequate areas in which targets will impact so as to protect users, spectators and private property. One technique is to lay out the target areas in a semicircle fashion with the targets thrown to the outside of the semicircle. This allows the inside of the area to be used for the gallery (trail) and spectators. Note: It is possible to lay out the facility in a semicircle with the target areas inside and overlaid from field to field. Caution: Layout of fields in this case should not include incoming targets (Towers excepted). 3.03.5 Targets 3.03.5.1 Six different types of clay targets are commonly used in sporting clays, including the regular trap/skeet target, the smaller “midi” target, the very small “mini” target, the “rabbit” target, the “bellue” (A very thin target), and the “rocket” which maintains its speed longer than the standard target. These different sized targets make for interesting challenges on sporting clays fields. 3.03.6 Traphouses 3.03.6.1 Structures varying from underground to tower-mounted installations must protect the trap machine from weather and inadvertent pellet strikes. Underground structures must be water proof and built with drain fields. Traphouses need only be large enough for the machine to operate properly, allow for maintenance and contain an adequate supply of targets. Small machines are best suited for sporting clays, but larger machines are acceptable. 3.03.7 Shotfall Zone 3.03.7.1 Distance of travel for shot on sporting clays facilities remains the same as for regulation trap and skeet. Shotfall zone dimensions (Angles of dispersion) will vary, sometimes dramatically. Each particular field layout will require a different shotfall zone design. It is common for target presentations to be changed on sporting clays ranges from time to time to provide variety. Potential changes in target angles must be considered in planning safe shotfall zones. 3.03.8 Buildings 3.03.8.1 Build a range building with enough space to house a storage area, a class room, a workshop and satisfy administrative needs. 3.03.9 Surface Grade 3.03.9.1 Surface grade on the sporting clays facility should not be changed, except where target houses are to be installed. Maintain the natural terrain as much as possible. 3.04 Shotgun Field Dimensions 3.04.1 ATA Trap II-11-15 3.04.1.1 To prevent oversight, the precaution has been taken to write out field dimensions and then supplement them with dimensioned drawings. (See drawing A-23) 3.04.1.2 Shotfall Zone 3.04.1.2.1 The shotfall zone is defined as an area laid off 47 degrees right and left of the centerline of a field and 300 yards in length as measured from the front of the trap house. The centerline is projected from the center of station 3 down range through the center point of the traphouse and extending forward of the traphouse to a distance of 300 yards. 3.04.1.3 Field Layout, ATA Trap 3.04.1.3.1 Competition trap fields should face from DUE north to about 10 degrees northeast (In the Northern Hemisphere) to provide for better lighting conditions during the day. Lay out trap fields according to the specifications given in this chapter which agree with ATA rules. The primary reference point is the centermost point and elevation of station 3. This is the reference point for all other measurements and elevations. Where known elevations do not exist, simply assign the reference point an elevation of 0.00 feet. Use permanent structures as control points so that this reference point can be relocated should it be removed during grading operations. Note: Refer to the ATA official trapshooting rules as published by the Amateur Trapshooting Association, 601 W. National Road, Vandalia, Ohio 45377. The ATA rules are published annually and are available at www.shootata.com. "Base" is defined to be a point located at the centermost point of the trap machine base. The most commonly used reference point, however, is the pivot point of the throwing arm. 3.04.1.3.2 To comply with the ATA rules, install pieces of PVC pipe to act as brackets along the left and right target boundary lines at 15 yards from the center point of the trap. Place two target setting reference poles 16-20 feet high in each bracket each time targets are set. The shorter distance is used since wind conditions often effect the target at longer distances. 3.04.1.4 Firing Stations 3.04.1.4.1 Firing stations for ATA trap are generally 36 inches on a side. All firing stations on a given field must be installed on a common horizontal plane within a maximum variation of plus or minus 2 inches. It is suggested that all firing stations be built using reinforced concrete a minimum of 3 inches thick and pass a 28 day compressive strength test of 2,500 pounds per square inch. Welded wire fabric 6 inch by 6 inch 10/10 gauge is required for reinforcing all walkways, firing stations and sidewalk areas. Special placement devices are available from concrete supply houses. 3.04.1.5 Target Area 3.04.1.5.1 Target areas are determined by the type of activity. 3.04.1.6 Targets II-11-16 3.04.1.6.1 For ATA trap, "no target shall measure more than four and five-sixteenths inches (10.94 centimeters) in diameter, not more than one and one-eights inches (28.58 millimeters) in height, and shall weigh 3.5 ounces (99.23 grams) with an allowable variation of 5 percent from this figure. "Targets" may be all black, all white, all yellow, all orange; or the full dome may be painted white, yellow or orange; with a black ring. A common color combination used by ATA clubs is all orange for day and all white for night firing. A target color for a registered shoot must visible against the background of the range under all normal lighting conditions. The same color targets used for competition must also be used for practice rounds during the tournament. The color must also be included in match programs for all registered shoots. 3.04.1.7 Shotfall Zone 3.04.1.7.1 The shotfall zone is established from the normal line which extends 50 yards to the right and left of the centerline of the traphouse. From each end of the normal line, left and right boundary lines having interior angles of 130 degrees extend down range for 300 yards. The safety area should be incorporated on all ATA trap fields as a standard, even though smaller angles may be used for trapshooting activities. 3.04.1.8 Administrative Facilities 3.04.1.8.1 Buildings 3.04.1.8.1.1 Building sizes vary according to purpose. 3.04.2 International Trap 3.04.2.1 Automatic Trap (Alternate to International "Bunker") 3.04.2.1.1 Shotfall Zones 3.04.2.1.1.1 Shotfall zones for automatic trap are similar, but not identical to those used for ATA activities. (See drawing A-25) 3.04.2.1.2 Firing Stations 3.04.2.1.2.1 Firing stations for automatic trap are the same as for ATA trap, but with a marker added identifying a 15 meter line as measured from the inside edge of the front wall. 3.04.2.1.3 Target Area 3.04.2.1.3.1 The target area for automatic trap is an area 45 degrees right and left of the field centerline and extending to 82 meters down range. 3.04.2.2 Targets (Automatic Trap and International Trap) 3.04.2.2.1 Same as those used for international skeet. II-11-17 3.04.2.3 Traphouses, Automatic Trap 3.04.2.3.1 USAS and ISSF rules state the traphouse roof must be on the same horizontal plane (elevation) as the shooting stations. Build roofs with a 2 inch to the foot sloped roof. Traphouse floor dimensions (outside) are a minimum of 7 feet 6 inches square and a maximum of 8 feet 6 inches square. Traphouses should be pitted (4-5 feet deep) to allow for target storage. 3.04.2.4 International Trap 3.04.2.4.1 Bunkers must be built according to the following inside dimensions: Width = Minimum: 3.00 meters Maximum: None Length = Minimum: 16.60 meters Maximum: 25.80 meters Depth = Minimum: 1.05 meters Maximum: 2.00 meters 3.04.2.4.1.1 Other dimensions are: The roof may have a pitch of 2 inches per 10 running feet with the rear edge of the roof set to the same elevation as the firing positions. Wall thicknesses for end and rear walls must be a minimum of 6 inches, with the front wall no less than 8 inches thick. No. 4 reinforcing steel is used to reinforce end and back walls. Place reinforcing bars 8 inches on center and tied into the floor. Place the concrete floor in three sections, a minimum of 6 inches thick with No. 4 bars placed 12 inches on center and located 3 inches off the dirt. The front wall is reinforced by two layers of No. 4 bars placed 8 inches on center. Install layers 4 inches apart and the front layer a minimum of 2 inches off the dirt. Concrete specifications are: pass a 28-day compressive strength of 3,500 psi, air entrainment of 6 percent and a 4 inch slump. Other materials may also be used to build the walls and roof, but should be selected only according to soil conditions on site. 3.04.2.5 Machine Installation (International (Bunker) Trap 3.04.2.5.1 Fifteen machines are installed in banks of three spaced from 1.0 to 1.1 meters apart. The distance between the center traps in the groups must be 3 meters to 3.30 meters. Machines 1 and 15 are set away from the end walls 1.30 meters. The pivot point of the throwing arm is set back from the inside edge of the front wall 0.50 meters (plus or minus 0.1 meters) and 0.50 meters (plus or minus 0.1 meters) below the inside edge of the roof. Maximum roof thickness is 0.10 meters. 3.04.3 International Skeet 3.04.3.1 Shotfall Zones 3.04.3.1.1 Direct fire zones are a half circle with its center point located at the center point of station 8. The radius of the half circle is 300 yards. (See drawing A-22) 3.04.3.2 Field Layout 3.04.3.2.1 Field layout is accomplished by first identifying the crossing point. This point is used as a point of reference for all other measurements. The base chord line is 36.80 meters long as measured from the front edge of stations 1 and 7 and is the centerline for stations 1, 8 and 7. (See drawing A-22) II-11-18 3.04.3.2.2 Boundary markers are set at 40.23 meters or 44 yards or 132 feet from each throwing house. Target distance markers are set, according to the ISSF and USAS rules, "at not less than 65 meters nor more than 67 meters from each throwing house". Boundary markers coincide with the target flight line and a line drawn parallel to the face of each skeet house, perpendicular to the base chord line, and projecting exterior to the base chord line to the point of intersection. 3.04.3.3 Firing Stations 3.04.3.3.1 Firing stations are located on a circle having a radius of 19.20 meters as measured from the target crossing point. Station 1 and 7 are at each end of and centered on the base chord line which is located 5.49 meters from the crossing point. Station 8 is centered on the base chord line and the field centerline, running through the crossing point and the center of station 4. The exact distance between the centers of all stations is 8.13 meters on chord. Stations 1-7 are 91 centimeters on a side. Station 8 measures 91 centimeters wide and 183 centimeters long. 3.04.3.4 Target Area 3.04.3.4.1 Target areas are basically restricted to the normal skeet target flight path. Adjustments must be maintained to keep the target trajectories correct. 3.04.3.5 Targets 3.04.3.5.1 Targets must meet precise specifications to be considered for use in international shotgun activities. The diameter must equal 110mm plus or minus 1mm (4 ε inches plus or minus 1/16 inch); target height must equal 25mm to 26mm; weight must equal 105 grams plus or minus 5 grams (4.5 ounces plus or minus .2 ounces). Targets may be all black, all white, all yellow, all orange, or the full dome may be painted white, yellow or orange; with a black ring painted around the base of the target. A common target color combination used on international shotgun ranges, both trap and skeet, is an orange dome with a black ring, and are available from several commercial target companies. The color of a target selected for a match must be clearly visible against the background of the range under normal lighting conditions. The same color targets must be used for practice and the color must also be included in match programs for all registered tournaments. 3.04.3.6 Skeet Houses 3.04.3.6.1 Skeet houses are built to the dimensions stated in this chapter. Variations of this exact measurement are not permitted when competitive events are included in the overall action plan. Informal ranges should also incorporate the standard dimensions, since many of these facilities end up as full-time operations. Skeet house dimensions, even though they are provided in metric units, will meet NSSA requirements. Skeet houses are constructed 7 feet 2 inches square (Outside dimensions) with the centermost point of each house located 20.42 meters from the center of station 8, or 40.84 meters center to center. Layout dimensions conform to standing rules as promulgated by the USAS, ISSF and NSSA. A light is usually mounted on each house at window height to signal when the target is released. This is used by referees to aid in determining if the shooter moved their firearm from its required starting position before the target was thrown (Resulting in a lost target). II-11-19 3.04.3.7 Machine Installation 3.04.3.7.1 Machines are installed in skeet houses on mounting platforms measuring 14 inches wide, 3 feet 4 inches wide, 3 feet 4 inches long and 14 inches high. This dimension is generally universal, but is based on a template developed for Olin Corp. machines. For other machines the wooden base plate may require modification. The machine platform for the high house is wood frame and abuts the front wall (Window side) and overlaps the centerline of the house by 1.25 inches. The machine pier for the low house is set back from the front wall (Window side) 9 inches and the off side of the pier (Opposite the window) to coincide with the centerline of the house. 3.04.3.8 Shotfall Zones 3.04.3.8.1 Shotfall zones extend 300 yards as measured from the target crossing point with angles of dispersion included within a 600 yard diameter half circle area, the diameter of which coincides with the base chord line. Target flight angles dictate shotfall areas. *Note the recommended depth for the shotfall zone is 300 yards or 900 feet. However, these shotfall zones can be reduced, if the range controls type of ammunition and the size of the shot. (See drawing A-22) 3.04.3.9 Stairs to High House 3.04.3.9.1 Build stairs using a standard 6 inch riser, 8 inch tread (With no toe board), 2 inch by 10 inch stringers and a railing to act as a safe guard against falling. 3.04.4 Sporting Clays 3.04.4.1 Sporting clays fields should conform to the surrounding terrain and need not be set up on any given standard, other than for shotfall zones. Consult the current NCSA Rulebook. 3.04.4.2 Shotfall Zone 3.04.4.2.1 Shotfall zones for sporting clays fields vary according to each particular layout. Determine these zones for each field during the planning and design phase. 3.04.4.3 Firing Station 3.04.4.3.1 Firing stations for sporting clays fields may resemble those used on regulation trap or skeet fields. For appearance, the stations are best outlined with natural occurring materials such as fallen trees, rocks, wood chips, etc. Mark the firing stations so that shooters don't have to guess where they must stand, but provide as natural a setting as possible. One method is to prepare small signs stenciled with small animals or birds and place them at the front edge of the firing station. 3.04.4.4 Target Area 3.04.4.4.1 Target areas are generally the same as for ATA or automatic trap, except that on some sporting clays fields, the shooter will be standing in the target area. This is true for the goose and dove towers where the targets are high overhead and incoming. Lay out areas using an 80 meter long target fall area. II-11-20 3.04.4.5 Targets 3.04.4.5.1 Rules for targets used on sporting clays fields require no particular dimension. Most sporting clays operations mix targets, such as international for the fast birds and regular targets for slower targets. Smaller targets may be used for special type fields. For example, to add interest, the smaller targets mixed with large targets may be thrown from a tower. Special targets are also available for rabbit run operations. These targets, thrown along the ground, are made with a heavy ring about the center which allows the target to bounce along the ground without breaking. 3.04.4.6 Machine House 3.04.4.6.1 Machine house dimensions require only adequate room for the machine and a few cases of targets. For tower operations, the size must be increased to allow for range personnel to refill machines. Space required is less than that required for regular trap or skeet houses. 3.05 EQUIPMENT 3.05.1 Equipment used to set up shotgun shooting facilities may be simple, such as a portable trap mounted on a bumper hitch or a special mounting bracket cemented into the ground or on an elevated platform. Or a facility may be as complete as official ATA, NSSA, NSCA, USAS or ISSF rules can make it, with automatic machines, concrete walkways, traphouses and automatic release mechanisms. Regardless of the complexity of a facility, the effort requires it be built to existing standards. For the permanent facilities, select materials that require low maintenance. The following is an alternative for permanent trap facilities, most often used for training. (a) Use portable traps, temporary installation. (b) Use semi-portable traps mounted on benches, tables, special posts, etc. Semi-permanent means the traps are removed each day and stored. (c) Use of traps mounted in movable houses. Houses are constructed to resemble full scale traphouses, but not permanent. These houses can be used in any open area sufficiently large to contain shotfall. They may be equipped with either manually or electrically operated machines. Where manually operated equipment is used, incorporate double thickness walls to protect the operator. 3.05.2 Traphouses 3.05.2.1 Traphouses for permanent installation are best constructed by using forms and pouring concrete in place or by using precast concrete panels. Other building materials, such as lumber, may be used, but are not as easy to maintain. Regardless of the materials used, ongoing maintenance programs should be part of the plan. Traphouses are easily precast into sections, transported to job-site and installed. All underground portions of the house should be of masonry or concrete construction, protected with drain fields and waterproofing materials. 3.05.2.2 International trap bunkers can also be constructed from precast units and assembled on site. Other methods are available and the specifications provided herein are to: (1) maintain precise dimensions (deviations may prevent the facility from being used for competition); (2) reduce construction costs; and (3) to reduce maintenance costs. 3.05.2.3 Markers (boundary, distance and elevation) used on both trap and skeet fields should be made of PVC pipe. At each marker position, cement a piece of 1 3 inch PVC pipe into the ground and set II-11-21 the top edge to grade. Additionally, pieces 14 inches in length and 1 inch in diameter are used as visible markers. This technique supports grounds maintenance, and the various markers needed for trap and skeet can be removed and replaced as needed to avoid confusion. Wooden or metal stakes are an alternative, but are usually permanent and require careful handling of lawn equipment during mowing. 3.05.3 Skeet 3.05.3.1 Materials used for skeet field construction can vary from wood to concrete products. Again the choice depends on available resources. An "Estimate Take Off and Cost Analysis" sheet is a standard form used by construction companies to list those items needed to build, in this case, one complete skeet facility using wood frame construction. II-11-22 ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.01.1 First, develop a training program for field operators, referees and pullers and include it as a part of the safety and maintenance programs. This training program includes: (1) Turn-on procedures, including where the power switches are located, how to hook up the electrical cord; what to check for when a machine fails to come on; and how to determine when one of the steps has been omitted or a procedure is performed incorrectly. (2) Shut down procedures, including how to release spring tension on an automatic machine safely, how to disconnect and store control cords and how to perform a final power shut down. Most facilities provide an inside-the-clubhouse circuit breaker to disable the entire field to prevent after hours vandalism or unauthorized use. (3) Troubleshooting techniques: Most operations manuals published by the machine manufacturer provide a good training aid. These manuals give step-by-step instructions on locating a problem by the process of symptom analysis with many of the problems easily solved. When the manual doesn't cover a problem, call an expert. (4) Safety precautions: Each field operator, referee and puller must be taught what precautions to take when loading a machine, how to disable a machine, how to clear target jams, how to enter a traphouse properly when a machine is jammed and how to stand when holding target setting devices or when standing in the throwing field during set up operations. (5) Target handling operations: A convenient means of estimating breakage is that 10 percent breakage occurs each time targets are handled in bulk. This may mean an even more sizable loss of target revenue should those who handle large quantities of targets do so carelessly. Therefore, how to off-load targets from tractor trailers must be included in a training program. How to stack targets for storage, how to fill machines and how to prepare for a major shoot are also suggested subjects. A forklift (rental units are available) make short work in off-loading tractor trailers. Bulk transfers from the storage building to individual fields may also be done with a forklift in conjunction with a tractor and flatbed trailer. Use turf tires on these pieces of equipment. (6) Target setting operations: This is an important part of the training program because targets must be used to determine proper settings. Training should reduce the number of targets needed to set the machine angles. Commonly used wrenches are usually needed to set trap and skeet machines. Each field operator or qualified referee should be trained in the operation of the machines. 4.02 Maintenance 4.02.1 Machine maintenance on shotgun ranges is very important. Many large clubs include a repair and maintenance shop on site, while others use factory repair centers. Either method is fine, provided enough machines are kept ready for use. On fields where major tournaments are held, spare machines in good repair should be available. 4.02.2 Establishing a good maintenance program calls for training personnel in how to lubricate machines, change worn parts, to clean machine surfaces, to change switches in cables and to keep trap or skeet houses clean and orderly. (See Section II, Chapter 3.) II-11-23 ARTICLE 5. APPENDIX 5.01 ATA Traphouse Dimensions 5.01.1 ATA dimensions provided in the following chart and on drawings are specifications and must be used if the facility is to conduct registered shoots. Be sure to check current ATA rules. Height Firing Width Length Above Grade Position Min Max Min Max Min Max ---------- -------------- -------------- --------------- --------------- 36" sq. 7'6" 9'6" 7'6" 9'6" 2'2" 3’ Construction Recommandations: Roof Pier Pier Pier Thickness Height Dimensions Cap Min Max Min Max Lgth Wdth L W D -------------- -------------- -------------- -------------------- 1.25" 3.0" 4.0" 2'10" 3'5" 1'2" 3'5" 14" 2" Pier Cap Machine Mounting Front Slab Hole Spacing Bolt Spacing in Pier L W D ---------------- ------------------------ ----------------- 9" OC width 9" OC width 8'0" 3'0" 3'0" 2'11" OC length 2'11" OC length Wall Thickness Floor Thickness Min Max Min Max ------------------ ------------------- 4.0" 8.0" 3.0" 6.0" Range Services ©2012 National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section II Chapter 12 MISCELLANEOUS SHOTGUN II-12-2 II-12-3 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Intent 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.03 Chapter Organization 1.04 Cross Reference ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.02 Dimensions 3.03 Materials 8 2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). II-12-4 II-12-5 ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Intent 1.01.1 This chapter provides details on constructing shotgun ranges not normally associated with competition, including crazy quail and turkey shoot facilities. Other types of shotgun activities are discussed under hunter simulation facilities. See Chapter 17 of this section. Shotgun facilities may be part of a larger facility or may be constructed separately. For shot patterning, separate the setup from the remainder of the facility in an area where shot travel is interrupted by a berm. 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.02.1 Many of the special purpose ranges devised over the past few decades are the result of individual experimentation. Hunters interested in practicing their skills developed most of the existing shotgun programs for that reason. However, with many new skills development programs, competition soon followed. The resulting competitive games require rules, procedures, shooting fields and specialized equipment not necessarily in keeping with the needs of hunters. Operators of existing or newly organized facilities would be wise to explore the growing demand by hunters for a place to shoot in the off-season. 1.03 Chapter Organization 1.03.1 This chapter is organized into three major subsections: (1) Article 1 deals with general information; (2) Article 2 with safety issues; (3) Article 3 describes the technical specifications and is further subdivided into three sections involving technical considerations, dimensions, and materials. 1.04 Cross Reference 1.04.1 Range Source Book References 1.04.1.1 Planning and Safety a. General Information, Section I, Chapter 1 b. Construction Guidelines, Section II, Chapter 1, Article 5 c. Safety Plan, Section I, Chapter 2 d. Planning and Design, Section I, Chapter 3 e. Competition Shotgun Ranges, Section II, Chapter 11 II-12-6 ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.01.1 Special requirements in the form of swing stops (posts or walls set up to limit the swing of a shotgun) or barriers to restrict fields of fire may be required for the crazy quail setup. The reason is the wide variation of target trajectories or angles of flight call for rapid target engagement by the shooter. Target engagement on crazy quail can result in the shooter's swinging the firearm too far. This tendency is corrected with swing stops, posts or walls set alongside the shooting position to restrict both horizontal and vertical travel of the firearm. The idea is to limit shot impact inside a designated shotfall area. For other activities, such as turkey shoots, requirements are reduced and require less space. The following safety rules apply for most shotgun activities and are provided as a guide from which to develop a set for a particular facility. Different sets are provided for each type facility, but may be combined for multi-purpose shotgun facilities. 2.01.2 Safety rules for all shotgun ranges a. Range rules and commands must be obeyed at all times. b. In the event of a malfunction, jam or other condition where a live round remains in the gun, the shooter must keep the muzzle pointed in a safe direction (down range either up or at the ground) and call for assistance. All shooting ceases on that particular field until the condition has been corrected. In the event of a hangfire or misfire, DO NOT OPEN the gun for 30 seconds. c. Shotguns only are permitted on these fields. d. New shooters must be accompanied by an experienced shooter at all times. e. Except for patterning, all shooting must be at clay targets thrown from approved trap machines. Patterning activities are to be conducted in a separate area. f. Guns must be unloaded and the actions kept open at all times, except when on the firing station. Loading is performed only when it is the shooter's turn to shoot. Break action shotguns may be closed for storage in a rack but must be opened immediately after being removed from the rack. g. All firearms must be opened and unloaded immediately after shooting and BEFORE the shooter turns to leave the shooting station. h. Shotguns must be carried unloaded with actions open and muzzles pointed forward or straight up. i. Retrieving shotshell hulls is allowed only when the round is completed and the proper command is given: "The range is clear." j. No one is allowed past the firing line or the most forward shooting position until the range is clear. k. Damascus twist steel barrels are not allowed. l. Ammunition may be inspected by a range officer and rejected if it doesn't conform to established range or shooting activity rules. m. The practice of tracking targets with an unloaded gun behind other shooters or when other shooters are on the line is prohibited. 2.01.3 Skeet Safety Rules a. Lead shot size is limited to a maximum of No. 7 2 and shotguns no larger than 12 gauge. b. Target loads only are permitted. High velocity magnum loads are prohibited. Shotshell loads shall not exceed 1χ ounce of shot and 3 dram equivalent of powder in 12 gauge. 1200fps loads are considered “target loads” and are permitted in skeet. II-12-7 c. When live fire exercises are under way no one is allowed to enter the field past the high house or the low house window. d. Retrieving spent shotshell hulls across the base chord line is prohibited until all firing has ceased on the field. e. Shooters on the firing line may not leave the station or change positions until the firearm is unloaded and the action is open. 2.01.4 Trap Safety Rules a. Maximum lead shot size is limited to No. 7 1/2 and shotguns no larger than 12 gauge. b. Shotshell loads must be standard trap loads. High velocity or magnum loads are not permitted. Shotshell loads must not exceed 1χ ounces of shot and 3 dram equivalent of powder in 12 gauge. c. Except for trap operators, no one is allowed to enter the field forward of the 16-yard line during the course of a round, even though firing has stopped. d.. In handicap shooting, the maximum differential between adjacent shooters is 2 yards and the maximum between any two squad members is 3 yards. Smaller distances may be imposed by the operators if deemed necessary for safety. e. The retrieval of unbroken clay targets is prohibited. 2.01.5 Sporting Clays Safety Rules a. Lead shot size is limited to a maximum of No. 71/2 and shotguns no larger than 12 gauge. b. Hand traps may be used, provided throwing positions are designed to protect the trap operator. c. Vertical restraints should be in place at each shooting station to prevent swinging a shotgun in an unsafe direction. d. Clay targets must be thrown only from designated positions and only in directions or elevations required by design specifications. (Locking devices are suggested to limit direction and elevation). e. Only range personnel are authorized in the down range area and only after a cease-fire is called on the field. f. The retrieval of unbroken targets is prohibited. 2.01.6 Informal Table Trap Safety Rules a. Shot size not to exceed a maximum of No. 71/2. b. The shooting station must be located four (4) feet left of and two (2) feet forward of the trap behind a safety shield. c. Safety shields must be installed to protect both the trap operator and the shooter from target chips, should a target break as the arm is released. 2.01.7 Crazy Quail/Miscellaneous Shotgun Rules a. Shot size not to exceed a maximum of No. 71/2. b. For manually operated traps, operators may change only during a cease-fire. c. When the crazy quail pit is located near other shotgun fields, adjacent fields must not operate while the crazy quail pit is in use. d. Only range personnel are allowed forward of the firing line or station. e. Special guard fences or swing stops must be installed to restrict angles of fire to within the predetermined area for crazy quail. Special swing stops are not needed for turkey shoot activities when the target and shooting position are one-to-one. II-12-8 ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.01.1 Introduction 3.01.1.1 Shotgun facilities are designed to provide shooters with a variety of target angles. Breakable targets and changing angles add interest to the sport of trap, skeet, sporting clays, and informal shotgun games. Turkey shoots, patterning boards and other stationary targets used offer additional interest and provide shooters with experience in different kinds of shooting. Shotfall areas are determined by the limits of target trajectory (In elevation) and range of ammunition allowed on the facility. Buffer areas are also needed along each side of the field as a potential shotfall area. 3.01.2 Wobble Trap 3.01.2.1 Wobble Trap requires 1 trap and 1 firing station. The machine is located 16 yards in front of the firing station and below the grade of the station. A protective barrier is provided between the firing station and the pit to protect both the machine and operator. A crazy quail facility may utilize natural terrain such as a dropoff for the trap location, providing a natural barrier for the machine pit. More complex fields may use either hand-set, electrically operated machines or may chose fully automatic ones outfitted with target hoppers. Natural settings with installation using available terrain are preferred. 3.01.2.2 Direct Fire Zone 3.01.2.2.1 Direct fire zones for crazy quail are restricted only by the area available and by the distance the machine moves side to side. Direct fire zones may be as wide as those for skeet fields or may be restricted to 45 degrees right and left of centerline. Elevations are generally controlled by a vertical change motor using the widest arc from low ground skimmers to steep angled fast rising targets. 3.01.2.3 Shooting Stations 3.01.2.3.1 Wobble Trap uses only 1 firing station. Only 1 shooter occupies the station at a time. 3.01.2.4 Target Area 3.01.2.4.1 The wobble trap range is laid out with the target thrower (machine) located in a pit 16 yards in front of the shooting station. The shooting position is stationary with target trajectories set up to be anywhere within a 360 degree circle. Most operations choose to limit the target area to the standard factory settings on the machine and install swing stops to restrict target engagement angles. Rule out incoming targets because broken target fragments can strike and injure either a shooter or spectator. The most popular design is to restrict the flight of targets to a zone laid off 45 degrees right and left of the machine, with targets either crossing in front of, or going away, from the shooter. 3.01.2.5 Targets 3.01.2.5.1 Regular trap or skeet targets. II-12-9 3.01.2.6 Trap Houses (Pit) 3.01.2.6.1 Machines are located in a pit area, the top of which is installed flush with the existing grade. The pit is built deep enough to protect the machine and an operator where manual machines are used. 3.01.2.7 Shotfall Zone 3.01.2.7.1 Shotfall zones may vary according to the available land mass and the desired angles of target trajectory. 3.01.2.8 Administrative Facilities 3.01.2.8.1 Most crazy quail installations are part of a larger operation and do not require separate facilities for administration. 3.01.2.9 Other Considerations 3.01.2.9.1 Surface grade 3.01.2.9.1.1 The surface may be graded level, but should fit into the natural terrain as much as possible. 3.01.3 Turkey Shoots 3.01.3.1 Turkey shoots are held on facilities where the fixed target is a piece of paper with an X drawn through the center. The shooter's objective is to shoot one shot from a 12 gauge shotgun at the target and hope that one pellet will strike close to the intersection of the X. The shooter whose target has a pellet hit closest to the center of the X wins. Ammunition is supplied by the sponsoring organization as another control measure. This form of turkey shoot is NOT based on skill, but on chance. Because of this, some individuals make modifications to their shotguns to restrict shot spread. These modifications may constitute what it known as "sleeving the gun" and may not be allowed. Therefore, shotguns are inspected by a range officer to prevent this practice. 3.01.3.1.1 The Colonial Turkey Shoot positions the turkey behind a log. Each shooter in turn takes a shot when the turkey sticks its head up to check out the turkey gobbler challenging his territory. The "other" turkey is the match sponsor using a turkey call. The winner is the shooter who kills the turkey. A modern version of this sport uses a wooden, steel or ceramic silhouette of a turkey head, colorfully painted and mounted on a hinged device behind a large simulated log. The operating mechanism is located at the firing line where the shooter waits for the turkey head to come into view. Turkey shoot ranges are generally set up in the following two styles: (1) Conventional, using twenty firing points, set a minimum of 6 feet apart with targets set at 20 - 30 yards downrange: or (2) Colonial, using silhouettes of a turkey head attached to the back of a log on a hinged arm. Slabs cut from logs at a local saw mill make good simulated logs. The conventional style setup uses 20 firing positions to reduce range time. Some clubs use a one point system, but speed up operations by using a return target mechanism. The process: A shooter buys a target, is assigned a point, and when twenty targets are sold a range officer places all the targets in the target holders, returns to the firing line and instructs shooters to go to their assigned firing point. The range officer goes to point one gives the first shooter a shotshell and waits until the shooter takes up a position and fires. He proceeds along the line until all shooters have fired, cleared their firearms and placed them in a rack. He then retrieves the targets for scoring. Colonial scoring is accomplished by a range officer as targets are knocked down. II-12-10 3.01.3.2 Direct Fire Zone 3.01.3.2.1 Direct fire zones for shotgun are similar to those for rifle and pistol, when targets and firing positions are set up in a manner similar to rifle and pistol. The direct fire zone would be equal to the width of the firing line area and three hundred yards in length, as measured from the target line. 3.01.3.3 Firing Station 3.01.3.3.1 Firing stations may be identified by a post, stake or an area marked off three (3) feet square. Some turkey shoot ranges are equipped with heavy posts against which the shooter may rest his shotgun. Colonial turkey shoots require shooters to shoot offhand only. 3.01.3.4 Target Area 3.01.3.4.1 Targets are mounted on a post or special target frame at either 20 or 30 yards down range. Targets are set a minimum of 6 feet apart. Target lines are parallel to the firing line. 3.01.3.5 Targets 3.01.3.5.1 Targets may vary in dimensions from a 7 inch x 7 inch paper to special knockdown or breakable targets. For the Colonial Turkey Shoot activities, targets are generally re-usable, requiring only spray painting between relays to cover pellet strike marks. 3.01.3.6 Trap Houses - Not used. 3.01.3.7 Shotfall Zone 3.01.3.7.1 Shotfall zones are set up according to a one-to-one target-to-firing position relationship with shotfall areas extending 300 yards down range. 3.01.3.8 Administrative Structures 3.01.3.8.1 Turkey shoot operations are generally seasonal and facilities are often temporary. Travel trailers, tents, takedown sheds or other types of temporary buildings are used. If the intent is to construct a permanent facility, building permits may be required. 3.02 Dimensions 3.02.1 Wobble Trap 3.02.1.1 Direct Fire Zone 3.02.1.1.1 Direct fire zones may be set up in either of two layouts; layout one is identical to a skeet field, and layout two is similar to a trap field laid out with a 90 degree fan. A skeet layout requires a 180 degree fan with shotfall area extending 300 yards down range. The 90 degree setup is controlled by using swing stops or barriers installed alongside the firing station. II-12-11 3.02.1.2 Shooting Station 3.02.1.2.1 Firing stations for crazy quail installations should be three (3) feet square. 3.02.1.3 Target Area 3.02.1.3.1 Target trajectory angles for layout one should be restricted to 75 degrees right and left of the machine or range centerline. Layout 2 is restricted to 45 degrees left and right of the machine or range centerline. Target travel distance should be set between 50 and 65 yards. This will allow regulation trap targets to be used. 3.02.1.4 Targets 3.02.1.4.1 Standard American targets must meet the specifications outlined for use on American trap fields. (See Chapter 11, Competition Shotgun Ranges.) 3.02.1.5 Trap Houses (Pit) 3.02.1.5.1 The pit area for crazy quail operation should be located in an open area and constructed 10 feet square, 5 feet deep, with the top edge flush with the horizontal surface of the ground. On the side directly exposed to live fire, construct a protective barrier, such as an earthen berm to protect the pit area. This berm should be a minimum of 3 feet high and 12 feet long with the forward side abutting the rear retaining wall. Repair construction areas so that they will blend in with the natural background. Where terrain allows, locate the pit over the edge of a dropoff or crest of a hill so that the pit area and operator are protected by natural terrain. Here the pit will simply be recessed into the hillside with the off side remaining open. Allow adequate space for ease of target throwing, either manually or automatic. 3.02.2 Turkey Shoot Facility 3.02.2.1 Constructing a turkey shoot facility calls for precise dimensions from the targets to the firing position. All other measurements, such as the size of firing positions, posts, and target size, need not be exact. 3.02.2.2 Direct Fire Zone 3.02.2.2.1 Direct fire zones extend down range for three hundred (300) yards, with 10 degree safety zones on each side of the range. 3.02.2.3 Firing Station 3.02.2.3.1 A minimum area of one square yard should be set aside and appropriately marked for each firing station. Marking materials may include, paint, chalk, string, stakes, lime, gravel or concrete slabs. Regardless of the marking method, shooters must be able to identify the position readily. 3.02.2.4 Target Area 3.02.2.4.1 Targets are set up in an area where shot travel is interrupted by a backstop. 3.02.2.5 Targets II-12-12 3.02.2.5.1 Targets for life-size turkey heads are attached to an arm hinged to the back of a log or facsimile. Targets are painted red. 3.02.2.6 Trap Houses - Not used. 3.02.2.7 Administrative Facilities 3.02.2.7.1 May be temporary, permanent or part of an existing range facility. 3.03 Materials 3.03.1 Wobble Trap 3.03.1.1 Wobble Trap installations may be built of materials ranging from wood products to precast concrete. From a maintenance standpoint, and considering that the wobble trap pit will be subjected to sub-surface elements, chose concrete over pressure treated lumber. 3.03.1.2 Direct Fire Zone - Not Used 3.03.1.3 Shooting Station 3.03.1.3.1 Swing stops may be constructed using either 4 inch x 4 inch timbers or 2 inch (PVC) pipe. Surface areas should remain natural. 3.03.1.4 Target Area - Not used 3.03.1.5 Targets - Not used 3.03.1.6 Trap Houses (Pit) 3.03.1.6.1 The pit walls may be pressure (Moisture resistant) treated lumber, masonry, poured-in-place or precast concrete housing. The design must withstand hydraulic pressures exerted by water saturated soils, therefore install drainage systems. In very wet soil conditions, the use of wash gravel as a base with a heavy 4 mil plastic vapor barrier placed between the lumber and the gravel. Place drain pipe around and below the foundation. In an area where natural drainage is inadequate or the installation of drain fields is impractical, design may require the use of sump pumps and piping to carry water away from the facility. Wooden walls are constructed by using standard wall configurations with two inch by six inch studs placed 16 inches on center. To guard against infiltration of water two by eights are faced with marine plywood surface treated with either tar or asphaltum followed by the application of a polyethylene sheet over the tar. Drain tile is installed at or below the floor level at a grade of 3 inch per foot, either draining into a dry well or into a drain system. Concrete construction, especially a precast vault may be an alternative that could prove more cost effective than other types of construction. The advantages of most materials used to build the pit (vault) is above ground assembly. Once the assembly is complete, the excavation work starts with the entire pit installed as a unit. This prevents the necessity of workers being subjected to the hazards of cave-ins should the walls be built in place. Lifting requirements increase but will not take longer than a few minutes once the pit excavation is ready. II-12-13 3.03.1.6.2 Excavation equipment needed: One backhoe with wide bucket. Certain soil conditions may require the use of water pumps to control water levels during the construction (Foundation) work. Very bad soil conditions, such as running sand or extremely heavy underground springs may mean excessive costs. To determine soil conditions a test pit should be excavated prior to final construction. 3.03.1.6.3 A protective berm or barrier is needed along the edge of the pit facing the shooter. A retaining wall is added to the top of the pit wall during initial construction. Mop surfaces next to dirt with tar and surface treated with polyethylene. Earth used for the berm should be clean and free of any materials which might cause shotgun pellets (steel or lead) to ricochet or bounce back. This protective berm should be landscaped to blend with the background. 3.03.1.6.4 Machine mounts are constructed from angle iron and sheet steel to set up a swivel base so that wider angle targets can be thrown. The mount is bolted to the floor by any means that will prevent deterioration due to vibration, and ease removal. For small machines the use of a wooden or metal table may be sufficient. 3.03.1.7 Shotfall Zone - Not used 3.03.1.8 Administrative Facilities 3.03.1.8.1 Generally not used. The average rule where the crazy quail facility is located on a temporary or quasi-permanent site, is to use either a house trailer or some temporary housing. This provides the scorers a place to stay out of the elements since most turkey shoots are conducted during the fall and winter months. Where the turkey shoot activities are conducted as a part of a larger facility, the club house or buildings will often serve the purpose needed, without any modification and/or additions. 3.03.2 Turkey Shoot Facility 3.03.2.1 Materials used for turkey shoot facilities are generally very limited. For conventional turkey shoot facilities, the use of posts at the firing position (Firing line) and target lines are normally all that is required. Special target brackets may be constructed, but operations may simply call for tacking the target to a piece of plywood nailed on the post. One of the problems with plywood or wooden posts is rapid deterioration from the constant impact of shot. With metal frames this problem is minimized. 3.03.2.2 Direct Fire Zone - Not used. 3.03.2.3 Firing Position/Station Area 3.03.2.3.1 Posts (Four by fours) 5 feet long are set 1 foot deep in concrete at each firing position with a rope barrier strung from one side of the range to the other serves as the firing line. Each post has a one inch hole drilled 6 inches from the top and parallel to the firing line through which the rope barrier is strung. Bright yellow polyethylene rope is best. 3.03.2.4 Target Area - not used II-12-14 3.03.2.5 Targets 3.03.2.5.1 The Colonial style target incorporates the use of either a wooden, steel or ceramic (Clay) turkey head. This head is affixed to a board or piece of steel that is attached to the off side of a log or simulated log. The best adaptation has been to use a piece of plywood as a backer with a slab sawed from a large tree attached to the front side. This provides realism and approximates what the colonials saw when they would gather for a turkey shoot. The number of turkey head mechanisms will be dependent upon the level of activities. The best turkey heads are made of steel and are set up to fall from view when hit. As the drawing illustrates, each head can be reset from the firing line, limiting downrange movement. 3.03.2.6 Trap Houses - not used 3.03.2.7 Shotfall Zone - not used 3.03.2.8 Administrative Facilities 3.03.2.8.1 Generally not used. The average rule where the turkey shoot facility is located on a temporary or quasi-permanent site, is to use either a house trailer or some temporary housing. Construction of temporary facilities should use wood. For more permanent facilities, the use of either wood framing or masonry products is suggested. Range Services ©2012 National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section II Chapter 13 OUTDOOR PRIVATE AND TEST II-13-2 II-13-3 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Chapter Organization 1.03 Cross Reference ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.02 Range Dimensions ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Equipment 4.02 Maintenance 8 2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). II-13-4 II-13-5 ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 This chapter provides information on how to design and build a single point range or test facility. The principles used in design for a single or multiple point shooting range are the same. Some of the range designs contained in this chapter are intended for individual use only, under controlled conditions. 1.02 Chapter Organization 1.02.1 This chapter is organized into four sections: (1) General information; (2) Safety; (3) Technical specifications; (4) Equipment operations and maintenance. Cross references are given to aid the user in finding related information throughout the remainder of the source book. 1.03 Cross Reference a. General Information, Section I, Chapter 1 b. General Outdoor Range Information, Section II, Chapter 1 c. Safety Plan, Section I, Chapter 2 d. Planning and Design, Section I, Chapter 3 1.03.1 Related Ranges with similar features. a. A private range for a competitive activity must meet the same standards as one that is available to the public; a test range needs only to meet the demands of the user . All other ranges will have similarities. (See the technical chapter covering the proposed activity for additional guidance.) II-13-6 ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.01.1 Safety for the operator of a private range or test facility is just as important as it is for a public range where many users participate. Any time a range is located in a heavily populated area, the public has a right to expect: (1) The range will be appropriately located in relation to their property. (2) There will be no physical damage to adjoining property from its use, (3) Sound generated from its use will meet local regulations. (4) There will be no trespass related to the range. (5) The range will not cause the perception of a health threat. 2.01.1.1 The individual range builder must build a facility that does not adversely affect surrounding areas. II-13-7 ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.01.1 Generally, building projects require a building permit. The basic criteria required by those who approve these permits is the protection of public health and safety. The criteria in this and the referenced chapters will help the range builder to comply. 3.01.2 Private facilities specifications for backstops, baffles, sound suppression, lighting and other range fixtures, will be similar to those needed on larger ranges. The only difference is size, with only one firing point usually required. This range should be designed to meet the present and anticipated needs of the owner. Provisions should be incorporated for design modifications since needs often change. 3.01.3 Design Considerations 3.01.3.1 For a private range to practice competitive shooting the main considerations are: a. Safety b. The distances from firing line to target line c. The angles of targets d. Meeting the requirements of the rules 3.01.3.2 For a test range the main considerations are: a. Safety b. The function of the range (Function firing, accuracy, ammunition testing, etc.) 3.02 Range Dimensions 3.02.1 Dimensions for the test range need only meet the requirements of the user for firing distance and safe operation. A test range for function firing can be as simple as a 55 gallon drum filled with sand and an appropriate firing point. The design must still control any potential for stray shots. Safety must not be compromised. 3.02.2 Dimensions for a private range to practice competitive shooting should match the specifications for the activity. A private range may do without some of the amenities of a public range as long as it meets the basic requirements. 3.02.3 Firing points 3.02.3.1 For practice ranges firing points should meet the same standards as a competition range. 3.02.3.2 For a test range the firing point needs to be large enough to accommodate the planned activity with sufficient room for the shooter to move without interference. II-13-8 ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Equipment 4.01.1 Equipment for private ranges will be similar to that for a public range. 4.02 Maintenance 4.02.1 Maintenance requirements will be similar to those for larger ranges, but simplified by the limited number of users. Range Services ©2012 National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section II Chapter 14 OUTDOOR INFORMAL TRAINING II-14-2 II-14-3 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Introduction 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.03 Chapter Organization 1.04 Cross Reference 1.05 General Outdoor Information 1.06 Planning Overview ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.02 Dimensions ARTICLE 4. OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.02 Maintenance 8 2012The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). II-14-4 II-14-5 ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Introduction 1.01.1 This chapter provides information on how to construct small arms ranges on which training in the safe use of firearms may be conducted. All facilities described are based on the minimum requirements necessary to accomplish the educational objectives of the specific discipline being taught. The latest information on safety as it relates to range construction and use is also included. The specifications in this chapter will assist the range builder with basic instructions, supported by drawings and sketches to make the job as easy as possible. Designs are kept simple to reduce cost and minimize the need for specially designed equipment. The projects have been planned to use stock sizes, eliminating some of the labor necessary in the cutting and fitting operations. In addition, these designs may be modified to accommodate specific range applications. This chapter also provides the volunteer instructor/coach the information to set up a facility easily, thus maximizing the time for teaching and learning. 1.01.2 Other informal facilities such as a safety walk, used for hunter education, may be set up to simulate field conditions that allow the student to demonstrate proficiency in hunter safety. Safety and wildlife (target) identification situations can be set up for training purposes. Lay out the safety walk in areas offering natural terrain obstacles to simulate in-the-field experiences. These may be operated as shooting or non-shooting courses as allowed by site conditions. Shooting courses may use air guns, shotguns or rifles and pistols using wax or plastic bullets. Another option is the non-shooting courses designed to serve in areas where live-firing is not permitted. Such facilities allow students to carry their firearm (unloaded) to provide hands-on experience and add interest to the training experience. Students are allowed to point their firearm in all situations, but are graded according to their ability to recognize a shoot-don't-shoot situation. Air guns may be used where sufficient safe area exists down range. Do not depend on a wooded area to act as a safety barrier or to stop pellets. Shotguns may be used, if sufficient shotfall areas exist. 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.02.1 Few inventions have shaped American history more than the firearm. Hunters and target shooters, have long enjoyed using firearms in healthful outdoor recreation. The primary goals of these shooting sports are good sportsmanship and increased skills. For other citizens, firearms are a means of self protection or the object of collecting. 1.03 Chapter Organization 1.03.1 This chapter is organized into four major sub-sections, (1) General information; (2) Safety issues; (3) Technical specifications further subdivided into two sections involving range components; and (4) Equipment operations and maintenance. 1.04 Cross References 1.04.1 This publication offers information sufficient to build basic shooting facilities with minimal experience, tools and dollars. But the user may find it advantageous to reference other chapters of this source book for additional information on range design, and shotfall zones. II-14-6 1.05 General Outdoor Information 1.05.1 Safety cannot be compromised for cost or expediency in range building. The facility must be located in an area that has the least number of restrictions possible. Initial design determines what activities can be safely conducted on the range. Once planned, designed and constructed, the facility must continue to be used for original purposes intended. Over the years, the original purposes of the range may be forgotten. To ensure that the range is not used for other purposes in the future, establish a course of action and maintain records on the project for future operators. 1.06 Planning Overview 1.06.1 The importance of planning for any range operation cannot be overstated. The first step is to develop an action plan that considers alternatives, advantages and disadvantages of the project. This written plan must leave nothing to chance. Construction projects must conform to standards required by law or meet traditionally acceptable standards designed to protect the user and public alike. Local ordinances, available from the county administrative offices, may dictate building standards, permit requirements and zoning restrictions, but not public safety standards that relate to shooting facilities. Therefore, precautions such as impact berms, baffles and other barriers, both physical and psychological, must be used to assure positive protection. Environmental issues, such as air, water, and noise pollution should be considered in the design of the range. II-14-7 ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General 2.01.1 Develop a safety plan and stick with it. Set up control measures that range users must adhere to, such as a simple set of safety rules. Before live firing, allow shooters time to become familiar with range operations, range rules and planned activities. This will help the instructor or coach to identify those who may need additional help. In addition to rules, the physical layout of a facility must conform to established guidelines. For example, in areas where urban areas border the range site, design the range so that all bullets are restricted to or totally contained in zones within specified boundaries. Remember, any range is only as safe as the manner in which it is used. For the informal training range, range operations must be supervised by a trained instructor. 2.01.2 Safety Rules for Training Ranges 2.01.2.1 Accidents generally happen because of carelessness, improper training, poor mental attitude, lack of discipline, or negligence. A well-built and well-designed range simply provides a workable site for a planned activity. Its ultimate success hinges on use alone. The following gun handling and shooting rules must always be included in every safety plan. 2.01.3 Suggested General Rules (Applicable to all ranges) 1. ALWAYS POINT THE GUN IN A SAFE DIRECTION. 2. ALWAYS KEEP YOUR FINGER OFF THE TRIGGER, and outside the trigger guard until ready to shoot. 3. ALWAYS KEEP THE GUN UNLOADED UNTIL READY TO USE. 4. KNOW YOUR TARGET AND WHAT IS BEYOND. Make sure the down-range area is unoccupied. 5. BE SURE THE GUN IS SAFE TO OPERATE. 6. KNOW HOW TO USE THE GUN SAFELY. 7. USE ONLY THE CORRECT AMMUNITION FOR YOUR GUN. When on a range, do not have more than one firearm and its ammunition out of its case at one time. 8. WEAR EYE AND EAR PROTECTION AS APPROPRIATE. 9. NEVER USE ALCOHOL OR DRUGS BEFORE OR WHILE SHOOTING. 10. BE AWARE THAT CIRCUMSTANCES MAY REQUIRE ADDITIONAL RULES UNIQUE TO A PARTICULAR SITUATION. 11. KNOW AND OBEY ALL RANGE COMMANDS. 12. BE AWARE OF OTHERS AND BE PREPARED TO REACT TO ANY HAPPENSTANCE OUT OF THE ORDINARY. 13. SHOOT ONLY AT AUTHORIZED TARGETS. 14. DESIGNATE A QUALIFIED RANGE OFFICER when none are present or assigned. 15. OPEN, UNLOAD AND BENCH OR GROUND ALL FIREARMS DURING CEASE- FIRES. 16. DO NOT HANDLE FIREARMS OR STAND AT THE FIRING LINE WHEN OTHERS ARE DOWNRANGE. II-14-8 17. SMOKING, EATING OR DRINKING WHILE ON THE FIRING LINE ARE PROHIBITED. 18. ONLY THOSE FIREARMS AUTHORIZED ON A GIVEN RANGE FACILITY ARE ALLOWED. 19. ALL FIRING MUST BE DONE FROM DESIGNATED FIRING LINES OR POSITIONS. 2.01.4 Guidelines for Developing Safety Rules for Air Gun Training Facilities 2.01.4.1 Safety with air guns is important. The attitude toward any gun, air or otherwise, should be that it is a gun and must be treated accordingly. Air guns can cause serious injury if handled unsafely. Rules under which air gun activities are to be conducted include: 1. Air guns should not be cocked, pumped or loaded until the instructor commands, and only after the shooter is in position and ready to fire. 2. During cocking and loading, the air gun must be pointed in a safe direction. 3. In case of a malfunction, where the pellet or BB does not clear the barrel, the shooter immediately informs the instructor. 4. When a cease-fire is called, ALL firing stops immediately. 5. Upon command of the instructor, the gun(s) will be cleared by firing into the backstop. 6. Eye and ear protection should be used as appropriate. 7. Pellets or BB's must not be fired at steel, rubber, masonry, wood or other hard surfaces which may cause bounce-backs. Use only approved traps designed to trap pellets or BB's. 8. Change CO2 cylinders only when the air gun is unloaded. 9. In the event of a malfunction due to a discharged CO2 cylinder, clear the barrel prior to installing a new cylinder. 10. Before removing a CO2 cylinder (puncture type), discharge the remaining gas, according to the manufacturer's instructions. 11. Install new CO2 cylinders according to manufacturer's instructions. 12. For multi-pump air guns, do not exceed manufacturer's ratings and recommendations for the number of pumps to be used. 2.01.5 Safety Rules for Smallbore Rifle and Pistol Ranges. 1. The only ammunition allowed is .22 cal. rimfire designated either short, long or long rifle. (.22 caliber rimfire magnum or any .22 caliber centerfire ammunition is prohibited.) 2. Only those firearms authorized for a given facility are allowed. 3. Pistol shooting is restricted to the less powerful pistol calibers, such as .22 caliber rimfire and .38 caliber target loads. 2.01.6 Rules for Muzzleloading Training Ranges. 1. NO SMOKING AT ANY TIME. 2. Muzzleloading firearms must be loaded at the loading table behind the firing line and only with blackpowder or pyrodex7. Loading is not to be done until after the command "Commence Firing" has been given. 3. Loading benches are to be set up a minimum of eight (8) feet behind the firing line. Never shoot over or near a loading table or over or near any container of blackpowder. 4. Spectator areas should be at least six (6) feet behind the loading area. 5. Cap or prime muzzleloading firearms only on the firing line. II-14-9 6. Always point the muzzle in a safe direction. When moving from the loading table to the firing line, carry the firearm with the muzzle elevated. 7. Wipe the bore of a muzzleloading rifle with a damp patch between shots to prevent premature ignition of powder charge from any remaining live sparks. 8. In the event of a hang-fire, hold the firearm in position (Pointed down range) for at least one minute then notify the range officer. Keep the muzzle pointed in a safe direction. 9. It is strongly suggested that shooters be required to wear eye and ear protection. 10. Upon a specific command of the instructor/range officer, blackpowder firearms will be cleared by firing into the backstop. To demonstrate that the firearm is unloaded and safe, each shooter, upon command, will snap a percussion cap with percussion firearms and drop a ramrod into the barrel of flintlocks. 2.01.7 Safety Rules for Shotgun Training Ranges 1. Damascus twist steel barrels are prohibited. 2. Maximum shot size is limited to No. 71/2. 3. Shooters on a firing line position must not leave the position until the action is open and the firearm is unloaded. Break action guns may be closed when placed in a gunrack. 4. All shotguns and ammunition must be inspected for compatibility by the instructor prior to live fire exercises. 5. Shoot only at authorized targets. 6. The retrieval of clay targets is prohibited. 7. Shooting activities on trap or hunter's clays ranges must conform to specified firing lanes. 8. Handtraps may be used, provided safety precautions to protect the thrower are taken, and provided the thrower is not the primary instructor. 9. Shooting activities on all shotgun ranges must be in designated directions for each particular field. 10. NO ONE is allowed forward of the firing positions. 11. Prohibit steel patterning boards for patterning steel or lead shot. The reason is that steel and lead shot will bounce back off the surface. (Patterning boards may not be necessary on training range facilities.) 2.01.8 Safety Rules for Archery Training Ranges 1. Inspect equipment for damage prior to shooting. 2. Check arrows for cracks, loose vanes, bends, broken nocks or any other condition that may cause the arrow to fly erratically or to rupture when released. 3. Check bows for frayed strings, loose pulleys, warped limbs, cracks or other damages that may result in breakage when at full draw. When a pool of equipment is used by several students over several weeks or months, inspect after each use. 4. Shoot only those arrows matched to the shooter's draw length with spines matched to the bow's draw weight. 5. Never "dry fire" a bow. The resistance of an arrow is needed to prevent damage to the bow limbs. 6. Never draw someone else's bow. Draw length and pull weight vary with each shooter. 7. Never overdraw a bow intentionally. 8. Where broadhead arrows are allowed, cover razor tips with an approved sheath. 9. Check surroundings before drawing a bow to shoot. Tree limbs, low ceilings or other items may obstruct the bow's action. 10. Use proper gear, including armguards to prevent string burns and bruises to the forearm, fingertabs protect fingertips and bow slings to maintain control of the bow. II-14-10 ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.01.1 Firing Lines and Target Lines 3.01.1.1 The firing line is parallel to the target line. The line of fire is perpendicular to the firing and target lines. The firing positions must be behind the firing line. 3.01.1.2 Distance (for rifle and pistol) 3.01.1.2.1 Fifty (50) feet. For air rifle, thirty-three (33) feet. 3.01.1.3 Direct Fire Zone 3.01.1.3.1 The direct fire zone is defined as that area into which all shots are fired during a normal course of fire. The direct fire zone includes all directions and angles of fire used on a range while shooting at a specific target corresponding to a specific firing point. 3.01.2 Firing Line Area 3.01.2.1 Positions 3.01.2.1.1 Firing positions are areas marked off along and behind the firing line, occupied by the shooter, his equipment and a coach. 3.01.3 Target Line Area (For rifle and pistol) 3.01.3.1 Frames 3.01.3.2 Number Boards 3.01.3.2.1 Firing points and targets should be numbered according to a one-to-one relationship to avoid confusion along the firing line when shooters are taking up positions. Readily identifiable markers should be set at the left front corner of each position running in a left-to-right ascending order, with corresponding numbers attached to the target frame. 3.01.3.3 Targets II-14-11 3.01.3.3.1 Specific targets needed for each NRA shooting activity contained herein are listed in the following chart: A. Rifle and Pistol Targets: Type Range Distance Target Designation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Smallbore Rifle 50 ft. NRA A-36, A32 & A17 Smallbore Pistol 50 ft. NRA B-2 and B-3 Air Rifle 10 m NRA AR 5/1, or AR-5/10 Air Pistol 10 m NRA B-32 BB Rifle 5 m NRA AR 4/10 Muzzleloading 25 & 50 yds NMLRA 6-bull Muzzleloading 25 & 50 yds Buffalo Target B. Shotgun Targets: Two types of shotgun targets are used for training purposes: clay targets, thrown from a target thrower to simulate upland birds, and animal targets drawn on large sheets of paper to use in wildlife identification and Safety Walk training areas. C. Archery Targets: Two designs of paper targets are available commercially. Paper targets, especially the colorful bullseye target, are best for teaching fundamentals. For hunter education, the best target is an animal picture redrawn on a large sheet of paper. Several range operators have also taken the drawings used to manufacture metallic silhouettes, traced the outline on styrofoam and cut out the figures. These handmade targets are popular and offer a good alternative. 3.01.3.4 Backstop (for rifle or pistol) 3.01.3.4.1 Backstops may be constructed with fill of any description, but on the side facing the shooter, a minimum of 18" - 24" of rock-free earth is required to reduce possible ricochet. Where not possible recommend rocks no greater than ¾” in size. The utilization of Geotextile materials can aid with the construction of the backstop. (Refer to Section IV Range Products and Services). 3.01.3.4.2 Backstops for BB's can be assembled from old carpeting, canvas or other loose hanging materials capable of absorbing the energy and allowing the BB to fall harmlessly into a container or on the floor. For pellets, backstop material must be layered sufficiently to arrest pellet momentum and backed with wood to eliminate damage to areas beyond the backstop. To catch misses, a double layer of carpet hanging in the back of the boxes works well. Caution: Single layers of carpet are not adequate to stop pellets. Backstops and side berms are physical barriers that may be used on a range facility to protect adjacent areas. Backstops are designed to contain projectile impact, whereas side berms are used to restrict horizontal angles in which a projectile could exit the range. In populated areas, these fixtures may be necessary. On archery ranges, the only barrier used is generally a backstop behind the target. The most commonly used target material is two rows of straw bales which offer sufficient mass to stop arrows. To reduce costs of replacing straw bales, build a small shelter with a roof to cover them. 3.01.4 Projectile Containment (For rifle or pistol) 3.01.4.1 Projectile containment to the area in which the entire range is located, plus an area of size sufficient to allow the bullet not contained in the range backstop to impact safely and not leave the property. II-14-12 3.01.5 Administrative Structures 3.01.5.1 Administrative Buildings 3.01.5.1.1 Generally, administrative buildings are not practical for ranges used part time. For the permanent facility, they can be useful, especially to store materials, aid in administrative chores, and to house training staff. Buildings to house maintenance and lawn equipment can also store targets, frames and other necessary range equipment. When planning range buildings, consider future growth and allow for expansion. 3.01.5.2 Bulletin Board 3.01.5.2.1 Bulletin boards for the training range are optional. Many training instructors simply provide handouts to the students. 3.01.5.3 Gunracks 3.01.5.3.1 Each range facility will need at least one gun rack to hold firearms. 3.01.5.4 Safety Barriers 3.01.5.4.1 Safety barriers, such as earth berms, walls, fences, signs, etc., are all used to prevent bullets from escaping and to keep certain areas off limits. Published rules are also safety tools aimed at educating range users. 3.01.5.4.2 For temporary training range facilities where the down range area is accessible use highly visible signs to proclaim that live firing exercises are being conducted. On shotgun training ranges, place a yellow nylon rope barrier on stakes or posts placed between the shooter and spectators. Set up temporary facilities in areas where visibility, especially to the sides of the range, is greatest. Side walls or berms may not be necessary on archery ranges, unless the range is located close to homes or apartments. 3.01.5.5 Restrooms 3.01.5.5.1 Restrooms are a must. Rental units are usually best, since maintenance is not required by range personnel. In some areas, where local laws permit, permanent facilities may be built. 3.01.5.6 Range Flags 3.01.5.6.1 Range flags of highly visible red material vary in size from 18 inches to 3 feet across the mast, and extend from 2 to 18 feet long. They are used to inform others that live firing exercises are in progress. Locate flag poles so that they are clearly visible from the surrounding area. Range flags can be mounted on temporary masts easily made from one inch fence pipe, available at a local chain link fence company. They can be set up temporarily using small rope to anchor it in place or mounted on a staff attached to the bumper of an automobile. 3.01.6 Other Considerations 3.01.6.1 Surface Grade II-14-13 3.01.6.1.1 Range surface areas should be as level as possible, but should allow for drainage. Remove large rocks and debris from the range area to help control ricochets. 3.01.6.2 Loading Table (Muzzleloading) 3.01.6.2.1 Setup loading areas no less than eight (8) feet behind the firing positions. This provides adequate room for the loading process and protects against the inadvertent ignition of open containers of powder from sparks caused when the firearm is fired. A well-designed table provides a stable area on which shooters can lay out their gear. The loading table should be equipped with notches. 3.01.6.3 Benches and Benchrests 3.01.6.3.1 Benches aid in range control by providing students a place to wait for their turn on the firing line. Place benches a minimum of 15 feet behind the firing line. 3.01.6.3.2 Benchrests used by rifle and pistol shooters as a steady rest are optional. (See drawing A-19) Note: build benchrests with the tops level. A folding benchrest is easily transported to and from the range site and is suitable for informal shooting. Permanent benchrests are required for competition. 3.01.6.4 Baffles 3.01.6.4.1 Commonly used overhead to prevent bullets from leaving the range and to contain noise, baffles serve well in densely populated areas. Although expensive to construct when built correctly, they offer many years of low maintenance use. On an informal training range, the cost may be prohibitive. 3.02 Dimensions 3.02.1 Distance 3.02.1.1 Dimensions for distance between targets and firing line areas for training purposes should not exceed 50 feet for smallbore, 25 yards for muzzleloading, 10 meters for air gun, 5 meters for BB gun and 5 yards for clay targets. 3.02.1.2 Direct Fire Zone 3.02.1.2.1 The direct fire zone is defined as that area into which all shots are fired during a normal course of fire. The direct fire zone includes all directions and angles of fire used on a range while shooting at a specific target corresponding to a specific firing point. 3.02.2 Firing Line Area II-14-14 3.02.2.1 The suggested dimensions for firing line points and/or positions are: Range Type Suggested Minimum Width Length Width Length ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Smallbore (.22 caliber rimfire) 5 ft. 6 ft. 4 ft. 5 ft. Muzzleloading (Rnd. Ball) 7 ft. 6 ft. 7 ft. 6 ft. Air Gun 4 ft. 6 ft. 4 ft. 5 ft. Shotgun 3 ft. 3 ft. 3 ft. 3 ft. Archery 6 ft. 4 ft. 5 ft. 4 ft. 3.02.3 Target Line Area 3.02.3.1 See drawing A-42. 3.02.3.2 Number Boards 3.02.3.2.1 Twelve (12) inches square with eight (8) to ten (10) inch numbers in alternating colors. 3.02.3.3 Target Assembly - Not used. 3.02.3.4 Targets 3.02.3.4.1 Targets for air gun ranges (NRA AR-l or B-32) should be set up on backing materials which allow the pellets or BB's to pass through the first layer and then be stopped by multiple layers of shock absorbing material. One method is to construct traps using cardboard boxes. (See drawing A-29) 3.02.3.4.2 The standard muzzleloading targets, as standardized by the National Muzzleloading Rifle Association (NMLRA), includes a six (6) bull target generally shot offhand at 25 yards and from a benchrest at 50 yards. The "fun targets" offer many dimensions and forms. Scoring areas on these targets are generally indicated. In some instances, cups of water are used to give the appearance of an explosion when hit. In any event, scoring may be modified at the discretion of the training staff. The point to make with the "fun target" is change of pace from the more formalized round-bull target. Breakable targets like clay targets used for trap and skeet are often hung on cardboard for new shooters to add interest. However, where range areas must be kept clean, these targets cause extra work. 3.02.3.4.3 Targets, usually the clay disc, can be thrown from informal handtraps, seat traps or traps mounted on picnic tables, barrels or even a vehicle trailer hitch. Where the training objective is to teach the fundamentals of hitting a moving target, the firing position in relation to where the trap is mounted should be 4 feet in front of and 5 feet left of the throwing machine. Regular trap or skeet targets, now available in biodegradable form, serve well and low cost throwers are available through sporting goods and department stores. Read and follow precaution labeling on packages. 3.02.3.4.4 The large colorful bullseye targets and full face animal picture targets are used for archery training. For the bowhunter, life-size drawings of wildlife printed on paper offer good targets for training. Styrofoam targets are easily made at home or obtained commercially and add realism to the training program. (See references to Products and Services in the Appendix for suppliers.) II-14-15 3.02.3.5 Backstop 3.02.3.5.1 Refer to Section I Chapter 1, 3.04.5.1. Note: In areas where the natural angle of repose will not support a 1 1/2:1 slope, special construction methods, such as cribbing may be employed or a special backstop, such as a commercial steel backstop may be used. The utilization of Geotextile materials can aid with the construction of the backstop. (Refer to Section IV Range Products and Services). 3.02.3.5.2 Targets for either smallbore or muzzleloading must be positioned so that all bullets will strike the backstop in the bottom half. Target frames, therefore, must be marked so that shooters will know where to place a specific target. Targets shall be positioned on the frames so that the line of fire is approximately level. Each range necessarily differs in this requirement and the target position on the frame must be determined. This is a primary reason shorter distances are suggested for training ranges. 3.02.4 Projectile Containment 3.02.4.1 For air guns, use the following maximum ranges: Steel BB's, 200 yards; pellets, 300 yards; shotfall zones 300 yards (see drawingA-29); Arrow containment area extends 300 yards and requires no ricochet zone. For training purposes, light draw (35 pound or less) weights should be utilized to reduce safety fan requirements. It is important to remember that if a projectile leaves your property it is a trespass. You may have to all additional range features to your facility. 3.02.5 Administrative Structures - not used. 3.02.6 Other Considerations 3.02.6.1 The slope of terrain is not a major factor on training facilities where distances are held to the established minimums. However, a level grade is preferred on the range proper. Down range areas should include, where possible, terrain features sufficiently elevated to preclude the need for backstops. The down range area should be as open as possible for good visibility and protection against encroachment by others. 3.02.6.2 Baffles 3.02.6.2.1 In confined quarters, hang drapes in front of and above the firing positions to restrict the flight of pellets or BB's to a given area. Arrange the drapes far enough in front of the firing position to catch high shots and high enough above to permit an unobstructed view of the target area. Remember, areas needing protection will vary, so be prepared to adjust the drapes. Drapes must fall loose at the bottom to allow for movement when the pellet or BB strikes. This movement serves to resist pellet penetration. Drapes can be made from double thick canvas, or carpeting with a five (5) inch separation between each of two layers. II-14-16 ARTICLE 4. OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.01.1 Operating a shooting range or managing a shooting program is the job of a planner who can write the program on paper, establish a timetable and recruit and train assistants. The job also requires the ability to promote a program that meets the community's needs as a means of recruiting participants and gaining financial backing. But the most important aspect of management is to operate a range that will serve the total community, not a select few. 4.01.2 Range officials should run the range. At training ranges, the instructors do the individual teaching and they should also be trained as range officials. Train range personnel to be generalists because staff is usually limited. 4.02 Maintenance 4.02.1 Maintenance for ranges can be preventive or reactive. Reactive simply means responding to whatever goes wrong when it goes wrong, while preventive means constant upkeep on a planned basis to keep the range operational. Preventive maintenance is preferred. Develop a plan to identify the tasks, the frequency of occurrence and a schedule to follow. Set up a schedule to allow for adjustments, such as when the work will be done and by whom. 4.02.2 For muzzleloading and smallbore ranges, limit equipment to devices that, when damaged, are easily replaced. Equipment maintenance also requires taking safety precautions. Safety on ranges is not restricted to the act of shooting; it is also a part of maintenance, be it target handling or mowing the grass. 4.02.3 Equipment maintenance for archery ranges is limited to replacing target stands and bales of straw and ongoing inspection and replacement of range owned bows and arrows. Maintenance costs can be reduced by covering targets with plastic tarps to guard against weather damage. Range Services ©2012 National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section II Chapter 15 OUTDOOR MOVING TARGET II-15-2 II-15-3 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.03 Chapter Organization 1.04 Cross Reference 1.05 General Guidelines ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.02 Safety Rules for Moving Target Ranges ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.02 Range Dimensions ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.02 Maintenance 8 2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). II-15-4 II-15-5 ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 This chapter provides information on how to plan, design and build an outdoor moving target range for rifle or pistol shooting. Moving target ranges offer advanced training opportunities for hunter education, competition and law enforcement. This chapter combines several features currently used in action pistol, international running game target, law enforcement moving target and hunter simulation into one basic range package. Thus, with planning and modification, all moving target activities may be conducted on a single facility. 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.02.1 Hunters have long sought to enhance their skills by shooting at moving targets. Though most hunting situations involve stationary targets, the skills developed at a moving target facility may be of use in some circumstances. Running game target events have taken many forms: Automobile tires with targets inserted have been rolled down hillsides; targets attached to a board and held exposed above the highpower rifle pits were moved horizontally by someone hidden in the pits. 1.02.2 A 100 meter "running deer" competitive event was first introduced in the Olympic program in 1900. This event, especially popular in the Scandinavian countries, remained on the Olympic program through 1956 and on the World shooting championship program through 1963. The 50 meter running boar event became part of the World championships in 1966 and the Olympics in 1972. This competition derived from German hunting simulation competitions. Several of these ranges have been built in the United States for both competition and hunter training. A 10 meter running game target event is now part of the World championship program. These air rifle ranges are generally set up indoors and take up so little space almost any shooting organization may have one. The moving target events in police training were introduced to add realism and continue to be an important part of many law enforcement firearms training programs. These requirements for realistic pistol training also inspired the use of moving targets in action pistol events. 1.02.3 The need for better equipment for international shooting has led to better quality equipment and is available commercially. However, commercial equipment is not necessary to a good shooting facility. On the contrary, homemade mechanisms set up by some clubs rival commercial models. 1.03 Chapter Organization 1.03.1 This chapter is organized into four sections: (1) General information (2) Safety (3) Technical specifications (4) Equipment operations and maintenance. Cross references are given to aid the user in finding related information throughout the remainder of the source book. 1.04 Cross Reference a. General Outdoor Range Information, Section II, Chapter 1 b. Outdoor Range Design Criteria, Section II, Chapter 2 c. Safety Plan, Section I, Chapter 2 II-15-6 d. General Information, Section I, Chapter 1 1.05 General Guidelines 1.05.1 A moving target mechanism can be installed on ranges varying from air gun to highpower rifle by adapting the installation to existing range features. It may also be possible to construct the moving target operation in a wooded area to add realism, especially if it is used for hunter training. Regardless of the site chosen, landscaping enhances the range appearance. The primary considerations of the moving target range are the varying angles at which a target can be shot and the lead that must be maintained from the beginning of the run until the shot is fired. This requires a different projectile containment plan than for ranges where one target per firing point is used. II-15-7 ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.01.1 General safety on moving target ranges requires a different projectile containment plan because of the horizontal movement of firearms to engage the target as it travels along the firing area. Berm construction or use of natural terrain features differs from the normal one target to each firing point, perhaps requiring extension berms on each side of the range. Concentrating on a moving target sometimes causes a shooter to take late shots resulting in hits on the pit building very wide of the mark. This may require a larger berm area and will require target houses to be built with impenetrable walls. 2.02 Safety Rules for Moving Target Ranges a. All range rules, regulations and commands must be obeyed immediately. b. No more than one shooter may fire at a single target at one time. c. No one is permitted forward of the firing line, until a cease-fire has been called. d. When on the firing point, keep all actions open and unloaded until instructed to do otherwise. During practice or when alone, follow the same procedures as if a range officer were present. e. Before leaving a firing position, the action must be open, empty and detachable magazines removed. f. Keep the muzzle pointed in a safe direction at all times. II-15-8 ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.01.1 Firing Line to Target Line 3.01.1.1 The target moves along a horizontal track in front of the shooter, offering a continuously variable angle through which the rifle or pistol must be moved in order to fire at the target. The target line is parallel to the firing line and at a prescribed distance. For running game target competition, this distance is 50 meters, except air rifle which is 10 meters. For action pistol, the distance varies from 7 to 25 yards. 3.01.1.2 Distances for other types of moving target ranges may vary according to the type of firearm used. On running deer ranges, the target generally approximate the average distances encountered by hunters. 3.01.1.3 Direct Fire Zone 3.01.1.3.1 The direct fire zone for the moving target range is fan shaped. Its overall size is dictated by the type firearm, distance of target travel, firing distance, backstops and baffling systems used. Direct fire zones are often limited because the range is short in comparison to other ranges, and the firing line cover is often constructed to incorporate a forward overhang to act as a baffle. 3.01.2 Firing Line Area 3.01.2.1 Length 3.01.2.1.1 Firing lines, as they are known for other type ranges, do not exist in the sense that they extend the entire width (Side-to-side) of the facility. Firing points are limited to one per range. 3.01.2.2 Firing Point 3.01.2.2.1 The space provided for each shooter is laid out several feet in front of the range officer's position. There may be a space to the left of the shooter's firing point to allow for dry firing by other shooters. Place a screen between the firing point and the dry firing area to eliminate any possibility of shooter distraction. 3.01.2.2.2 Each range provides for only one shooter at a time, so a comfortable waiting area with sun shades, chairs or benches will serve well. International running game ranges generally have the firing point enclosed within a shooting house or cover. 3.01.3 Target Line Area 3.01.3.1 Target Frames 3.01.3.1.1 The targets are sometimes attached to a special camming device constructed to change the target facing as the direction is reversed or the process may be done manually. The targets are mounted on hinges placed 90 degrees apart so that one target is always vertical, with the other horizontal. The design of openings into the pit houses must also include enough space for the largest target to be used, yet maintain a sufficiently small area to guard against the possibility of bullet fragments entering the confined area. Target frames should provide adequate support for the II-15-9 target so that, as bullets pass through, the target will remain upright. Use corrugated cardboard as backing material attached to a short metal frame extending up from the moving mechanism but not high enough to be struck by a bullet. 3.01.3.2 Targets 3.01.3.2.1 Most of the targets used are available from several NRA licensed target manufacturers. Targets should be glued to durable composition board (Corrugated cardboard) to allow for minimal disturbance of the target as the bullet passes through. Targets are placed in the frames so that the center is located a minimum of 55 inches above the elevation of the firing point. 3.01.3.3 Backstop 3.01.3.3.1 Backstops should be constructed according to standard dimensions with the exception that the backstop is recommended to be a minimum of 30 feet behind the target line when pit houses are used. This will reduce backsplatter of dirt and other debris onto the target mechanism. 3.01.3.4 Moving Target Mechanism 3.01.3.4.1 The moving target mechanism (drawing A-19) should be arranged to move horizontally in both directions with a variable speed capability as required by international rules. For all other events, variable speeds are not required. In action pistol, the target must cross a 50 foot firing area in five seconds, but in international running game target the time required to cross a 10 meter distance is 5 seconds for the slow run and 2.5 seconds for the fast run. For law enforcement or other use, travel time varies according to individual requirements. 3.01.3.4.2 Electrically operated target mechanisms are commercially available and can be adapted to any moving target shooting activity. When the device uses a track between pit houses, the mechanism and track must be protected from direct bullet strikes. In some cases, homemade mechanisms can be used, but must, if used for international competition, pass UIT and NRA requirements. 3.01.4 Projectile Containment 3.01.4.1 Projectiles can be restricted on these facilities by overhead baffles constructed as part of the firing line cover. The backstop area is generally sufficient to catch all bullets fired on the facility due to the short distance between the firing point and target. 3.01.5 Administrative Space 3.01.5.1 Clearance 3.01.5.1.1 Behind the rear line of the firing point, allow sufficient space for range operations officials, referees, judges and juries. A minimum space of 6 feet has generally proven adequate for moving target ranges. 3.01.5.1.2 Support Areas 3.01.5.1.2.1 An area (Preferably a building or shelter 10 feet by 20 feet) should be provided as a staging area where shooters can enter and be squadded (Assigned a relay). This helps for both the informal training range and tournament operations, but is not absolutely necessary. II-15-10 3.01.5.1.3 Spectator Areas 3.01.5.1.3.1 Separate spectators from the competitors and officials by a suitable barrier located at least 5 meters behind the back edge of the firing line. 3.01.5.1.4 Enclosures (Firing line cover) 3.01.5.1.4.1 Enclosures should be constructed having a minimum ceiling height of 7 feet, extending the entire length of the firing line with the roof overhang a minimum of 2 feet forward of the firing line and 6 feet behind the back edge of the firing point. 3.02 Range Dimensions 3.02.1 Range dimensions are prescribed for competition and may vary for informal or training activities. The firing distance for international running game target competition is set at 10 meters for air rifle and 50 meters for .22 caliber smallbore rifle. Shooting Activity Firing Distances Target Travel Distance ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Action Pistol 7-25 yards 50-60 feet 10 Meter Air Rifle 10 meters 2 meters 50 Meter Rifle 50 meters 10 meters Running Deer Up to 100 yards Up to 25 yards Law Enforcement Various Various 3.02.1.1 Protective barriers, such as walls, that are used to protect the target mechanism are usually constructed from masonry products, but may be made from other materials so long as the target mechanism is shielded from direct bullet strikes. In addition, where personnel are assigned to the pit area to move the target manually or score the targets, the walls must serve as a safety barrier and must be impenetrable. The firing point must be located at the appropriate distance and positioned on a line perpendicular to the path of the target. The projection of the firing point centerline will cross the path of the target at the center point of the distance the target travels. 3.02.2 Moving Target Pit Area 3.02.2.1 Moving target mechanisms are protected in a pit area where the buildings shielding the equipment are usually built above ground. External walls for the pit should be a minimum of 7 feet high on the pit buildings. An earthen embankment can be used to protect part of this wall. Along the top of this earthen embankment, sand bags can be used to prevent impact erosion of the berm along the firing area since most of the misses will strike this area. This will also aid in protecting the moving target mechanism and rail. The facing wall of the buildings shall be no less than 6 inches thick and can be made using concrete having a 28-day compressive strength of 3,000 pounds per square inch or other materials offering similar characteristics. Reinforcement rods and welded wire fabric must conform to ASTM requirements. Some pit walls built with concrete block filled with concrete are costly to repair. Pit buildings also may be constructed with wood products according to the specifications shown in the technical drawings, with special attention given to the facing wall. Materials selected for construction must be adequate to prevent penetration. Wooden buildings require additional surface or intermediate application of impact resistant materials. II-15-11 3.02.3 Baffles 3.02.3.1 Baffles for smallbore ranges require use of materials sufficient to stop .22 caliber rimfire ammunition. Two layers of plywood with 16 gauge steel sandwiched between is adequate. 3.02.3.2 Baffles may be constructed in several configurations, as shown on drawings A-11, A-12, A-13, and A-14. The vertical baffle, 4 feet high and extending the entire width of the range may be used, but must be placed properly to provide maximum protection. The easiest method is to extend the firing line cover 10-12 feet in front of the firing line and add material sufficient to stop any errant bullets. II-15-12 ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.01.1 Operation of the target equipment will either incorporate modern equipment or handcrafted mechanisms. Neither will be inexpensive nor easy to operate. Such equipment requires skill in its operation, and all users should be trained in its use. 4.02 Maintenance 4.02.1 Proper equipment installation extends the service life of the operation and reduces maintenance requirements. The most important part of the maintenance program is to assure smooth operation of the carrier as it passes along the rail system. Roller bearing wheels (Casters) with grease fittings should be used in the place of sealed units. Rollers are positioned to relieve friction in three directions: up, down and sideways. The track must be maintained as a straight line, with special maintenance techniques used to protect the track from excessive wear. Frequent cleaning of the dirt, mud, sand or ice will result in easier carrier travel and reduce drag caused by this buildup. Range Services ©2012 National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section II Chapter 16 OUTDOOR ARCHERY II-16-1 II-16-2 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.03 Chapter Organization 1.04 Cross Reference ARTICLE 2. Safety 2.01 General Safety 2.02 Safety Rules ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.02 Range Dimensions 3.03 Materials ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.02 Maintenance 8 2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). II-16-3 II-16-4 ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 This chapter provides information on how to design and construct a target (known distance) archery range or a field archery range on which bow hunter training or competitive events can be conducted. 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.02.1 Bows and arrows are among the oldest hunting and shooting implements known to man. Over the past few years, archery has enjoyed a major resurgence that has led to special hunting seasons for bowhunters throughout the United States. In some areas, hunters must pass a bowhunter education course to qualify for a license. 1.03 Chapter Organization 1.03.1 This chapter contains four sections: (1) General information (2) Safety (3) Technical specifications (4) Equipment operations and maintenance. Cross references are given to aid the user in finding related information throughout the remainder of the source book. 1.04 Cross Reference 1.04.1 Range Source Book References a. General Information, Section I, Chapter 1 b. General Outdoor Range Information, Section II, Chapter 1 c. Safety Plan, Section I, Chapter 2 II-16-5 ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.01.1 Safety rules for archery differ somewhat from those dealing with firearms, yet they are just as important. 2.02 Safety Rules (1) Inspect equipment for damage before shooting. (2) Check arrows for cracks, loose vanes, bends, broken nocks or any condition that may cause the arrow to fly erratically or to rupture when released. Serious injuries can be avoided by taking the time to inspect for damage. (3) Check bows for frayed strings, loose pulleys, warped limbs, cracks or other damage that may result in breakage when at full draw. Where a pool of equipment is used by several students over a period of time, be sure to assess damage by inspecting after each use. (4) Shoot only those arrows that have been matched to the shooter's draw length and have spines matched to the bow's draw weight. (5) Never dry fire a bow. The resistance of an arrow is needed to prevent damage to the bow limbs. (6) Never draw a bow that was set up for someone else. Draw lengths and weights vary. A person with a 32 inch draw length drawing a bow with a 28 inch draw can cause a bow limb to rupture with sufficient force to cause serious injury. Additionally, drawing an arrow that is too short may cause the arrow to slip behind the handle, effectively blocking forward travel, rupturing the arrow and causing serious injury to the archer. (7) Never intentionally over draw a bow. (8) Broadhead arrows should not be used for basic instruction. (9) Never carry broadhead arrows with the razor tips unsheathed. (10) Check surroundings before drawing the bow to shoot. Tree limbs, low ceilings or other objects may obstruct the bow's action, causing either a bad shot or injury to the archer. (11) Use proper gear, including armguards to prevent string burns and contusions to the forearm, fingertabs to save fingertips from abrasions and bow slings to maintain control of the bow. II-16-6 ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.01.1 Shooting Line to Target Line 3.01.1.1 Targets should be positioned to coincide with each shooting station (One-to-one) and in a direct line down range. Shooting stations are normally spacious on archery ranges, offering an ample area for the shooter to set up equipment and move about freely. An area 5 feet to 8 feet square should prove adequate. Field archery courses laid out in wooded areas should provide the same dimensions for shooting stations. 3.01.2 Distance 3.01.2.1 Target archery distances may vary from 10 yards to 100 yards, but on field archery ranges the target distances usually do not exceed 75 yards. The majority of shots on the field archery range will not be set at a prescribed distance, rather the idea is to approximate those shots the bowhunter might encounter while afield. These range between 15 yards and 35 yards. A few targets set at the longer distances will provide occasional practice for those who may become expert enough to make good shots at these greater distances. (See drawing A-30 for a standard field archery and bowhunter range layout.) 3.01.3 Direct Flight Zone 3.01.3.1 Direct flight zones are generally established one target to each shooting station. 3.01.4 Shooting Line Area 3.01.4.1 Length 3.01.4.1.1 The shooting line length for target archery depends on the number of shooting stations provided. For field archery ranges, shooting lines are a single station, usually a pit area filled with wood chips and outlined with sections of small logs or with only a stake for the shooter to stand behind. 3.01.4.2 Depth 3.01.4.2.1 Depending upon the use of the facility, the shooting line depth (Front-to-back) will vary. For example, a facility where major tournaments will be held should have a shooting line deep enough to provide shooters with an area free from disturbance, and also provide space for those who are preparing to move up on the line to set up their equipment. Training ranges generally provide an area for class activities (open air) and adequate space for each student. Field archery ranges generally are constructed to maintain the area in as natural a state as possible. The gallery or trail is often laid out, by using wood chips for ground cover and small logs for outline. This is most useful in areas where constant travel along the trail would create muddy conditions, especially in wet weather. 3.01.4.3 Shooting Stations II-16-7 3.01.4.3.1 Shooting stations on the target archery range may be covered with concrete, wood chips, gravel or natural turf. Shooting stations should provide each user with adequate space in which to set up equipment and move about freely without interfering with another archer. 3.01.5 Administrative Space 3.01.5.1 Clearance 3.01.5.1.1 For the target archery range, clearance on and behind the shooting line is important from two standpoints: the archer and range operations. Sufficient space is needed to be sure that operations run smoothly and that there is no interference with participants during the course of a tournament. 3.01.5.2 Support Areas 3.01.5.2.1 Support areas for tournament operations are important and may vary from a tent shelter to a modern building with major conveniences. Most range operators find some form of building or support area desirable even for informal operations, such as users checking into and out of the facility. Extra space helps assure compliance with range policy and procedures. 3.01.5.3 Spectator Areas 3.01.5.3.1 Spectator areas, especially important at target archery ranges, should be provided on a limited basis on the field archery trail. These areas should be separated from the range proper to prevent anyone from entering the down range area or interfering with the normal functions of the facility. 3.01.6 Shooting Line Cover 3.01.6.1 Shooting line covers are seldom used on archery ranges. Where the option is taken, shooting line covers must provide sufficient overhead clearance for bow limbs. 3.01.7 Target Line Area 3.01.7.1 Target Stands 3.01.7.1.1 Target stands for target archery operations may be either portable or permanent. Portable stands and target backers are the rule as they provide the capability to move targets to a new target line. However, where only one distance is used per station on the field archery course, fixed target stands are best. 3.01.7.2 Target Assembly 3.01.7.2.1 Target assembly may vary from placing a new target face on a portable target backer to stacking bales of straw into special housing devices along the field archery trail. 3.01.7.2.2 Where the ranges are set up to use permanent target stands, plastic or other roofing materials can be used to protect the bales of straw or other target material from weather related deterioration. 3.01.8 Backstop 3.01.8.1 Conventional backstops like those found on firearms ranges, other than target backing materials, are not generally used for archery ranges due to the shorter range of arrows. Target materials II-16-8 most commonly used are bales of excelsior which offer sufficient thickness or density to arrest the arrow's flight. To reduce costs of replacing straw bales, build a small shelter to reduce deterioration caused by the weather. 3.01.9 Administrative Facilities 3.01.9.1 Buildings 3.01.9.1.1 A shed or building large enough to shelter staff and hold indoor events during inclement weather would be an asset to the facility and may justify the necessary expense. Restroom facilities, especially in remote locations, are required and can range from portable toilets to fully equipped modern conveniences. Range equipment buildings are a plus and can be used to house targets, target stands, target assembly materials and other range equipment. 3.01.10 Communications 3.01.10.1 Clear, distinct communications are desirable along the line or between range control personnel on walk-through facilities. Two-way radios provide good communications. 3.01.10.2 Control towers may be considered a part of archery range communications and are located at the center point of the shooting line, set back several feet to prevent any interference with archers. For small ranges, towers or control booths may not be necessary. Control towers should be elevated or constructed high enough to allow observation of all shooting stations. They will vary in height according to range size. For better control, restrict the number of shooting stations for the archery range. This will allow the tower control officer to determine quickly if proper procedures are being followed and where a line officer may be needed. Note: Where shooting line covers are used, they must not obstruct the view from the tower. 3.01.11 Other Components 3.01.11.1 Surface Grade 3.01.11.1.1 Flat land is generally preferred for the target archery range, but a field archery range uses natural terrain features. A hillside or slight rise in the down range area of a target archery range will have the advantage of more easily locating arrows after shooting is complete. The down range area should be open, offer good visibility and protect against encroachment. 3.01.11.2 Side Berms 3.01.11.2.1 Side berms are not necessary on archery ranges, except where the range may be located close to dwellings. In these instances, the conventional side berms or backstops of firearms ranges may not be necessary. Plywood or sheet metal may be used to construct appropriate side barriers. For backstops, the usual bales of straw, double-layered and backed up with plywood or similar material will serve effectively. Should an analysis prove barriers too costly, explore an indoor operation. 3.01.11.3 Baffles 3.01.11.3.1 Shooting line baffles may be necessary on archery ranges where available space is limited. II-16-9 3.01.11.4 Walls 3.01.11.4.1 Walls used in lieu of side berms or used to separate the range into sections should be capable of stopping any arrow fired on the range and 8 feet high. Special care should be taken during the design phase to select materials for these walls. 3.02 Range Dimensions 3.02.1 Shooting Stations 3.02.1.1 Shooting stations should be not less than 5 feet wide for either indoor or outdoor ranges. Depth of the shooting point should be not less than 6 feet. 3.02.2 Arrow Containment 3.02.2.1 No ricochet zone is required and the overall range is less. An area extending to 300 yards or the maximum distance achievable with bows used on the facility is of primary importance for general purposes, using normal target and field archery equipment (see drawing A-30). Some bow draw weights may exceed 100 pounds and would require a larger arrow containment area. 3.03 Materials 3.03.1 Targets 3.03.1.1 The colorful bullseye targets are standard for the target archery range. For the field archery range, the life size wildlife paper targets offer good training opportunities. Other targets made of styrofoam can add realism to the field archery facility. 3.03.2 Target backers can vary from bales of excelsior to full-scale styrofoam targets set up in a natural setting. Target archery backers are available commercially. (Bales of straw should only be used as a secondary backing as the straw will not stop arrows from modern compound bows.) II-16-10 ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.01.1 Equipment is limited to a few bales of excelsior and Styrofoam and requires no operation. 4.02 Maintenance 4.02.1 Maintenance means the inspection and timely replacement of target material, weatherproof coverings for the targets, tree stands and bows and arrows that belong to the club. Maintenance costs for target materials can be reduced by covering the targets with either tarps or a roof to guard against weather damage. National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section II Chapter 17 OUTDOOR HUNTING SIMULATION Range Services © 2012 II-17-2 II-17-3 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. INTRODUCTION 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Chapter Organization 1.03 Cross Reference ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.02 Safety Rules ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Hunter's Clays 3.02 Hunter Trail 3.03 Dimensions ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Facilities Operation 8 2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). II-17-4 II-17-5 ARTICLE 1. INTRODUCTION 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 This chapter provides guidelines on setting up a hunter's clays range and suggestions on how to operate it. 1.01.2 Unlike most other ranges, hunter simulation ranges are built primarily as educational and skills improvement facilities. For example, during some range activities a user may be allowed to carry loaded firearms as they approach a shooting area. Therefore, design is important, but so are range procedures which include training programs for each user. Users must be taught when to load, how to maintain safety during walk-through exercises and how to engage a target while on the move. The Safety Plan, ( see Section I, Chapter 2), emphasizes educating those who visit the range. Safety cannot be over-emphasized for any range and hunter simulation ranges are no exception. Typical hunting situations often include taking quick shots at running deer, rabbits, upland birds and other game species. Other situations may require shooting from confined areas, such as blinds, tree stands, layout boats or gunning rigs (Flatboats set among decoys on rivers or lakes), and over dogs. And yet others include shooting across open fields, in wood lots, scrub brush, briar patches, heavy timber, deserts, on ridges, mountainsides and in valleys. The concept is therefore, to recreate those situations the hunter is most likely to encounter in a specific geographic area. 1.01.3 The ingredients of a quality hunter simulation course are imagination, sound engineering practices and a set of safety rules. The guidelines offered in this chapter are based on experience and designed to maximize safety. Remember, a range is only as safe as the manner in which it is used. 1.01.4 The ideal location for such a range facility would be in or near regular hunting areas. These are often large areas well removed from cities and suburbs, and may be either public hunting areas or private land holdings. The best approach in seeking a site is to promote the benefits provided to the hunting community at large: (1) the facility is designed to train new hunters and improve the skills of the seasoned hunter; (2) the facility enhances state hunter education programs; and (3) a well-planned facility challenges even the best of hunters. The club or commercial hunter's clays facility should serve either club members or a broad based clientele. 1.02 Chapter Organization 1.02.1 This chapter is organized into four major sub sections: (1) Introduction (2) Safety issues (3) Technical specifications; (4) Equipment operations and maintenance. Cross references are given to aid the user in finding related information throughout the remainder of the source book. 1.03 Cross References 1.03.1 Range Source Book References II-17-6 1.03.1.1 Planning and Safety a. General Information, Section I, Chapter 1 b. Construction Guidelines, Section II, Chapter. 1, Article 6 c. Safety Plan, Section I, Chapter 2 d. Planning and Design, Section I, Chapter 3 1.03.1.2 Related Ranges with common range components a. Competition Shotgun, Sect II, Chap. 11 1.03.2 Program/Competition Rules 1.03.2.1 NRA Rules and/or Program guidelines a. Hunter Education Training Programs b. Hunter Education Competitive Rules II-17-7 ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.01.1 Several impact areas for the rifle training course are required. Rifle courses are designed to be set up in hilly or mountainous terrain to limit construction costs and reduce land requirements. By utilizing draws, ravines or other terrain features, it's possible to have a quality rifle training facility, including highpower hunting rifles. In evaluating sites large enough for this facility, rule out most flat areas. However, in some parts of the country, a few flat areas exist that are large enough to accommodate such a rifle facility. Analyze impact area requirements carefully to allow all live fire areas to operate simultaneously. Aerial photographs and topographic maps of the proposed site are key tools in this analysis. 2.01.2 Teach the principles of safe gun handling on the safety walk. For example, the most fundamental rule of using firearms is to treat every gun as if it were loaded and point it in a safe direction. 2.02 Safety Rules 2.02.1 Air Gun and Safety Walk 2.02.1.1 Rules for air gun and safety walk facilities parallel all rules for the actual use of firearms. No matter what type of gun is used by the student, teach the respect and responsibility that goes with handling firearms. The following rules apply specifically to air guns and BB guns. Each student should learn these rules both in the classroom and on the training course. Remember, students are interested in all types of hunting so safety walk exercises may require simulation of more than one particular type. For example, some want only to hunt with a bow, while others want to hunt ducks and geese, upland game or big game with firearms. Be flexible. a. Always keep gun pointed in a safe direction b. Always keep your finger off the trigger until ready to shoot. c. Always keep the gun unloaded until ready to use. d. Air rifles should not be cocked, pumped or loaded until the command is given by a range officer. e. During the cocking and loading process, keep the air rifle pointed in a safe direction. f. In case of a malfunction, when the pellet or BB does not clear the barrel, the shooter must inform the range officer immediately. g. When a cease-fire is called to end firing for a relay, and not for safety reasons, all air guns (on command) will be fired into the backstop to clear. h. Construct pellet or BB traps to allow for adjustment to the various shooting positions. i. At the end of firing and upon the command, "The range is clear," each shooter is responsible for cleaning up the area around his/her firing position and disposing of refuse properly. 2.02.1.1.1 BB Gun Rules a. All participants are urged to wear eye and ear protection while live firing is in progress. Even though BB guns do not produce loud sounds, using ear protection is a good habit. b. Steel BB's must not be fired at material such as steel, masonry, rubber, wood or any other surface likely to cause bouncebacks. c. Use only approved pellet or BB traps designed to trap the projectile. Traps can be simply constructed using corrugated cardboard or other materials that BB's penetrate easily. II-17-8 2.02.2 Hunter's Clays 2.02.2.1 Safety on a hunter's clays facility may incorporate special design features, such as swing stops, since several stations along the trail or gallery may call for shooter movement with a loaded firearm. Along with additional safety rules and range regulations these design features add to range safety. Range commands also tell the participant when to load and when to be ready for target release and engagement. Range commands permit range officers to control the action and the participant. Safety barriers must be impenetrable from any distance. 2.02.2.1.1 Hunter's Clays Safety Rules a. Shot sizes are restricted to the maximum of No. 71/2, and must conform to the specifications of a standard trap or skeet load, such as low brass and low velocity. Magnum ammunition is not permitted. b. Shotguns 12 gauge and under are permitted, provided the firearm is in safe working condition. Caution: Control all ammunition to prevent dropping a 20 gauge shell into a 12 gauge barrel. c. All firearms must be carried unloaded, with actions open and loaded only on command. d. The range officer decides when shooters may carry live ammunition. Live ammunition may be disallowed for beginners or for special events. e. Hand traps may be used, provided throwing positions are set up with barriers built to protect the operator. f. Clay targets must be thrown only from designated positions and in a direction or elevation as required by design specifications. (Locking devices are suggested to limit direction and elevation.) g. Only range personnel are authorized in the down range area. h. Retrieving unbroken targets is prohibited. 2.02.3 Quail Walk Safety 2.02.3.1 A quail walk facility may be separate or a field in the hunter's clays facility. A quail walk allows shooters to walk along a prescribed path while carrying a loaded firearm with which to engage a target springing to flight. This activity requires a different approach to safety as it relates to bystanders, and the user. Space requirements include an area 45 degrees to the right and left of the shooting position, special markers may be used to identify where a shooter must shoot. 2.02.3.1.1 Quail Walk Rules (Muzzleloading) a. The shotgun must be carried muzzle up and pointed in a safe direction. b. The shotgun may not be loaded, primed or capped until the shooter is in position and is given the proper command to proceed. See Section I, Chapter 2, Safety Plan. 2.02.4 Bowhunters Game Trail 2.02.4.1 Safety along the game trail includes rules for the handling of all types of hunting implements. Rules apply to the appropriate activity. For example, a typical hunting situation may call for a student to shoot an arrow from a tree stand, an activity that calls for the participant to use a safety harness, pull a bow up into the stand with a haul line, and shoot at ground based targets. Shooting from a tree stand may, as a rule, be restricted to advanced students. Another rule may restrict the use of broadhead arrows for training purposes. Instead, balanced fieldpoints for arrows are used. The following rules apply to the bowhunter trail, as they do for any field archery course. They are: II-17-9 1. Inspect equipment for damage prior to shooting. 2. Check arrows for cracks, loose vanes, bends, broken nocks or any other condition that may cause the arrow to fly erratically or rupture when released. 3. Check bows for frayed strings, loose pulleys, warped limbs, cracks or other damages that may result in breakage when at full draw. When a pool of equipment is used by several students over several weeks or months, inspect after each use. 4. Shoot only arrows matched to the shooters draw length and with spines matched to the bow's draw weight. 5. Never "dry fire" a bow. The resistance of an arrow is needed to prevent damage to the bow limbs. 6. Never draw someone else's bow. Draw length and pull weight vary with each shooter. 7. Never overdraw a bow intentionally. 8. Where broadhead arrows are allowed, cover razor tips with an approved sheath. 9. Check surroundings before drawing a bow to shoot. Tree limbs, low ceilings or other items may obstruct the bow's action. 10. Use proper gear, including armguards to prevent string burns and bruises to the forearm, finger tabs protect finger tips and bow slings maintain control of the bow. 2.02.4.2 Safety rules for firearms or air guns are listed under appropriate headings in this chapter and may be used as a guide from which to develop rules for the game trail. II-17-10 ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 HUNTER'S CLAYS 3.01.1 Relationships 3.01.1.1 Hunter's clays ranges serve both as a training facility for hunter education classes and as a recreational shooting facility for all hunters to sharpen their skills. Hunter's clays, differ from sporting clays in two ways: (1) firing positions for the sporting clays range will be defined, whereas for hunter clays the firing stations may be recognizable only by a simple marker; (2) on sporting clays ranges, shooters position themselves on a firing point and indicate when they are "ready," whereas in hunter's clays, targets may be released anytime after a shooter has entered the firing station area. 3.01.1.2 Distance 3.01.1.2.1 Target distances should approximate those found in the hunting fields. The training obtained on the hunter's clays facility is valuable only if actual field situations are simulated. 3.01.1.3 Direct Fire Zones 3.01.1.3.1 Direct fire zones should be established for each field layout and controlled by means of swing stops or terrain features. 3.01.1.4 Trail/Gallery/Fields 3.01.1.4.1 The general layout of the facility should be in a semicircle with firing directions outward. When space is limited, one common shotfall zone is used for all fields. However, this particular layout may not allow all fields to operate simultaneously. Where the direction of fire is outward of the semi-circle and positioned correctly, all stations or fields along the gallery may be used at the same time, increasing the number of shooters that can use the facility. For the training course, however, the use of one station at a time may be necessary depending on the number of instructors and students. Each station or field should offer different angles, both horizontally and vertically. For example, a duck blind should provide shooters with low and fast targets from either end of the blind, high in coming and going away targets from the front. Caution: All incoming targets must be high (20 feet above the shooter or more) to allow target fragments to fall free. The hunter's clays facility should include fields set up in open areas, beside ponds, in wooded areas, near brush piles and in brushy areas. Target mechanisms should be camouflaged by natural terrain features, such as trees, shrubs, brush piles, depressions, in underground housings and in towers. Mounting the machines so that each target appears to leave the ground will approximate actual flight patterns. 3.01.1.4.2 The number of shooting stations depends on the training environment, available finances and user requirements. Firing stations should be identified by markers but remain as natural as possible. For example, a shooter approaching a regulation trap field knows exactly where the stations are, whereas on a hunter's clays facility the shooter knows only that he/she has entered a firing station area. II-17-11 3.01.1.5 Target Areas 3.01.1.5.1 Target areas in woodlots will require the removal of some trees to permit clear flight lines, leaving sufficient growth to make the course challenging. Designing target areas requires establishing the firing station location and defining how a shooter will track the target prior to shooting. Close in trees should be removed to prevent the possibility of ricochet. In more open areas, shrubs may be transplanted to provide cover. Scrub brush may also be piled up around a machine location as screening material. Target areas should be large enough to allow for frequent change of target angles. Target angles and shooting positions should vary to the extent that the same shooter will rarely see the same target twice. 3.01.1.5.2 Targets 3.01.1.5.2.1 Standard trap and skeet targets, midi targets, mini targets, battues, and rabbit targets are adequate. 3.01.1.5.3 Machines 3.01.1.5.3.1 Locate trap machines (automatic or manual) in either a pit or in special houses alongside the gallery. Arrange each machine in its housing to allow ease of maintenance and storage of targets. For manual trap operation, the structure must protect the operator and the machine. Automatic machines, still require protection. There are several different throwing mechanisms on the market and ranging from a few dollars to several thousand dollars each. The ideal machine is easily transported, easily repaired, and is equipped with a target hopper, and an angle change motor. It should be small enough to fit in the smaller houses used on hunter's clays facilities. 3.01.1.6 Shotfall Zone 3.01.1.6.1 Various shotfall zone areas may be used with the stipulation that sufficient distance is allowed exceeding the range of shot allowed on the facility. (See Chart B in Section I, Chapter 1, General Information.) 3.01.1.7 Administrative Facilities 3.01.1.7.1 Not necessary on informal ranges. 3.01.1.7.1 Communications 3.01.1.7.1.1 On a hunter's clays facility, distinct communications between fields and Range Control are essential. Two-way (FM) radios are best, although other forms of communications work as well. Each operator must maintain constant communications with range control during the time a squad is going through the course. II-17-12 3.01.1.8 Other Considerations 3.01.1.8.1 Surface Grade 3.01.1.8.1.1 Natural terrain should remain undisturbed, except for materials removed as a safety precaution, such as rocks and debris. Grading should be restricted to the machine house area and could be landscaped according to its natural setting. Trails or galleries should follow the natural contour of the land without any indication where the trail is, except for the locations of firing stations. 3.02 Hunter Trail 3.02.1 Considerations 3.02.1.1 The hunter trail facility offers several different ranges at one location. To set up such a facility, the land area need not be large. For example, a gallery or trail could be designed so that the user travels different trails, each of which leads back to a common shooting area. This arrangement is used successfully for biathlon ranges. On the other hand, where the space is available, a full course with many different shooting areas may be installed. Shooting equipment used on the hunter trail may range from highpower hunting rifles to archery equipment. Set up each range to simulate a variety of situations the hunter may encounter. Non-shooting game trails, referred to as "safety walks," may be set up to allow students to participate in hunter education activities, including wildlife identification, safe handling of firearms and shoot-don't-shoot exercises. In the latter, students decide to fire or not to fire (Simulated) their firearm in a certain hunting circumstance and are graded according to the wisdom of their choice. Blank ammunition may be used in some training situations to add realism and to allow the student to gain experience with the firearm. CAUTION: When using blank ammunition, ear and eye protection are required. Follow manufacturer's safety precautions as outlined on the ammunition container. Wax or plastic bullets powered by primers are another training option to provide added realism to the exercise. 3.02.1.2 Distance 3.02.1.2.1 Vary distances to targets on the hunter trail layout, according to actual hunting conditions, but be realistic. Long-range targets, for example, should not exceed three hundred (300) yards on a highpower course and smallbore targets should be set up at fifty (50) yards or less. Design the course so that the shooting areas are not protected from either wind or direct sunlight. Understanding how these two elements affect the shooter's ability to hit distant targets is an important part of the learning experience. 3.02.1.3 Direct Fire Zones 3.02.1.3.1 Direct fire zones should take advantage of natural terrain features to eliminate the need for berms and to reduce the acreage needed. As an example, when a hunter trail is located in mountainous terrain, locate all shooting areas so that mountainsides are used as a backstop and that the points of impact are free of rocks. Choose those areas where elevation changes are greatest (Shown on a topographic map where contour lines are close together). Control access into adjacent areas must be controlled to prevent unauthorized entry onto the impact area. II-17-13 3.02.1.4 Trail/Gallery 3.02.1.4.1 The main part of the range facility is the trail or gallery, laid out to follow natural terrain features that will approximate the travels of a hunter. Pay special attention to features hunters encounter while afield, such as gates, other hunters, fences, game trails, creeks, no hunting/trespassing signs, etc. The objective is to add realism and to provide knowledge of the out-of-doors so hunters will learn hunting skills in a controlled environment. Make every effort to maintain the area in its natural state. Arrange the trail so that students will not know what is next. For large areas identify target areas only on a map; require students to use a map and compass or GPS unit to find each target area. One way to set up a training event is to organize an overnight camping trip. During the trip, teach such things as fire building, hunting skills, cooking, safety, etc. Also include training sessions with map and compass or GPS unit. 3.02.1.4.2 Lay out the course in a circle so that when the exercise is completed the student will come out at the original starting point. Targets must always be set up so that no portion of the trail falls within any of the direct fire zone. 3.02.1.4.3 Props used for game identification and NOT live firing may be positioned anywhere along the course. Set up special hunting circumstances, varying in degrees of difficulty, to test the student's skills. One example is a hunter prop dressed in camouflage standing beside a tree and behind a deer prop. Another may be a child prop, just barely visible, in line with a rabbit prop. Set up as many of these realistic challenging situations as possible. Set up props in trees, under rocks, on hillsides, on roads or trails, across streams, in apple orchards, alongside fences and across roads to test the student's hunting ethics. These props may also be set up as action targets, such as a pop-up ground hog, flying duck, disappearing squirrel, etc. Moving targets may be either hinged to base plates or suspended between trees or other natural occurring objects. 3.02.1.5 Target Areas 3.02.1.5.1 Lay out target areas along natural terrain features. Target areas should remain in their natural state, taking advantage of vegetation and obstacles. Change these target areas from time to time to reduce damage scars from bullet impact. Bullet impact areas should retain the natural appearance as much as possible. In areas where vegetation is sparse and growth rates slow, target locations may require more frequent change. However, in some areas bullet scars will blend with the background. 3.02.1.5.2 Targets 3.02.1.5.2.1 To add realism, match targets with game species found in the trail's geographical area. However, most hunters find that the target used is not important, but marksmanship skills are. Therefore, to improve the shooting skills levels, use regular silhouette targets for firearms training set at shorter distances. For smallbore and air gun, use life size targets rather than the very small ones used for competition. Construct target stands that are easily installed and leave no scars on the landscape. 3.02.1.6 Projectile Containment 3.02.1.6.1 Projectile containment requirements for the hunter walk are identical to those required for conventional range facilities. Where terrain features are inadequate to restrict bullet flight, full size backstops are required. II-17-14 3.02.1.7 Administrative Facilities 3.02.1.7.1 To leave an area in its natural state, use temporary administrative facilities, such as tents, small utility buildings, camping trailers, etc. 3.02.1.8 Other Components 3.02.1.8.1 Surface Grade 3.02.1.8.1.1 Surface grade requires fixtures which will not materially change the natural state of the area. Grading is not a factor, even during target installation. 3.03 Dimensions 3.03.1 Hunter's Clays 3.03.1.1 Distance 3.03.1.1.1 Distance requirements for hunter's clays facilities state only that targets be within the effective range of standard trap and skeet ammunition. Target trajectories from 15 to 30 yards are considered normal distances. 3.03.1.2 Direct Fire Zone 3.03.1.2.1 Direct fire zone dimensions depend upon the restrictions placed on a given field. On some fields the direct fire zone will encompass up to a 90 degree fan, whereas on others the area will use less than 15 degrees. During the planning and design phase, direct fire zones should be identified according to each particular field layout, and incorporated into the overall plan accordingly. 3.03.1.3 Shooting Station Area 3.03.1.3.1 Design shooting stations so that angles of fire provide a safety margin between the shooter and trap operator. Use special shooting field restrictive devices (Swing stops) to maintain positive control. These additions may be two poles on each side of the firing station which serve to restrict horizontal movement of the muzzle, or a shooting cage that restricts both horizontal and vertical movement. Paint trail elements, such as machine houses, to blend with the natural background. An alternative is to use material taken from the course, such as small saplings, dead pine trees, etc., to construct barricades, fences or use as safety devices. Shooting cages should be portable so that angles of fire can be changed from time to time. 3.03.1.3.2 Shooting positions must be marked for easy identification. For shooting activities calling for movement with a loaded firearm during which time targets will be released, a loading station precedes the shooting lane. Shooting lanes can be very short or extend for several yards but should be a minimum of four (4) feet wide. Alert the target machine operator by a silent signal when the operator cannot clearly observe the shooter. Distance between shooting areas again depends upon the terrain, direction of fire and shotfall area requirements. The average distance between adjacent fields is between twenty-five (25) and one hundred (100) yards. Topographic maps and aerial photographs set to a predetermined scale, e.g., one inch equals five hundred feet are important tools when laying out a hunter's clays range. II-17-15 3.03.1.3.3 The ideal layout would include fairly open wooded areas, rolling hills and flat open fields. This arrangement provides a variety of shooting angles and hunting situations, making it easier to duplicate actual flight patterns of upland game birds. The construction of, or use of, a pond or other water resource will add realism to waterfowl hunting. A pond can be used to teach students how to set up a decoy spread and shoot from a gunning rig, shore or offshore blind. Use rolling hills to simulate flight patterns of grouse, woodcock and doves. Open flat terrain provides opportunities to simulate rabbit runs, quail, pheasant, chukar, or partridge flights, etc. 3.03.1.4 Target Area 3.03.1.4.1 Plot target trajectories so that missed or hit targets land in areas free of inhabitants. Throw targets only in areas clear of bystanders and personal property. Explore surrounding areas before setting up target impact areas. The distance a target will travel depends on the quality of machines used. Set machines to throw a minimum of fifty (50) yards. Machines should be equipped with both horizontal and vertical angle change devices. Build a shield at the machine to deflect target fragments when a target breaks on the machine. 3.03.1.5 Targets 3.03.1.5.1 Clay targets are to conform to the standard size (4 5/16 inch dia. x 1 1/8 inch high) as used for trap and skeet. Other specialty targets have different dimensions/diameters. Target colors should be adapted to the background to provide easy visibility Bio-degradable targets are now available. 3.03.1.6 Shotfall Zone 3.03.1.6.1 Minimum shotfall zones of 300 yards are required at each firing station. (A chart showing the maximum range of shot is included in Section I, Chapter 1. Shotfall zones may coincide provided the point of intersection of each zone (Area) is a minimum of 100 yards down range from any shooting position. 3.03.1.7 Machines 3.03.1.7.1 Target throwing mechanisms must be capable of throwing targets at different speeds and distances to provide varying degrees of difficulty. Several types of machines are currently available, ranging from those that attach to an automobile bumper hitch to the very sophisticated auto-loading oscillating machines. The main concern for a hunter's clays range is to simulate actual hunting situations. Permanent installation of machines calls for permanent barriers to protect against weather, vandalism and misdirected shots. 3.03.1.8 Administrative Facilities - temporary only. 3.03.1.9 Other Components - not used. 3.03.1.9.1 Surface Grade - not used. 3.03.1.9.2 Barriers 3.03.1.9.2.1 Build protective barriers out of ε inch plywood, two layers with either 18 or 20 gauge sheet metal sandwiched between. II-17-16 3.03.2 Hunter Trail 3.03.2.1 Depending on available land masses, the gallery or trail may be a few hundred yards or more than a mile long. 3.03.2.2 Distances 3.03.2.2.1 Distances are usually not considered, since targets are set up as the hunter encounters game animals in the field. 3.03.2.3 Direct Fire Zone 3.03.2.3.1 Direct fire zones should take advantage of natural terrain features to eliminate the need for berms and to reduce the acreage needed. As an example, when a hunter trail is located in mountainous terrain, locate all shooting areas so that mountainsides are used as a backstop and that the points of impact are free of rocks. Choose those areas where elevation changes are greatest (Shown on a topographic map where contour lines are close together). Control access into adjacent areas must be controlled to prevent unauthorized entry onto the impact area. 3.03.2.4 Shooting Station Area 3.03.2.4.1 Shooting station areas should not be precisely measured out, rather they should be considered a firing area. That is, the student should know, as indicated by a visible but nondescript marker, that a firing area has been entered. 3.03.2.5 Target Area 3.03.2.5.1 Target areas should be designed according to the specific shooting activity and not used interchangeably. However, there is an exception. Should a range be designed for highpower rifles, all other hunting guns may be used on the facility. On those designated for .22 caliber ammunition, however, only those firearms having less or equal ranges may be used. 3.03.2.6 Targets 3.03.2.6.1 Any target may be used on the hunter trail facility so long as it preserves the natural order of the area and does not present an unsafe situation to the user or spectator. 3.03.2.6.2 Life size animal 3-D targets may be used for archery. Life size game targets (Paper) or steel silhouette targets (life-size for short range use) are used for firearm activity. Animal pictures mounted on plywood and cut out to approximate actual size, can be set up to use a clay target to represent a vital kill area. Breakable targets provide interest. Attach the clay target by using small wires looped through drilled holes in the clay target. For best results, paint a red dot equal in diameter to the clay target, so when the target is broken the red dot will appear. For example, a red dot the same size as the clay target is painted on the target and covered by a black clay target. When the target breaks, the red dot appears. 3.03.2.7 Projectile Containment 3.03.2.7.1 Depending upon the terrain and ammunition authorized, projectile containment requirements will correspond to those outlined for regulation ranges. II-17-17 3.03.2.8 Administrative Facilities - may be used. 3.03.2.9 Other Components - not used. II-17-18 ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Facilities Operation 4.01.1 Training programs for range operators are required both for reasons of safety and to maintain a smooth operation. The importance of these training programs cannot be overemphasized. Training programs include: 4.01.1.1 Range operators must be trained how to operate target machines, with training to include: a. How to install a trap, make minor repairs, trouble shooting skills and how to clear a jam should one occur. b. How to shut down the machines. c. Trouble shooting techniques. Most operations manuals published by the machine manufacturer serve as excellent training aids. These manuals give step-by-step instructions on how to locate a problem through a process of symptom analysis and may include solutions for many of the problems. d. Safety precautions. Each field operator must be taught the precautions necessary when reloading a machine, how to disable an automatic machine so that the release mechanism won't function. The training session also includes, how to clear target jams, how to enter a trap house properly when a machine is jammed and how to stand when holding target setting devices or when standing in the throwing field when machines are being set. e. Target setting operations are also an important part of the training program. Training will reduce the number of targets needed to set the machine angles, both horizontal and vertical. For hunter's clays operations, trajectories will not follow a set pattern, rather the objective is to simulate field conditions. 4.01.2 Machine maintenance is extremely important. Without throwing machines that work properly the course is out of business. On large ranges, machines should be housed in dry bunkers or stored in a dry area. Machine maintenance should not be complicated or too expensive, unless the more expensive automatic machines are used. When the more expensive machines are used, a full scale maintenance program is needed. 4.01.3 To establish a good maintenance program, train individuals how to perform preventive maintenance, such as frequent machine lubrication, changing of parts that wear out quickly, machine surface cleaning, changing switches in cables and keeping trap houses clean. Each machine should be numbered and a log created to track maintenance costs. Range Services ©2012 National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section II Chapter 18 OUTDOOR LAW ENFORCEMENT II-18-2 II-18-3 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Chapter Organization 1.03 Cross Reference ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.02 Range Dimensions 3.03 Materials 8 2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). II-18-4 II-18-5 ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 This chapter describes the planning, design and construction of law enforcement ranges. 1.02 Chapter Organization 1.02.1 This chapter is organized into three sections: (1) General information; (2) Safety; (3) Technical specifications. Cross references are given to aid the user in finding related information throughout the source book. 1.03 Cross Reference a. General Information, Section I, Chapter 1 b. General Outdoor Range Information, Section II, Chapter 1 c. Safety Plan, Section I, Chapter 2 d. Planning and Design, Section I, Chapter 3 II-18-6 ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.01.1 Law enforcement employees who use law enforcement range facilities as part of their employment may come under the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) regulations. Operators of law enforcement ranges need to ensure they abide by any local, state and federal regulations that apply. 2.01.1.1 Drinking any beverage or consuming any food should be prohibited anywhere in the range area. 2.01.1.2 All shooters and range officers should wash their hands with cool water and soap after leaving the firing area. 2.01.2 Simple First Aid Kit: Law enforcement ranges need to be equipped with a simple first aid kit containing band-aids, alcohol swabs and other basic items for simple abrasions and cuts. 2.01.3 Trauma Medical Bag: A SEPARATE Medical Kit containing bandages, CPR mask, emergency tourniquets, quick clot, and other material suitable to provide emergency treatment for gunshot wounds should be kept permanently onsite or if training on another agencies range, one brought with the range officer. Local Para-medics can be consulted to determine what items should be in the Ranges Trauma Medical Bag, 2.01.4 AED Unit: If available, an AED unit should be kept permanently at the range or one brought with the range officer. II-18-7 ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.01.1 In planning ranges, law enforcement agencies are influenced by training requirements and sometimes by the requirements of law enforcement competition. The police competition range can be an excellent starting point for planning a law enforcement range; its specifications are well established and are based on the training programs of a number of law enforcement agencies. The police competition range is laid out with firing lines parallel to the target line, usually at distances of 3, 7, 10, 15, 25 and 50 yards. (See drawing A-15.) The recommended width of each firing point is 8 feet; and turning targets are required for NRA Registered Tournaments. Barricades are required at 25 and 50 yards, and the target frames must accommodate the NRA B-27 target, which is about 24 inches by 45 inches. Selecting target frames that will accommodate B-27 Targets means other law enforcement targets of various sizes can also be used. 3.01.1.1 As stated, the competition range can provide a good basic design from which to develop a training facility. When building a competition range, consider making the range as versatile as possible for training purposes. (See drawing A-15.) 3.01.1.2 Additional considerations for the police training range are: (1) Police training programs often require firing from other than the standard competition distances, such as arms-length from the target. If the range is outdoors, all-weather firing lines should be provided at all distances. At a minimum, range and target construction should be such that the shooter can be positioned anywhere on the range from 50 yards to touching distance. Shooters must have secure footing. Target height must average, as measured from the center, 4 2 feet above the ground for bullseye targets. Target frame height should be such that when a man sized target is placed in it the head of the target is at average adult head height. If the NRA B-27 target is used, the top of the silhouette should be about 5 feet 9 inches from the ground. This precludes the use of protective berms in front of the target mechanism and limits the choice of target mechanism design. Additionally, backstops should be constructed no closer than 10 yards behind the targets to protect shooters from backsplatter. (2) Police training often incorporates everyday objects to simulate protective cover. Be prepared to move such objects as simulated fire hydrants, mailboxes, power poles, doorways, or tree stumps onto the range. Real items of cover made of metal should be avoided and replicas made of wood, plastic, Coro-Plast, foam, or other material sue to reduce the chance of ricochet or other damage or injury should a bullet hit the range prop. (3) Police training includes firing at multiple targets, increasing the angle at which the shooter may fire. The size of the required direct fire zone and impact area will vary accordingly. (4) Police training includes moving targets. It is best to make these part of the over-all plan rather than tack them on as an after-thought. Will the targets move laterally? Diagonally? Up and down range? On a track system? Or on overhead wires? For lateral movement, the direct fire zone and safety fans change and must be designed accordingly during the planning and design phase. (5) Artificial lighting must be designed to allow dim and bright light firing. Lighting levels must be maintained so that firing activities are conducted safely. Police ranges will require the use of lights capable of producing all levels of light. When round-the-clock activities are planned, install lighting systems capable of producing near daylight II-18-8 conditions on the facility. Dimmers need to have switch markings that will allow the light level to be consistently repeated. If not a light meter will have to be used to consistently set the light level during reduced light training and qualifications. (See drawing A-35.) (6) Many police training programs use motor vehicles on the range as a shooting cover, to provide emergency lights for dim-light training or even to provide public address capability. If such use is planned, provide vehicle access and an all-weather supporting surface. 3.01.1.3 If space is available, the range planner may choose to build a separate special-purpose range alongside the existing range to accommodate special features. One reason to do this is that it may be necessary to stabilize surface areas to support cruisers during training exercises. Stabilizing of soil may require major excavation and replacement. 3.01.1.4 Direct Fire Zone 3.01.1.4.1 The direct fire zone includes all directions and angles of fire used on a range while shooting at a specific target corresponding to a specific firing point. 3.01.1.5 Firing Points 3.01.1.5.1 Competition range firing line areas are usually constructed with concrete slabs measuring 4 feet wide with firing points identified by painted lines on the surface. Walkways leading down range are optional. Walkways should be constructed to protect the leading edges from damage and to reduce ricochet potential. Also consider such things as lawn mower operations and moving vehicles, ATV’s, etc around the range. 3.01.2 Target Line Areas 3.01.2.0 Target lines will vary from one target for each firing point for known distance ranges to several targets for each firing point set up to simulate a variety of situations. Target lines must be set at a minimum of 10 yards from the backstop as measured from the toe of the slope, as defined on drawing A-15. This distance reduces the possibility of shooters being subjected to backsplatter. 3.01.2.1 Frames 3.01.2.1.1 Target frames for competition require no modification, but for training, frames are assembled from either soft wood or corrugated cardboard composites to reduce the possibility of backsplatter, flying splinters or redirected bullet fragments. This requirement is critical, since training often calls for officers to engage targets at arm’s length. 3.01.2.2 Targets 3.01.2.2.1 Paper targets attached to backing material must allow easy penetration of bullets yet contain backsplatter. Metallic target specifications call for mirror smooth surfaces. These targets require a minimum 10-yard firing distance because of possible backsplatter. 3.01.2.3 Backstop II-18-9 3.01.2.3.1 The primary function of any backstop is to provide an impact and containment area for bullets after they pass through or by a target. Preferred backstops are: (1) natural hill or mountain sides; (2) earthen, constructed from clean fill material; (3) earthen, with mixed core material like broken concrete, asphalt, bricks, etc., and covered with clean fill dirt; (4) earthen, constructed from unstable clean fill like sand, and stabilized internally with cribbing; (5) commercially made steel backstops. 3.01.3 Projectile Containment 3.01.3.1 Projectile containment for a law enforcement range must be adequate to contain all ammunition authorized for use on the facility. Shotguns, for example, will be fired using both small shot (7 to 9) and large shot up to 00 buck, as well as slugs. It is suggested that for a multipurpose law enforcement training range, the longest range ammunition authorized for planned activities be the controlling factor used in site selection. Projectile containment requirements should be calculated according to future needs. All projectiles must be contained within the property site by use of berms, baffles, barriers, backstops and other range features. 3.01.4 Range Control 3.01.4.1 Control towers should be constructed to allow clear communications with the firing line. Open platforms constructed 3-6 feet above the range surface are best for training ranges. Enclosed control towers may be used on known distances ranges, but they should have sliding glass windows. Movable control platforms may be ideal so that it can be moved closer for handgun training, farther up range for rifle training, or event taken off range all together to maximize tactical training drills. 3.02 Range Dimensions 3.02.1 Suggested dimensions are based on the safety of both the users and range officers. Metallic targets must be made according to the specifications in Chapter 10, Outdoor Silhouette, and firing distances must not be less than 10 yards. The surface of any metallic target must be maintained mirror smooth. Small dimples, craters, pockmarks, bent plates, weld marks, lead buildup or heavy rust do cause backsplatter. Eye protection is required when metallic targets are used. Note that we say eye protection MUST ALWAYS be worn except while wearing an approved gas mask. 3.02.2 Firing Line Area 3.02.2.1 Barricades used at firing positions for the competition range typically measure 6.5 feet high, , usually set at 25 yards and 50 yards and may be made from 2 inch by 8 inch lumber. A special bracket to hold the barricade is installed on the centerline of each position. For training, barricades can be common barriers or shields used by officers when engaging either single or multiple targets. Stand alone barricades that can be moved onto and off of the range may also be used. Ideally barricades should have wood, plywood, or plastic attachment face that provides simulated cover that is 4 feet wide by the height of the support. As with other range props, there should be no metal framing, corners, exposed brackets, or other hard material on the barricade that could cause damage or injury if a bullet were to impact it. II-18-10 3.02.2.2 For training, additional props, such as simulated parts of automobiles, trash containers (Dumpsters), mailboxes, fire hydrants or other common fixtures the officer is likely to encounter when on duty should be available. Real items made of metal should be avoided and replicas made of wood, plastic, Coro-Plast, foam, or other material used to reduce the chance of ricochet or other damage or injury should a bullet hit the range prop. 3.02.3 Target Line Area 3.02.3.1 Frames 3.02.2.1.1 Frames for competition facilities will measure 4 inches larger than the target, or as manufactured commercially. For training, target frames should not contain any metallic objects that will cause backsplatter. Dimensions should be 4 - 6 inches greater in size than the full face target, except when the target has the edge clearance built in as the B-27. Frames should be firmly attached to a stand so targets will simulate the average height of a human being. (See drawingA-19) Other target frames constructed to resemble a window, doorway or edge of a building should be constructed from soft lumber (Soft pine or particle board) or plastic to reduce splintering.3.02.3.2 Targets. 3.02.3.2.1 Only paper or cardboard targets should be used in training exercises where the firing distance is less than 10 yards. Paper targets should be mounted on corrugated cardboard or other composite not capable of producing backsplatter. Targets may be set up either fully or partially exposed. 3.02.3.2.2 Construct moving target mechanisms according to guidelines provided in Chapter 15, Outdoor Moving Target, with one difference. For law enforcement training ranges, the target and backing material must be made from corrugated cardboard or a composite not capable of producing ricochets or backsplatter. 3.02.3.2.3 Other types of targets known as "decision" targets are available commercially. Such targets are commonly set up in a "shoot/don't shoot" placement that requires special design work on the backstop to contain bullets. 3.02.3.3 Backstop Design 3.02.3.3.1 Backstop heights vary according to use. The following dimensions establish the overall width of the backstop and call for a minimum extension of 5 feet beyond the end target as measured at the top of the berm, assuming one target for each firing point. There are some exceptions to this requirement: (1) If the range has high side berms, walls or other barriers installed along the sides of the range. (2) Where walls or other barriers are used alongside the range, the overall width may be reduced accordingly. (3) Where side berms, walls or other barriers are used, the distance from the outside edge of the last (Wing) target to the toe of the berm or edge of the barrier shall be no less than 5 feet. (4) Where the range is immediately adjacent to another with firing lines at different distances and side berms not used, the overall separation of both ranges must be increased so that the shorter of the two ranges is outside the longer range's direct fire zone. II-18-11 3.02.3.3.2 Refer to Section 1 Chapter 1, 3.04.5.1. 1Constructing the backstop calls for the natural grade to be cut and compacted level, for a width and length equal to or exceeding the base required by the proposed backstop dimensions. Dimensions should include a 5-to-6 feet wide flat surface on top of the backstop for easy maintenance. Length, therefore, would be based on the total target line length plus 5 foot extensions beyond each end target. A soil analysis by a soils engineer determines surface and subsurface conditions in the area of proposed construction. Various soil conditions influence backstop construction and directly affect construction procedures. Information on surface conditions is necessary for planning construction. For example, can the soil support construction equipment, and should vegetation exist where excess material is deposited to prevent erosion? Of primary importance is the foundation area. Will it support the added weight of the backstop? Often in poor soils, the foundation area will require excavation and replacing of poor soil with suitable material. The slope of the range side (Side facing the shooter is recommended be as steep as possible, depending on the natural angle of the soil. A natural hill that has the minimum required height and slope may be used as a backstop. The natural slope is recommended to be at least 1.5:1 (33 - 34 degrees), and the height from the toe of the cut slope to the visual crest must be at least that specified for a man-made backstop. Targets should be positioned so that the centers are 5 feet above this reference line. The reference line should be established on a plus or minus 3 percent grade. Use construction techniques to stabilize both the cut area and any fill material used on site. A horizontal bullet catcher may be installed above the cut area and so as not to add any significant loading factors along the berm face sufficient to cause slides or cave-ins. This is especially important in areas frequently saturated by heavy rains. Construction procedures should support the horizontal bullet catcher (see drawing 1/C-4) and stabilize soils. Where the cut area is backed by high terrain features, such as hills or mountains, horizontal bullet catchers may be omitted. In other areas, the land above the cut should be cleared of trees and debris to the visual crest or at least 100 feet. The visual crest is the highest part of the hill that can be seen by an observer standing on the firing line. If a range has several firing lines, the visual crest will vary, depending on the point of observation. In any event, the closest point of observation yields the lower visible crest. Where necessary, depending on soil conditions Geocell materials may be used to maintain a vertical slope on the backstop. 3.03 Materials 3.03.1 Materials for Backstop Construction 3.03.1.1 The impact surface of the backstop must be free of rocks and debris to a depth of 18-to-24 inches to prevent ricochets. Take fill material for the backstop from a borrow pit on site if possible. Fill should be relatively free of large rocks or other debris. In rocky soils, where the face of a hillside is cut to provide a better angle, over-excavate the cut and place clean fill in the cavity to provide a clean impact area. In poor soil areas, stabilizing techniques include: (1) Nets designed specifically for slope retention may be used until vegetation is mature enough to add strength to the soil. These nets are made of biodegradable material, either burlap or netting saturated with fertilizer and grass seed. Suitable mixtures of grass include rye, fescue and crown vetch. When considering slope retention methods, determine the slump potential of a given soil type. An experienced soils engineer or the local Soil Conservation District office are good sources of help. (2) Use wooden cribs to construct a backstop core with additional clean earth placed on the facing side. Where the supply of clean soil is limited, build the crib with special (bullet penetrable) vertical panels which are then used as target backers. These panels, made II-18-12 from soft pine, must be frequently removed and replaced. A good technique is to provide channels for several panels and as one deteriorates, clean out debris and slide additional panels into place in front of the damaged panel, along with additional fill material. After several panels have been shot up, remove all the damaged panels, clean out excess material for lead recovery, insert new panels and begin anew. The major disadvantage of a crib backstop is the rapid deterioration of the wood. The wooden crib backstop is not recommended for ranges where shooting distances exceed 25 yards. During the evaluation process include the disadvantages of a wooden crib in the initial analysis. Remember, such an elaborate bullet stop or backstop is very expensive. When this backstop is used, the recommended height is 20 feet. (3)Steel backstops, may also be used as in areas where fill dirt is inadequate. The main drawback with steel backstops is the cost of building the backstop to meet minimum widths and the foundation to support the system. However, if there is a substantial amount of shooting, the cost may be partially offset by the sale of reclaimed lead. In fact, steel backstops installed on outdoor commercial, law enforcement and some private ranges have paid for themselves from recovered lead sales. National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section III Chapter 1 GENERAL INDOOR RANGE INFORMATION Range Services ©2012 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Cross Reference ARTICLE 2. GENERAL INDOOR INFORMATION 2.01 Introduction 2.02 Planning Overview 2.03 General Information ARTICLE 3. SAFETY 3.01 Elements of the Plan 3.02 General Rules and Regulations ARTICLE 4. PLANNING AND DESIGN 4.01 Planning and Design Considerations 4.02 Planning 4.03 Design 4.04 Professional Assistance 8 2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). III-1-4 III-1-5 ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 This chapter provides range planners with information on how indoor ranges are built. Information includes the advantages and some disadvantages of building an indoor range. Before the decision to build an indoor range is made, all factors must be included in the decision-making process. For example, in some areas regulations covering environmental pollution, coupled with urban sprawl and the lack of open spaces for outdoor shooting facilities, have created a shift toward the construction of indoor ranges. Indoor ranges, unlike outdoor facilities, offer a totally controlled shooting environment, eliminating difficulties with bullet containment and sound which affect outdoor ranges. In addition, planners must communicate with the public sector, for too often past practices have been inadequate. Range developers must provide permit authorities with adequate information on the project, how it is designed, how it will be used and how it will benefit the community. 1.01.2 Nothing in the information that follows should be considered as Αrequirements≅ or Αstandards≅ of NRA. The informational items provided are suggested Αguidelines.≅ A range designer, owner, or operator may, or may not choose to act on any or all of these guidelines. It should not be interpreted by anyone that a failure to accept and /or implement any of the guidelines set forth herein is evidence of a Αcavalier attitude≅ regarding health and/or safety. A range operation may otherwise be very safety and health conscious without having to conform to all of these suggested guidelines. 1.02 Cross Reference (a) General Information, Section I, Chapter 1 (b) Safety Plan, Section I, Chapter 2 (c) Planning and Design, Section I, Chapter 3 III-1-6 ARTICLE 2. GENERAL INDOOR INFORMATION 2.01 Introduction 2.01.1 Design considerations for an indoor range must include: (1) ballistic envelope impenetrable walls, floor and ceiling; (2) adequate ventilation (3) lighting to approximate near daylight conditions; (4) sufficient space and (5) acoustical treatment for sound attenuation transmission and reverberation. 2.01.2 Factors that may lead to an unsafe operation are: (1) Incompatibility of use with original design (2) Change of use without appropriate modification 2.01.2.1 The range must be used according to its original purposes. Sometimes, facilities are used in a manner inconsistent with the original design. To prevent this, establish a program that will explain why rules must be followed. In addition, range use criteria should be distributed to each user, with a requirement that a document be signed stating he/she understands and will comply with the stated rules. 2.02 Planning Overview 2.02.1 A well thought-out plan takes into consideration: (1) Essentials (2) Desirables (3) Alternatives, to include advantages and disadvantages 2.02.1.1 This plan should be written, spelling out what each aspect must accomplish. In addition, list all desirables and then alternatives, including the advantages and disadvantages. Only then can the decision-making process be done correctly. By setting up a systematic plan, mistakes will be minimized. 2.03 General Information 2.03.1 Indoor range construction projects generally require the same approach as outdoor ranges. Refer to Section I and II for: (1) General information planning and design; (2) Setting up a safety plan; (3) Organization and management and (4) Range operations and maintenance. III-1-7 ARTICLE 3. SAFETY 3.01 Elements of the Plan (a) Rules (b) Physical Facilities (c) Training 3.01.1 Safety is affected by setting up control measures to which range users must adhere. These rules must be followed while handling firearms on an indoor range. Users must understand the rules of firearms-handling before live firing. Instructors or coaches provide additional help, thus enhancing the safety program. 3.01.2 Developing the safety plan includes the four E's -- evaluate, engineer, educate and enforce. 3.01.2.1 Evaluation determines what type indoor range will be constructed. The first step is to identify which firearms will be used, such as .38 caliber special, .22 caliber rimfire, .357 magnum, .45 ACP, .44 caliber magnum or a combination of calibers. Once this decision is made, the next step is to engineer or design. Design the facility to accommodate the planned activity. For highpower rifles, backstops must be capable of handling the higher velocity bullets. Do not design for pistol calibers and expect to use highpower rifles. The third step is to educate. Those who supervise or use the indoor range must be taught how the facility is to be used. They should understand the design and why any use outside its design limits is prohibited. For those who fail to abide by the rules, the final step is to enforce. To suspend privileges either temporarily or permanently. Rules are worthless without enforcement. 3.02 General Rules and Regulations 3.02.1 Designing and constructing an indoor shooting facility provides a workable facility for a planned activity. How it is used is of primary importance, for an indoor range is only as safe as the manner in which it is used. 3.02.2 The following gun handling rules are suggested for range safety plans. The Fundamental NRA Rules for Safe Gun Handling Are: (1) ALWAYS Keep the Gun Pointed in a Safe Direction. (2) ALWAYS Keep Your Finger Off the Trigger Until Ready to Shoot. (3) ALWAYS Keep the Gun Unloaded Until Ready to Shoot. When Using A Gun, Always Follow These Rules: (4) Know Your Target and What is Beyond; Make Sure the Down-Range Area is Unoccupied (5) Be Sure the Gun is Safe to Operate. (6) Be Thoroughly Familiar With How the Gun Operates. (7) Use Only the Correct Ammunition For Your Gun. (8) Wear eye and ear protection as appropriate. (9) Never Use Alcohol or Drugs Before or While Shooting. (10) Unattended Guns Should Not be Accessible to Unauthorized Persons. III-1-8 Be aware that circumstances may require additional rules specifically for indoor ranges. (11) Know and obey all range commands. (12) Be alert for unexpected actions by other people. (13) Shoot only at authorized targets in authorized frames or carriers. (14) Designate a qualified range officer when none have been assigned. (15) Open, unload and bench or ground all firearms during cease-fires. (16) Do not handle firearms or stand at the firing line when others are down range. (15) Smoking, eating or drinking while on the firing line is prohibited. (16) Only those firearms for which the range has been designed will be allowed. (17) All firing will be done from designated firing lines or points. (18) No firing may be conducted closer than 50 feet from a backstop, unless the backstop is specifically designed to reduce backsplatter; or is modified with backsplatter shields such as curtains. (19) Each user is required to clean up the area after completing firing. Refuse and brass are to be placed in designated containers. 3.02.3 Cross Reference (a) General Range Commands, Section I, Chapter 2, Article 4 3.02.4 Range commands for each indoor facility may be abbreviated from those in NRA rulebooks, but should be considered part of the safety plan. Range commands should clearly and concisely inform shooters what to do and when to do it, ensuring smooth and safe operations. NRA Rule Books are now available on line in PDF format: http://www.nrahq.org/compete/nra-rule-books.asp III-1-9 ARTICLE 4. PLANNING AND DESIGN 4.01 Planning and Design Considerations 4.01.1 Planned use is the basis for design of indoor ranges. During the evaluation process, determine how the range will be used. Design work for ventilation, wall structures, floors, ceiling, acoustics, backstop and lighting hinge on that decision. 4.01.2 Regardless of the approach in setting up or constructing an indoor range, all legal requirements must be met. Obtain professional assistance during the planning and design phase. 4.02 Planning 4.02.1 Planning for the indoor range is often complicated by changes in design and substantial increases in cost. The plan establishes a course of action for those initially involved and for those who follow. For example, if plans are to construct an indoor range for smallbore rifles, backstop design and range maintenance should conform to the requirements for smallbore rifles, not centerfire revolvers. 4.02.2 Initial Planning 4.02.2.1 During initial planning meetings, make hard decisions on the limitations for the use of the range. Preserve appropriate records to eliminate possible misuse. Provide information to current users and make sure that future users will be aware of how the facility is to be used. During the initial planning process, much of the information gathering will parallel that used when planning an outdoor facility, but there are important differences. 4.02.2.2 Research. Research will center on what type of building will be needed. Can the range be built in an existing building or will it require a new one? How large should it be? How many shooters will it be expected to serve? How will it benefit the community? Will it be used for competition? Should space be allowed for classrooms? How much will the facility cost? The answers to these questions will determine whether to proceed. As in other construction projects the following should be obtained: (a) Copies of ordinances, zoning regulations, building codes, soil conservation regulations and any other information pertaining to legal requirements must be obtained. A thorough review of these requirements will help in site selection within established zones and will assist in satisfying legal requirements for building design, foundation requirements and health and safety codes. (b) Identify for evaluation either a site for a new building or several existing buildings which may provide suitable design characteristics. Several buildings should be reviewed for the proper structural support. A copy of the original design specifications, usually on file at the local building permits office, can be of significant help. (c) Gather other technical information relevant to the project. This information includes zoning requirements, on-site information and range design criteria. Local zoning codes or health department regulations normally will provide answers or solutions on how the project is to be handled. Permits to construct or modify a building are needed in most jurisdictions. These include a "use and occupancy permit," which in turn, requires signatures from plumbing, electrical and building inspectors and health department officials. Occasionally a special exemption must be applied for before using the facility. III-1-10 Since some zoning codes may specifically exclude shooting facilities, the planners during the initial planning phase, must determine what zones are affected. 4.02.2.3 Site Evaluation: At this point in the project, try to secure any drawings which may exist on the proposed building. Check with the original owner, architect, engineer, builder or office permit for copies. These drawings often indicate the construction material used in the building, thus giving the designers useful information on structural integrity, foundation design, wiring schematics, plumbing arrangements and other information which can be used to determine if the building is suitable. The following reference points should be used in making the initial evaluation of an existing building: (a) Building construction: Where possible, avoid using buildings constructed from wood products. Modifications to shore up the structure to support metal backstops or to reduce fire hazards are often difficult and costly. Masonry buildings should be given primary consideration, especially those constructed on concrete slabs. With masonry, the main requirement for indoor ranges -- complete containment of bullets -- is easier and less expensive. The advancements in concrete technology make the use of precast buildings a more viable alternative both financially and structurally. Also, precast concrete panels allow for a smaller initial investment, yet provide expendability as financial resources become available. Precast concrete companies can provide precast buildings complete (Job site delivered) if engineering specifications for steel placement are provided on a set of plans (drawings) for the proposed building. Precast assembly allows for the installation of a more suitable roof design for an indoor range, such as steel beam, bar joist or conventional wood frame. Do not consider gabled or hip roof designs. The flat bar joist design is suggested over other types if space is available in which to install ventilation and heating ducts, along with lighting fixtures. The flat roof design also provides support for air conditioning, heating and ventilation equipment outside of the range, thus saving space and reducing cost. Caution: Have a structural engineer determine the load generated when installing ventilation equipment, baffles and other items needed for an indoor firing range to determine if the structure will handle the additional load. You may have to either build a structure with the structure or replace the roof with a different bar joist. (b) Building dimensions: A minimum length of 80 feet is necessary for a 50 foot range, with the width depending upon how many firing points (positions) are needed. Storage areas, waiting areas, restrooms, office, scoring areas and a classroom will call for additional space, but not necessarily on the same floor. A second floor may be more cost-effective than to increase space in a single story building. (c) Modifications: Existing buildings require certain modifications to enhance range safety and efficient use. Windows and doors located forward of the firing line must be secured. Windows must be sealed to prevent bullet penetration and doors must be modified to allow for emergency exit only. The structure must be evaluated for strength to support the added weight of backstops or bullet traps, ventilation equipment, other assorted pieces of range equipment and for the added weight of materials needed to make the walls impenetrable. Protective devices are needed for doors to prevent bullet penetration and to seal cracks to aid air flows. Protective shields for lighting fixtures must also be provided. In addition to structural integrity, electrical wiring may need modification to provide for added lighting fixtures, ventilation equipment and range operations. Plumbing fixtures may also require modifications to allow for range cleaning. (d) General conversion: Converting existing buildings to indoor range use generally requires difficult and costly modifications. Special precautions must be taken in designing the ventilation system so that all lead or other contaminants are either trapped or expelled from the range so that no adjoining operation is affected. In high density population III-1-11 areas, the exhaust of airborne contaminants may be severely restricted by law requiring the additional installation of HEPA (High efficiency particulate) filtering systems. (e) Access: The range should be accessible in any weather condition and must have adequate parking facilities. This aspect is equally important in constructing a new building. Providing access is often expensive if roads do not exist. (f) Utilities: Water, electricity and phone lines normally do not present a problem in existing buildings, but new construction calls for running lines to the facility. Often this service is expensive, especially for long runs. Check with the local power, phone and water resource companies for cost estimates, which most companies provide at little or no cost. (g) Security: In remote areas where casual security, such as police cruising, is not adequate, take precautions to prevent unauthorized use. Install an alarm system or substantially heavier materials around doors and windows. Where laws permit, and space is available, having a maintenance person living on the property is a good idea. 4.02.3 Final Site Selection 4.02.3.1 In making the final decision -- new as opposed to existing -- apply information gathered in the initial planning phase to both preliminary and final drawings. Local laws or regulations may mandate that an architect or professional engineer make up the drawings. 4.02.3.2 With a workable plan on paper, pursue a community relations program. The benefits of a well-conducted public relations program are: (1) Helps erase misunderstandings about guns and shows the sport of shooting as a healthy recreational pursuit. (2) Promotes understanding and cooperation in the community when the benefits of a well-planned shooter education program are put forth. (3) Attracts new members. (4) Establishes a friendly working arrangement with the local news media. A good public relations program is best started by coordinating with other potential users, such as Boy Scouts, 4-H, hunter education instructors, law enforcement agencies, Jaycees, etc., who sponsor youth programs and may wish to share the facility. 4.03 Design 4.03.1 Based upon the site selected, type of shooting to be done, how many users, site layout and community relations, the next step is to design the facility by preparing detailed drawings showing specifications and necessary dimensions. Not only does a good design, properly laid out in detailed drawings, provide guidelines for construction, it preserves the history of a facility, why it was built, and how it should be used. 4.03.2 Designing a range construction project often involves many hours to do it correctly, so allow for maximum lead time in the planning and design cycle. 4.04 Professional Assistance 4.04.1 Professional assistance can often be obtained from engineers, architects, draftsmen, attorneys, carpenters, plumbers, electricians and bricklayers. They may be members of local shooting clubs or associations or may live in neighborhoods where future ranges may be located. Professional services should be enlisted whenever possible. III-1-12 Range Services ©2012 National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section III Chapter 2 INDOOR RANGE DESIGN CRITERIA T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Chapter Organization 1.03 Cross Reference ARTICLE 2. HEALTH AND SAFETY 2.01 General Health and Safety ARTICLE 3. DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Backstops and Bullet Traps 3.02 Baffles, Deflectors and Shields 3.03 Walls, Ceilings and Floors 3.04 Shooting Booths 3.05 Target Carriers and Turning Mechanisms 3.06 Control Booth 3.07 Communications 3.08 Lighting 3.09 Plumbing 3.10 Sound Control 3.11 Ventilation and Filtering Systems ARTICLE 4. APPENDIX 4.01 OSHA Lead Standard for General Industry 4.02 Effects of Lead (The Lead Industries Association, Inc.) 4.03 Health Monitoring 8 2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). III-2-4 III-2-5 ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 This chapter provides information in the design of an indoor range once the determination has been made of what type facility is needed. 1.02 Chapter Organization 1.02.1 This chapter is organized into four sections; (1) General information; (2) Health and safety; (3) Design specifications; and (4) Appendix. 1.03 Cross Reference 1.03.1 All chapters in Section I. III-2-6 ARTICLE 2. HEALTH AND SAFETY 2.01 General Health and Safety 2.01.1 See Section I, Chapter 1, Article 4. III-2-7 ARTICLE 3. DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Backstops and Bullet Traps 3.01.1 Design specifications are based on information gathered from experience, along with testing and research on available materials from which backstops and bullet traps are built. The range builder who plans to construct these fixtures on-site is cautioned that the backstop or bullet trap must be designed according to acceptable standards to reduce back splatter and ricochets. 3.01.2 Materials used to construct backstops vary from 10 gauge sheet steel to 1 inch thick armor plate and produce varied results. This variation is largely due to a lack of understanding about the characteristics of steel and what specific type steel should be used. Often what is used is obtained at no cost. The problem with no-cost material is that it very often does not meet design specifications. For example, 10-gauge steel will work well for air gun ranges, but not with .22 caliber firearms. Equally risky is the concept that "using massive 1 inch thick plates will work for all present and future needs". Thickness alone does not guarantee durability or compatibility with a projected use. Thickness, surface hardness, abrasion resistance and specific alloy compositions, combined with how the plates are installed, make equal contributions to a satisfactory backstop. 3.01.3 The design of a backstop or bullet trap is also a contributing factor to the service life of the unit. Under-design (Use of improper angles, low grade steel, and so forth) virtually guarantees damage will occur, but over design doesn't guarantee it won't. Install steel according to the type of ammunition to be used and according to proven angle configurations (See chart in paragraph 3.01.4). Additionally, backstops and bullet traps manufactured commercially provide a viable alternative to the 45 degree angle backstop. 3.01.4 Always base design considerations on what use is planned for a facility. For example, a backstop designed for smallbore rifles may not be adequate for centerfire pistols. The hammering effect caused by repeated bullet strikes on the plates of a backstop will eventually result in some damage. Metal plates selected for use in a backstop or trap must resist repeated stress, according to the degree of stress applied. Necessary characteristics are: resistance to abrasion, resistance to penetration, surface hardness, thickness and alloyed strength to resist metal fatigue. These characteristics in a steel are produced by mixing different metals to form a stronger alloy. This mixture can produce either a soft (Ductile) or an extremely hard composition. With a quality alloy, the final factor is installation. For example, erect the metal plates so that stress from a bullet strike is distributed over a larger area to minimize damage. Those involved in the design process should recognize that selecting steel plate is critical. Quality steel is not difficult to find, but it is often expensive and may require special welding techniques. Remember, the time and attention needed to design a quality facility are usually about the same as for an improperly designed one. Plan for quality. Note: Designers must consider the type of ammunition to be used on a range. The following table is a guide for determining use based on either the use of low energy or high energy ammunition. Note: In order to build and operate a safe backstop for a shooting range, the plan, specifications and construction of said backstop requires the thorough professional evaluation, guidance and services of professional engineers and architects. The chart below is not, under any circumstances, to be used as a substitute for the necessary professional services of engineers and architects that are required to design and build a safe shooting range backstop. III-2-8 Table 1.i Examples of Acceptable Ammunition, Muzzle Velocities and Minimum Steel Plate Thickness for Metal Backstops, Deflector Plates (Baffles), and Bullet Traps Maximum Ammo Muzzle Armor Plate Angle Velocity 300 BHN 440 BHN 500 BHN (feet/ sec) mm thick mm thick mm thick 42 .22 LR rimfire 1100 6 6 6 42 .38 Cal. Ball 755 10 6 6 42 .357 Cal. 1235 10 6 6 42 .45 cal. 890 10 6 6 42 9mm pistol 1220 10 6 6 42 .44 Magnum 1200 12 10 10 30 5.56 x 45 mm NATO (.223 Rem) 3240 12 NR* 10 30 .30 caliber carbine 1990 12 NR* 10 30 7.62 X51 NATO (.308 Win) 2800 12 NR* 10 Note: 0.25 inch and.375 inch plate may be substituted for 6-mm and 10-mm plate, respectively. 6mm =.2375 tenths of an inch 10mm =.400 tenths of an inch NR* Not Recommended (Armor Piercing and Incendiary Ammunition Prohibited) * NRA highly recommends you contact a commercial manufacturer for your backstop needs. 3.01.5 There are many different backstop and bullet trap designs on the market today. You may want to contact the manufacturers and discuss your specific use, budget, and space requirements, and go with the design that most adequately meets your shooting range needs. (See References to Products & Services section of the Appendix.) III-2-9 3.01.6.2 The General Services Administration has written specifications for target backstop steel in their bulletin (Public Building Service, Indoor Firing Range Design, Operations and Maintenance Criteria April 2012, Appendix B)ii. The chart shown above is compatible with GSA specifications and the steel alloys specified therein are available in warehouse stocks. "Steel plates supported by concrete or masonry should be anchored by expansion bolts or toggle bolts, as suitable for construction, with flush countersunk heads, not more than 12 inches on center of all edges of each plate. Joints and edge lines shall be backed with continuous 2 inch plate no less than 4 inches wide. Bolts pierce both facing and back plates. Expansion bolts penetrate concrete not less than 2 inches. Steel plates must have milled edges at all joints. "Joints must be butted flush and smooth. Plates must be free from buckle or wave after erection. Exposed edges must be beveled at 42 degrees to a fillet approximately 1/16 inch thick. There shall be no horizontal joints in any steel plate work. Welding must meet the American Welding Society Code for welding in building construction: "Steel plates joined at and supported on structural steel supports must be spot welded to steel supports not more than 6 inches on center." 3.02 Baffles/Deflectors/Shields 3.02.1 Baffles on indoor ranges protect lighting fixtures, ventilation and heating ducts, ceilings and target carrier apparatus. Baffles are designed to protect against the occasional errant bullet but not for repeated bullet strikes. Baffles, therefore, must extend the entire width of the range and downward to cover or protect vulnerable ceiling areas or range fixtures. Spacing of baffles on a 50-foot-to-75-foot range depends upon ceiling design. Range distance (Firing line to target line) and height are factors. Ceilings, which may also serve as floors for inhabited space above the range, must be impenetrable. Design specifications for new construction pose no problem. However, to modify an existing building, especially one of wood construction, to prevent the escape or penetration of bullets, baffles or deflector plates should be used. Baffle design requires the steel portion of the baffle be covered with a minimum of 1 inch of soft wood. The wood traps the projectile, whereas bare steel redirects it downward into the range area. Ranges with untreated baffles usually show significant damage to concrete floors and often complete penetration through wood floors; therefore, apply a wooded surface on overhead baffles. Baffles are installed at a 25-30 degree angle as measured from the horizontal plane of the ceiling. (See drawingA-21.) 3.02.2 Deflectors, unlike baffles, are installed vertically and horizontally and perform the task of redirecting wide angle shots into the backstop area. Deflector shields (drawingA-21) protect pilasters, leading edges of sand traps, bottom edges of backstops, doorways, windows, ventilation registers along the wall, etc. Deflectors are generally not covered with wood, but may be. These devices are also installed at a 25-degree angle either to the wall surface or floor. 3.02.3 Special impenetrable shields are installed above the firing line, especially in wood frame buildings, to protect ceiling areas. This shield extends the entire width of the range and 12 feet forward of the firing line. Floor shields may be required on wood floors. Construct these shields from metal sheets according to planned use. For example, 10 gauge steel covered with a minimum of 1 inch of soft wood is effective in stopping most pistol calibers. For .22 rimfire use only, 16 gauge sheet steel can be used. III-2-10 3.03 Walls, Ceilings and Floors 3.03.1 Walls, ceilings and floors of an indoor range facility must be impenetrable. This is why a structural analysis must be made of an existing building to determine loading factors which may exceed original design specifications. Wooden buildings may require modifications to support the increased weight. Specifications for new construction call for either poured-in-place concrete, precast concrete or dense masonry block. The common solid cinder block should be used in place of the hollow-core block, because the solid block can withstand glancing strikes and an occasional direct hit without sustaining much damage. Specifications for modifying existing buildings call for adding additional materials to prevent bullet escape. This can be done with wood and steel laminated shields. Extended shooting booths (For pistol ranges only) which will not permit angular shots to strike the wall area between the firing line and the backstop may also be used. 3.03.2 Laminated shields can be constructed on site by placing sheet steel or steel plates between two sheets of : inch plywood. While this method is more expensive than the extended booth design, it allows for an open firing line and better visibility for the range officer. Walls should be treated beginning 3 feet to the rear of and extending forward of the firing line until all vulnerable surfaces are protected. To aid in sound control, apply acoustical material. 3.04 Shooting Booths 3.04.1 Shooting booths, commercially available or built locally, may be desirable on pistol ranges. The panels which comprise the shooting booth can provide an impenetrable barrier between shooters, reduce sound levels, restrict the travel of expended brass and act as a spray shield when revolvers are used. There is some debate as to whether air flow is aided by shooting booths; however, methods discussed under paragraph 3.08, Ventilation and filtering systems are effective. 3.04.2 Any shooting booth installed in a bullseye pistol range should never extend behind the firing line more than 18 inches. Any long extension behind the firing line obstructs the visibility of range control officers. 3.04.3 Design criteria for the construction of booth panels: (a) Booth panels must be impenetrable by the bullet from any firearm used on the range. Note: To meet this criterion the panel must be capable of withstanding the impact of a bullet fired at any angle to the surface and at point blank range. In a series of tests using 10 gauge steel plate and firing all-lead bullets at right angles, the plate, covered with a nominal 2 inches of soft wood, withstood direct hits from all standard pistol calibers, up to and including .44 caliber magnum. (b) Must reduce muzzle blast effects on shooters and range personnel, including the shooter occupying a booth. This is accomplished using special acoustical materials. (c) Must not restrict airflow. (d) Must not restrict visibility of the firing line by the range officer. (e) Must extend from floor to at least 6 feet high, preferably to the ceiling. 3.04.3.1 Before installing shooting booths, remember some insurance companies require that on commercially operated ranges, shooting booths or separating barriers must be impenetrable. Some of the commercially available booths vary in dimension and may protrude more than the suggested maximum 18-inch rear extension. To compensate, simply move the shooters back a few inches. III-2-11 3.05 Target Carriers and Turning Mechanisms 3.05.1 An indoor range can be operated much more efficiently and safely by installing a target transport system. This system may be a simple handmade device or a completely automatic electrically powered system. Either serves to enhance safety by eliminating the need to walk down range to replace targets. 3.05.2 Target carriers should be equipped to handle the various target heights as dictated by the shooter's position. A commonly used design incorporates detachable extension rods of varying lengths, so that the target center is located at the proper height. It is important that for angled plate backstops target heights be adjustable. For example, if one target height is used, the angles required to hit the target would change accordingly and may defeat its design criterion. Optimum height for the four positions are: Position Height of Target Center ------------------------------------------------ Prone 12 inches Sitting 12 inches Kneeling 28 inches Standing 59 inches 3.05.3 Target carrier systems speed up range operations. During tournaments, it is possible that more relays may complete a course of fire. A turning target mechanism is available that faces the target parallel to the line of sight and then turns the target 90 degrees to the line of sight to begin the stated time period. While not required (NRA Pistol Rule 6.8b), such mechanisms are recommended for pistol competitions. Note: These are not necessary or desirable for rifle. 3.06 Control Booth 3.06.1 Range control booths must allow for maximum visibility, easy entry and exit either into the range or into a ready area. The control booth should provide both seclusion from and immediate access to the range environment. This design protects the range officer from frequent exposure to high sound levels and lead emissions. A typical control booth is shown on drawing A-20. 3.07 Communications 3.07.1 Sound levels on indoor ranges require a communications system capable of relaying range commands that are distinct and separate from the sounds generated by shooting activities. Caution: Some systems do not account for: (1) shooters who wear two pair of hearing protectors; and (2) persons who have substantial hearing loss. This can be remedied by using visual aids such as flashing lights, or 110dB buzzers. 3.08 Lighting 3.08.1 While technological advances in lighting continue, not a great deal of information is available on how to light an indoor shooting range properly. The old method was to install fluorescent cool white or incandescent lamps. The problem with this concept is that these lamps subjected range users to undue eyestrain caused by ultraviolet emissions. ΑGreen≅ fluorescent tubes have no III-2-12 ultraviolet emissions are available, but the quality of light may not be suitable for all indoor applications. 3.08.2 A visually safe installation must be free of excessive glare and of any major differences in light levels. This means that the walls, floor and ceiling must be designed to provide some light reflection. It also means that emergency lighting (battery powered) should be used for emergency exits in the event of a power outage. 3.08.3 Range lighting involves three systems: (1) General lighting; (2) Local lighting; and (3) Semi-direct lighting. General lighting provides uniform light levels over the entire range area and adjoining areas and is usually installed in a symmetrical arrangement to blend with the architecture. Local lighting supplements general lighting along the firing line to provide better visibility for those tasks associated with the loading and firing of firearms. Semi-direct lighting distribution directs 60 percent to 90 percent of the lighting on the target with a small upward component to reflect from the ceiling and walls to soften shadows and generally improve range brightness. When ceilings are white, lighting fixtures mounted too close create too much glare. 3.08.4 Lamp specifications for general lighting should provide 30 footcandles to 50 footcandles of luminance measured at a point 4 feet above the floor. Local lighting should produce 40 footcandles to 60 footcandles of luminance on the firing line and the Semi-direct lighting on the targets should achieve 100 footcandles of luminance. Eliminate or reduce glare by incorporating pastel colors in the interior design. Caution: Use materials with colors manufactured into them. Do not paint interior surfaces. Lighting designs should also seek to balance the color of light emissions. Most fluorescent fixtures, for example, produce high levels of blue which alone are not suitable for indoor ranges. If fluorescent fixtures are used, obtain the green tubes or install other light sources to balance the colors. 3.09 Plumbing 3.09.1 Plumbing requirements call for a fresh water supply for personal hygiene and for range cleaning chores, along with a waste system that will suffice for normal waste material and for materials removed from the range. The best approach, depending upon the level of filtration used at local sewage treatment plants, is to provide for a dry-well or septic system into which wastes from range cleaning can be deposited. Floor drains would be connected to this alternate waste system while restrooms, showers and sinks would be connected to a regular sewer system. 3.10 Sound Control 3.10.1 Sound control on indoor ranges includes two distinct components, sound levels within the range, and sound levels in adjoining, occupied rooms. To minimize amplification of sound within the range by reflection, apply acoustical material to walls and ceiling. To reduce transmission of sound to adjoining rooms, seal air leaks with air-tight insulation around doors, windows, ceiling, and walls, and line ventilation and heating ducts with acoustical material. 3.11 Ventilation and Filtering Systems 3.11.1 When designing a ventilation system for an indoor firing range, the worker and his/her exposure to airborne particulate lead is of primary importance. III-2-13 3.11.2 The design engineer is responsible for designing a ventilation system that can comply with the OSHA Lead Standard for General Industry 29 CFR 1910.1025, and other state and local building codes, laws and regulations. If the engineer cannot design a system based on that criteria, or does not adequately understand the laws, codes or regulations, then you may want to select another engineer. The ventilation system design engineer must choose a design that best addresses the protection of workers, the location and type of climate conditions, the initial start-up cost versus operational cost, i.e., maintenance, repair, and replacements costs of equipment and filters. 3.11.3 Total Air Exhaust System is defined as utilizing a 100 percent fresh air make-up. All air from the shooting range area is completely exhausted. This system operates most efficiently and effectively in areas where temperatures are between 50 and 80 degrees throughout most of the year. In such moderate climates, heating and cooling is typically not needed. Heating, cooling and removal of moisture in the air can be achieved by gas or electric units if necessary. 3.11.4 Air Cleaning Recirculation System is a system that re-circulates between 60 - 80 percent of the air in the shooting range area. The air is filtered during the exchange. The air filtration system permits recirculation of the majority of the shooting range air. The recirculation system reduces heating and air conditioning operating expenses. The re-circulating air equipment and exhaust air equipment must be designed to operate in unison to achieve the necessary air quality, optimum filter life, and overall negative pressure within the shooting range. The exhaust and make-up air design must be balanced to ensure the range is always under negative pressure to prevent air from the shooting range entering other parts of the building. III-2-14 ARTICLE 4. APPENDIX 4.01 OSHA Lead Standard for General Industry * Portions reprinted with permission from The Lead Industries Association, Inc., Controlling Lead Exposures in the Workplace, 295 Madison Avenue, 8th Floor, New York, NY 10017, Phone: 212-578-4750, Fax: 212-684-7714. 4.01.1 The National Rifle Association can accept no responsibility for factual misstatements or specific applications of information contained here-in, and reserves the right to amend or modify such information. As OSHA standards and guidelines may be amended from time to time, current standards and guidelines should always be consulted and complied with 4.01.2 OSHA only regulates the workplace where there is at least one employee. Ranges that may not fall under the legal jurisdiction of OSHA should consider the regulations as guidelines to ensure the range is operated as safely as possible. "Best management practices" are also discussed that are not currently required by law, but should be reviewed as a proactive approach to range management. OSHA has direct jurisdiction in 29 states to enforce regulation relating to shooting ranges. As of 1995, these states are: AL, AR, CO, CT, DE, FL, GA, ID, IL, KS, LA, ME, MA, MS, MO, MT, NE, NH, NJ, NY, ND, OH, OK, PA, RI, SD, TX, WV, and WI. The other 21 states plus Puerto Rico and the Virgin Islands are known as state plan states; they have their own occupational safety and health plan, which must be at least as stringent as the federal program. The rules to follow in order to be in compliance with federal regulations are printed in the Code of Regulations (CFR). Title 29 covers the labor regulations and part 1910 addresses general industry. Specific subparts deal with everything from asbestos to welding; 29 CFR 1910.1025 deals specifically with lead. 29 CFR 1910.134 covers respiratory protection and 29 CFR 1926.62 cover lead during construction. Copies of the CFRs can be found in most libraries and are also available from local OSHA offices and government printing office bookstores. A copy should be on file with the operating policies of each range. 4.01.2.1 As mentioned earlier, many other regulations pertaining to shooting ranges must be followed. So it is important to understand all aspects of the range and know who to ask for help when the need arises. 4.01.3 Four primary routes of exposure to be concerned about when dealing with lead include: (a) Inhalation (nose and mouth) (b) Injection (sub dermal) (c) Absorption (skin) (d) Ingestion (mouth) 4.01.3.1 Inhalation is the main route of exposure to be concerned with, and it is the area where controlling exposure to lead on shooting ranges can have the greatest impact. Clean air in the worker's breathing zone is critical in preventing overexposure to lead particulate. 4.01.3.2 Under normal circumstances, injection is not a concern and rarely found to be a primary cause of lead exposure. Except for organic lead, such as tetraethyl lead in gasoline, skin absorption does not directly contribute significantly to lead exposure. Skin on hands does have a significant role as a transporter of lead from contaminated surfaces to the mouth or transferring lead from contaminated surfaces to food that is then ingested. III-2-15 4.01.4 Lead contamination may be a problem both on indoor ranges and outdoor ranges, but most potentially significant human exposure problems are found on the indoor range. 4.01.4.1 Lead of concern on shooting ranges is metallic lead, all inorganic lead compounds, and organic lead soaps. Lead particulate is released from the primer detonation, the powder combustion (lead compounds are key components in almost all smokeless powders) and the lead portion of the bullet. These particles are harmful if inhaled or ingested. Particulate lead comes from five major sources on a shooting range: (1) The primer (2) Shavings produced at the forcing cone in revolvers (3) Shavings from the bullet as it passes through the barrel (4) Impact on backstops (5) Handling of ammunition and spent brass. 4.01.5 The regulations require you, as the employer, to ensure that no employee is exposed to airborne lead at a concentration of 50 Φg/m; (Micrograms per cubic meter of air) averaged over an eight- hour workday. This is the permissible exposure limit (PEL) as a time-weighted average (TWA) for that day. If any employee is exposed to lead for other than eight hours in any day, the PEL TWA for that day is adjusted according to the following formula: Maximum permissible limit (MPL in Φg/m;) = 400 divided by the hours worked that day For example: (1) If an employee works ten-hour days, divide 400 by 10 to get an MPL of 40 Φg/m; of air averaged over the ten-hour day. This means the employee cannot be exposed to more than 40 Φg/m; of lead averaged over the ten-hour day. (2) If an employee works two hours a day, divide 400 by 2 to get an MPL of 200 Φg/m; averaged over the two-hour day. This means the employee cannot be exposed to more than 200 Φg/m; of lead averaged over the two-hour day. 4.01.6 Air Monitoring. Before you can determine if you are being exposed to air lead in excess of the PEL, you need to know what the exposure is at each workplace. In order to learn this, OSHA has required your employer to measure the exposure of a representative number of employees who probably have the highest risk. The measurement must be done for a full shift, using personal air samplers and without regard to respirators. 4.01.6.1 The first measurement is called the Initial Determination, and it is very important. The initial determination will decide what safety measures must be taken by you and your employer. 4.01.6.2 If the Initial Determination reveals air lead to be at or above 30 Φg/m;, called the Action Level, certain OSHA regulations will go into effect: III-2-16 (1) Your employer must establish an Air Monitoring Program to determine your exposure at each job classification. (2) The monitoring must be repeated every six months. (3) Your employer must provide medical surveillance (physical examination and blood lead tests) to any employee exposed above the action level for 30 or more days per year. (4) Your employer must provide a training program. 4.01.6.3 During the Initial Determination or follow-up Air Monitoring Program, you may be required to wear a personal air sampler for a full shift. This is the only effective way to measure the air lead at your workplace and is in your own best interest. 4.01.6.4 If the Initial Determination reveals air lead exposures lower than 30 Φg/m;, then, following a written report, no further monitoring is necessary unless a production, process, or personnel change occurs. If the Initial Determination reveals air lead exposures at or greater than the PEL (50 Φg/m;), OSHA requires: (1) That your employer conduct the Air Monitoring Program every three months instead of every six months. (2) That your employer notify you of corrective action to reduce the air lead exposure. (3) That your employer put into effect other elements of the Standard covering hygiene, housekeeping, respirator usage, and protective work clothing. 4.01.6.5 Your rights concerning air monitoring. Under the OSHA Final Standard for Lead you are entitled to: (1) An explanation of the monitoring procedures. (2) Observe the monitoring. (3) The opportunity to record results or to receive a copy of the results. (4) A written statement of your exposure level within five days of receipt of the results. (5) A statement of corrective action if your exposure exceeds the PEL. 4.01.6.5.1 Your responsibilities concerning air monitoring. In order to best protect your own health, you ought to: (1) Participate constructively in the air monitoring program by wearing a personal air sampler and following all instructions provided. (2) Be aware of your airborne exposure level. (3) Follow common sense procedures to reduce your exposure. III-2-17 (4) Make constructive suggestions for reducing air lead levels. 4.01.7 Engineering Controls / Work Practice Controls. Engineering controls and work practice controls can be very effective in reducing the level of air lead. Some common engineering principles that can be used to lower air lead are: (1) Better filters (2) Improved ventilation (3) Shorter hours (4) Change of duties (5) Personal protective equipment 4.01.7.1 Protecting yourself through common sense work habits and good personal hygiene is your responsibility. You owe it to yourself and to your family to take care of your health. It is easy to do. Here are a few Do's and Don’ts which will help you. (1) Always wash your hands, arms, and face before smoking or eating. If you fail to do this, you will be putting lead dust directly into your mouth. You wouldn't eat lead paint; why eat lead dust? Poor clean-up habits are one of the major causes of lead poisoning. (2) Always use care when carrying, mixing, or feeding lead-bearing materials into vessels. Spilling is a major danger because it increases the amount of lead dust entering the air, creates a clean-up problem, and exposes your person and clothing to direct lead absorption. (3) Always keep your work area clean using high efficiency vacuum scrubbers. Other methods of cleaning - such as shoveling or sweeping - may only be used when vacuuming is not possible. (4) Always leave all work clothes at work and shower completely before going home. You don't want to be responsible for family members becoming ill from lead dust which you brought home. (5) Always use the ventilation systems properly and follow closely all Standard Operating Procedures. (6) Never eat, drink or smoke while on a shooting range. Bringing food into an area filled with lead dust will result in your direct ingestion of lead which will settle on your food, cup, or cigarette. This is always dangerous. Always eat, drink, or smoke in a separate area. (7) Never create dust by rough handling contaminated objects. Horse play, fooling around, tossing or careless handling of lead is both foolish and dangerous to your health and the health of others. (8) Never dry sweep - it creates dust; then the dust either enters your lungs, settles on your clothing, or lands back on the floor where it began. Dry sweeping is not only ineffective, it is dangerous (Wear your respirator when cleaning up!) III-2-18 (9) Never put your hands in your mouth, bite your fingernails, or wipe your face on your sleeve while at work. During the work day, dust accumulates under nails, gloves, and clothing. Make it a habit to rinse off with water, otherwise you might "wipe-on" the lead. (10) Never forget to make sure that the ventilation system is on and working properly. 4.01.8 Use of adequate ventilation systems normally reduces airborne lead concentrations to below the OSHA PEL of 50 Φg/m;. Such a policy can be easily enforced by wiring the exhaust fans to the switches that turn on the targets. 4.01.8.1 Lead exposure is further mitigated by the use of jacketed bullets while firing on all ranges. Monitoring during live fire has shown that this practice significantly reduces airborne lead levels. The use of smaller caliber ammunition also helps, but since shooters' preferences encompass a variety of ammunition, it is difficult to control the caliber of ammunition allowed on the range without affecting business. 4.01.9 If respiratory protection is required to protect employees, review 29 CFR 1910.134 and follow all applicable sections. Respiratory protection may be required during range cleaning, filter changing, maintenance operations, and so on. Provide employees with all training and equipment necessary to properly use respiratory protection and require employees to use respirators when installing or implementing controls to reduce exposure to lead below the PEL. 4.01.9.1 You cannot require employees to wear respiratory protective devices longer than 4.4 hours per day. Additionally, you should have a written respiratory protection program meeting the requirements outlined in 29 CFR 1910.134. 4.01.10 Institute a medical surveillance program for all employees who are or may be exposed above the action level for more than 30 day per year. This program should include all the items listed in 29 CFR 1910.1025. An important part of the medical surveillance program involves blood lead monitoring, which must be performed on employees who are or may be exposed above the action level of 30 Φg/m; for more than 30 days per year. This monitoring must be provided by the employer and is covered in greater detail in section (j) of the lead standard. 4.01.11 Post the following warning signs in each work area where the PEL is exceeded: WARNING LEAD WORK AREA POISON NO SMOKING OR EATING 4.01.11.1 Assure that signs required by this regulation are illuminated and cleaned as necessary so that the legend is readily visible. 4.01.12 Record keeping is an important part of any regulation and is very important for shooting ranges. The regulation requires medical monitoring as follows (a) Exposure monitoring: III-2-19 (b) Date(s), number, duration, location, and results of each sample taken, including a description of the sampling procedure used to determine representative employee exposure where applicable. (c) Description of the sampling and analytical methods used and evidence of their accuracy. (d) Type of respiratory protective devices worn. (e) Name, Social Security number, and job classification of the employee monitored and of all other employees whose exposure the measurement is intended to represent. (f) Environmental variables that could affect the measurement of employee exposure. (g) Maintain these records for at least 40 years or for the duration of employment plus 20 years, whichever is longer. 4.01.13 Whenever respiratory protection is used to comply with the requirements laid out in the lead standard, follow all requirements associated with training, fit testing, medical qualification, use storage, cleaning, and so forth found in this regulation to ensure proper protection of employees. 4.01.14 29 CFR 1926.62. This regulation applies to all construction work where an employee may be occupationally exposed to lead. This covers all work for construction, alteration, or repair, including painting and decorating. This standard is mentioned because there is always the potential for modification to range facilities and you must be aware that there are specific requirements addressing these modifications. 4.02 Effects of Lead* * Portions reprinted with permission from The Lead Industries Association, Inc., Controlling Lead Exposures in the Workplace, 295 Madison Avenue, 8th Floor, New York, NY 10017, Phone: 212-578-4750, Fax: 212-684-7714. 4.02.1 Lead is poisonous at high doses. Overexposure to it can cause serious illness and even death. There are two types of overexposure - acute and chronic. 4.02.1.1 Acute overexposure occurs when you absorb a large dose of lead within a short period of time. . In industry it almost never happens. (NRA Note: No known case of acute overexposure of lead has occurred on a shooting range.) 4.02.1.2 Signs and symptoms of chronic overexposure to lead. Chronic overexposure occurs with the slow, continual absorption of lead over a long period of time. Chronic overexposure is the more realistic danger in industry. Because the accumulation of lead in your system is slow, and because the effects are not always noticeable or distinguishable from those associated with minor illnesses, chronic overexposure is often overlooked - until signs are unmistakable. By then, permanent and irreversible damage may have already occurred. 4.02.1.2.1 Chronic overexposure to lead can impair vital functions of the body and damage vital organs. Among the parts of the body affected by lead are the blood, the gastro-intestinal tract, the nervous system, the kidney, and the reproductive system. III-2-20 4.02.1.3 Blood. Overexposure to lead can produce anemia. This occurs when the lead in your system interferes with your body's ability to produce and sustain red blood cells. As a result there is a general lowering of your hemoglobin, an oxygen-bearing substance in the red blood cells. This lessening of oxygen in the blood can lead to feelings of dizziness or fatigue. According to OSHA, these symptoms may develop with blood lead levels as low as 50 Φg/100g (50 micrograms of lead per 100g of whole blood). 4.02.1.4 Gastrointestinal Tract. Excessive absorption of lead can also affect the gastrointestinal tract. Experts do not completely understand how lead affects the gastrointestinal system, but the symptoms are easily recognized: colic (stomach pain), loss of appetite, nausea, insomnia, fatigue, muscle and/or joint pain and constipation. Another sign is a pale color to your skin. 4.02.1.5 Reproductive System. Overexposure to lead may have serious effects on the reproductive systems of both men and women. Pregnant women, in particular, should avoid prolonged exposure to lead because it can cross the placental barrier and affect the unborn child. Although the extent of lead's effect on an unborn child is not known, it is reasonable to assume that the fetus cannot accept the same blood lead levels as adults. Therefore, a pregnant woman has to be even more careful about her exposure to lead than anyone else. Some women who have been overexposed to lead have reported menstrual irregularities, as well as increased number of premature births, miscarriages, and stillbirths. Men can also suffer from reproductive system disorders. Although experts disagree on the subject, OSHA feels there may be a decrease in sexual desire, impotence, decreased ability to produce healthy sperm, and sterility as a result of chronic overexposure to lead. 4.02.1.6 Nervous System. Lead can have a bad effect on both the central nervous system (Brain, spinal cord) and the peripheral nervous system (Nerves in arms, legs, etc.). Central nervous system ailments are extremely rare. 4.02.1.7 Damage to the peripheral nervous system is more common than damage to the central nervous system, but it is still rare in modern industry. Some recognizable signs include weakness in the hands and fingers, "wrist drop" or "foot drop," and tremors. 4.02.1.8 Kidney. Long-term exposure to lead can result in kidney damage. Although the OSHA standard is designed to protect against kidney damage, you must be very careful because: 1. A damaged kidney cannot be repaired, and 2. Normal biological monitoring (Blood lead tests and physicals) cannot detect early kidney damage. 4.02.1.8.1 Your best protection against kidney damage is to limit your intake of lead by following your own common sense and the work rules set down for your protection. 4.02.2 What can you do about overexposure to lead? First, you should notify your employer and your physician if you develop any of the signs or symptoms associated with lead poisoning or if you desire medical advice about your ability to have healthy children. 4.02.2.1 Secondly, you should know the dangers, signs and symptoms of lead overexposure and take common sense steps to reduce your risk. III-2-21 4.03 Health Monitoring Procedures* * Portions reprinted with permission from The Lead Industries Association, Inc., Controlling Lead Exposures in the Workplace, 295 Madison Avenue, 8th Floor, New York, NY 10017, Phone: 212-578-4750, Fax: 212-684-7714. 4.03.1 Only through individual medical surveillance is it possible to determine how you, as an individual, are being affected by the exposure to lead. No two people are the same; no two people will react the same way to exposure. The only way you can be sure of your reaction is to participate in your employer's medical surveillance program. 4.03.1.1 Your participation in this program is especially important if: (1) You work in high lead exposure areas. (2) You have a high burden of blood lead from past exposures. (3) You are exposed to additional lead outside of work. (4) You have a medical condition which could be made worse by exposure to lead. (5) Your lead absorption rate changes. 4.03.2 OSHA Requirements. OSHA has established several rules which must be followed in regard to your company's medical surveillance program. First, you must be provided with medical surveillance (physical examination and blood lead testing) if you are exposed to air lead above the "action level" (30 Φg/m;) for 30 days or more a year. Second, the employer must provide the medical service free of charge and at a convenient time and place. All medical services must be performed by, or under the supervision of, a licensed physician. 4.03.2.1 If you are exposed to lead above the action level for 30 days or more, you must have a PbB (blood lead) and ZPP (Zinc protoporphyrin) test every six months. The PbB test determines the number of micrograms (Φg) of lead in every 100 grams of blood. If your blood lead exceeds 40 micrograms per 100 grams (written 40 Φg/100g) your testing must be increased to every two months. Furthermore, your employer must inform you in writing if your blood lead is in excess of 40 Φg/100g. He must also inform you in writing of the provisions of the Medical Removal Plan. 4.03.2.2 Medical Examinations. If your PbB test shows that your blood lead level is at or above 40 Φg/100g blood, you must then give the doctor the necessary information about your work and medical history, and the physical exam must include tests to check your blood chemistry and kidney function. You may also ask for a laboratory evaluation of male fertility or a pregnancy test, whichever applies. The physician must provide the company with a written opinion, and you must receive a copy. You also have the right to request a second opinion on any medical findings or recommendations by the doctor. III-2-22 4.03.2.3 Medical Removal Protection. Medical Removal Protection (MRP) permits your employer to temporarily remove you from a high-exposure operation if your blood lead becomes too high. Under the OSHA-established MRP, you are entitled to: (1) Protection of your earnings, seniority or other benefits which you would have had; (2) Your job back when you are able to return to it. 4.03.2.4 If your average blood lead level reached 50 Φg/100g or two consecutive blood lead samples were above 60 Φg/100g, you will have to be removed from any job where the air lead exposure is 30 Φg/m; or greater, and you cannot return until your blood lead drops to 40 Φg/100g or less. You may also be removed upon the written recommendation of the company doctor. In such cases you will only be allowed to return to your job when the doctor says that it is safe for you to do so. 4.03.2.5 Record Keeping. Your employer is required to keep your medical records on file for 40 years or for at least 20 years after your termination of employment, whichever is longer. These records must show your name, results of any blood lead tests or physical examinations, and any opinions written by a physician. 4.03.2.6 If you have been temporarily removed from a job under the MRP, this must also be kept on file and must include, in addition to your name and social security number, the dates of removal and return and the reason for removal. You or your authorized representative have a right to see these records. 4.03.2.7 If you were removed from your job as a result of elevated blood levels, you must be given a monthly blood test. If you were removed as the result of a doctor's recommendation, you must be given the tests or examinations which the doctor prescribes. Note: Failure to comply with the follow-up medical service may cause you to lose your benefits under MRP. 4.03.2.7.1 Medical removal is a last resort and is not desired by anyone. You may have to be removed to a job or shift that you do not like. Your employer will have to train a new person to take your place. To avoid medical removal: (1) Participate in your company's medical surveillance plan. (2) Use common-sense work habits and personal hygiene to avoid overexposure. i Engineering Technical Letter. 2011. Small Arms Range Design and Construction. P.39. ii GSA Public Building Service. 2012. Indoor Firing Range Design, Operations, and Maintenance Criteria. P.B-1. National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section III Chapter 3 INDOOR RANGE OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE Range Services ©2012 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.03 Cross Reference ARTICLE 2. OPERATIONS 2.01 Operations Guide 2.02 Operations Check List ARTICLE 3. MAINTENANCE 3.01 Maintenance Guide 3.02 Maintenance List 3.03 Maintenance Schedule 3.04 Equipment List 8 2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). III-3-4 III-3-5 ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 In Section II, Chapter 3, guidelines were offered on how to establish an O & M (Operations and maintenance) guidebook. This chapter provides specific details on the organization of an operations and maintenance guidebook (including checklists) for an indoor range facility. This guidebook will help establish a step-by-step procedure to keep the facility operational. All ranges should establish a solid program of O & M based on a preventive, rather than a reactive, mode of operation. 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.02.1 Many ranges have been operated informally without the guidance or help of any manual, guidebook or documentation. Perhaps this technique served well when having a range required little more than walking out the back door, setting up a target and taking a few practice shots. Today, operations manuals along with training programs for range officers or operators are necessary to maintain continued use of the facility. 1.03 Cross Reference 1.03.1 All chapters in Section III. III-3-6 ARTICLE 2. OPERATIONS 2.01 Operations Guide 2.01.1 Ranges should set up and use an operations guide. The guide should include a compilation of information needed to operate an indoor range successfully. Set up and tab each section in the guide (For ease of identification) and make copies for each of the officers or operators. The elements of an operations guide are referenced as: a. Organization Records, Section I, Chapter 4, Article 4 b. Safety Plan, Section I, Chapter 2, Sample Safety Plan, Section I, Chapter 2, Article 5 c. Organization Structure, Section I, Chapter 4, Article 2 d. Planning Guide, Section I, Chapter 3, Article 2 e. Maintenance Guide, This chapter f. Long Range Plan, Section I, Chapter 3, Paragraph 2.10 g. Sample Standard Operating Procedures, Section I, Chapter 2, Article 5 2.02 Operations Checklist 2.02.1 An operations checklist or guide together with training provides all users with the capability of running the facility when assigned operators are unavailable. An operations outline helps provide each user a complete detailed step-by-step operational procedure. The guide will detail who is responsible for keys, tools, range fixtures, whom to call for technical service, how to sign up new members, how to account for financial transactions, how to check in users or members either to shoot on a casual basis or in a tournament, how to turn on the lights, how to start the ventilation system, how to call the line for a tournament, how to operate range equipment along with many other details. By providing a detailed checklist of things to do and conducting training sessions for users on how to use the checklist, the problems associated with range operation by people who are not familiar with such operations is made much easier. 2.03.2 The table of contents for the handbook should be laid out to cover the following items. a. Overview The guidebook should begin with an overview of range operations, the range's purpose, who can use it and under what conditions it can be used. b. Operating procedures Operating procedures detail who is in charge, how the facility is to be used, when it is to be used, maintenance schedules, record keeping and who is authorized to do what. c. Range schedules A calendar of events. This part of the guidebook requires constant revision as new activities are scheduled. A copy of this should be provided to all users. d. Appendix The appendix should include all supporting documents and forms used during daily operation. III-3-7 ARTICLE 3. MAINTENANCE 3.01 Maintenance Guide 3.01.1 The maintenance guide may vary from as little as one page of information to a complete multi-page document filled with schematics, drawings, parts lists, maintenance requirements on lighting and ventilation systems and guidelines for major equipment maintenance. Often this guide is developed during the planning, design and construction of a project and includes a complete list of materials used in building the facility. It should document how the facility was designed and how it will be maintained, including information ranging from how to care for the lawn to how to remove and replace a target carrier or even the complete communications system. The elements are: (1) maintenance lists; (2) maintenance schedules; and (3) equipment lists. 3.02 Maintenance List 3.02.1 A maintenance list can be no more than a list of things to do, when to do it and what is required for the record books after it has been done. An example would be: a. Dust removal from walls, floor, ceiling, inside ventilation ducts, light bulbs, equipment, etc. b. Removal of lead from the pit or backstop area c. Cleaning and replacement of lamps to maintain lighting levels at or near original levels d. Repairing steel plate surface areas and removal of lead build up e. Lubricating motors and the moving parts of return target mechanisms f. Lubricating and repairing turning target mechanisms g. Painting exterior surfaces of the building h. Roof repairs i. Cleaning windows 3.03 Maintenance Schedule 3.03.1 The maintenance checklist indicates when tasks are scheduled (due date) and may be done so as to take advantage of certain climatic conditions. For example, conducting a roof inspection may be done in the cooler months or just before the rainy season. Lighting systems should be inspected and new bulbs put into service just prior to the seasonal start up. Maintenance schedules show a list of each part of the facility, buildings, grounds and equipment, with each broken down into its integral parts according to a prescribed time frame of maintenance. 3.03.2 Equipment maintenance schedules should show the piece of equipment and each job related to the maintenance program. One piece of equipment may have several jobs that must be performed during the year, identified according to a numbering sequence. For example, as the chart below indicates, the first piece of equipment is a fan motor for the ventilation system, identified as number one with three different tasks required. As shown, there are spaces to list parts used, provide a description of the job/part, indicate if the job was scheduled or unscheduled, to show the frequency that routine maintenance should be performed and a date on which the work is completed. This list keeps the equipment maintenance up to date and as an inventory control unit. III-3-8 3.03.2.1 Equipment Maintenance List EQUIPMENT NO. JOB NO. PARTS DESCRIPTION SCHEDULED - UNSCHEDULED FREQUENCY DATE Motor #1 1 Lubrication 1a Drive Pulley 1b Drive Belts 1c Light Bank 2 Ballast(s) 2a Bulbs/Tubes 2b Light Bank 3 Ballast(s) 3a Bulbs/Tubes 3b Mechanism 1 4 Cable 4a Motor 4b 3.04 Equipment List 3.04.1 An equipment list consists of an inventory of all equipment needed to keep the facility functioning, and the list is broken down into equipment lists and parts lists. a. Communications equipment, P.A. system, telephones: Χ microphones Χ jacks Χ speakers Χ handsets Χ cables Χ connectors Χ transformers Χ batteries III-3-9 b. Turning and return mechanisms: Χ grease fittings Χ cables Χ connector links Χ motors Χ switches Χ remote control boxes Χ turning forks c. Lighting systems: Χ lamps Χ ballasts Χ ladders Χ dimming devices Χ switches d. Ventilation systems: Χ ducts Χ motors Χ fan blades Χ drive belts Χ exhaust vents 3.04.2 Maintenance of Lighting Systems 3.04.2.1 Regular maintenance is the only way to ensure the effectiveness of any lighting system. Several factors contribute to decreased lighting: (1) luminaire (Lamp) ambient temperature (2) voltage to the (Lamp) luminaire (3) ballast factors (4) luminaire (Lamp) surface depreciation (5) room surface dirt depreciation (6) burnouts (7) lamp lumen depreciation (8) luminaire (Lamp) dirt depreciation 3.04.2.2 Since air is dirtier on an indoor range, lamps should be cleaned monthly. To maintain an effective lighting system, adopt the following procedures: (1) Change banks of lights regularly. This is because light output decreases as the lamps age. (2) Change lamps immediately on burnout. To allow burned out or blinking bulbs to remain in place is harmful to the life of the ballast system through overheating and expenditure of additional energy trying to restart the burned-out lamp. (3) Set up a cleaning program for lamps to remove dirt. (4) Maintain interior surfaces of fixtures by using vacuum cleaners and other cleaning materials to remove dirt and dust. (5) Arrange lighting fixtures so that ventilation in and around the fixture will serve to maintain lower temperatures. High temperature on the ballast and bulbs will greatly reduce life expectancy. III-3-10 3.04.2.3 Periodic replacement of lamps and cleaning results in more light per dollar invested, better energy management. III-4-1 Range Services ©2012 National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section III Chapter 4 INDOOR AIR GUN III-4-2 III-4-3 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1 GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.03 Cross Reference ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.02 Rules for Air Gun Ranges ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.02 Dimensions and Materials ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.02 Maintenance 8 2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). III-4-4 III-4-5 ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 This chapter outlines methods for building indoor air gun ranges. Building an air gun range is less complicated than building other ranges and can be accomplished at far less cost. 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.02.1 Since the 1500's air guns have played an important role in the history of shooting. Leonardo da Vinci is credited with inventing the first air gun, which was powered by a bellows and a strong spring in the stock. Air guns were used as military weapons by the Austrian army in the late 1700's and early 1800's against Napoleon. During the mid-1800's, air rifles, quite similar to todays, became popular at shooting galleries. The NRA offers seven different air gun programs: silhouette (both rifle and pistol), international pistol, international rifle, NRA precision AR, NRA Sporter AR, and NRA pistol. 1.03 Cross Reference 1.03.1 NRA Range Resource Book References a. General Information, Section I, Chapter 1 b. Indoor Range Information, Section III, Chapter 1 c. Safety Plan, Section I, Chapter 2 d. Planning and Design, Section I, Chapter 3 1.03.2 NRA Rule Books (available online at http://www.nrahq.org/compete/nra-rule-books.asp) a. NRA Precision Air Rifle Position Rule Book b. NRA Sporter Air Rifle Position Rule Book c. NRA International Style Pistol Rule Book d. NRA International Style Rifle Rule Book 1.03.3 Additional Information a. NRA Training Programs b. NRA League Handbook c. Jaycees Air Gun Program d. National Guard Marksmanship Air Gun Publication e. ISSF – International Shooting Sports Foundation (International Rules) III-4-6 ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.01.1 Air guns must be handled with the same care and respect as a firearm. The versatile air gun is used by plinkers, for Junior camp shooting activities and by elite competitive shooters in the Olympic games. The following rules are offered as a guide for range operators to use, but safety rules must also be based on planned use. Rules, once written and adopted, become part of the safety plan. Give copies to each user. 2.02 Rules for Air Gun Ranges (a) Obey all range commands immediately. (b) Treat all guns as if they were loaded. (c) Always point guns in a safe direction. (d) Keep fingers off the trigger until ready to shoot. (e) Air guns should not be cocked, pumped or loaded until a range officer issues the proper command and the shooter is in place ready to fire. (Rules adopted may not require the presence of a range officer where shooters have been trained in safe use of the facility.) (f) During cocking and loading, the air gun must be pointed in a safe direction. After firing, the muzzle must remain pointed in a safe direction. (g) In case of a malfunction (A pellet or BB does not leave the barrel), the shooter immediately informs the range officer. A cease-fire may be called, while the gun is being cleared. (h) When a cease-fire is called to end firing for a relay, shoot all air guns (on command) into the backstop to clear them. (i) Pellet or BB traps should be built to allow for height adjustment for the various shooting positions, such as prone, sitting, kneeling and standing. (j) Each shooter is responsible for cleaning up and disposing of refuse properly. 2.02.1 BB Gun Rules (a) Eye protection is required for all shooters. Eye and ear protection requirements are originated and enforced by each individual range. (b) BBs must not be fired at steel, masonry, rubber, wood or any other hard material likely to produce bounce backs. (c) Use only approved pellet or BB traps. Inexpensive traps can be easily built using multiple layers of cardboard inside a cardboard box. (See drawing A-29) 2.02.2 Rules for CO5-Powered Air Gun Rules (a) Eye protection is required for all shooters. Eye and ear protection requirements are originated and enforced by each individual range. (b) Never change CO5 cylinders when the air gun is loaded. (c) In the event of a malfunction due to a discharged (puncture type) cylinder, clear the barrel prior to installing a new cylinder. (d) Before removing a puncture type CO2 cylinder, discharge remaining gas according to the manufacturer's instructions. (e) Install new CO2 cylinders according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2.02.3 Multi-pump Air Gun Rules III-4-7 (a) Eye protection is required for all shooters. Eye and ear protection requirements are originated and enforced by each individual range. (b) For multi-pump air guns, do not exceed manufacturer's ratings and recommendations for the number of pumps to be used. For most shooting activities, best accuracy is achieved with less than the maximum number of pumps. ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Air gun facilities do not require heavy steel backstops or a ventilation system of any magnitude. A regular heating and ventilation system (HVAC) will suffice. However, should an air gun facility be included as part of an indoor firearms facility, such as one for smallbore rifles or pistols, the standards for firearms apply. 3.01.1 Any indoor facility should be designed to incorporate a pleasing decor. Interior design requires certain features for lighting and air flow. Include interior design through consistent and neutral colors with considerations for the best lighting possible (The rulebook recommends 100 lux) during the planning phase. 3.02 Technical Considerations 3.02.1 Firing Line to Target Line 3.02.1.1 Air gun ranges can be set up in any indoor area that accommodates movement of safety barriers and all firing positions and distances. Space for an air gun range need only consider the type of air gun activity to be conducted, such as 5 meter BB gun or 10 meter air pistol. A school gym, recreation center, meeting hall, sports stadium or large basement can be excellent choices. To build a separate air gun range, follow the steps outlined in (Planning and Design, Section I, Chapter 3; and General Indoor Range Information, Section III, Chapter 1.) 3.02.1.2 There are some ordinances in local areas which have been passed to control the indiscriminate use of BB guns and air guns within a residential area. Because of these restrictions, some school districts may be covered by laws which do not allow BB guns or air guns on school property, unless it is an organized and tightly controlled activity. To use a school gym, be sure to ask for permission to conduct a supervised educational and recreational air gun activity. Explain how the program benefits students and the community and provide literature on the particular shooting activity. 3.02.1.3 Distance 3.02.1.3.1 Distance requirements for indoor air gun facilities depend on the kind of air gun shooting planned. For certain types of air gun and BB gun shooting, standard distances have been adopted (See NRA and ISSF competition rule books). 3.02.1.4 Direct Fire Zone 3.02.1.4.1 Direct fire zones for indoor air gun facilities terminate at the backstop. Targets are set up on a one-to-one basis, with each end target placed a minimum of 4 feet from the side wall. 3.02.2 Firing Line Area III-4-8 3.02.2.1 Firing points are areas marked off along the firing line occupied by the shooter, his/her equipment and sometimes a coach. Allow enough space for shooting equipment and for the shooter to take up the appropriate shooting position, such as standing, kneeling or prone without interfering with others. If competitions are anticipated, be sure to check appropriate rulebooks for minimum firing point dimensions. The recommended minimum is 4 feet. 3.02.2.2 Support Areas 3.02.2.2.1 Support areas are important for classrooms, scoring areas and paperwork for training and competitive events. For some air gun ranges, one large room may be used for all activities. 3.02.2.3 Spectator Areas 3.02.2.3.1 Space for spectators is not a requirement, although it is desirable. Where such areas are provided, allow sufficient space for the firing area, staging area and the spectator area to minimize interference. Also make the range attractive for visitors. 3.02.3 Target Line Area 3.02.3.1 Frames 3.02.3.1.1 Commercially available target carriers may be used. Install this equipment so that it can be adjusted to each shooting position. When resources are limited, sheet metal makes good target frames with rubber bands to hold the target. Use material like corrugated cardboard, installed in layers within the box. Cut out a portion of one end the same size as the target. Cut two holes at the top and bottom of this opening and insert rubber bands, held in place with χ inch dowel rods. Then place the targets between the rubber bands. 3.02.3.2 Number Boards 3.02.3.2.1 Number boards or numbers stenciled above or below each target backer, the wall or special panel are important aids to the shooter. Number each point using alternating colors (This is required by rulebook): black on white or white on black. 3.02.3.3 Targets 3.02.3.3.1 Targets specified in NRA rulebooks are available from various target supply houses. 3.02.3.3.2 Air gun silhouette shooting may be practiced indoors by using paper targets with four rows of targets reduced to simulate sight pictures on outdoor ranges. (See target templates at the end of the Drawings section of the Appendix.) Because indoor ranges are confined, do not use silhouettes made of metal. Ricochets off the metal targets or the small targets themselves can cause damage to walls, lights and other equipment. 3.02.3.4 Target Carriers 3.02.3.4.1 Target carriers that are either electrically or hand operated are available commercially for indoor air gun ranges. These fixtures require 10 meters (32 feet 10 inches of space) for installation III-4-9 unless the cables are modified for a shorter shooting distance. These mechanisms are simple in design and may be made by the home craftsman. 3.02.3.4.2 Moving or running game target mechanisms are also available commercially (See References to Products and Services Chapter). The running game target device is self-contained, can be set up on a shelf or table, plugged into an outlet and, with an appropriate backstop, be ready to use. Backstops may be made using a sheet of ε inch plywood covered with soft building insulating board, which is set a minimum of 2 inch in front of the plywood. The soft board must be separate from the plywood in order to capture the pellet or BB and prevent bounce backs. 3.02.4 Communications 3.02.4.1 Communications require no special equipment, unless the firing line width is too great for voice commands to be heard clearly. 3.02.5 Other Considerations 3.02.5.1 Interior Floor Surface 3.02.5.1.1 Floor surfaces need no special consideration, other than for cleaning operations. Finish all floor surfaces as smooth as possible, just not too slick. Use both filler compounds and waterproof floor finishes on wood floors to allow easy operation of wet vacuums. Concrete surfaces require a fine finish, followed by the application of a quality sealing material and finish. 3.02.5.2 Ventilation 3.02.5.2.1 Air gun ranges do not require any special ventilation system. The amount of airborne lead generated as the pellet leaves the muzzle is very small. 3.02.5.3 Lighting 3.02.5.3.1 Indoor air gun ranges require the same level of lighting as other indoor ranges. Providing adequate lighting for the range means developing near-daylight conditions on the targets and producing a balanced light level on the entire range. Lighting designs include matching light sources to the space to be occupied by the range. A visually safe installation must be free of excessive glare and any major differences in light levels. This requires that the walls, floor and ceiling provide some reflection. Range lighting involves three systems: (1) general lighting; (2) local lighting; and (3) semi-direct lighting. General lighting provides uniform light levels over the entire range area and adjoining areas and are usually installed symmetrically. Local lighting supplements general lighting along the firing line. Semi-direct lighting distributes 60 percent to 90 percent of the lighting on the target with a small upward component to reflect from the ceiling and walls, softening shadows and generally improving range brightness. With white ceilings, lighting fixtures mounted too close create glare. Lamps for general lighting should provide 30 to 50 footcandles of brightness measured at a point 4 feet above the range floor. Local lighting should produce 40 to 60 footcandles of brightness on the firing line, and semi-direct lighting on the targets should achieve 100 footcandles of brightness. Note: ISSF General Technical Rule (GTR) 3.15d states that lighting on the target face must be 800 Lux to 1000 Lux and general lighting no less than 300 Lux. Eliminate or reduce glare by using pastel colors for interior design. Also seek to balance the color of light emissions with interior design. For instance, most fluorescent lighting has a large amount of ultraviolet light, which is not suitable. A mixture of III-4-10 fluorescent, incandescent and high pressure sodium lamps provide the best balance. For temporary ranges, lighting requirements should balance lighting on the target with available lighting in the building. In some cases, extra lighting may be required for the entire area. With this information, a lighting engineer can provide specific details to fit a particular application. 3.03 DIMENSIONS AND MATERIALS 3.03.1 Firing Line to Target Line 3.03.1.1 When constructing or selecting a building for an air gun range, the distance from the firing line to the target line should be 10 meters with space (Ready area) behind the firing line (10 to 15 feet) to allow shooters to move to and from the firing line. 3.03.1.2 Distance 3.03.1.2.1 Firing distances range from 5 meters to 10 meters for air gun activities. Depending on the specific use, such as training of new shooters or training for regular air gun shooting events, the building dimensions may be reduced. For example, if all shooting occurs at 5 meters, the room size can be reduced accordingly. 3.03.1.3 Direct Fire Zone 3.03.1.3.1 Direct fire zones for the indoor range end at the backstop. Firing points and targets are set up on a one-to-one relationship with end targets inset from the walls by a distance equal to the spacing between targets, or according to rulebook requirements for competitions. 3.03.2 Firing Line Area 3.03.2.1 Firing lines must be parallel to the target line and marked for easy identification and to warn against any movement forward during live firing. Should the range facility be temporary, mark the firing line with highly visible masking tape. Identify firing points by applying stick-on numbers at the front left corner of each point. Tables or benches may be used on air pistol ranges to identify the firing line. On permanent ranges, mark the firing line by painting a 3 inch wide light reflective (Yellow, white or blaze orange) line along the entire width (Wall to wall). The firing line is used as a reference point to measure the distance to a target. It also is used to establish a safety boundary, behind which all shooters must stay. 3.03.2.2 Firing Points 3.03.2.2.1 The NRA Precision Air Rifle Rule Books recommends a minimum of 48 inches wide and extended behind the firing line to allow sufficient space for all shooting positions from standing to prone, along with shooting equipment. However 40 inches is acceptable if range conditions will only allow for this width. 3.03.3 Target Line Area 3.03.3.1 Frames III-4-11 3.03.3.1.1 When target frames are built as an integral part of target carrier systems and multiple shooting positions are to be used, construct extensions to handle the various target heights as dictated by the shooter's position. One design incorporates detachable extension rods of varying lengths, so that the target center is located slightly lower than the line of sight. Depending upon the type of target carrier system and the height of installation above floor, these extension rods will vary in length. Check the appropriate rule book for competitive shooting. 3.03.3.2 Number Boards 3.03.3.2.1 Number boards for air gun ranges use 4 inch to 6 inch high numbers stenciled on either the backstop material or wall rather than number boards alone. 3.03.3.3 Backstop 3.03.3.3.1 Testing of materials is the best method to determine what material must be used in an air gun backstop. Carpeting, canvas, plywood faced with soft insulation board or a combination of these materials have been used and are adequate for a period of time. Materials, such as carpeting and canvas, must be tested in double and triple layers with a 6 to 10 inch separation between layers. These materials must be lightweight and be allowed to hang free (Attached at the top only) behind the target area. (See drawingA-29.) Similar material may be used to protect side walls. For permanent ranges, a 14 gauge to 10 gauge steel backstop should supply years of low-maintenance use. Mobile frames made of sheet metal may also be an option. 3.03.3 Administrative Facilities 3.03.3.1 Many air gun ranges are used for both training and competition. Depending upon specific use, space should include a classroom and storage areas for targets and equipment. For some air gun ranges all activities are conducted in one large room. III-4-12 ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.01.1 An operations guide is a good idea for permanent indoor air gun ranges with carriers and any complex equipment. The guide should be written for all users to explain how equipment works, start-up procedures and maintenance techniques. Be sure to keep a supply of spare target holders, target frames and other expendable items, such as light bulbs on hand. 4.02 Maintenance 4.02.1 Equipment maintenance on the air gun range depends on its complexity. A more complex facility will require more attention, such as the routine maintenance of lighting systems, cleaning and target holder repairs. Set up a maintenance checklist in the range for everyone to use so that when small tasks are completed the list is marked accordingly. Pellets create some lead dust, and cleaning of traps or floor areas at the backstop require either wet vacuum or a dampening of materials before removal. (See Indoor Operations and Maintenance, Section III, Chapter 3.) 4.02.2 Manufacturer's warranty and service manuals provide guidelines for specific pieces of equipment. Service manuals often explain how to lubricate, change parts, diagnose problems and obtain spare parts or additional product enhancements. III-5-1 Range Services ©2012 National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section III Chapter 5 INDOOR SMALLBORE RIFLE III-5-2 III-5-3 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.03 Chapter Organization 1.04 Cross Reference ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.02 Rules for Indoor Smallbore Rifle (paper targets) ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Firing Line to Target Line 3.02 Range Dimensions 3.03 Materials ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.02 Maintenance 8 2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). III-5-4 III-5-5 ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 This chapter deals with indoor smallbore rifle ranges. Information on training, competition and informal shooting is provided. Range planners are encouraged to consider multipurpose indoor ranges rather than single purpose as described in this chapter. Multipurpose use is generally more cost effective and time efficient. 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.02.1 Indoor smallbore rifle shooting, sometimes referred to as gallery shooting, first became popular in the 19th century. Indoor shooting grew because of popular school and youth shooting programs and because it permitted low-cost, all-year practice for highpower rifle shooters. Indoor four-position rifle leagues were once one of the more popular forms of shooting. Today indoor smallbore rifle shooting utilizing either three or four positions commands a popular following. Indoor ranges are also frequently used to conduct training courses for both junior and adult shooters. 1.03 Chapter Organization 1.03.1 This chapter is organized into four sections: (1) General information; (2) Safety; (3) Technical specifications; and (4) Equipment operations and maintenance. Cross references are given to aid the user in finding related information throughout the remainder of the source book. 1.04 Cross Reference 1.04.1 Range Source Book References a. General Indoor Range Information, Section I, Chapter 1 b. Indoor Range Design Criteria, Section III, Chapter 2 c. Safety Plan, Section I, Chapter 2 1.04.1.2 Related Ranges with common range components a. Indoor Bullseye Pistol (Section III, Chapter 7) 1.04.2 NRA Rule Books (available online at http://www.nrahq.org/compete/nra-rule-books.asp ) a. NRA Smallbore Rifle Rule Book III-5-6 ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.01.1 Safety is every gun-user's responsibility. Gun owners must educate both themselves and others on proper gun handling. The following safety rules are offered as a guide to developing a safety plan for indoor smallbore rifle ranges. 2.02 Rules for Indoor Smallbore Rifle (paper targets) a. The only ammunition allowed for smallbore is.22 caliber rimfire, with a designation of short, long, and long rifle. (.22 caliber rimfire magnum or .22 caliber centerfire are prohibited, unless the backstop is specifically designed for the more powerful calibers.) b. The only authorized targets for the indoor smallbore range are paper targets, which must be centered in a target frame or holder. The frame or holder is specifically designed for such use. Any other target must be approved before its use. c. Electronic target with electronic scoring is also available. These are sophisticated and more expensive systems. III-5-7 ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Firing Line to Target Line 3.01.1 Distance 3.01.1.1 Distances for indoor ranges should, if at all possible, meet rulebook requirements. Reduced distances are allowed only if no competition or training qualification shooting is planned. The standard for indoor ranges is 50 feet. While a few indoor ranges have been built for 75 feet, shooting at this distance is rarely done. A few ranges have 50 meter capabilities, these can be used for International .22 rifle and pistol shooting. 3.01.2 Direct Fire Zone 3.01.2.1 Direct fire zones for indoor smallbore rifle facilities should be set up on a one-to-one basis with each end target positioned at least 2 feet from the wall. 3.01.3 Firing Line Area 3.01.3.1 Firing Points 3.01.3.1.1 Firing points are areas marked off along the firing line that are occupied by the shooter, his equipment and, sometimes, a coach. Allow adequate space for shooters to place their equipment and assume the appropriate shooting position without interfering with others. Install panels between each point for additional safety, especially on pistol ranges. Firing Point - That part of the range provided for the competitor immediately in the rear of the firing line from which firing takes place. Each firing point is numbered to correspond with the target frames. Each firing point should have a minimum width of five feet (Except in gallery ranges where a minimum of four feet is permissible). As defined by NRA Rule Books, Section 6, Rule 6.2. 3.01.4 Administrative Space 3.01.4.1 Support Areas 3.01.4.1.1 Support areas are important for classrooms, lounge areas, scoring areas and statistical work for training and competitive events. These functions are best performed in rooms outside the range. 3.01.4.2 Spectator Areas 3.01.4.2.1 Spectator areas are desirable but are not a requirement. When such areas are provided, allow sufficient space between the firing area, the staging area and the spectators to prevent interference. A suitable spectator area may also serve as a ready room or staging area for shooters. 3.01.4.3 Ready Line 3.01.4.3.1 A line about 15 feet from the firing line. Behind this line competitors place their gear not used on the line during firing. III-5-8 3.01.5 Target Line Area 3.01.5.1 Frames 3.01.5.1.1 Target frames or holders for the smallbore rifle competition range should be designed to hold both the record target and a backing target. Backing targets are used at 50 feet and 75 feet during registered tournaments and are to be used to identify cross-fires and multiple shot holes. The NRA rulebook specifies that the distance between the record target and the backing target should be 3 inches (See Rule Book Section 6). Target holders or frames must be separated by the same distance, center to center, as the firing positions and must be uniformly spaced between record and backing targets. Target holders or frames should also be designed so the target height is adjustable. When target frames are built as an integral part of target carrier systems, construct extensions to handle the various target heights as dictated by the shooters position. The best design incorporates detachable extension rods of varying lengths, so that the target center is located slightly lower than the line of sight. Depending upon the type of target carrier system and the height of installation above the floor, these extension rods will vary in length. Lengths should provide for target positions in the following design: Position Height of Target Center Prone 12 inches Sitting 12 inches Kneeling 28 inches Standing 59 inches 3.01.5.2 Targets 3.01.5.2.1 Targets outlined in NRA rulebooks are available from various NRA licensed target manufacturers. 3.01.5.3 Return Target Carriers 3.01.5.3.1 Target carriers are generally used on the indoor range and are beneficial in reducing exposure of shooters and range personnel to airborne lead. They also reduce the time it takes to conduct training or competitive events. Target carriers are commercially available or may be designed and built locally. 3.01.5.4 Target Numbers 3.01.5.4.1 Target frames will be numbered on alternating background of contrasting color. The number will be large enough to be identified under ordinary conditions with normal vision. The numbers should be at least nine inches high and must correspond with firing point numbers. 3.01.6 Illumination 3.01.6.1 Artificial illumination of ranges is authorized. Artificial illumination for indoor ranges should provide the necessary level of even light without glare or distracting shadows on the target or firing positions. The background area behind the targets should be of non-glaring light color. Outdoor Sanctioned Leagues or Approved Tournaments may be fired under artificial illumination. III-5-9 3.02 RANGE DIMENSIONS 3.02.1 Firing Line to Target Line 3.02.1.1 Firing lines must be parallel to the target line and marked for easy identification to warn against any movement forward of that line during live firing. Should the range facility be temporary, mark the firing line so that no permanent lines are left behind. Mark each point at the front left corner of each firing point. Firing line markers should be highly visible (Yellow or blaze orange) tape or paint along the full length of the line. On permanent ranges mark the firing line by painting a 3 inch wide line along the entire width of the range, with appropriate division markers along each side of the firing point. Users should be taught the proper use of a firing line, for the firing line is used both to measure distances to the target and to maintain safety during live fire exercises. The firing line is measured as that part of the line closest to the shooter. 3.02.2 Firing Points 3.02.2.1 That part of the range provided for the competitor immediately in the rear of the firing line from which firing takes place. Each firing point is numbered to correspond with the target frames. Each firing point should have a minimum width of five feet (Except in gallery ranges where a minimum of four feet is permissible). Suggested dimensions for indoor firing positions are: Shooting Suggested Minimum Activity Width Depth Width Depth Smallbore (.22 rimfire) 5 ft. 6 ft. 4 ft. 5 ft. Width = side to side; Depth = front to back 3.02.3 Firing Line Area 3.02.3.1 Number Boards 3.02.3.1.1 Refer to NRA Smallbore Rule Book for updates or refer to the following link: http://www.nrahq.org/compete/RuleBooks/SBR/sbr-book.pdf Target frames will be numbered on alternating background of contrasting color. The number will be large enough to be identified under ordinary conditions with normal vision. The numbers should be at least nine inches high and must correspond with firing point numbers. Current as of January 2011. 3.02.3.2 Backstops 3.02.3.2.1 Smallbore rifle ranges may be set up on most indoor facilities with backstops that meet or exceed requirements for standard smallbore rimfire ammunition. The range facility may be either permanent or temporary, depending upon the wishes of the organization. Most smallbore rifle ranges are also set up to accommodate other range activities. The smallbore range is easier to design than those for the higher velocity centerfire firearms, since for .22’s standard grades of steel can be used for the backstop rather than special (AR) grades of steel, which are more expensive. If the range is to be limited to smallbore, the backstop must be marked clearly to III-5-10 indicate this restriction. In addition signs must be posted in conspicuous places. The range builder who plans to construct a backstop or bullet trap on site must build it according to acceptable standards so as to reduce or eliminate backsplatter or ricochets and takes full responsibility for its installation. The design of a backstop or bullet trap is also a contributing factor in the service life of the unit. Plates installed according to the ammunition and specifications chart below provide years of maintenance-free use. Additionally, backstops and bullet traps manufactured commercially provide a viable alternative to the more traditional, angled backstop. Design is always based on the planned use of a facility. 3.02.3.4.2 Smallbore activities may include the use of .22 caliber bullets which will strike the backstop with nearly 355 foot pounds of energy if .22 magnum firearms are allowed. Quality steel is not difficult to find but it is often expensive and may require special welding techniques. The following table is a basic guide for determining use for smallbore rifles. BACKSTOP SPECIFICATIONS CHART Table 1.i Examples of Acceptable Ammunition, Muzzle Velocities and Minimum Steel Plate Thickness for Metal Backstops, Deflector Plates (Baffles), and Bullet Traps Maximum Ammo Muzzle Armor Plate Angle Velocity 300 BHN 440 BHN 500 BHN (feet/ sec) mm thick mm thick mm thick 42 .22 LR rimfire 1100 6 6 6 42 .38 Cal. Ball 755 10 6 6 42 .357 Cal. 1235 10 6 6 42 .45 cal. 890 10 6 6 42 9mm pistol 1220 10 6 6 42 .44 Magnum 1200 12 10 10 30 5.56 x 45 mm NATO (.223 Rem) 3240 12 NR* 10 30 .30 caliber carbine 1990 12 NR* 10 30 7.62 X51 NATO (.308 Win) 2800 12 NR* 10 Note: 0.25 inch and.375 inch plate may be substituted for 6-mm and 10-mm plate, respectively. 6mm =.2375 tenths of an inch 10mm =.400 tenths of an inch NR* Not Recommended (Armor Piercing and Incendiary Ammunition Prohibited) Angle = Angle of plate in degrees from horizontal *NRA highly recommends you contact a commercial manufacturer for your backstop needs. III-5-11 3.02.3.2.3 There are many different backstop and bullet trap designs on the market today. Two of the most popular designs are crum rubber pieces and shallow angle steel bullet traps. You may want to contact the manufacturers and discuss your specific use, budget, and space requirements and go with the design that most adequately meets your shooting range needs. (See References to Products & Services section of the Appendix.) 3.02.3.2.4 The General Services Administration has written specifications for target backstop steel in their bulletin (Public Building Service, Indoor Firing Range Design, Operations and Maintenance Criteria April 2012, Appendix B p. B-1). The chart shown above is compatible with GSA specifications and the steel alloys specified therein are available in warehouse stocks. "Steel plates supported by concrete or masonry should be anchored by expansion bolts or toggle bolts, as suitable for construction, with flush countersunk heads, not more than 12 inches on center of all edges of each plate. Joints and edge lines shall be backed with continuous 2 inch plate no less than 4 inches wide. Bolts shall pierce both facing and back plates. Expansion bolts shall penetrate concrete not less than 2 inches. Steel plates shall have milled edges at all joints. "Joints shall be butted flush and smooth. Plates shall be free from buckle or wave after erection. Exposed edges shall be beveled at 42 degrees to a fillet approximately 1/16 inch thick. There shall be no horizontal joints in any steel plate work. Welding shall be in accordance with the American Welding Society Code for welding in building construction. "Steel plates joined at and supported on structural steel supports shall be spot welded to steel supports not more than 6 inches on center". 3.02.3.2.5 Alternate fabrication techniques may call for welding all seams. Should this method be used, all surface welds must be ground smooth and surface tempered to reduce backsplatter and resist abrasion and cratering of the steel. 3.02.3.2.6 Backstops which have proven to be unsatisfactory for use on indoor ranges are inclined plate backstops with angles exceeding 45 degrees from the horizontal. Earthen backstops are not satisfactory because of the dust produced. Excessive dust particles generated by bullet strikes serve to reduce the effectiveness of the ventilation equipment. In general, earthen backstops do not meet acceptable standards designed to create a clean atmosphere in an indoor range. 3.02.4 Administrative Facilities 3.02.4.1 The range should include a classroom, statistical (Target scoring) area and storage areas for targets and equipment. For some smallbore rifle ranges, especially permanent facilities, the same room may be used for all activities, including shooting, but efforts should be made to provide separate areas. 3.02.4.2 Communications 3.02.4.2.1 On small ranges, voice commands are generally all that are required. For large facilities, use at a minimum a public address system that can be clearly heard along the entire firing line. Other forms of communications are available and are included in the Reference to Products and Services section of the Appendix. III-5-12 3.02.5 Other Components 3.02.5.1 Floor Surface 3.02.5.1.1 The surface of the floor, except for the firing line area, should slope toward the backstop A special channel should be included at the base and forward edge of the backstop and designed so that a bullet sliding along the floor surface cannot strike the bottom edge of the backstop. (See drawing A-29) 3.02.5.2 Shields and Protective Barriers 3.02.5.2.1 Barriers on indoor smallbore ranges or on ranges on which the ammunition is restricted to .22 caliber all-lead bullets need not be as robust as those used to contain high velocity or highpower pistol and rifle ammunition. Sheets of plywood, a sheet of IDGA steel, a sheet of plywood, sandwiched in that order, is sufficient to stop any .22 caliber round and prevent backsplatter. This design may be used for both overhead baffles and wall shields. Plywood must conform to the specifications as required for ½ inch exterior grade and steel plates must conform to ASTM A-312 requirements for cold rolled steel plate, having a thickness of not less than 10 gauge. Normal concrete masonry units with 4” concrete roofs are adequate and can easily be used for .22 caliber smallbore ranges. 3.03 MATERIALS FOR RANGE COMPONENTS 3.03.1 See Section III, Chapter 2. ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.01.1 When equipment is restricted to smallbore rifle activity, write a training document to train the user in proper use of this equipment. This document should explain how the equipment works, provide drawings of the equipment, along with information on procedures to keep the equipment in operating condition. Target frame restoration, new construction and replacement should also be included. 4.02 Maintenance 4.02.1 Maintenance on range equipment and fixtures should be the responsibility of each user. Provide a maintenance checklist in the range building and arrange for those who know how to use the equipment to teach others. Reference the manufacturer’s= manuals that come with the equipment to provide guidelines for specific pieces of equipment. i Engineering Technical Letter. 2011. Small Arms Range Design and Construction. P.39. III-6-1 Range Services ©2012 National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section III Chapter 6 INDOOR HIGHPOWER RIFLE III-6-2 III-6-3 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Historic Perspective 1.03 Chapter Organization 1.04 Cross Reference ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.02 Safety Rules ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.02 Range Dimensions 3.03 Materials ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.02 Maintenance 8 2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). III-6-4 III-6-5 ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 The phrase "High power rifle range" means ranges on which a variety of high power rifles may be used. Range builders should plan, design and construct a range that will fit the needs of the user. This chapter describes the design and specific requirements of an indoor range to accommodate the use of high power rifles. 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.02.1 High power rifle ranges have been constructed primarily outdoors. This is due to: a. ballistic characteristics of high power projectiles; b. scarcity of economical backstops c. the price of AR rated steel; d. scarcity of steel capable of withstanding the high impact energies of high power ammunition; e. high levels of sound generated by high power rifles; and f. shock of the muzzle blast of high power rifles. Backstop designs developed commercially now make it feasible to construct an indoor high power range. Developments in acoustical material, steel alloys and building construction provide appropriate materials for the building of indoor high power ranges. 1.03 Chapter Organization 1.03.1 This chapter contains four sections: (1) General information; (2) Safety; (3) Technical specifications; (4) Equipment operations and maintenance. Cross references aid the user in finding related information throughout the remainder of the source book. 1.04 Cross Reference 1.04.1 NRA Range Resource Book References a. General Range Information, Section I, Chapter 1 b. General Indoor Range Information, Section III, Chapter 1 c. Safety Plan, Section I, Chapter 2 1.04.1.2 Related Ranges with common range components a. Indoor Smallbore Rifle, Section III, Chapter 5 b. Indoor Bullseye Pistol Section III, Chapter 7 1.04.2 NRA Rule Books (Available online at http://www.nrahq.org/compete/nra-rule-books.asp) a. NRA High Power Rifle Rule Book b. NRA High Power Sporting Rifle Rule Book III-6-6 ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.01.1 Indoor ranges for high power rifles differ from other ranges from safety and health standpoints. Sound levels and backstop steel requirements differ. High power firearms require more robust designs to be used in developing the facility. To protect the health of workers, ventilation systems must be capable of removing the combustion by-products generated in the discharge of the firearm. The concussion and noise generated should be dampened by installing sound reducing chambers parallel to the firing line. Target engagement angles and angles at which the projectile will strike the backstop are critical and must be specified to be within the design of the range. 2.02 Safety Rules 2.02.1 For gun safety and gun handling rules refer to Section I Chapter 2 Safety Plan 2.03.2.1 Safety Rules for Indoor Rifle Ranges a. Obey all range commands immediately. b. No one shall go forward of the firing line, unless a cease-fire has been called and the range is clear. c. Shoot at authorized targets only. d. Eye and ear protection are required. e. Shooting a rifle from any unstable position (Hip shooting, etc.) is prohibited. f. When loading, the rifle must remain on the rest and pointed at the backstop area. Moving the rifle off the benchrest to reload is prohibited. 2.02.1.1 Procedures for Indoor Rifle Ranges a. Loaded rifles must remain pointed down range. b. During a cease-fire open and unload all firearms. c. Rifles may be loaded with only one round at a time. This requirement will vary depending on the range and the training exercise being conducted. d. Designate type of cartridges that can or cannot be used on range. Some backstops will only accommodate specific type of cartridges or calibers. e. Armor piercing, tracer or incendiary ammunition is prohibited. 2.02.2 Should any additional safety procedures apply, advise each user of these limitations and the reasons for them. III-6-7 ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.01.1 Firing Line to Target Line 3.01.1.1 Firing lines must be parallel to the target line. Firing points must be oriented so that the projectiles will strike the backstop in the area and at the angle for which it was designed. 3.01.2 An indoor high power range is easily constructed above or below ground. Control of all projectiles and sound, both airborne and structure transmitted is more easily accomplished in an underground building. Methods of construction poured concrete, masonry walls, treated lumber, concrete pipe and rectangular culverts. Precast concrete structures may be used. 3.01.2.1 Distance 3.01.2.1.1 Distance on the indoor high power rifle facility is one of the factors used to determine requirements of the range. Distance is a factor in testing firearm/ammunition combinations. A 50 yard distance is usually adequate, but distances up to 100 yards are feasible. For greater distances, the use of either tubes or tunnels is probably more cost effective (See Section III, Chapter 8.) 3.01.2.2 Direct Fire Zone 3.01.2.2.1 The distance and the degree of control needed for bullet containment may require firing ports so all bullets will strike the proper area of the backstop. This will provide a controlled direct fire zone. 3.01.3 Firing Line Area 3.01.3.1 Firing Points 3.01.3.1.1 Firing points may be outfitted with moveable benchrests. A benchrest position is desirable while using the range. Adequate space should be designed into the firing point to allow for a benchrest and room in which the shooter can move about without interfering with others. A width of 5’0” feet is the practical minimum. III-6-8 3.01.3.1.2 Barriers used on high power rifle ranges require special designing to incorporate features capable of stopping all projectiles fired on the facility. 3.01.3.2 Administrative Space 3.01.3.2.1 Space for administrative activities is required. Plans should include office, restroom and assembly areas. 3.01.4 Target Line Area 3.01.4.1 Frames 3.01.4.1.1 Target frames should be constructed from soft pine or commercially available plastic target stands. They should be individual holders, this will eliminate unnecessary replacement of frames that are accidentally hit. These frames should allow the use of a variety of targets. Frames should include cardboard, or other soft material to which targets may be attached. Commercially available target retrieval systems with metal target brackets may be used, but should be adjusted to reduce the risk of bullet strike on the track, carrier system or target hanger. 3.01.4.2 Number Boards 3.01.4.2.1 Number boards used on the 100 yard indoor facility should be a minimum of 18 inches square and painted with contrasting colors. 3.01.4.3 Target Assembly 3.01.4.3.1 Targets may vary from walking down and stapling targets to frames to automated target return systems. 3.01.4.3.2 Target carriers may be installed at each firing position so that no one has to go down range to handle targets. On ranges where distances exceed 100 yards, the time needed to retrieve targets manually may be prohibitive especially on a commercial range. Target retrieval systems are commercially available for various distances. 3.01.4.4 Targets 3.01.4.4.1 Targets must conform to the operating requirements for a specific range. Indoor high power ranges generally use sighting-in targets rather than competition targets. These may be purchased from local sporting goods stores or from print shops. Official reduced competition targets made by NRA Licensed Target Manufacturers are necessary for NRA sanctioned competition and are available. 3.01.4.5 Backstop 3.01.4.5.1 For range builders considering the use of high power rifle indoor ranges, highly recommend using commercial rifle rated backstops. This takes the liability off of the club and puts it on the backstop manufacturer. 3.01.4.5.2 Design specifications for buildings require that walls, ceiling and floor surfaces be of ballistic resistant quality. In some cases this requires testing materials planned for use in the building design. III-6-9 3.01.5 Administrative Facilities 3.01.5.1 Administrative facilities should include: offices, classrooms, restrooms, storage areas and maintenance areas. A target and equipment storage room is a useful addition, especially for a commercial operation. 3.01.6 Other Components 3.01.6.1 Floor surfaces 3.01.6.1.1 Floor surfaces should be designed flat and smooth. Any expansion joints should be epoxy filled to keep the floor smooth and to keep green or unburnt powder from getting into the joint. A spark may cause the unburnt powder to blow a hole in the floor. If any other type of floor covering is utilized such as rubber be sure to follow manufacturer’s recommendations for a firing range. 3.01.6.2 Communications 3.01.6.2.1 Shooters should be encouraged to use both ear plugs and ear muff hearing protectors, because of the high levels of sound generated by the use of highpower firearms. Communications may require special consideration. Even during peak sound levels, effective communications are necessary. Use of visual signals, supplementary visual signals, colored lights or turning targets can be effective when hearing is restricted. 3.01.6.3 Control Booths 3.01.6.3.1 A control booth can be located near the center point of the firing line or at either end, and separated from the shooting area by safety glass set up double thickness to block sound. If two panes of glass are used, they must not be installed parallel to each other. Parallel panes of glass can form resonance chambers that can transmit the sound. A properly constructed control booth will protect the range officer and cut down on exposure to both airborne lead and sound. The range officer must have easy access to the range. 3.01.6.4 Restrooms 3.01.6.4.1 Restrooms are a necessity and should be included in the plans for the building. For new construction you must be handicap compliant. 3.01.6.5 Parking Areas 3.01.6.5.1 Parking areas should be constructed to provide all weather use. 3.02 Range Dimensions 3.02.1 Distance 3.02.1.1 Firing distances may extend up to 100 yards. For distances greater than 100 yards, tunnel facilities may be less expensive than a larger building. III-6-10 3.02.2 Firing Line Area 3.02.2.1 Firing lines must be parallel to the target line and must be marked for easy identification to warn against any movement forward during firing. The firing line is immediately in front of the several firing points. All ranges are measured from this tiring line to the face of the targets when targets are hung in their proper position in front of the backstop. The edge of the firing line is the portion of the line closest to the shooter and the shooter should not be touching the line. Firing line should be marked with numbers located at the front left corner or center of each position corresponding to the proper target. 3.02.2.2 Firing Points 3.02.2.2.1 Firing points should be a minimum of 5 feet wide and extended behind the firing line to allow sufficient space for all positions from standing to prone (Unless only benchrest shooting is permitted), and for shooting equipment. 3.02.3 Target Line Area 3.02.3.1 Frames 3.02.3.1.1 Where target frames are part of target carrier systems, build extensions to position the target at the height required by the shooters position. 3.02.4 Other Components 3.02.4.1 Grade 3.02.4.1.1 Surface grade on the floor surface of an indoor range level to the backstop. A special channel should be included at the base and forward edge of the backstop area and configured so that any projectile sliding along the floor surface cannot strike any edges of the steel trap. 3.02.4.2 Barriers 3.02.4.2.1 Barriers for use on high power ranges must be designed to stop all bullets fired on the range. . 3.03 Materials 3.03.1 Concrete walls must conform to the following specifications for both precast panels and poured-in-place walls: "Must have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 4,000 psi. The water cement ratio must not exceed 0.50. Cement must conform to ASTM C150 Type I. Poured-in-place wall panels must be poured with a concrete slump of 4 inches to 6 inches and must have an air entrainment of 4 per cent by volume. Cement must conform to ASTM C150 Type I. Concrete pipe or rectangular culverts must conform to standard ASTM specifications for the manufacturer of such items. 3.03.2 Concrete floors (Slabs) must be poured with a concrete slump of 4 inches to 6 inches, must have an air entrainment and must have a 28 day compressive strength of 3,000 psi. III-6-11 3.03.3 Reinforcing bars must conform to ASTM A615-81-SI, grade 60 and welded wire fabric installed in precast wall panels, deadmen, floors, walkways, roof panels and firing line slabs must conform to ASTM A185 and must have a minimum yield strength of 65,000 pounds per square inch. 3.03.4 Target carriers constructed on-site must be shop fabricated from steel angle iron and plate conforming to the requirements of ASTM A-36. Target carriers must be anchored to the concrete tube or ceiling by means of anchor bolts or weld plates cast in the concrete. Other attachment devices may be utilized, provided bullet deflection devices are properly installed. Anchor bolts and weld plates must conform to ASTM A-36 requirements and be shop fabricated. III-6-12 ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Equipment Operations 4.01.1 Equipment for the indoor high power range may include target carriers, vacuum cleaners, backstops and removable bullet traps and lighting systems. Each user must be trained in operating this equipment to avoid costly damage. 4.02 Equipment Maintenance 4.02.1 To ensure long-term use of range equipment, maintenance must be performed at appropriate intervals. Maintenance programs should be incorporated during the planning phase. Prior to use major wear points should be checked for signs of wear, accumulation of sand, dirt, rust, loose fitting or any evidence of stress. These wear points should be thoroughly cleaned and lubricated. A good rule is to conduct maintenance chores frequently, doing small jobs each time. Range Services ©2012 National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section III Chapter 7 INDOOR BULLSEYE PISTOL III-7-2 III-7-3 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Chapter Organization 1.03 Cross Reference ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.02 Safety Rules 2.03 Range Procedures ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.02 Range Dimensions 3.03 Materials ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.02 Maintenance 8 2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). III-7-4 III-7-5 ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 This chapter provides guidance on how to plan, design and construct an indoor bullseye pistol range. 1.02 Chapter Organization 1.02.1 This chapter is organized into four sections: (1) General information; (2) Safety; (3) Technical specifications; and (4) Equipment operations and maintenance. Cross references are given to aid the user in finding related information throughout the remainder of the source book. 1.03 Cross Reference a. General Indoor Range Information Section III, Chapter 1 b. Safety Plan, Section I, Chapter 2 c. Planning and Design, Section I, Chapter 3 d. Indoor Range Design Criteria, Section III, Chapter 2 ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.01.1 The environment of indoor ranges must be designed to protect the health and safety of users. Specific rules must apply. Therefore, the following guidelines are offered for the overall safety plan. 2.02 Safety Rules a. See Safety Plan, Section I, Chapter 2. 2.03 Range Procedures a. When the range has been declared safe for live firing, shooters may load for each string of fire. After two strings have been fired, a cease-fire may be called to allow for target change or repair. During informal firing exercises, cease-fires may be called at intervals convenient to all users. III-7-6 b. When firing is complete, all firearms shall be placed on the bench, with slides back, cylinders open, and magazines out and unloaded. Semi-automatic pistols may require a blocking device to hold the slide open. c. Upon the command "Cease Fire," shooters must immediately open, unload and bench all firearms, then step back from the firing line to indicate compliance to the range officer. d. On ranges where return target mechanisms are not used, shooters may proceed down range to check, remove or change targets after completing a firing exercise. Each shooter carries those items necessary to either, paste, staple or change a target. No one is permitted on or near the firing line while target change operations are underway. e. When target change operations are complete and all shooters have moved to the rear of the firing line, a range officer or designee declares the range safe, and gives subsequent range commands. f. A designated range officer gives the command "Commence Firing" when the target area and range are again clear. g. Firing is allowed on authorized targets only and must be set up according to range procedures. h. Shooters authorized to use the range must observe posted guidelines. These guidelines may state what targets can be used and how to engage in multiple use activities (Such as smallbore rifle and pistol), so that shooters do not interfere with one another. i. The firing of a pistol from the holster is strictly prohibited. j. On ranges designed for .22 caliber rimfire (Not to include .22 caliber rimfire magnum,) all shooting activities will be restricted to firearms using ammunition designated short, long or long rifle. ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.01.1 Indoor pistol ranges are constructed with one firing line and one target line, and use different targets from those used for outdoor distances (Such as 25 and 50 yards or meters). 3.01.2 Firing Line to Target Line Firing lines must be parallel to the target line and clearly marked to warn against any movement forward during firing. Should the range be set up on a temporary basis, the firing line should be behind a row of tables so that the shooters will have a place to lay their firearms and equipment. Ranges on which only bullseye pistol will be fired may have a bench running the entire length of the firing line with openings located at regular intervals along the line. The bench top at the openings is hinged to swing up and out of the way, permitting passage. The hinged sections are closed only after all shooters and range personnel have returned from the down range area. Special panels or shooting booths may be installed between the firing positions to enhance safety, redirect flying brass and restrict horizontal movement of firearms. Note: When indoor ranges are used for both pistol and rifle, pistol benches should be designed to be portable. 3.01.2 Distance The distance used on most indoor ranges is 50 to 75 feet. A few indoor ranges exist that have distances up to 50 meters. Bullseye pistol is generally not fired indoors at distances over 50 feet. III-7-7 3.01.3 Direct Fire Zone Direct fire zones for indoor pistol facilities should be set up on the basis of one target per firing point with each end target positioned at least 2 feet from the walls, with 4 feet preferred. Direct fire zones end at the backstop. 3.01.4 Firing Line Area 3.01.4.1 Firing Points Firing points are areas marked off along the firing line for the shooter, equipment and, when necessary, a coach. Panels or shooting booths may be installed between firing points to offer additional safety, especially on pistol ranges. The recommended minimum width required is 3 feet, 6 inches. 3.01.4.2 Administrative Space 3.01.4.2.1 Support Areas Support areas, such as classrooms, scoring areas, and statistical work areas for training and competitive events, are important. These functions may be performed in areas outside the range itself. 3.01.4.2.2 Spectator Areas Where spectator areas are provided, allow sufficient space between the firing area, staging area and the spectator area to minimize interference. Viewing areas should be behind a double thick safety plate window. 3.01.5 Frames 3.01.5.1 Target frames or holders for the indoor range usually hold a paper target backed by cardboard. The cardboard backer helps to keep the target rigid as the carrier is turned, and many indoor ranges are now using cardboard backers during competitions. Therefore, when designing frames and holding clamps, provide for the added thickness of material. The target should be positioned above the range floor to coincide with the average offhand position used by pistol shooters, usually 5 feet. Set the target at eye level to the shooter in the firing position. 3.01.5.2 Number Boards 3.01.5.2.1 Target frames will be numbered on alternating background of contrasting color. The numbers will be large enough to be identified under ordinary light conditions. Numbers must correspond with the firing point numbers. Target numbers will be fixed in position so as to remain visible when the targets are exposed and when concealed. Firing points and target frames are both numbered sequentially from left-to-right. The firing line number board should be located at the center of each position, and on the top front of the firing line bench. The target number board should be located at the target line, and large enough for the shooter with normal vision to see. Refer to NRA Rulebook. http://www.nrahq.org/compete/RuleBooks/Pistol/pistol- book.pdf III-7-8 3.01.5.3 Targets NRA bullseye pistol targets as outlined in NRA rulebooks are available from NRA licensed target manufacturers. 3.01.5.4 Backstops 3.01.5.4.1 Backstops are required and must be designed to handle the most powerful pistol caliber allowed for use on the facility. Paragraph 3.01.5.4.4 of this chapter includes the design specifications for backstops to handle more powerful pistol cartridges. Backstops should be constructed from the floor to the ceiling with additional baffles to prevent a bullet from exiting through the floor, ceiling or walls. 3.01.5.4.2 Design specifications used here are based on research, along with testing of materials from which backstops and bullet traps are constructed. The range builder who plans to construct these items on-site must be sure they meet acceptable standards and takes all responsibility for its construction. 3.01.5.4.3 The geometric design of a backstop or bullet trap also, contributes to the service life of the unit. Under-design virtually guarantees that damage will occur, but over-design does not guarantee long service life. Proper installation of plates according to the ammunition and specifications chart will provide years of maintenance-free use. Backstops and bullet traps are manufactured commercially and the NRA highly recommends you contact a commercial manufacturer for your backstop needs. (See References to Products and Services in Section IV.) 3.01.5.4.4 Backstops used on indoor pistol ranges need not exceed the thickness and AR rating provided in the materials specification chart. To do so constitutes over-design and unnecessary expense, unless highpower rifles or pistols capable of exceeding 1,200 foot pounds of muzzle energy are used. Backstops should be constructed to stop .44 magnum caliber soft-pointed lead bullets effectively, which calls for a backstop that will withstand striking energies of 1,200 foot pounds of energy. Any pistols capable of generating energies greater than 1,200 foot pounds should be excluded by range rules. Protect the proper steel plate characteristics during installation; AR steel is not difficult to find but is more expensive and requires special cutting and welding techniques. The time and attention needed to construct a quality facility is usually about the same as for an improperly constructed one, so demand quality construction. Given a quality alloy, and protect the alloy characteristics during installation. Quality alloy is not difficult to find, but is often expensive, and requires special welding techniques Note: To withstand the stress created on steel plate by the striking force of a bullet, design considerations must include what caliber ammunition and bullet type is authorized for a particular range. The following table is offered as a basic guide for determining use based on pistol calibers. Muzzle velocities for the 44 magnum range from 700 to 950 foot pounds of muzzle energy. Table provides a built in safety factor for reduction of wear and the peening effects caused by projectile impact on the steel: III-7-9 Table 1.i Examples of Acceptable Ammunition, Muzzle Velocities and Minimum Steel Plate Thickness for Metal Backstops, Deflector Plates (Baffles), and Bullet Traps Maximum Ammo Muzzle Armor Plate Angle Velocity 300 BHN 440 BHN 500 BHN (feet/ sec) mm thick mm thick mm thick 42 .22 LR rimfire 1100 6 6 6 42 .38 Cal. Ball 755 10 6 6 42 .357 Cal. 1235 10 6 6 42 .45 cal. 890 10 6 6 42 9mm pistol 1220 10 6 6 42 .44 Magnum 1200 12 10 10 30 5.56 x 45 mm NATO (.223 Rem) 3240 12 NR* 10 30 .30 caliber carbine 1990 12 NR* 10 30 7.62 X51 NATO (.308 Win) 2800 12 NR* 10 Note: 0.25 inch and.375 inch plate may be substituted for 6-mm and 10-mm plate, respectively. 6mm =.2375 tenths of an inch 10mm =.400 tenths of an inch NR* Not Recommended (Armor Piercing and Incendiary Ammunition Prohibited) Angle = Angle of plate in degrees from horizontal * NRA highly recommends you contact a commercial manufacturer for your backstop needs. 3.01.5.4.5 The type and velocity of ammunition used on an indoor range may be restricted to reduce backstop costs, but safeguards must be installed to prevent use of unauthorized ammunition. To counter any backsplatter problem, hang a curtain in front of the backstop. Tests have been conducted on a variety of materials including canvas, burlap, cardboard, walls built of insulation board and a synthetic rubber-like curtain. Most have proven reasonably effective in reducing backsplatter, but the wall and the rubber-like curtain are best. 3.01.5.4.6 There are many different backstop and bullet trap designs on the market today. You may want to contact the manufacturers and discuss your specific use, budget, and space restrictions, and go with the design that most adequately meets your shooting range needs. (See References to Products & Services section of the Appendix.) 3.01.5.4.7 The General Services Administration has written specifications for target backstop steel in their bulletin (Public Building Service, Indoor Firing Range Design, Operations and Maintenance Criteria April 2012, Appendix B p. B-1). The chart shown above is compatible with GSA specifications and the steel alloys specified therein are available in warehouse stocks. III-7-10 “Steel plates supported by concrete or masonry should be anchored by expansion bolts or toggle bolts, as suitable for construction, with flush countersunk heads, not more than 12 inches on center of all edges of each plate. Joints and edge lines shall be backed with continuous 2 inch plate no less than 4 inches wide. Bolts shall pierce both facing and back plates. Expansion bolts shall penetrate concrete not less than two inches. Steel plates shall have milled edges at all joints. Joints shall be butted flush and smooth. Plates shall be free from buckle or wave after erection. Exposed edges shall be beveled at 42 degrees to a fillet approximately 1/16 inch thick. There shall be no horizontal joints in any steel plate work. Welding shall be in accordance with the American Welding Society Code for welding in building construction. Steel plates joined at and supported on structural steel supports shall be spot welded to steel supports not more than 6 inches on center." 3.01.5.4.8 Alternate fabrication techniques may call for welding of seams. Should this method be used, grind all surface welds smooth to resist abrasion and locate them between primary points of impact. It is important to remember that the steel is not heat treated where there is a weld joint. Do not place targets over this area as the projectile impacts on the weld joint will eventually cut a hole through the steel even at very shallow angles and splatter will eventually start cutting through the back wall of the range. 3.01.5.4.9 Inclined plate backstops with angles exceeding 45 degrees from the horizontal are unsatisfactory for use on indoor ranges. 3.01.5.5 Target Return and Turning Mechanisms Target carrier systems allow for individual operation and control of each firing line. A turning target mechanism may be added to the carrier system for competition. While not mandatory (NRA Pistol Rule 6.8b), such mechanisms are recommended. Building a quality target carrier and turning mechanism with locally available resources is usually more expensive than purchasing a commercial product. 3.02 Range Dimensions 3.02.1 Administrative Facilities With the major emphasis on training, include a classroom, statistical (Target scoring) area and storage areas for targets and equipment. 3.02.2 Other Considerations 3.02.2.1 Floor Surface The floor of an indoor range should be flat. Include a channel at the base and forward edge of the backstop area and design the floor so that any bullet sliding along the surface cannot strike the edges of the backstop. III-7-11 3.02.2.2 Protective Barriers Barriers, such as baffles, safety shields, guard plates and walls, used on a standard indoor pistol ranges should be designed to withstand at a minimum the strike of a .44 caliber magnum lead bullet. Design specifications call for the use of materials like 10 gauge steel covered with plywood or composites that are impenetrable by authorized ammunition. Design criteria must specify the exact location and use to which these barriers will be applied. For example, a baffle to protect a ceiling would be designed to be impenetrable, while a panel used to protect a concrete pilaster might allow penetration but stop any ricochet or splatter. Shooting booths may also be used to restrict both firing angles and provide the shooter with additional protection from adjacent shooters. The shooting booth typically uses several layers of plywood covered with building insulation board or acoustical tile. A layer of steel also may be included where calibers warrant such use. Shooting booths should never project more than 18 inches to the rear of the firing line so that a range officer may see all activity along the line. 3.03 Materials 3.03.1 See Section III, Chapter 2, and technical drawings. ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.01.1 The development of an operations and maintenance guide (See Section III, Chapter 3) is a primary tool used to explain the process to all who may have responsibilities for operations or maintenance. A step-by-step procedure ensures long service life for the facility. Target carrier restoration, new construction or replacement should also be included, along with instructions for the user. Maintenance is a daily chore and when everyone shares the responsibility, fewer maintenance problems occur. 4.02 Maintenance 4.02.1 Each user should be responsible for maintaining indoor range equipment and fixtures. Provide a maintenance checklist in the range area so that anyone visiting the range can have access. If complex equipment is used, leaders must teach users how to use the equipment, rather than restricting its use to 1 or 2 qualified operators. This is good for the organization. Training should be on a continuous basis.1 Engineering Technical Letter. 2011. Small Arms Range Design and Construction. P.39. Range Services ©2012 National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section III Chapter 8 INDOOR PRIVATE AND TEST T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Chapter Organization 1.03 Cross Reference 1.04 Design Considerations ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.02 Range Dimensions 3.03 Materials ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.02 Maintenance 8 2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). III-8-4 III-8-5 ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 This chapter provides information on how to design and construct an indoor range or test facility having a single or up to three firing points. The principles used in design for a single point or multiple firing point shooting range are the same. Some of the range designs contained in this chapter are intended for individual use only, under controlled conditions. For detailed specifications, see the chapter that relates to the proposed activity. Information includes how to set up a conventional range and a tunnel range. 1.02 Chapter Organization 1.02.1 This chapter is organized into four sections: (1) General information; (2) Safety; (3) Technical specifications; and (4) Equipment operations and maintenance. Cross references are given to aid the user in finding related information throughout the remainder of the source book. 1.03 Cross Reference a. General Information, Section I, Chapter 1 b. Safety Plan, Section I, Chapter 2 c. Planning and Design, Section I, Chapter 3 d. General Indoor Range Information, Section III, Chapter 1 e. Indoor Range Criteria, Section III, Chapter 2 1.03.1 Related ranges with similar features. a. A private range for a competitive activity must meet the same standards as one that is available to the public; a test range needs only to meet the demands of the user and safety. All ranges will have similarities. (See the technical chapter covering the proposed activity for additional guidance.) 1.04 Design Considerations 1.04.1 For a private range to practice competitive shooting the main considerations are: a. Safety b. The distance from firing line to target c. Meeting the requirements of the rules 1.04.2 For a test range the main considerations are: a. Safety b. The function of the range (function firing, accuracy, ammunition testing, etc.) III-8-6 ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.01.1 Safety for the user of a private or test range is just as important as for a public range where many users participate. Many indoor test ranges are used for several purposes (Reloading, casting bullets, chronographing loads, testing firearm/ammunition combinations, etc). Appropriate safety precautions must be taken. 2.01.2 Public safety is also a concern and the requirements outlined in the foregoing chapters apply. (See Cross Reference.) The private or test range must be constructed to incorporate all the safety components of a large range. Safety must not be compromised for cost or convenience. 2.01.2.1 The individual range builder must build a facility that does not adversely affect surrounding areas. III-8-7 ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.01.1 Generally, building projects require a building permit. The basic criteria required by those who approve these permits is the protection of public health and safety. The criteria in this and the referenced chapter will help the range builder to comply. 3.01.2 Specifications for backstops, baffles, sound suppression, lighting and other range fixtures on private facilities, will be similar to those needed on larger ranges. The only difference is size, with only one firing point required. This range should be designed to meet the present and anticipated needs of the owner. Provisions should be incorporated for design modifications since needs often change. 3.01.3 Ventilation 3.01.4 Backstop 3.01.4.1 (See drawing A-20) Backstop requirements may be satisfied by purchasing commercially available backstops or bullet traps. (See references to Products and Services in Appendix for suppliers.) A bullet trap can be particularly convenient and cost effective in this application. Recovery of the lead alloys will often offset a significant portion of the cost of a bullet trap. A backstop can be fabricated on site for individual private ranges. 3.01.5 Lighting 3.01.5.1 Lighting needs in the firing line can be met with conventional fluorescent and LED fixtures. Lighting along the range should not be needed unless intermediate distances are to be used for testing purposes. Lighting at the target line should be 150 to 200 watt water proof incandescent lamps and a three tube fluorescent fixture capable of generating 75 foot candles of light on the target surface. Diffusers may be used to reduce glare. 3.01.6 Sound 3.01.6.1 The range owner may need to control sound levels by the use of acoustic materials at the shooting station. The orientation and location of the range should be adjusted to obtain the greatest possible buffer zone between the range and any neighbors. 3.02 Range Dimensions 3.02.1 Dimensions for the test range need only meet the requirements of the user for firing distance and safe operation. A test range for function firing can be as simple as a 55 gallon drum filled with sand and an appropriate firing point. The safety factors remain the same for a firearm and ammunition combination so the design must still control any potential for stray shots. Safety must not be compromised. 3.02.2 Backstop 3.02.2.1 The backstop should extend from floor to ceiling and from side to side of the range to contain all shots fired on the range. III-8-8 3.02.3 Pipe/Box Culvert 3.02.3.1 Tube ranges need to allow room for the normal dispersion of bullets at the distance used and for the trajectory of the cartridges to be used. Minimum inside diameters for round pipe are: (1) 20 inches for a 50 foot tube; (2) 36 inches for a 100 yard tube; and (3) 48 inches for a 200 yard tube. Box culverts should have minimum inside rectangular dimensions of: (1) 20 inches (Horizontal) x 24 inches (Vertical) for a 50 foot tube; (2) 24 inches (Horizontal) x 36 inches (Vertical) for a 100 yard tube; and (3) 36 inches (Horizontal) x 48 inches (Vertical) for a 200 yard tube. 3.02.4 Backstop Chamber 3.02.4.1 A pit or chamber in which a bullet trap will be installed may be constructed either from pressure treated wood, masonry or concrete. A precast contractor familiar with the design of concrete containers can provide a product suitable for the bullet trap. Selecting a size will depend on the length of the tunnel, the diameter of the pipe and the type of bullet trap selected. The precast contractor will also place spacers in one side of the container to allow easy connection of the pipe or box culvert. 3.03 MATERIALS 3.03.1 Pipe/Culvert 3.03.1.1 Material for the tunnel may be concrete pipe, corrugated metal or precast concrete box culverts. Concrete pipe or box culverts are generally available from precast concrete companies. The primary advantage of the box culvert is the rectangular construction which provides better surfaces on which to mount the target return mechanism and ventilation exhaust system. Box culverts can be made to meet any specification which may result in a savings on initial costs. Another advantage of the rectangular box culvert is that, instead of installing a chamber at the end of the tunnel to house a trap, a trap can be obtained that will fit into the tunnel on casters, allowing it to be removed periodically, cleaned, inspected, repaired and returned with minimal effort. In addition, with the movable bullet trap, any intervening distance can be used to evaluate firearm/ammunition combinations or for practice. Working with round pipe, on the other hand, requires special modifications, such as levelers along the bottom with guide rails on which return target mechanisms are attached. III-8-9 ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.02.1 Equipment needs for the private range will be similar to those items used by larger ranges. For instance, pistol shooters can install individual turning target mechanisms, smallbore shooters can use target return mechanisms, (drawing A-20). Test ranges may require specialized equipment for analysis of: 1) ballistics, using a chronograph; 2) noise, using sound meters; 3) or shot groups to evaluate ammunition and firearm combinations. 4.02 Maintenance 4.02.1 Maintenance requirements will be similar to those for larger ranges. Sophisticated testing equipment will require maintenance in addition to the range itself. Maintenance on items such as chronographs and noise level meters is described thoroughly in the literature provided by the manufacturer. These instructions should be kept in the operations notebook. III-9-1 National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section III Chapter 9 INDOOR INFORMAL TRAINING AIRSOFT, PAINTBALL, AND SIMMUNITION TRAINING RANGES Range Services © 2012 III-9-2 III-9-3 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Chapter Organization 1.03 Cross Reference 1.04 Design Considerations 1.05 Planning Overview ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.02 Safety Rules 2.03 Procedures for Air Gun Shooting 2.04 Procedures for Archery ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.02 Range Dimensions 3.03 Materials ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.02 Maintenance 8 2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). III-9-4 III-9-5 ARTICLE I. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 This chapter provides information on how to set up a temporary range where air soft, paintball or Simmunition training can be conducted safely. All facilities described are based on the minimum requirements for training, including information on safety as it affects range construction and use. The specifications in this chapter, supported by drawings, give the range builder basic instructions to make the job as easy as possible. Designs are kept simple to reduce cost and minimize the need for special training or range equipment. In addition, the designs are "idea generators" on which the range builder can improvise, perhaps finding better solutions for a given application. They provide the volunteer instructor with the information to set up a facility easily and maximize the time for teaching and learning. The point is to keep it as simple as possible. 1.01.2 All Air Soft, paintball and Simmunition guns follow the same gun safety and gun handling rules as a standard firearm. 1.02 Chapter Organization 1.02.1 This chapter is organized into four sections: (1) General information; (2) Safety; (3) Technical specifications; and (4) Equipment operations and maintenance. 1.03 Cross References a. Indoor Air Gun, Section III, Chapter 4 b. Indoor Archery, Section III, Chapter 11 1.04 Design Considerations 1.04.1 This chapter offers information sufficient to construct basic indoor shooting facilities with minimal experience, tools and dollars. It covers the basic requirements for a training facility on which air guns are used for training purposes. It does not cover the permanent indoor facility nor the use of equipment such as turning or return target mechanisms, ventilation systems, etc. 1.04.2 Those who would set up temporary training ranges indoors must not compromise safety for cost or convenience. The indoor informal range must be located in a building which can be altered to meet the minimum requirements of the particular application. Factors that can lead to unsafe range use are: (1) Incompatibility with purpose. The initial purpose of the range dictates the activities which can be conducted on it. Once set up, the range must not be used outside design specifications. (2) Lack of continuity. Over the years, the original purpose for the temporary range may be forgotten and the range used for other purposes. Using smallbore ammunition on an air soft or Simmunition gun range, for example, can seriously damage a backstop, or completely penetrate a wall or roof. To ensure that the temporary range is not used for III-9-6 other purposes, establish an action plan and maintain records so that future operations will not exceed the design capability. Dismantle the range except when needed. 1.05 Planning Overview 1.05.1 The importance of planning for any operation, regardless of its simplicity, cannot be overstated. The plan should consider the alternatives, advantages and disadvantages of the project before doing anything else. This written plan should spell out each element so nothing is left to chance. Although a temporary range may not be covered by building codes, other local ordinances may apply. Obtain copies of those applicable from the appropriate zoning offices. Environmental issues may be important, but a temporary range for air soft, paintball and Simmuntion ranges will usually not cause any problem. All firearms ammunition shall be excluded from any air soft, paintball or Simmunition training room in the building. Only specially marked Simmuntion and air soft guns will be used, including air guns. It is important to constantly check these restrictions, keeping ammunition and firearms off the range. III-9-7 ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.01.1 One of two factors causes most accidents: 1. Human error 2. Mechanical failure The primary purpose of safety rules is to prevent accidents caused by human error and to reduce the effects of those caused by mechanical failure. Range safety rules must be a simple set of rules, and they must always be observed while on the range. Training programs must include a thorough explanation of proper range use, why the safety rules have been made, and why those rules must be followed. 2.01.2 Elements of a Safety Plan 2.01.2.1 There are three elements to a safety plan: a. Rules - Shooter safety is affected by rules to which everyone must adhere. Before firing, include time for instruction in safety rules and safe handling. b. Physical facilities - These must be planned and laid out to accomplish the purpose of the range without introducing any hazard into the operation. The physical layout of the range should channel users toward safe action. c. Training - Users need to be trained in the concept and operation of the range. Even the simplest of ranges must be used within its design in order to be safe. 2.02 Safety Rules For Air Soft, Paintball and Simmunition Shooting (1) Always keep the gun pointed in a safe direction. (2) Always keep your finger off the trigger until ready to shoot. (3) Always keep the gun unloaded until ready to use. (4) Be sure of the target and what is beyond. Be aware of what is adjacent to the range and backstop. (5) Be sure that the gun and ammunition are compatible. Keep all firearms and ammunition off of the range (6) Know how the gun operates, or get instruction (7) Wear eye and ear protection as appropriate. (8) Do not use alcohol or drugs while shooting. (9) Obey all range commands immediately. (10) Know where others are at all times. (11) Shoot only at authorized targets. (12) Open actions and unload all guns during cease-fires. (13) Do not handle guns or stand at the firing line when others are down range. (14) Only those firearms authorized on a given range are allowed. (15) All shooting must be done from designated firing lines or positions. (16) Circumstances may require additional rules peculiar to a specific situation. III-9-8 2.03 Procedures for Air Soft, Paintball and Simmunition Shooting 2.03.1 Attention to safety with these guns is critically important because many do not consider them a real gun. The attitude toward any gun must be: This is a gun and must be treated accordingly. Air Soft, Paintball and Simmunition guns, like any other guns, can cause serious injury if handled in an unsafe manner. Procedural rules under which these gun activities are conducted are: (1) Guns should not be cocked, pumped or loaded until after the shooter is in position, ready to fire and told to do so by the instructor. (2) During the cocking and loading process, the gun must be pointed down range. (3) In case of a malfunction where the pellet, BB, plastic pellet, paintball does not clear the barrel, the shooter must immediately inform the instructor. (4) After a cease-fire has been called and upon command of the instructor, clear the guns by firing into the backstop. (5) BBs and pellets must not be fired at hard surfaces that may cause bounce backs or backsplatter. (6) Never change CO2 cylinders when the gun is loaded. (7) In the event of a malfunction due to a discharged CO2 cylinder, clear the barrel before installing a new cylinder. (8) Before removing a CO2 cylinder, discharge the remaining gas according to the manufacturer's instructions. (9) Install new CO2 cylinders according to manufacturer's instructions. (10) For multi-pump air guns, do not exceed manufacturer's ratings and recommendations for the number of pumps to be used. III-9-9 ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.01.1 Firing Line to Target Line (Should be 10 meters) for air gun. Steel BB 5 meters. Paintball, Air Soft and Simmunitions ranges set up according to the exercise. 3.01.1.1 The firing line must be parallel to the target line. The line of fire must be perpendicular to the firing and target lines. There must be one target for each firing point. 3.01.1.2 Numbering Scheme 3.01.1.2.1 Firing points and targets should be numbered in left-to-right ascending order and in alternating colors. 3.01.1.2.2 A number corresponding to the target number should be placed at the left corner of each firing point at the firing line. 3.01.1.2.3 Each target must have a number board identifying it with the corresponding firing point. 3.01.1.3 Restrooms 3.01.1.3.1 Restrooms are required for any indoor facility. 3.01.1.4 Benches 3.01.1.4.1 Benches aid in range control by providing a place to wait for firing line use. Any benches should be located a minimum of 15 feet behind the firing line. For a temporary range, a few folding chairs will suffice. 3.02 Range Dimensions 3.02.1 Distance 3.02.1.1 Informal training ranges usually adopt the minimum distance required for teaching the fundamentals of safety and marksmanship. In air gun, the recommended distance is 10 meters. BB’s 5 meters. 3.02.2 Firing Line Area 3.02.2.1 Firing Points 3.02.2.1.1 Firing points are areas marked off along and behind the firing line with room for the shooter, equipment and a coach. They should be at least 4 feet wide and 6 feet deep. 3.02.3 Target Line Area 3.02.3.1 Frames III-9-10 3.02.3.2 Number Boards 3.02.3.2.1 Numbers on number boards must be large enough to be read easily at the distance used and should be in alternating colors. 3.02.3.3 Target Assembly 3.02.3.3.1 Target assembly for air gun training may require the fabrication of special traps on which targets are fastened. 3.02.4 Backstop 3.02.4.1 A backstop must protect the area behind the targets and traps. A backstop should protect the entire area from floor to ceiling and from left to right of the range. 3.02.5 Administrative Facilities 3.02.5.1 Administrative Areas 3.02.5.1.1 Generally administrative spaces are not cost-effective for temporary ranges but some space in the facility, should be set aside for this use. Especially useful are storage areas, administrative areas, classrooms, restrooms and lounge areas. (See floor plan in drawing A-20, for suggestions as to building layout.) 3.02.5.2 Gunracks 3.02.5.2.1 Regardless of size, an air gun range will need gunracks. Plan for the number of gunrack spaces needed for a given activity. Gunrack space should be provided on the basis of two spaces per student. 3.03 Materials 3.03.1 Safety Barriers 3.03.1.1 Physical safety barriers are often needed. Physical structures such as walls, curtains, etc., restrict projectiles to a specific area. Carpeting, canvas, plywood covered with Celotex7 or a combination of these materials have been used and are adequate for a period of time. Materials, such as carpeting and canvas, must be tested and hung in double and triple layers with a 6 inch to 10 inch separation between each layer. These materials must be light-weight and be allowed to hang free (Attached at the top only) behind the target area. 3.03.2 Backstops 3.03.2.1 Backstops should be in neutral color that is consistent over entire backstop. For pellets or BBs, backstops can be assembled from old carpeting, canvas or other loose hanging materials capable of absorbing the energy and allowing the pellet or BB to fall harmlessly to the floor or into a container. A backstop is primarily to catch misses. A double layer of carpet hanging behind the target assembly can be all that is necessary. Backstops are designed to contain the impact of the projectile, while side protectors (Barriers) are used to protect adjacent areas and need only redirect projectiles down range. Backstop materials for archery include: bales of straw, sheets of III-9-11 styrofoam, and multiple layers of cardboard thick enough to stop the arrow. To reduce costs of replacing backstops only target or field tips should be allowed. 3.03.3 Pellet Traps 3.03.3.1 One type of trap is several layers of newspaper or corrugated cardboard, placed vertically inside a box (Only suitable for BB or air soft. For high velocity pellets, backstop material should be layered sufficiently to arrest pellet momentum and should be backed with wood to prevent damage beyond the backstop or use a pellet trap. 3.03.3.2 Several manufacturers provide adequate pellet traps at a moderate price. III-9-12 ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.01.2 Trained range officers should supervise the range. In the case of training ranges, the instructors do the individual teaching and can also be trained as range officials. Range personnel must be trained in all aspects of the programs. 4.02 Maintenance 4.02.1 Maintenance for ranges can be preventive or reactive. Reactive means to repair or replace a range fixture when needed, while preventive means upkeep on a planned basis to ensure every fixture is operational at all times. Both types of maintenance are recommended. Develop a plan to identify the tasks, the frequency of occurrence and a flexible schedule. 4.02.2 Equipment needed for a smooth operation may be limited to devices simply replaced when damaged. Operation of equipment usually involves only the hanging of targets. Equipment maintenance involves some degree of assuring that target handlers do not suffer injuries from staples, nails or splinters. National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section III Chapter 10 INDOOR MOVING TARGET Range Services ©2012 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.03 Chapter Organization 1.04 Cross Reference ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.02 Safety Rules ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.02 Range Dimensions ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.02 Maintenance 8 2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). III-10-4 III-10-5 ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 This chapter provides information for setting up moving target mechanisms on an indoor range. An important type of indoor moving target range is designed for the 10 meter air rifle international running game event. A few other indoor moving target facilities have been built for .22 caliber firearms at 50 meters, 25 yards or 50 feet. They offer another way to utilize an indoor facility more fully and provide additional shooting opportunities. 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.02.1 Historically, moving target activities have revolved around or evolved from hunting activities. Included as part of the Olympics, Pan American Games and World Shooting Championships, running game target events have led to the development of some very sophisticated mechanisms, not all of which are suitable indoors. 1.03 Chapter Organization 1.03.1 This chapter is organized into four sections: (1) General information; (2) Safety; (3) Technical specifications; and (4) Equipment operations and maintenance. Cross references aid the user in finding related information throughout the remainder of the source book. 1.04 Cross Reference a. General Information, Section, I, Chapter 1 b. General Indoor Range Information, Section, III, Chapter 1 c. Safety Plan, Section I, Chapter 2 d. Indoor Range Design Criteria, Section III, Chapter 2 1.04.1 Related Ranges a. Indoor Smallbore Rifle b. Indoor Pistol c. Indoor Air Gun III-10-6 ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.01.1 General safety precautions for indoor running game ranges must consider the movement of guns as the shooter follows the target. An air gun backstop is required between the 10 meter running game target mechanism and the regular backstop. 2.02 Safety Rules 2.02.2 Gun Handling Rules 2.02.2.1 Gun handling rules are of primary importance. They should always appear first in the safety plan and be prominently displayed on the range. Several versions exist, but as a minimum, the following rules are suggested: a. ALWAYS KEEP THE GUN POINTED IN A SAFE DIRECTION. b. ALWAYS KEEP YOUR FINGER OFF THE TRIGGER UNTIL READY TO SHOOT, and outside the trigger guard, until ready to fire or until the command "Commence Firing" has been given. c. ALWAYS KEEP THE ACTION OPEN AND FIREARM UNLOADED UNTIL READY TO USE. On a firing range this means the shooters are in position on the firing line and the range has been cleared for live firing. d. KNOW YOUR TARGET AND WHAT IS BEYOND. When on shooting ranges, be mindful also of adjacent areas and act accordingly. e. BE SURE THE GUN IS SAFE TO OPERATE. f. KNOW HOW TO USE THE GUN SAFELY. g. USE ONLY THE CORRECT AMMUNITION FOR YOUR GUN. When at a shooting range with more than one firearm, use one at a time and when finished, store that firearm and its ammunition before using the next one. h. WEAR EAR AND EYE PROTECTION as dictated by the shooting range i. NEVER USE ALCOHOL OR DRUGS BEFORE OR WHILE SHOOTING. j. STORE GUNS SO THEY ARE NOT ACCESSIBLE TO UNAUTHORIZED PERSONS. There may be federal, state or local statutes, ordinances and/or regulations regulating the manner of firearms storage, including some that may make the failure to properly store firearms a criminal offense. You are strongly advised to consult with a local attorney licensed to practice law in your state to advise you in regard to these matters. k. Be aware that certain types of guns and many shooting activities require additional safety precautions. 2.02.3 General Range Rules 2.02.3.1 All general range rules, whether indoor or outdoor ranges, should incorporate at a minimum the following: a. Know and obey all range commands. b. Know where others are at all times. c. Shoot only at authorized targets. d. Ground level targets are not authorized without a proper backstop. See exceptions for Smallbore Rifle, Highpower and Smallbore Silhouette. Maintain the proper target height III-10-7 to ensure that the fired projectile, after passing through the target, hits the desired portion of the backstop. This will reduce the possibility of ricochets and projectiles escaping the property. e. Designate a range officer when none is present or assigned. f. Unload, open the action, remove the magazine and ground and/or bench all firearms during a cease-fire. g. Do NOT handle any firearm or stand at the firing line where firearms are present while others are down range. h. Always keep the muzzle pointed at the backstop or bullet trap. Never allow the muzzle to point in any direction whereby an inadvertent discharge would allow the escape of a projectile into an outer area. III-10-8 ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.01.1 Firing Line to Target Line 3.01.1.1 Running game target mechanisms can be installed on most indoor facilities with few alterations. Design should consider difficulties in setup and removal. For 10 meter air gun, the mechanism should be installed on a frame equipped with casters for mobility. 3.01.2 Firing Line Area 3.01.2.1 Firing Points 3.01.2.1.1 Firing points are limited to one per moving target mechanism and should be marked accordingly. 3.01.3 Target Line Area 3.01.3.1 Mechanisms 3.01.3.1.1 Some target mechanisms are designed to change direction at the end of a run. On some models this simply means moving a toggle switch to reverse the direction and may be accomplished by the shooter, or during competition by a range officer. 3.01.3.1.2 Target assembly may require corrugated cardboard as a backer for the target. Gluing targets to the cardboard is better than using staples. 3.01.3.2 Targets 3.01.3.2.1 Targets for running game events are either full size for 50 meter .22 caliber rifle shooting or smaller sized for 10 meter air rifle shooting. Most indoor ranges, however, are built 50 feet long, so the use of anything other than 10 meter targets is not practical. 3.01.3.3 Backstops 3.01.3.3.1 Backstop design for the air gun running game is the same as for other indoor air gun ranges. Either drapes, plywood covered with insulation board, carpeting or multiple layers of cardboard are adequate. Note: Any material used for air gun backstops must be tested before use. On indoor ranges that permit installation of a full 50 meter running game mechanism for .22 caliber rifles, material used to cover the backstop must be capable of containing backsplatter. 3.01.4 Administrative Facilities 3.01.4.1 Indoor running game target ranges are generally part of a larger facility. Therefore, administrative facilities should be an overall design consideration. Should the decision be made to construct a running game target range independent of any other, space for these facilities may be required. III-10-9 3.01.4.2 Staging Areas 3.01.4.2.1 Depending upon range size and the number of mechanisms installed, waiting areas should be designed to provide ample space for shooters waiting for their relay. Running game target rules also require that the firing point have sufficient space and a divider so that the shooter waiting to fire next can dry fire on the target. 3.01.4.3 Communications 3.01.4.3.1 Since air guns do not generate loud sounds, special equipment to communicate with shooters along the firing line area may not be required. On indoor facilities, a public address system is generally the rule and may be used for 10 meter running game events. 3.01.4.4 Swing Stops 3.01.4.4.1 Special swing stops are an added safety feature for training ranges only. On indoor ranges where shooting booths are used, swing stops are not needed. For indoor rifle ranges, booths are not suggested. Swing stops may be simply two wood strips placed in front of and alongside the firing point to limit the movement of a rifle barrel while a shooter is following the target. 3.01.5 Other Considerations 3.01.5.1 Other design considerations, such as lighting, ventilation, floor surface areas, etc., are contained in this Section in Chapters 1 and 2. 3.02 Range Dimensions 3.02.1 Firing Line Area 3.02.1.1 Range dimensions are prescribed for competition, but may vary for informal or training activities. The firing distance for air gun competition has been established at 10 meters by the NRA and UIT. 3.02.2 Firing Line Area 3.02.2.1 Firing Points 3.02.2.1.1 There is one firing point per moving target unit. It measures 3 feet by 3 feet square. 3.02.2.1.2 The firing point is located at the appropriate range, positioned on a line perpendicular to the target line. The projection of the firing point centerline will cross the target line at the centerpoint of the firing zone. 3.02.3 Target Line 3.02.3.1 Number boards are not necessary for running game target operations. 3.02.3.2 Target assembly is not a factor for running game target facilities, with the exception that targets should be pasted onto corrugated cardboard because they are attached to the III-10-10 mechanism. For new facilities, running game target mechanisms can be built into the facility. Where space permits, install full size (50 meter) operations with the track placed in the floor with movable partitions on each end. 3.02.3.3 Targets 3.02.3.3.1 Targets may be purchased from NRA licensed target manufacturers. Practice or informal targets may be drawn by hand. Each square on the drawing represents a scale for each particular use, smallbore, air gun, etc. Each dot in the outline is located by means of the left and bottom matrix. Simply locate the dots on a large sheet of paper using the guide matrix, and then draw the outline of the animal, cut along the outline and retain the outer portion. This section then becomes a template. Glue this template on poster board or a sheet of plastic, spray with black paint and again cut out the animal. Corrugated cardboard works best. Note that these handmade targets are not approved for use in NRA sanctioned events. Inter-club matches may use them. 3.02.3.4 Target Run 3.02.3.4.1 The target run is the area from left to right of the target line in which the target is visible. 3.02.3.4.2 The target run for 10 meter international competition is set at 2 meters and is defined on the extreme left and right by protective barriers. The protective barriers may be constructed of other materials such as plywood, carpeting, etc., so long as the scorers, target handlers and the target mechanism are adequately protected. Competition rules provide for slow (5 seconds) runs and fast (2.5 seconds) runs. Slower runs may be used for training. 3.02.3.5 Backstops 3.02.3.5.1 See Section III, Chapter 2. III-10-11 ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.01.1 Target equipment: incorporate either modern equipment or hand crafted mechanisms. Neither is inexpensive or simple to operate. Users should be trained how to use equipment to maximize range use and to minimize operational difficulties. 4.02 Maintenance 4.02.1 Proper installation extends the service life of the operation and reduces maintenance. The most important maintenance requirement is the smooth operation of the carrier as it passes along the rail system. Roller bearing wheels (Casters) with grease fittings should be used in the place of sealed units. Rollers are positioned to relieve friction in three directions - up, down and sideways. The track must be maintained in a straight line, and special maintenance techniques used to protect the track from excessive wear. The reduction of drag results in lower workload on the motor and longer service life. III-10-12 III-11-1 Range Services © 2012 National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section III Chapter 11 INDOOR ARCHERY III-11-2 III-11-3 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.03 Chapter Organization 1.04 Cross Reference ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.02 Safety Rules ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Firing Line to Target Line ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.02 Maintenance 8 2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). III-11-4 III-11-5 ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 This chapter provides information on how to design, construct or modify an existing indoor area for archery. 1.02 Historical Perspective 1.02.1 Traditionally, archery has not been a part of the overall shooting program offered by the NRA. But the techniques for constructing ranges, regardless of the use, are similar. Also, some NRA members are archers, and the NRA is dedicated to promoting all shooting sports. The materials used in this chapter and the one on outdoor ranges have been gathered from experience and from the American Archery Council and the National Bowhunters' Association. 1.03 Chapter Organization 1.03.1 This chapter is organized into four sections: (1) General information; (2) Safety: (3) Technical specifications; and (4) Equipment operations and maintenance. Cross references are given to aid in finding related information throughout the remainder of the source book. 1.04 Cross Reference 1.04.1 Range Source Book References a. General Information, Section I, Chapter 1 b. Safety Plan, Section I, Chapter 2 c. Planning and Design, Section. I, Chapter 3 d. General Indoor Range Information, Section III, Chapter 1 III-11-6 ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.01.1 Safety rules for archery differ slightly from those for firearms, yet are just as important. 2.02 Safety Rules 2.02.1 Safety is not a function of design alone but rather one of proper range use and operating procedures. Always keep the bow pointed in a safe direction when the arrow is knocked in position on the bow. Know your target and what is beyond. Make sure the down-range area is unoccupied before drawing your bow with arrow in position. Never use alcohol or drugs before or while shooting a bow. Indoor Archery Range Safety (1) Properly protect all columns, or structural parts of the building to include lighting and sprinklers to prevent damage to the arrows and prevent rebound into the shooting area. (2) Backstop height should extend to 8 foot above floor level. Adequate protection should also extend to the right and left side of the target to ensure that the arrows are not damaged. (3) Design bow racks so they will not be a hazard to equipment or personnel. (4) Automatic target retrieval systems should stop 30 to 36 inches ahead of the firing line to ensure that the arrows do not hit the archers. (5) Ranges utilizing moveable target equipment should have a warning system should anyone advance over the shooting line in the direction of the target. Alarm will sound and can be either bells or horns audible for everyone in the range in conjunction with a strobe or flashing light for the hearing impaired. (6) Fixed targets on walk-up ranges should have signs posted giving specific directions regarding when it is safe to advance forward of the firing line. The signal may be either range commands or manual device such as a strobe or flashing light. Signage should be prominent and conspicuous from the shooting stake. Equipment Safety (1) Inspect equipment for damage prior to shooting. (2) Check arrows for cracks, loose vanes, bends, broken nocks or any condition that may cause the arrow to fly erratically or to rupture when released. Serious injuries can be avoided by taking the time to inspect for damage. (3) Check bows for frayed strings, loose pulleys, warped limbs, cracks or other damages that may result in breakage when at full draw. Where a pool of equipment is used by several students over a period of time, make a special effort to assure minimal damage and inspect after each use. (4) Shoot only those arrows that have been matched to the shooter's draw length and have spines matched to the bow's draw weight. (5) Never "dry fire" a bow. The resistance of an arrow is needed to prevent damage to the bow limbs. III-11-7 (6) Never draw a bow that was set up for someone else. Draw lengths and weights vary. If someone with a 32 inch draw length draws a bow having a 28 inch draw, the bow limb may fracture or rupture with sufficient force to cause serious injury. Additionally, drawing an arrow that is too short may cause the arrow to slip behind the handle, effectively blocking forward travel and causing a rupture of the arrow and injury to the archer. (7) Never overdraw a bow. (8) Check surroundings before drawing the bow to shoot. Low ceilings or items hanging from the ceiling may obstruct the action of the bow limb causing either a bad shot or injury to the shooter. (9) Use proper gear, including arm guards to prevent string burns and contusions to the forearm, finger tabs to save fingertips from abrasions and bow slings to maintain control of the bow. III-11-8 ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Firing Line to Target Line 3.01.1 Indoor archery facilities may be set up in a variety of sites, for example, a single target in a basement, an indoor/outdoor facility, a converted building (Bowling alleys are ideal) or in a multipurpose structure used by a local shooting club. Many of the features of an archery facility are identical to regular shooting facilities. Firing lines are parallel to the target line, firing positions are laid out in uniform increments (Generally 6 feet center-to-center). Special barriers are used to protect lights, pilasters, walls, floors and ceilings. In fact, the guidance offered in most of the indoor range sections can be used, with the exception of ventilation and steel backstops, as guidelines from which to construct an indoor archery facility. Ceiling heights are of some concern, primarily for those who still prefer to use the longer recurve tournament and hunting bows. With the advent of compound bows and the shortening of bow limbs, ceiling height requirements have been reduced substantially. Lighting on the indoor facility still offers some challenge but is not insurmountable. Other features and relationships will be discussed under specific headings. 3.01.2 Distance 3.01.2.1 Target distances for the indoor archery range will vary according to the range design. Most new shooters require close-in targets to build their morale and keep them shooting for improved scores. With adequate safety measures, shooting at close range can be done. 3.01.3 Firing Line Area 3.01.3.1 Firing Points 3.01.3.1.1 Firing points are normally spacious, offering a sufficient area for the shooter to set up equipment and move about freely. Six feet deep and wide should prove adequate for most shooters, including space for equipment. 3.01.4 Target Line Area 3.01.4.1 Number Boards 3.01.4.1.1 Number boards are not a requirement for archery facilities, although for very large indoor ranges, painted numbers on the wall provide a guide for the shooter. In particular where old bowling alleys are used, numbers might prove worthwhile. 3.01.4.2 Target Assembly 3.01.4.2.1 Target assembly should pose no problems for the indoor archery range. The only requirement is to use special pins with thin aluminum washers to hold the backstop material. Thin aluminum washers are used because, when hit, they do not damage the arrows. 3.01.4.3 Targets 3.01.4.3.1 The number of targets should coincide with the number of firing points and be in a direct line down range, perpendicular to the firing line. III-11-9 3.01.4.4 Backstop 3.01.4.4.1 Backstops must be designed to contain the energy of an arrow and allow for easy arrow retrieval by the shooter. Some materials require considerable effort to extract arrows, others represent a potential fire hazard or cause damage to the vanes. Much effort has been expended by archers and archery equipment suppliers to design suitable backstops. Those from which arrows are easily extracted deteriorate rapidly and must be replaced frequently. Backstops constructed from bales of straw or excelsior require that at least two fire extinguishers be located at each side of the building and all users should be trained in their use. In addition to straw or excelsior bales, a backboard of plywood covered with at least 1 inch thick insulation board should be installed directly behind the bales. This board prevents arrows passing through loose sections of the straw or excelsior bails and hitting the wall. Those facilities using commercially available target backers or backstops should also have backing material to protect wall areas. 3.01.5 Administrative Facilities 3.01.5.1 Design may include areas for checking in shooters, for a retail shop and for assembling results of tournament operations. In addition, where archery is taught under the auspices of the American Archery Council, the National Bowhunters' Association or hunter education programs, a classroom would be helpful. 3.01.6 Communications 3.01.6.1 Communications are seldom a problem on archery ranges, except for very large facilities. On these, a public address system along the firing line area provides sufficient communication from the control officer and the shooter. 3.01.7 Barriers 3.01.7.1 Barriers to protect the interior walls, floor and ceiling of a facility must be constructed of material thick enough to stop an arrow. This material should allow easy penetration and containment without damage to the arrow or surface area. This means that the closer the barrier, the greater the thickness of the absorbing material. Under no circumstances should rubber curtains be used to contain arrows. Arrow velocity may not be great enough to penetrate them. The result could be a bounce back sufficient to cause injury. Building insulation board, cork, Styrofoam, Kevlar, or tightly woven bales of straw or excelsior may be used effectively. 3.01.8 Baffles 3.01.8.1 Baffles are often necessary to protect lights, ventilation ducts, wiring and other down range features in an indoor area. Such baffles should be designed in a manner similar to the barriers mentioned above, but must be suspended from the ceiling so that a shooter at the firing line cannot shoot an arrow that will strike any of the above-mentioned features. Another factor is the weight of these baffles. Material used to cover wall or ceiling areas must be capable of absorbing energies expended by an arrow and may be quite heavy. Therefore, in existing and new buildings, be sure the structural design takes care of the added weight. 3.01.9 Restrooms 3.01.9.1 Restrooms are a necessity. An important feature for any restroom facility is accessibility by all shooters including the handicapped. III-11-10 3.01.10 Additional information can be accessed by reviewing the following website: http://www.texasarchery.org/Documents/AMO/AMORangeLayout.pdf III-11-11 ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.01.1 Equipment is limited to a few bales of straw, excelsior, or Styrofoam, polyethylene foam and requires no real operation. On the other hand, specially designed target carrier systems may require special training for range operators. These items may be made on-site or obtained from a commercial outlet. 4.02 Maintenance 4.02.1 Maintenance is limited to replacing target material. (See Section III, Chapter 3, for information on maintenance of an indoor facility.) III-11-12 III-12-1 National Rifle Association 12 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section III Chapter 12 INDOOR LAW ENFORCEMENT Range Services ©2012 III-12-2 III-12-3 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.02 Chapter Organization 1.03 Cross Reference ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.02 Other Components ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.02 Maintenance 8 2012 The National Rifle Association. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by mechanical means, photocopying, electronic reproduction, scanning, or any other means. For more information contact, National Rifle Association, Range Services, 11250 Waples Mill Road, Fairfax, VA, 22030 or call (877) NRA RANGE (672-7264). III-12-4 III-12-5 ARTICLE 1. GENERAL 1.01 Purpose 1.01.1 This chapter describes the planning, design and construction of an indoor law enforcement training range. 1.02 Chapter Organization 1.02.1 This chapter is organized into four sections: (1) General information; (2) Safety; (3) Technical specifications; and (4) Operations and maintenance. Cross references are given to aid the user in finding related information throughout the remainder of the source book. 1.03 Cross Reference a. General Information, Section I, Chapter 1 b. General Indoor Range Information, Section III, Chapter 1 c. Safety Plan, Section, I, Chapter 2 d. Planning and Design, Section I, Chapter 3 1.03.1 Related Ranges a. Indoor Bullseye Pistol III-12-6 ARTICLE 2. SAFETY 2.01 General Safety 2.01.1 Law enforcement employees who use law enforcement range facilities as part of their employment may come under the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) regulations. Operators of law enforcement ranges need to ensure they abide by any local, state and federal regulations that apply. 2.01.1.1 Drinking any beverage or consuming any food should be prohibited anywhere in the range area. 2.01.1.2 All shooters and range officers should wash their hands with cool water and soap after leaving the firing area. 2.01.2 Simple First Aid Kit: Law enforcement ranges need to be equipped with a simple first aid kit containing band-aids, alcohol swabs and other basic items for simple abrasions and cuts. 2.01.3 Trauma Medical Bag: A SEPARATE Medical Kit containing bandages, CPR mask, emergency tourniquets, quick clot, and other material suitable to provide emergency treatment for gunshot wounds should be kept permanently onsite or if training on another agencies range, one brought with the range officer. Local Para-medics can be consulted to determine what items should be in the Ranges Trauma Medical Bag, 2.01.4 AED Unit: If available, an AED unit should be kept permanently at the range or one brought with the range officer. III-12-7 ARTICLE 3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 Technical Considerations 3.01.1 In planning ranges, law enforcement agencies are influenced by training requirements and sometimes by the requirements of law enforcement competition. The police competition range can be an excellent starting point for planning a range for law enforcement training. Its specifications are well established and are based on the training programs of a number of law enforcement agencies. The police competition range is laid out with firing lines parallel to the target line, usually at distances of 3, 7, 10, 15, 25 and 50 yards. Competition can be held on a 50 foot indoor range using reduced targets as necessary. The recommended width of each firing point is 8 feet; and turning targets are required for NRA Registered Tournaments. Barricades are required at 25 and 50 yards or the equivalent stage on the reduced course. The target frames must be built to accommodate the NRA B-27 target, the standard size of which is 24 inches by 45 inches. Selecting target frames that will accommodate B-27 Targets means other law enforcement targets of various sizes can also be used. 3.01.1.1 As stated, the competition range can provide a good basic design from which to develop a training facility. When building a competition range, consideration should be given to making the range as versatile as possible for training applications. 3.01.1.2 Additional considerations for the police training range are: (1) Police training programs often require firing from other than the standard competition distances. These may include arms-length from the target. Range and target construction should be such that the target can be positioned anywhere on the range from the maximum distance available to touching distance. Firing should be conducted no closer than 10 yards to the backstop in order to avoid shooters being struck by backsplatter. Target frame height should be such that when a man sized target is placed in it the head of the target is at average adult head height. For instance, if the NRA B-27 target is used, the top of the silhouette should be about 5 feet 9 inches from the ground. (2) Police training often incorporates the use of common objects to simulate protective cover. Provision should be made to move such objects as simulated fire hydrants, mail boxes, power poles, doorways, or tree-stumps onto the range. Real items of cover made of metal should be avoided and replicas made of wood, plastic, Coro-Plast, foam, or other material sue to reduce the chance of ricochet or other damage or injury should a bullet hit the range prop. (3) Police training may include firing at multiple targets. This will increase the angle at which the shooter may fire so side panels must be added to the backstop to avoid damage to the walls. The maximum angles of fire must be regulated to ensure that all rounds are contained by the backstop. (4) Police training may include moving targets. If they are included, it is best to make them part of the over-all plan rather than tack them on as an afterthought. Will they move laterally? Up and down range? On a track system? Or overhead wires? In the case of lateral movement, the design of the direct fire zone will change, and must be considered during the planning and design phase. (5) Artificial lighting must be designed to allow dim and bright light firing. Lighting levels must be maintained so that firing activities are conducted safely. Since fluorescent and other non-incandescent lighting systems are not compatible with most dimming controls, police ranges will require the use of incandescent lamps capable of producing all desired levels of light. Dimmers need to have switch markings that will allow the light level to be III-12-8 consistently repeated. If not a light meter will have to be used to consistently set the light level during reduced light training and qualifications. 3.01.1.3 Direct fire zone 3.01.1.3.1 Direct fire zones on an indoor range are limited to the space between the firing line and backstop. 3.01.1.4 Firing Line 3.01.1.4.1 The firing line must be parallel to the target line and at the specified distance. In training exercises, it might be desirable to move the firing line, but it is always necessary to maintain a relationship with the target and the backstop so that every round fired will be properly contained. 3.01.1.4.2 Firing lines may be marked with a painted parallel line to the targets. Since there are no firing lines on the street where officers work, consideration should be given to only placing yardage markers on the extreme left and right side of the range, and in the center for very wide ranges. Theses markers provide Firearm Instructors and shooters with the firing line reference needed for qualification purposes without installing permanent yardage markers that will interfere with training operations. 3.01.2.1 Firing Points 3.01.2.1.1 Firing points should be a minimum of 8 feet wide, which allows sufficient room for training and competition activities. 3.01.2.1.2 Barricades 3.01.2.1.2.1 Barricades used to simulate cover or concealment at selected firing positions, usually at 25 yards and 50 yards typically measure 6.5 feet high and may be made from 2 inch by 8 inch lumber. A special bracket to hold the barricade may be installed on the centerline of each position. Stand-alone barricades that can be moved onto and off of the range may also be used. Ideally barricades should have a wood, plywood, or plastic attachment face that provides simulated cover that is 4 feet wide by the height of the support. As with other range props, there should be no metal framing, corners, exposed brackets, or other hard material on the barricade that could cause damage or injury if a bullet were to impact it. 3.01.2.1.2.2 For training, additional props, such as simulated parts of automobiles, trash containers (Dumpsters), mailboxes, fire hydrants or other common fixtures the officer is likely to encounter when on duty should be available. Real items made of metal should be avoided and replicas made of wood, plastic, Coro-Plast, foam, or other material used to reduce the chance of ricochet or other damage or injury should a bullet hit the range prop. 3.01.3 Target Line Area 3.01.3.1 Frames 3.01.3.1.1 Target frames used on law enforcement indoor ranges are usually an integral part of a target carrier system. Spare parts should be available when needed. III-12-9 3.01.3.1.2 Target frames to be used for competition must be large enough to handle the NRA B-27 target or one of its reduced versions appropriate to the distance used. (See Section 3.01.1). 3.01.3.2 Turning Target Mechanisms 3.01.3.2.1 Turning target mechanisms with the ability to face targets 90 degrees away from the shooter are usually obtained from commercial sources (See References to Products and Services in the Appendix) and come in standard sizes. Fixed target frames may be used for approved tournaments. Registered tournaments require turning mechanisms. 3.01.3.3 Number Boards 3.01.3.3.1 Number boards must be large enough to be easily read from the farthest firing line by people with normal vision. 3.01.3.3.2 Number boards must be in sequence from left to right corresponding to the numbers of the firing points. 3.01.3.3.3 Number boards should be painted in contrasting colors and the background color should alternate from target to target. 3.01.4 Targets 3.01.4.1 The B-27 target is approved for NRA Police Pistol Combat (PPC) Program Tournaments and training and is used at distances of 7, 15, 25 and 50 yards. The B-29 target is a reduced size target used on 50 foot ranges for PPC 25 and 50 yards course of fire. The B-34 is used on 25 yard ranges for PPC 50 yard course of fire. For training purposes the distances used will vary, as may the targets. Targets used should be readily available to be economical and to preclude difficulty in obtaining supplies. If backing material is used, it must permit close range shooting without any accompanying hazard to the shooter. The backer should extend 2 to 4 inches beyond the outside edge of the target paper unless the target incorporates the extra space. 3.01.5 Backstop 3.01.5.1 Backstops are required and must be able to contain the most powerful ammunition scheduled for use on the range. Chapter 2 of this Section highlights the design specifications for backstops to handle powerful calibers. Backstops should be constructed from the floor to the ceiling with additional baffle systems to prevent any bullet from exiting through the floor, the ceiling, or the walls. 3.01.6 Ventilation 3.01.6.1 Law enforcement range facilities may come under the standards of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) concerning work place environments. Operators of law enforcement ranges need to ensure they abide by any local, state and federal regulations that apply. 3.01.7 Lighting III-12-10 3.01.7.1 Adequate lighting is necessary for safety and usefulness of a range. The lighting design must relate to the particular use of the range. A range must be free of excessive glare and major differences in light levels. This means that the walls, floor and ceiling must be able to reflect light. NOTE – We usually like the floors NOT to reflect light so there is no glare from above ground lighting and no glare when prone or kneeling. 3.01.7.2 Range lighting involves three systems: (1) general lighting, (2) local lighting, and (3) semi-direct lighting. (1) General lighting provides uniform light levels over the entire range and adjoining areas and should usually be installed in a symmetrical arrangement designed to blend with the architecture. (2) Local lighting supplements general lighting where extra light is needed. It is particularly important to provide better visibility along the firing line for loading and firing. (3) Semi-direct lighting calls for 60 percent to 90 percent to be focused on the target and a small upward component to reflect from the ceiling to soften shadows and improve range brightness. When ceilings are white, lighting fixtures mounted too close to the ceiling may create too much glare. 3.01.7.2.1 General lighting should provide 30-to-50 footcandle illuminance measured at a point 4 feet above the range floor. 3.01.7.2.2 Local lighting should produce 40-to-60 footcandle illuminance on the firing line and the semi-direct lighting on the targets should achieve 100 footcandle illuminance. 3.01.7.2.3 Eliminate or reduce glare by incorporating pastel colors in the interior design. Colors should be manufactured into a product, rather than added by painting. Many acoustic materials lose effectiveness if painted. 3.01.8 Range Control 3.01.8.1 A control booth is useful to house the controls for the target mechanisms and the loudspeaker system. The control booth should be elevated enough to give the range officer a clear view of the entire firing line area. 3.01.8.1.1 The control booth can be a simple podium with shelf space for the equipment to be used. An enclosed booth separated from the range by glass protects the range officer. If enclosed adequate ventilation and air exchange must be ensured. A control booth must be designed to allow easy access into the range proper. A door should open from the booth directly onto the range and the windows should be capable of being opened. Separate overhead and instrument control lighting should be incorporated so the range officer can see all target and PA controls during reduced light operations. 3.02 Other Components 3.02.1 Administrative Facilities 3.02.1.1 Spaces for target storage, maintenance and range operations improve overall activities. 3.02.2 Rooms III-12-11 3.02.2.1 Class rooms, ready rooms and lounge areas are useful to an indoor training range. These areas should be separated from the range area proper by an air tight seal to prevent any contamination from range activities. A glass wall to allow observation will enable shooters waiting their turn to see when a change is about to be made and speed up operations. The decibel level inside any area near the range should be checked when live fire is taking place to ensure that hearing protection is not required in adjoining rooms to the range. 3.02.3 Communications 3.02.3.1 Shooters should be encouraged to use both ear plug and ear muff hearing protectors, due to the high levels of sound generated by firearms. Communications may require special consideration beyond the traditional public address system. If movement by the user is limited, hearing protectors with speakers incorporated into the headset and hard-wired to the public address system are an alternative worth considering. Even during peak noise levels, communications are effective. III-12-12 ARTICLE 4. EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 4.01 Operations 4.01.1 Whether the range uses turning target mechanisms or stationary target frames, each range officer should be trained in how to set up the equipment, how the equipment works, how to secure the range at the close of each day. 4.02 Maintenance 4.02.1 Maintenance on indoor range equipment and fixtures is sometimes the responsibility of each range officer. On law enforcement ranges this is normally done under the supervision of the range master or the instructor. A maintenance check list should be provided in the range area so that anyone using the range can have access. With the use of sophisticated equipment comes the responsibility to teach users how to use the equipment properly. Otherwise, the operation of the equipment should be restricted to qualified operators. 4.02.2 Down Range Maintenance: Proper protective equipment must be worn when working downrange, such as when cleaning out bullet traps, cleaning decelerator champers, lubricating steel trap plates and during other such times. Minimum equipment may include tyvex disposable overalls, shoe covers, rubber exam gloves, and appropriate dusk mast. Cleaning and maintenance operations should be detailed in writing so all operators know and follow set procedures. Typical Ground and Overhead Baffle National Rifle Association of America THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK Section IV Product and Services List Vendor List 12 Range Services ©2012 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 1 THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 2 AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHS Photomaps USA 19570 State Hwy 75 Remlap, AL 35133 Phone 800-528-7250 Fax 205-680-0199 E-mail photomap@bellsouth.net Website http://photomapsusa.com/ AIR GUN, AIR SOFT, ACCESSORIES Beeman Precision Air Guns 10652 Bloomfield Avenue Santa Fe Springs, CA 90670 Phone 800-822-8005 Fax 562-968-5823 E-mail Website www.beeman.com AIR GUN, AIR SOFT, ACCESSORIES Marksman Products/Beeman Precision Air gun 10652 Bloomfield Avenue Santa Fe Springs, CA 90670 Phone 562-968-5891 Fax 562-968-5823 E-mail Website www.beeman.com AIR GUN, AIR SOFT, ACCESSORIES Sius Target Systems USA, Inc. 3025 A Mc Naughton Road Columbia, SC 29223 Phone 803-699-1800 Fax 803-699-0038 E-mail siustgtsys@aol.com Website AIR GUN, AIR SOFT, ACCESSORIES Pyramyd Air 151 Atkinson Hill Avenue Bardstown, KY 40004 Phone 800-726-1696 Fax 502-349-9596 E-mail staff@compasseco.com Website www.compasseco.com AIR GUN, AIR SOFT, ACCESSORIES Crosman Corporation Benjamin Sheridan 7629 Routes 5 & 20 Bloomfield, NY 14469 Phone 800-724-7486 Website www.crosman.com AMMUNITION SNC Technologies Corp./Simunition P.O. Box 576 Avon, CT 06001 Phone 800-465-8255 Fax 860-404-0169 E-mail info@simunition.com Website http://simunition.com/en AMMUNITION AcuSport Corporation Doug VanderWoude One Hunter Place Bellefontaine, OH 43311 Phone 800-543-3150 Fax E-mail dvanderwoude@AcuSport.com Website www.AcuSport.com AMMUNITION Daisy Outdoor Products P.O. Box 220 Rogers, AR 72757 Phone 800-643-3458 Fax E-mail info@daisy.com Website www.daisy.com AMMUNITION Winchester Div. Olin Corp 427 North Shamrock East Alton, IL 62024 Phone Fax E-mail Website www.winchester.com THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 3 AMMUNITION Fiocchi of America 6930 N. Fremont Rd. Ozark, MO 65721 Phone 417-725-4118 Fax 417-725-1039 E-mail sales@fiocchiusa.com Website www.fiocchiusa.com AMMUNITION Hornady 3625 West Old Potash Hwy Grand Island, NE 68803 Phone 1-800-338-3220 Fax 308-382-5761 E-mail Website www.hornady.com ARCHITECTS AND DESIGNERS Brasseur & Drobot Architects, P.A. 224 Datura Street, Suite 311 West Palm Beach, FL 33401 Phone 561-820-8088 Fax 561-820-8089 E-mail Jeffrey@brasseuranddrobot.com Website www.brasseuranddrobot.com ARCHITECTS AND DESIGNERS The Vaughn Collaborative 42 West Lafayette Street Trenton, NJ 08608 Phone 609-695-7411 Fax 609-695-2867 ARCHITECTS AND DESIGNERS Johnson Architects Gary W. Johnson 3868 River Walk Drive Duluth, GA 30096 Phone 770-448-3868 Fax E-mail gwjaia@msn.com Website www.gwjaia.com ARCHITECTS AND DESIGNERS McClaren, Wilson & Lawrie, Inc. Jim McClaren 8705 North Central Avenue Phoenix, AZ 85020 Phone 602-331-4141 Fax 602-943-5018 E-mail info@mwlarchitects.com Website www.mwlarchitects.com ARCHITECTS AND DESIGNERS MT2 Mike Burkett 14045 West 66th Avenue Arvada, CO 80004 Phone 303-465-6977 Fax 303-456-6998 E-mail mburkett@metalstt.com Website http://www.mt2.com/index.htm ARCHITECTS AND DESIGNERS Landtiser Architects Jeffrey G. Landtiser, AIA 2944 North 44th Street, Suite 101 Phoenix, AZ 85018 Phone 602-957-3426 Fax 602-957-3426 E-mail info@landtiserarchitects.com Website www.landtiserarchitects.com ARCHITECTS AND ENGINEERS Hansen Consulting Scott Hansen 1005 Moorgate Ave., Apt 204 Spotsylvania, VA 22553 Phone 781-640-4457 E-mail shansen5@comcast.net THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 4 ASSOCIATIONS & ORGANIZATIONS U.S. Practical Shooting Assn./IPSC 872 North Hill Blvd. Burlington, WA 98233 Phone 360-855-2245 Fax 360-855-0380 E-mail office@uspsa.org Website www.uspsa.org ASSOCIATIONS & ORGANIZATIONS National Bench Rest Shooters Assn., Inc. Mrs. Pat Ferrell 2835 Guilford Lane Oklahoma City, OK 73120 Phone 405-842-9585 Fax 405-842-9575 E-mail patnbrsa@aol.com Website nbrsa.org ASSOCIATIONS & ORGANIZATIONS National Skeet Shooting Association 5931 Roft Road San Antonio, TX 78253 Phone 210-688-3371 Fax 210-688-3014 E-mail Website www.nssa-nsca.org ASSOCIATIONS & ORGANIZATIONS XS Sight Systems Dave Biggers 2401 Ludelle Fort Worth, TX 76105 Phone 888-744-4880 Fax 800-734-7939 E-mail Website www.xssights.com ASSOCIATIONS & ORGANIZATIONS National Rifle Association 11250 Waples Mill Road Fairfax, VA 22030 Phone 888-672-3888 Fax E-mail https://www.nrahq.org/contact.asp Website http://home.nra.org/#/nraorg ASSOCIATIONS & ORGANIZATIONS National Sporting Clays Assn. 5931 Roft Road San Antonio, TX 78253 Phone 800-877-5338 Fax 210-688-3014 E-mail Website www.nssa-ncsa.org ASSOCIATIONS & ORGANIZATIONS National Muzzle Loading Rifle Assn. Box 67 Friendship, IN 47021 Phone 812-667-5131 Fax 812-667-5136 E-mail nmlra@nmlra.org Website www.nmlra.org ASSOCIATIONS & ORGANIZATIONS Amateur Trapshooting Assn. 601 W. National Rd. Vandalia, OH 45377 Phone 937-898-4638 Fax 937-898-5472 E-mail info@aitactical.com Website www.shootata.com AUTOMATIC GATE AND ACCESS Byan Systems, Inc. John Boreczky 413 Linden Lusk, WY 82225 Phone 307-334-3865 Fax E-mail customers@byan.com Website www.byan.com BALLISTIC TEST LABARATORIES H.P. White Laboratory, Inc. Donald Dunn 3114 Scarboro Road Street, MD 21154 Phone 410-838-6550 Fax 410-838-2802 E-mail Website www.hpwhite.com THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 5 BALLISTIC TEST LABARATORIES Waco Composites, Ltd. 320 South Twenty-Seventh Street Waco, TX 76710 Phone 866-688-3088 Fax 254-752-3634 E-mail jclark@armorcore.com Website www.armorcore.com BALLISTIC TEST LABORATORIES Armortex 5926 Corridor Parkway Schertz, TX 78154 Phone 800-880-8306 Fax 210-661-8308 E-mail info@armortex.com Website www.armortex.com BRASS (BUYER) Southern Bell Brass Vicky Harrison P.O. Box 36 Memphis, TN 38101 Phone 901-774-9800 Fax 901-947-1924 E-mail vicky@southernbellebrass.com Website www.southernbellebrass.com BRASS PICKERS Southern Bell Brass Vicky Harrison P.O. Box 36 Memphis, TN 38101 Phone 901-774-9800 Fax 901-947-1924 E-mail vicky@southernbellebrass.com Website www.southernbellebrass.com BULLET CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS Action Target, Inc. P.O. Box 636 Provo, UT 84603 Phone 801-377-8033 Fax 801-377-8096 E-mail support@actiontarget.com Website www.actiontarget.com BULLET CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS Regupol America John P. Aten 33 Keystone Drive Lebanon, PA 17042 Phone 800-537-8737 Fax 717-675-2199 E-mail Website www.regupol.com BULLET CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS Shooting Range Industries 3885 Rockbottom Street N. Las Vegas, NV 89030 Phone 702-362-3623 Fax 702-310-6978 E-mail JRamos@ShootingRangeLLC.com Website www.ShootingRangeIndustries.com BULLET CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS Meggitt Training Systems 296 Brogdon Road Suwanee, GA 30024 Phone 800-813-9046 Fax E-mail CustomerSupport@Meggitt.com Website http://www.meggitttrainingsystems.com BULLET RESISTANT PRODUCTS Waco Composites, Ltd. 320 South Twenty-Seventh Street Waco, TX 76710 Phone 866-688-3088 Fax 254-752-3634 E-mail jclark@armorcore.com Website www.armorcore.com BULLET RESISTANT STEEL ESCO Supply 2141 NW 25th Avenue Portland, OR 97210 Phone 503-228-3795 Fax 503-226-8071 E-mail epinfo@escocorp.com Website http://www.escocorp.com THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 6 BULLET TRAPS American Defense Systems, Inc. 420 McKinney Parkway Lillington, NC 27546 Phone 937-898-4638 Fax 937-898-5472 E-mail info@aitactical.com Website www.adsiarmor.com BULLET TRAPS The Bullet Bunker P.O. Box 400 Port Clinton, OH 43452 Phone 419-341-1416 Fax E-mail gary@thebulletbunker.com Website www.thebulletbunker.com BULLET TRAPS Meggitt Training Systems 296 Brogdon Road Suwanee, GA 30024 Phone 800-813-9046 Fax E-mail CustomerSupport@Meggitt.com Website http://www.meggitttrainingsystems.com BULLET TRAPS Savage Range Systems, Inc. Eoin B. Stafford 100 Springdale Road Westfield, MA 01085 Phone 413-642-4219 Fax 413-562-1152 E-mail estafford@SavageArms.com Website www.SnailTraps.com BULLET TRAPS Range Systems Tim Lindell 5121 Winnetka Ave. North New Hope, MN 55428 Phone 888-999-1217 Fax E-mail sales@range-systems.com Website http://range-systems.com/ BULLET TRAPS Action Target, Inc. P.O. Box 636 Provo, UT 84603 Phone 801-377-8033 Fax 801-377-8096 E-mail support@actiontarget.com Website www.actiontarget.com BULLET TRAPS Concept Development Corp PO Box 18970 Fountain Hills, AZ 85269 Phone 800-472-4405 Fax 480-836-4435 E-mail Website www.firearms-safety.com CLEAN AIR Neutron Industries Hunter Johnson 7107 N. Black Canyon Highway Phoenix, AZ 850217661 Phone 877-646-7337 Fax E-mail questions@neutronindustries.com Website www.neutronindustries.com CLEANING EQUIPMENT ESCA Tech Jim Elliott 3747 North Booth Street Milwaukee, WI 53212 Phone 414-962-5323 Fax 414-962-7003 E-mail cservice@esca-tech.com Website esca-tech.com CLEANING EQUIPMENT Pyramyd Air 151 Atkinson Hill Avenue Bardstown, KY 40004 Phone 800-726-1696 Fax 502-349-9596 E-mail staff@compasseco.com Website www.compasseco.com CLEANING EQUIPMENT THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 7 Nilfisk -Advance America, Inc. 740 Hemlock Road, Suite 100 Morgantown, PA 19543 Phone 800-645-3475 Fax 610-286-7350 E-mail questions@niffisk.com Website http://www.nilfiskcfm.com/ CLEANING EQUIPMENT Range Systems Tim Lindell 5121 Winnetka Ave. North New Hope, MN 55428 Phone 888-999-1217 Fax E-mail sales@range-systems.com Website http://range-systems.com/ CLEARING BARRELS Concept Development Corp PO Box 18970 Fountain Hills, AZ 85269 Phone 800-472-4405 Fax 480-836-4435 E-mail Website www.firearms-safety.com CLEARING BARRELS Action Target, Inc P.O. Box 636 Provo, UT 84603 Phone 801-377-8033 Fax 801-377-8096 E-mail support@actiontarget.com Website www.actiontarget.com CLEARING BARRELS Savage Range Systems, Inc Eoin B. Stafford 100 Springdale Road Westfield, MA 01085 Phone 413-642-4219 Fax 413-562-1152 E-mail estafford@SavageArms.com Website www.SnailTraps.com COMPOSTING RESTROOMS Hunter Knepshield Company P.O. Box 260677 Plano, TX 75026 Phone 972.867.5739 Fax 972-867-7250 E-mail Website www.hunternepshieldco.com COMPOSTING RESTROOMS J.F. Fitzpatrick Industries, Inc. Jim Fitzpatrick 28 industrial Crt Unit A Sault Ste. Marie, ON Phone 800-661-8366 Fax 705-759-2421 E-mail jim@fitzpatrickindustries.com Website www.reedconstructiondata.com COMPOSTING RESTROOMS Clivus Multrum, Inc. 15 Union Street Lawrence, MA 01840 Phone 800-425-4887 Fax 978-557-9658 E-mail forinfo@clivusmultrum.com Website www.clivusmultrum.com CONTRACTORS MT2 Mike Burkett 14045 West 66th Avenue Arvada, CO 80004 Phone 303-465-6977 Fax 303-456-6998 E-mail mburkett@metalstt.com Website http://www.mt2.com/index.htm CONTRACTORS Range and Civil Construction, LLC Brian Backus 27840 County Route 193, Suite 2 Theresa, NY 13691 Phone 315-836-0444 Fax 888-855-9625 E-mail jim@raccllc.com Website http://www.raccllc.com/index.html THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 8 CORROSION PROTECTION Sentry Solutions, Ltd. PO Box 214 Wilton, NH 03086 Phone 800-546-8049 Fax 603-654-3003 E-mail info@sentrysolutions.com Website www.sentrysolutions.com DESIGN CONSULTANTS Johnson Architects Gary W. Johnson 3868 River Walk Drive Duluth, GA 30096 Phone 770-448-3868 Fax E-mail gwjaia@msn.com Website www.gwjaia.com DESIGN CONSULTANTS Okie Environmental & Consulting Services, LLC Charles Sever 930 Shulze Drive Norman, OK 73071 Phone 405-384-1351 Fax 405-329-6967 E-mail cwsever@severconsulting.com Website DESIGN CONSULTANTS Hansen Consulting Scott Hansen 1005 Moorgate Ave., Apt 204 Spotsylvania, VA 22553 Phone 781-640-4457 Fax E-mail shansen5@comcast.net DESIGN CONSULTANTS McClaren, Wilson & Lawrie, Inc. Jim McClaren 8705 North Central Avenue Phoenix, AZ 85020 Phone 602-331-4141 Fax 602-943-5018 E-mail info@mwlarchitects.com Website www.mwlarchitects.com DESIGN CONSULTANTS Meggitt Training Systems 296 Brogdon Road Suwanee, GA 30024 Phone 800-813-9046 Fax E-mail CustomerSupport@Meggitt.com Website http://www.meggitttrainingsystems.com DESIGN CONSULTANTS Savage Range Systems, Inc Eoin B. Stafford 100 Springdale Road Westfield, MA 01085 Phone 413-642-4219 Fax 413-562-1152 E-mail estafford@SavageArms.com Website www.SnailTraps.com DESIGN CONSULTANTS Kuegler Associates, LLC Depot Square Business Center, Suite 214 Watertown, CT 06795 Phone 860-945-6955 Fax 860-274-9540 E-mail KWK@KUEGLERassociates.com Website www.kueglerassociates.com DESIGN CONSULTANTS Landtiser Architects Jeffrey G. Landtiser, AIA 2944 North 44th Street, Suite 101 Phoenix, AZ 85018 Phone 602-957-3426 Fax 602-957-3426 E-mail info@landtiserarchitects.com Website www.landtiserarchitects.com DESIGN CONSULTANTS Range Systems Tim Lindell 5121 Winnetka Ave. North New Hope, MN 55428 Phone 888-999-1217 Fax E-mail sales@range-systems.com Website http://range-systems.com/ THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 9 ELECTRONIC TARGET SYSTEMS Megalink Postbox 1051 Amfi Drobak City, N-1442 Drobak Phone 47-64-93-34-12 Fax 47-64-93-88-03 E-mail firmapost@megalink.no Website www.megalink.com ELECTRONIC TARGET SYSTEMS Sius Target Systems USA, Inc. 3035 A McNaughton Road Columbia, SC 29223 Phone 803-699-1800 Fax 803-699-0038 E-mail siustgtsys@aol.com Website ELECTRONIC TARGET SYSTEMS Action Target, Inc. P.O. Box 636 Provo, UT 84603 Phone 801-377-8033 Fax 801-377-8096 E-mail support@actiontarget.com Website www.actiontarget.com ELECTRONIC TARGET SYSTEMS Oakwood Controls 765 Foxtail Drive York, PA 17404 Phone 717-801-1515 Fax 717-326-1054 E-mail info@oakwoodcontrols.com Website www.oakwoodcontrols.com ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES MT2 Mike Burkett 14045 West 66th Avenue Arvada, CO 80004 Phone 303-465-6977 Fax 303-456-6998 E-mail mburkett@metalstt.com Website http://www.mt2.com/index.htm ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES Eagle Industrial Hygiene Associates Pete Rollman 359 Dresher Road Horsham, PA 19044 Phone 215-672-6088 Fax 215-443-0899 E-mail kcrawford@eaglein.com Website www.eagleih.com ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES Environmental & Turf Services, Inc. Stuart Cohen 11141 Georgia Avenue #208 Wheaton, MD 20902 Phone 301-933-4700 Fax 301-933-4701 E-mail info@environmentalandturf.com Website www.environmentalandturf.com ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES Okie Environmental & Consulting Services, LLC Charles Sever 930 Shulze Drive Norman, OK 73071 Phone 405-384-1351 Fax 405-329-6967 E-mail cwsever@severconsulting.com ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES AWT Environmental Services Inc. Timothy Roper P.O. Box 128 Sayreville, NJ 08871 Phone 732-613-1660 Fax 732-613-1536 E-mail http://www.awtenvironmental.com/contact.php Website www.awtenvironmental.com EYE PROTECTION Lab Safety Supply P.O. Box 1368 Janesville, WI 53547 Phone 800-356-0783 Fax 800-543-9910 E-mail custsvc@labsafety.com Website labsafety.com THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 10 EYE PROTECTION Daisy Outdoor Products P.O. Box 220 Rogers, AR 72757 Phone 800-643-3458 Fax E-mail info@daisy.com Website www.daisy.com EYE PROTECTION Eagle Industrial Hygiene Associates Pete Rollman 359 Dresher Road Horsham, PA 19044 Phone 215-672-6088 Fax 215-443-0899 E-mail kcrawford@eaglein.com Website www.eagleih.com EYE PROTECTION AcuSport Corporation Doug VanderWoude One Hunter Place Bellefontaine, OH 43311 Phone 800-543-3150 Fax E-mail dvanderwoude@AcuSport.com Website www.AcuSport.com EYE PROTECTION Pyramyd Air 151 Atkinson Hill Avenue Bardstown, KY 40004 Phone 800-726-1696 Fax 502-349-9596 E-mail staff@compasseco.com Website www.compasseco.com EYE PROTECTION E.A.R. Inc. Garry Gordon P.O. Box 18888 Boulder, CO 80308 Phone 800-525-2690 Fax 303-447-2637 E-mail info@EARinc.com Website EARinc.com GOVERNMENT AGENCIES Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and Firearms 99 New York Avenue Washington, DC 20226 Phone 202-648-7080 Fax E-mail http://www.atf.gov/contact/headquarters/ Website www.atf.treas.gov HEARING PROTECTION Lab Safety Supply P.O. Box 1368 Janesville, WI 53547 Phone 800-356-0783 Fax 800-543-9910 E-mail custsvc@labsafety.com Website labsafety.com HEARING PROTECTION AcuSport Corporation Doug VanderWoude One Hunter Place Bellefontaine, OH 43311 Phone 800-543-3150 E-mail dvanderwoude@AcuSport.com Website www.AcuSport.com HEARING PROTECTION E.A.R. Inc. Garry Gordon P.O. Box 18888 Boulder, CO 80308 Phone 800-525-2690 E-mail info@EARinc.com Website EARinc.com HEARING PROTECTION Eagle Industrial Hygiene Associates Pete Rollman 359 Dresher Road Horsham, PA 19044 Phone 215-672-6088 Fax 215-443-0899 E-mail kcrawford@eaglein.com Website www.eagleih.com THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 11 HEATING, VENT. AND AIR COND. (HVAC) Super Trap, Inc. Art Fransen 1580Commerce Street Corona, CA 92880 Phone 951-736-9440 Fax 951-736-9450 E-mail info@supertrap.com Website www.supertrap.com HEATING, VENT. AND AIR COND. (HVAC) Eagle Industrial Hygiene Associates Pete Rollman 359 Dresher Road Horsham, PA 19044 Phone 215-672-6088 Fax 215-443-0899 E-mail kcrawford@eaglein.com Website www.eagleih.com HEATING, VENT. AND AIR COND. (HVAC) Kuegler Associates, LLC Depot Square Business Center, Suite 214 Watertown, CT 06795 Phone 860-945-6955 Fax 860-274-9540 E-mail KWK@KUEGLERassociates.com Website www.kueglerassociates.com HEATING, VENT. AND AIR COND. (HVAC) Range Ventilation Design, Inc. 17 Regent Lane Lincolnshire, IL 60069 Phone 847-528-3500 Fax 847-940-8649 E-mail Mike.Bott@RVDinc.com Website http://www.rvdinc.com/ HEATING, VENT. AND AIR COND. (HVAC) Carey's Heating & Air Condi., Inc. Bill Provencher 8201 W. 183rd Street Unit B Tinley Park, IL 60487 Phone 708-532-2449 Fax 708-429-2150 E-mail wprovencher@careyscentral.com Website http://careyscentral.com HEPA VACUUMS / FILTER SYSTEMS ESCA Tech Jim Elliott 3747 North Booth Street Milwaukee, WI 53212 Phone 414-962-5323 Fax 414-962-7003 E-mail cservice@esca-tech.com Website esca-tech.com HEPA VACUUMS / FILTER SYSTEMS Eagle Industrial Hygiene Associates Pete Rollman 359 Dresher Road Horsham, PA 19044 Phone 215-672-6088 Fax 215-443-0899 E-mail kcrawford@eaglein.com Website www.eagleih.com HEPA VACUUMS / FILTER SYSTEMS Fortress Environmental Solutions, LLC Jim Rose 649 Busha Rd. Owosso, MI 48867 Phone 517-318-1276 Fax E-mail jimrose@corunna.org Website HEPA VACUUMS / FILTER SYSTEMS Lab Safety Supply P.O. Box 1368 Janesville, WI 53547 Phone 800-356-0783 Fax 800-543-9910 E-mail custsvc@labsafety.com Website labsafety.com HEPA VACUUMS / FILTER SYSTEMS Nilfisk -Advance America, Inc. 740 Hemlock Road, Suite 100 Morgantown, PA 19543 Phone 800-645-3475 Fax 610-286-7350 E-mail questions@niffisk.com Website http://www.nilfiskcfm.com/ THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 12 HEPA VACUUMS / FILTER SYSTEMS Tiger-Vac Inc. 73 S.W. 12 Ave. Bldg.1, Unit 7 Dania, FL 33004 Phone 954-925-3625 Fax 954-925-3626 E-mail sales@tiger-vac.com Website http://www.tiger-vac.com HEPA VACUUMS / FILTER SYSTEMS Range Systems Tim Lindell 5121 Winnetka Ave. North New Hope, MN 55428 Phone 888-999-1217 Fax E-mail sales@range-systems.com Website http://range-systems.com/ HEPA VACUUMS / FILTER SYSTEMS Ruwac, USA Wolfgang Schloesser 54 Winter Street Holyoke, MA 01040 Phone 800-736-6288 E-mail wolfgang@ruwac.com Website www.ruwac.com HEPA VACUUMS / FILTER SYSTEMS Action Target, Inc. P.O. Box 636 Provo, UT 84603 Phone 801-377-8033 Fax 801-377-8096 E-mail support@actiontarget.com Website www.actiontarget.com HVAC-RANGE VENTILATION En-Range Thomas M. Taylor 3310 NW 29th Street Miami, FL 33142 Phone 305-635-9858 Fax 305-635-8645 E-mail info@en-range.com Website www.en-range.com HVAC-RANGE VENTILLATION Savage Range Systems, Inc Eoin B. Stafford 100 Springdale Road Westfield, MA 01085 Phone 413-642-4219 Fax 413-562-1152 E-mail estafford@SavageArms.com Website www.SnailTraps.com INDOOR AIR QUALITY Eagle Industrial Hygiene Associates Pete Rollman 359 Dresher Road Horsham, PA 19044 Phone 215-672-6088 Fax 215-443-0899 E-mail kcrawford@eaglein.com Website www.eagleih.com INDOOR AIR QUALITY ESCA Tech Jim Elliott 3747 North Booth Street Milwaukee, WI 53212 Phone 414-962-5323 Fax 414-962-7003 E-mail cservice@esca-tech.com Website esca-tech.com INDOOR AIR QUALITY NMC 404 N. Berry Street Brea, CA 92821 Phone 714-672-3500 Fax 714-672-3501 Website http://www.ncmgroup.com/ INDOOR RANGE DECONTAMINATION AWT Environmental Services Inc. Timothy Roper P.O. Box 128 Sayreville, NJ 08871 Phone 732-613-1660 Fax 732-613-1536 http://www.awtenvironmental.com/contact.php Website www.awtenvironmental.com THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 13 INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE Eagle Industrial Hygiene Associates Pete Rollman 359 Dresher Road Horsham, PA 19044 Phone 215-672-6088 Fax 215-443-0899 E-mail kcrawford@eaglein.com Website www.eagleih.com INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE ESCA Tech Jim Elliott 3747 North Booth Street Milwaukee, WI 53212 Phone 414-962-5323 Fax 414-962-7003 E-mail cservice@esca-tech.com Website esca-tech.com INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE Nilfisk-Advanced America, Inc 740 Hemlock Road, Suite 100 Morgantown, PA 19543 Phone 800-645-3475 Fax 610-286-7350 E-mail questions@niffisk.com Website http://www.nilfiskcfm.com/ INSURANCE Lockton Risk Services - NRA Endorsed Ins. Program P.O. Box 410679 Kansas City, MO 64141 Phone 877-487-5407 Fax 913-652-7599 E-mail nrains@locktonaffinity.com Website www.nraendorsedinsurance.com INSURANCE Joseph Chiarello and Co., Inc. 31 Parker Road Elizabeth, NJ 07208 Phone 800-526-2199 Fax 908-352-8512 E-mail info@jcinsco.com Website www.guninsurance.com LAW FIRMS Law Offices of Martha A. Dean Martha Dean 15 Ensign Drive Avon, CT 06001 Phone 860-676-0033 Fax E-mail mdean@mdeanlaw.com Website http://www.mdeanlaw.com/ LAW FIRMS Sive, Paget & Riesel, P.C. 460 Park Ave New York, NY 10022 Phone 212-421-2150 Fax 212-421-1891 E-mail Website LAW FIRMS Edward George & Associates Ed George, Jr. 110 Florence Street, 2nd Floor Malden, MA 02148 Phone 781-322-7575 Fax 781-322-1555 E-mail info@edgeorgelaw.com Website http://www.edgeorgelaw.com/ LEAD ABATEMENT Doe Run Company Resource Recycling Division Louis Magdits 1801 Park 270 Drive, Suite 300 St. Louis, MO 63146 Phone 314-453-7100 Fax E-mail Imagdits@doerun.com Website www.doerun.com LEAD ABATEMENT Jacobson Satshell Consultants Steve Jorgensen 10838 Old Mill Road, Suite 1 Omaha, NE 68154 Phone 402-697-0701 Fax 402-697-0702 E-mail info_omaha@jacobsonsatchell.com Website www.jacobsonsatchell.com THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 14 LEAD ABATEMENT Nilfisk-Advance America, Inc. 740 Hemlock Road, Suite 100 Morgantown, PA 19543 Phone 800-645-3475 Fax 610-286-7350 E-mail questions@niffisk.com Website http://www.nilfiskcfm.com/ LEAD ABATEMENT NMC 404 N. Berry Street Brea, CA 92821 Phone 714-672-3500 Fax 714-672-3501 E-mail Website http://www.ncmgroup.com/ LEAD ABATEMENT Action Target, Inc P.O. Box 636 Provo, UT 84603 Phone 801-377-8033 Fax 801-377-8096 E-mail support@actiontarget.com Website www.actiontarget.com LEAD ABATEMENT ESCA Tech Jim Elliott 3747 North Booth Street Milwaukee, WI 53212 Phone 414-962-5323 Fax 414-962-7003 E-mail cservice@esca-tech.com Website esca-tech.com LEAD ABATEMENT MT2 Mike Burkett 14045 West 66th Avenue Arvada, CO 80004 Phone 303-465-6977 Fax 303-456-6998 E-mail mburkett@metalstt.com Website http://www.mt2.com/index. LEAD ABATEMENT Okie Environmental & Consulting Services, LLC Charles Sever 930 Shulze Drive Norman, OK 73071 Phone 405-384-1351 Fax 405-329-6967 E-mail cwsever@severconsulting.com Website LEAD ABATEMENT En-Range Thomas M. Taylor 3310 NW 29th Street Miami, FL 33142-_ Phone 305-635-9858 Fax 305-635-8645 E-mail info@en-range.com Website www.en-range.com LEAD ABATEMENT Environmental & Turf Services, Inc. Stuart Cohen 11141 Georgia Avenue, #208 Wheaton, MD 20902 Phone 301-933-4700 E-mail info@environmentalandturf.com Website www.environmentalandturf.com LEAD ABATEMENT AWT Environmental Services Inc. Timothy Roper P.O. Box 128 Sayreville, NJ 08871 Phone 732-613-1660 http://www.awtenvironmental.com/contact.php Website www.awtenvironmental.com LEAD ABATEMENT Eagle Industrial Hygiene Associates Pete Rollman 359 Dresher Road Horsham, PA 19044 Phone 215-672-6088 Fax 215-443-0899 E-mail kcrawford@eaglein.com Website www.eagleih.com THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 15 LEAD ABATEMENT Dick Peddicord and Company Richard "Dick" Peddicord, Ph. D. 1115 Coopers Landing Rd. Heathsville, VA 22473 Phone 804-580-3320 Fax 804-580-3360 E-mail dick@dickpeddicord.com Website dickpeddicord.com LEAD ABATEMENT Edenspace 210 N 21st Street, Suite B Purcellville, VA 20132 Phone 703-961-8700 Fax 703-961-8939 E-mail info@edenspace.com Website www.edenspace.com LEAD ASSOCIATIONS Doe Run Company Resource Recycling Division Louis Magdits 1801 Park 270 Drive, Suite 300 St. Louis, MO 63146 Phone 314-453-7100 Fax E-mail Imagdits@doerun.com Website www.doerun.com LEAD CONSULTANT Action Target, Inc P.O. Box 636 Provo, UT 84603 Phone 801-377-8033 Fax 801-377-8096 E-mail support@actiontarget.com Website www.actiontarget.com LEAD CONSULTANTS En-Range Thomas M. Taylor 3310 NW 29th Street Miami, FL 33142 Phone 305-635-9858 Fax 305-635-8645 E-mail info@en-range.com Website www.en-range.com LEAD CONSULTANTS Dick Peddicord and Company Richard "Dick" Peddicord, Ph. D. 1115 Coopers Landing Rd. Heathsville, VA 22473 Phone 804-580-3320 Fax 804-580-3360 E-mail dick@dickpeddicord.com Website dickpeddicord.com LEAD CONSULTANTS Logan Simpson Design, Inc. Steve Fairaizl 51 West Third Street, Suite 450 Tempe, AZ 85281 Phone 480-967-1343 Fax 480-966-9232 E-mail sfairaizl@lsdaz.com Website www.logansimpson.com LEAD CONSULTANTS Edenspace 210 N 21st Street, Suite B Purcellville, VA 20132 Phone 703-961-8700 E-mail info@edenspace.com Website www.edenspace.com LEAD CONSULTANTS ESCA Tech Jim Elliott 3747 North Booth Street Milwaukee, WI 53212 Phone 414-962-5323 Fax 414-962-7003 E-mail cservice@esca-tech.com Website esca-tech.com LEAD CONSULTANTS MT2 Mike Burkett 14045 West 66th Avenue Arvada, CO 80004 Phone 303-465-6977 Fax 303-456-6998 E-mail mburkett@metalstt.com Website http://www.mt2.com/index.htm THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 16 LEAD CONSULTANTS Okie Environmental & Consulting Services, LLC Charles Sever 930 Shulze Drive Norman, OK 73071 Phone 405-384-1351 Fax 405-329-6967 E-mail cwsever@severconsulting.com Website LEAD CONSULTANTS Eagle Industrial Hygiene Associates Pete Rollman 359 Dresher Road Horsham, PA 19044 Phone 215-672-6088 Fax 215-443-0899 E-mail kcrawford@eaglein.com Website www.eagleih.com LEAD RECOVERY (OPEN RANGES) Gene Sears Supply Company Gene Sears 2003 S Shepard Avenue El Reno, OK 73036 Phone 800-522-3314 Fax 405-262-2811 E-mail gsears@coxinet.net Website www.genesears.com LEAD RECOVERY (OPEN RANGES) Terra Resources, Ltd. Larry Wood 4750 Wolverine Rd Palmer, AK 99645 Phone 907-746-4983 E-mail lwood@Wood-alaska.com Website www.terrawash.com LEAD RECOVERY (OPEN RANGES) Doe Run Company Resource Recycling Division Louis Magdits 1801 Park 270 Drive, Suite 300 St. Louis, MO 63146 Phone 314-453-7100 E-mail lmagdits@doerun.com Website www.doerun.com LEAD RECOVERY (OPEN RANGES) MT2 Mike Burkett 14045 West 66th Avenue Arvada, CO 80004 Phone 303-465-6977 Fax 303-456-6998 E-mail mburkett@metalstt.com Website http://www.mt2.com/index.htm LEAD RECOVERY (OPEN RANGES) McCain and Associates, Inc. John McCain 5300 Highway 12 Maple Plain, MN 55395 Phone 952-346-3900 Fax 952-346-3901 E-mail jmccain@mccainassociates.com Website http://mccainassociates.com/ LEAD RECOVERY (OPEN RANGES) En-Range Thomas M. Taylor 3310 NW 29th Street Miami, FL 33142 Phone 305-635-9858 E-mail info@en-range.com Website www.en-range.com LEAD RECOVERY (OPEN RANGES) Liberty Manufacturing, Inc. Alex Martinez 2233 East 16th Street Los Angeles, CA 90021 Phone 323-581-9171 Fax 323-581-9351 E-mail libertymfginc@aol.com LEAD RECOVERY (OPEN RANGES) Brice Environmental Services Corp. Craig Jones P.O. Box 70668 Fairbanks, AK 99707 Phone 907-452-2512 Fax 907-452-5018 E-mail craigj@briceinc.com THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 17 Website www.briceinc.com LEAD RECOVERY (OPEN RANGES) Allstate Geotek, Inc. 2515 Brunswick Avenue Linden, NJ 07036 Phone 908-862-3800 Fax E-mail Website LEAD RECOVERY (OPEN RANGES) NMC 404 N. Berry Street Brea, CA 92821 Phone 714-672-3500 Fax 714-672-3501 E-mail Website http://www.ncmgroup.com/ LEAD RECYCLERS Metal Merchants 445 West Liberty Street Medina, OH 44256 Phone 330-723-3228 Fax 330-772-2413 E-mail mmusa@zoominternet.net Website LEAD RECYCLERS Gopher Resource Corporation Dan Leach 3385 Highway 149 Eagan, MN 55121 Phone 651-405-2209 Fax 651-405-6409 E-mail Daniel.Leach@grcmn.com Website www.gopherresource.com LEAD RECYCLERS Doe Run Company Resource Recycling Division Louis Magdits 1801 Park 270 Drive, Suite 300 St. Louis, MO 63146 Phone 314-453-7100 Fax E-mail lmagdits@doerun.com Website www.doerun.com LEAD RECYCLERS MT2 Mike Burkett 14045 West 66th Avenue Arvada, CO 80004 Phone 303-465-6977 Fax 303-456-6998 E-mail mburkett@metalstt.com Website http://www.mt2.com/index.htm LEAD RECYCLERS Kinsbursky Brothers, Inc. 125 E. Commercial Anaheim, CA 92801 Phone 800-548-8797 Fax 714-773-4830 E-mail dkinsbursky@kinsburskyu.com Website www.kinsbursky.com LEAD RECYCLERS NMC 404 N. Berry Street Brea, CA 92821 Phone 714-672-3500 Fax 714-672-3501 Website http://www.ncmgroup.com/ LEAD RECYCLERS En-Range Thomas M. Taylor 3310 NW 29th Street Miami, FL 33142 Phone 305-635-9858 Fax 305-635-8645 E-mail info@en-range.com Website www.en-range.com LEAD RECYCLERS Liberty Manufacturing, Inc. Alex Martinez 2233 East 16th Street Los Angles, CA 90021 Phone 323-581-9171 Fax 323-581-9351 E-mail libertymfginc@aol.com THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 18 LEAD REMEDIATION (Closed Ranges) Doe Run Company Resource Recycling Division Louis Magdits 1801 Park 270 Drive, Suite 300 St. Louis, MO 63146 Phone 314-453-7100 Fax E-mail Imagdits@doerun.com Website www.doerun.com LEAD REMEDIATION (CLOSED RANGES) MT2 Mike Burkett 14045 West 66th Avenue Arvada, CO 80004 Phone 303-465-6977 Fax 303-456-6998 E-mail mburkett@metalstt.com Website http://www.mt2.com/index.htm LEAD REMOVAL PRODUCTS Fortress Environmental Services Jim Rose 649 Busha Rd. Owosso, MI 48867 Phone 800-526-2569 Fax 989-720-5542 E-mail jimrose@corunna.org LEAD REMOVAL PRODUCTS Lab Safety Supply P.O. Box 1368 Janesville, WI 53547 Phone 800-356-0783 Fax 800-543-9910 E-mail custsvc@labsafety.com Website labsafety.com LEAD REMOVAL PRODUCTS AWT Environmental Services Inc. Timothy Roper P.O. Box 128 Sayreville, NJ 08871 Phone 732-613-1660 Fax 732-613-1536 http://www.awtenvironmental.com/contact.php Website www.awtenvironmental.com LEAD REMOVAL PRODUCTS ESCA Tech Jim Elliott 3747 North Booth Street Milwaukee, WI 53212 Phone 414-962-5323 Fax 414-962-7003 E-mail cservice@esca-tech.com Website esca-tech.com LEAD REMOVAL PRODUCTS MT2 Mike Burkett 14045 West 66th Avenue Arvada, CO 80004 Phone 303-465-6977 Fax 303-456-6998 E-mail mburkett@metalstt.com Website http://www.mt2.com/index.htm LEAD REMOVAL PRODUCTS Action Target, Inc. P.O. Box 636 Provo, UT 84603 Phone 801-377-8033 Fax 801-377-8096 E-mail support@actiontarget.com Website www.actiontarget.com LEAD REMOVAL PRODUCTS Doe Run Company Resource Recycling Division Louis Magdits 1801 Park 270 Drive, Suite 300 St. Louis, MO 63146 Phone 314-453-7100 Fax E-mail Imagdits@doerun.com Website www.doerun.com LEAD REMOVAL PRODUCTS NMC 404 N. Berry Street Brea, CA 92821 Phone 714-672-3500 Fax 714-672-3501 E-mail Website http://www.ncmgroup.com/ THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 19 LEAD SMELTERS Doe Run Company Resource Recycling Division Louis Magdits 1801 Park 270 Drive, Suite 300 St. Louis, MO 63146 Phone 314-453-7100 Fax E-mail lmagdits@doerun.com Website www.doerun.com LEAD SMELTERS Gopher Resource Corporation Dan Leach 3385 Highway 149 Eagan, MN 55121 Phone 651-405-2209 Fax 651-405-6409 E-mail Daniel.Leach@grcmn.com Website www.gopherresource.com LEAD WIRE Liberty Manufacturing, Inc. Alex Martinez 2233 East 16th Street Los Angles, CA 90021 Phone 323-581-9171 Fax 323-581-9351 E-mail libertymfginc@aol.com Website LIGHTING Action Target, Inc. P.O. Box 636 Provo, UT 84603 Phone 801-377-8033 Fax 801-377-8096 E-mail support@actiontarget.com Website www.actiontarget.com LIGHTING Musco Sports Lighting,LLC. P.O. Box 808 Osaloosa, IA 52577 Phone 800-825-6030 Fax 641-673-4582 E-mail lighting@musco.com Website www.musco.com LUBRICANTS Pyramyd Air 151 Atkinson Hill Avenue Bardstown, KY 40004 Phone 800-726-1696 Fax 502-349-9596 E-mail staff@compasseco.com Website www.compasseco.com LUBRICANTS Sentry Solutions, Ltd. PO Box 214 Wilton, NH 03086 Phone 800-546-8049 Fax 603-626-8889 E-mail info@sentrysolutions.com Website www.sentrysolutions.com MAINTENANCE TMC Shooting Range Specialists 29124 Highplains Court Castaic, CA 91384 Phone 661-257-0181 Fax 661-257-0179 E-mail tmcranges@yahoo.com Website http://www.tmcranges.com NOISE CONSULTANTS Eagle Industrial Hygiene Associates Pete Rollman 359 Dresher Road Horsham, PA 19044 Phone 215-672-6088 Fax 215-443-0899 E-mail kcrawford@eaglein.com Website www.eagleih.com NOISE CONSULTANTS Edward George & Associates Ed George, Jr. 110 Florence Street, 2nd Floor Malden, MA 02148 Phone 781-322-7575 Fax 781-322-1555 E-mail info@edgeorgelaw.com Website http://www.edgeorgelaw.com/ NOISE CONSULTANTS THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 20 National Rifle Association Range Services 11250 Waples Mill Road Fairfax, VA 22030 Phone 877-672-7264 Fax 703-267-1011 E-mail range@nrahq.org Website http://www.nrahq.org/shootingrange/ NOISE CONSULTANTS Okie Environmental & Consulting Services, LLC Charles Sever 930 Shulze Drive Norman, OK 73071 Phone 405-384-1351 Fax 405-329-6967 E-mail cwsever@severconsulting.com Website NOISE CONSULTANTS Harris, Miller, Miller and Hanson Inc. Dave Towers 77 South Bedford Street Burlington, VA 22553 Phone 781-229-0707 E-mail dtowers@hmmh.com Website www.hmmh.com NOISE CONSULTANTS Staiano Engineering, Inc. Michael A. Staiano, PE 1923 Stanley Avenue Rockville, MD 20851 Phone 301-468-1074 Fax 301-468-1262 E-mail admin@staianoengineering.com Website www.staianoengineering.com NOISE CONSULTANTS Troy Acoustics Corporation Joan Drucker 2580 Sidney Lanier Drive Brunswick, GA 31525 Phone 800-987-3306 Fax 818-376-8495 E-mail info@troysoundwalls.com Website www.troysoundwalls.com NOISE CONSULTANTS Hansen Consulting Scott Hansen 1005 Moorgate Ave., Apt 204 Spotsylvania, VA 22553 Phone 781-640-4457 E-mail shansen5@comcast.net NOISE CONSULTANTS Siebein Associates, Inc. Lana S. Cheshire 625 NW 60th Street - Suite C Gainesville, FL 32607 Phone 352-331-5111 Fax 352-331-0009 E-mail office@siebeinacoustic.com Website www.siebeinacoustic.com NOISE CONSULTANTS Pinta Acoustic Eric Johnson 2601 49th Ave. N. Suite #400 Minneapolis, MN 55430 Phone 800-662-0032 Fax 612-355-4299 E-mail sales@pinta-acoustic.com Website www.pinta- acoustic.com/applications_GunRanges.php OPERATIONS AND MANAGEMENT CONSULTANTS Don Turner LLC Don Turner 7602 Lake Louise Avenue Las Vegas, NV 89131 Phone 602-799-6466 Fax 702-633-7935 E-mail donturnerllc@cox.net PORTABLE RANGES Sius Target Systems USA, Inc. 3035 A McNaughton Road Columbia, SC 29223 Phone 803-699-1800 Fax 803-699-0038 E-mail siustgtsys@aol.com Website THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 21 PORTABLE RANGES Savage Range Systems, Inc Eoin B. Stafford 100 Springdale Road Westfield, MA 01085 Phone 413-642-4219 Fax 413-562-1152 E-mail estafford@SavageArms.com Website www.SnailTraps.com PORTABLE RANGES Action Target, Inc P.O. Box 636 Provo, UT 84603 Phone 801-377-8033 Fax 801-377-8096 E-mail support@actiontarget.com Website www.actiontarget.com RANGE CLEAN-UP Liberty Manufacturing, Inc. Alex Martinez 2233 East 16th Street Los Angles, CA 90021 Phone 323-581-9171 Fax 323-581-9351 E-mail libertymfginc@aol.com Website RANGE CLEAN-UP Neutron Industries Hunter Johnson 7107 N. Black Canyon Highway Phoenix, AZ 850217661 Phone 877-646-7337 Fax E-mail questions@neutronindustries.com Website www.neutronindustries.com RANGE EQUIPMENT Pyramyd Air 151 Atkinson Hill Avenue Bardstown, KY 40004 Phone 800-726-1696 Fax 502-349-9596 E-mail staff@compasseco.com Website www.compasseco.com RANGE EQUIPMENT Meggitt Training Systems 296 Brogdon Road Suwanee, GA 30024 Phone 800-813-9046 Fax E-mail CustomerSupport@Meggitt.com Website http://www.meggitttrainingsystems.com RANGE EQUIPMENT Super Trap, Inc Art Fransen 1580Commerce Street Corona, CA 92880 Phone 951-736-9440 Fax 951-736-9450 E-mail info@supertrap.com Website www.supertrap.com RANGE EQUIPMENT Action Target, Inc. P.O. Box 636 Provo, UT 84603 Phone 801-377-8033 Fax 801-377-8096 E-mail support@actiontarget.com Website www.actiontarget.com RANGE EQUIPMENT American Defense Systems, Inc. 420 McKinney Parkway Lillington, NC 27546 Phone 937-898-4638 Fax 937-898-5472 E-mail info@aitactical.com Website www.adsiarmor.com RANGE EQUIPMENT Savage Range Systems, Inc. Eoin B. Stafford 100 Springdale Road Westfield, MA 01085 Phone 413-642-4219 Fax 413-562-1152 E-mail estafford@SavageArms.com Website www.SnailTraps.com THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 22 RANGE EQUIPMENT Mancom Manufacturing Inc. 1335 Osprey Dr. Ancaster, Ontario Phone 888-762-6266 Fax 905-304-6137 E-mail cward@mancom.ca Website www.mancom.ca RANGE EQUIPMENT Range Systems Tim Lindell 5121 Winnetka Ave. North New Hope, MN 55428 Phone 888-999-1217 Fax E-mail sales@range-systems.com Website http://range-systems.com/ RANGE EQUIPMENT ESCA Tech Jim Elliott 3747 North Booth Street Milwaukee, WI 53212 Phone 414-962-5323 Fax 414-962-7003 E-mail cservice@esca-tech.com Website esca-tech.com RANGE EQUIPMENT Advanced Interactive Systems 665 Andover Park West Seattle, WA 98188 Phone 800-441-4487 Fax 206-575-8665 E-mail info@ais-sim.com Website www.ais-sim.com RANGE EQUIPMENT Super Trap Inc. Jeff Peiten 1580Commerce Street Corona, CA 92880 Phone 951-736-9440 Fax 951-736-9450 E-mail info@supertrap.com Website www.supertrap.com RANGE EQUIPMENT Competition Electronics, Inc 3469 Precision Dr. Rockford, IL 61109 Phone 815-874-8001 Fax 815-874-8181 Website www.competitionelectronics.com RANGE EQUIPMENT Ruwac, USA Wolfgang Schloesser 54 Winter Street Holyoke, MA 01040 Phone 800-736-6288 E-mail wolfgang@ruwac.com Website www.ruwac.com RANGE EQUIPMENT XS Sight Systems Dave Biggers 2401 Ludelle Fort Worth, TX 76105 Phone 888-744-4880 Fax 800-734-7939 E-mail Website www.xssights.com RANGE EQUIPMENT Meggitt Training Systems 296 Brogdon Road Suwanee, GA 30024 Phone 800-813-9046 Fax E-mail CustomerSupport@Meggitt.com Website http://www.meggitttrainingsystems.com RANGE EQUIPMENT Academi 1001 19th Street, 19th Floor Arlington, VA 22209 Phone 252-435-2488 Fax 252-435-6388 E-mail train@academi.com Website http://www.academi.com THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 23 RANGE EQUIPMENT Armortex 5926 Corridor Parkway Schertz, TX 78154 Phone 800-880-8306 Fax 210-661-8308 E-mail info@armortex.com Website www.armortex.com RANGE PRODUCTS On Target Range Services David Rimberg P.O. Box 279 Shawnee on Delaware, PA 18356 Phone 888-674-2362 Fax E-mail DocRimberg@OnTargetRS.com Website http://www.ontargetrs.com/index.htm RANGE PRODUCTS Neutron Industries Hunter Johnson 7107 N. Black Canyon Highway Phoenix, AZ 850217661 Phone 877-646-7337 Fax E-mail questions@neutronindustries.com Website www.neutronindustries.com RANGE PRODUCTS & SERVICES Advanced Interactive Systems 665 Andover Park West Seattle, WA 98188 Phone 800-441-4487 Fax 206-575-8665 E-mail info@ais-sim.com Website www.ais-sim.com RANGE PRODUCTS & SERVICES Savage Range Systems, Inc Eoin B. Stafford 100 Springdale Road Westfield, MA 01085 Phone 413-642-4219 Fax 413-562-1152 E-mail estafford@SavageArms.com Website www.SnailTraps.com RANGE PRODUCTS & SERVICES Johnson Architects Gary W. Johnson 3868 River Walk Drive Duluth, GA 30096 Phone 770-448-3838 E-mail gwjaia@msn.com Website www.gwjaia.com RANGE PRODUCTS & SERVICES Fortress Environmental Services Jim Rose 649 Bush Rd. Owosso, MI 48867 Phone 800-526-2569 Fax 989-720-5542 E-mail jimrose@corunna.org Website RANGE PRODUCTS & SERVICES MT2 Mike Burkett 14045 West 66th Avenue Arvada, CO 80004 Phone 303-465-6977 Fax 303-456-6998 E-mail mburkett@metalstt.com Website http://www.mt2.com/index.htm RANGE PRODUCTS & SERVICES Mancom Manufacturing Inc. 1335 Osprey Drive Ancaster, Ontario Phone 888-762-6266 Fax 905-304-6137 E-mail cward@mancom.ca Website www.mancom.ca RANGE PRODUCTS & SERVICES Environmental & Turf Services, Inc. Stuart Cohen 11141 Georgia Avenue #208 Wheaton, MD 20902 Phone 301-933-4700 Fax 301-933-4701 E-mail info@environmentalandturf.com Website www.environmentalandturf.com THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 24 RANGE PRODUCTS & SERVICES Action Target, Inc. P.O. Box 636 Provo, UT 84603 Phone 801-377-8033 Fax 801-377-8096 E-mail support@actiontarget.com Website www.actiontarget.com RANGE PRODUCTS & SERVICES Advanced Interactive Systems 665 Andover Park West Seattle, WA 98188 Phone 800-441-4487 Fax 206-575-8665 E-mail info@ais-sim.com Website www.ais-sim.com RANGE PRODUCTS & SERVICES Range Systems Tim Lindell 5121 Winnetka Ave. North New Hope, MN 55428 Phone 888-999-1217 Fax E-mail sales@range-systems.com Website http://range-systems.com/ RANGE PRODUCTS & SERVICES Meggitt Training Systems 296 Brogdon Road Suwanee, GA 30024 Phone 800-813-9046 E-mail CustomerSupport@Meggitt.com Website http://www.meggitttrainingsystems.com RANGE PRODUCTS AND SERVICES Hansen Consulting Scott Hansen 1005 Moorgate Ave., Apt 204 Spotsylvania, VA 22553 Phone 781-640-4457 Fax E-mail shansen5@comcast.net Website RANGE PRODUCTS AND SERVICES Pyramyd Air 151 Atkinson Hill Avenue Bardstown, KY 40004 Phone 800-726-1696 Fax 502-349-9596 E-mail staff@compasseco.com Website www.compasseco.com RANGE PRODUCTS AND SERVICES Armortex 5926 Corridor Parkway Schertz, TX 78154 Phone 800-880-8306 Fax 210-661-8308 E-mail info@armortex.com Website www.armortex.com RANGE PRODUCTS AND SERVICES Landtiser Architects Jeffrey G. Landtiser, AIA 2944 North 44th Street, Suite 101 Phoenix, AZ 85018 Phone 602-957-3426 Fax 602-957-3426 E-mail info@landtiserarchitects.com Website www.landtiserarchitects.com RANGE PRODUCTS AND SERVICES Don Turner LLC Don Turner 7602 Lake Louise Avenue Las Vegas, NV 89131 Phone 602-799-6466 Fax 702-633-7935 E-mail donturnerllc@cox.net Website RANGE TOWERS Porta-King Building Systems Steve Walker 4133 Shoreline Drive Earth City, MO 63045 Phone 800-284-5346 Fax 314-291-2857 E-mail info@portaking.com Website www.portaking.com THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 25 RANGE TOWERS Landtiser Architects Jeffrey G. Landtiser, AIA 2944 North 44th Street, Suite 101 Phoenix, AZ 85018 Phone 602-957-3426 Fax 602-957-3426 E-mail info@landtiserarchitects.com Website www.landtiserarchitects.com RANGE TOWERS Range-Ops 111 E. University Drive, Suite 105-301 Denton, TX 76209 Phone 214-551-1530 E-mail sales@rangeops.com Website rangeops.com RANGE VENTILATION Eagle Industrial Hygiene Associates Pete Rollman 359 Dresher Road Horsham, PA 19044 Phone 215-672-6088 Fax 215-443-0899 E-mail kcrawford@eaglein.com Website www.eagleih.com RANGE VENTILATION Carey's Heating & Air Cond., Inc. Bill Provencher 8201 W. 183rd Street Unit B Tinley Park, IL 60487 Phone 708-532-2449 Fax 708-429-2150 E-mail wprovencher@careyscentral.com Website http://careyscentral.com RANGE VENTILATION ESCA Tech Jim Elliott 3747 North Booth Street Milwaukee, WI 53212 Phone 414-962-5323 Fax 414-962-7003 E-mail cservice@esca-tech.com Website esca-tech.com RANGE VENTILATION American Defense Systems, Inc. 420 McKinney Parkway Lillington, NC 27546 Phone 937-898-4638 Fax 937-898-5472 E-mail info@aitactical.com Website www.adsiarmor.com REMEDIATION CONSULTANT ECS Mid-Atlantic, LLC Garnett B. Williams 1601 Airport Road Charlottesville, VA 22911 Phone 434-973-3232 E-mail gwilliams@esclimited.com Website www.ecslimited.com RUBBER PRM Enterprises LLC Julie Cole Phone 440-221-7711 Fax 614-319-7711 E-mail ballisticrubber@gmail.com Website www.ballisticrubber.net SAFETY CURTAINS Meggitt Training Systems 296 Brogdon Road Suwanee, GA 30024 Phone 800-813-9046 Fax E-mail CustomerSupport@Meggitt.com Website http://www.meggitttrainingsystems.com SAFETY EQUIPMENT & SUPPLIES Concept Development Corp PO Box 18970 Fountain Hills, AZ 85269 Phone 800-472-4405 Fax 480-836-4435 E-mail Website www.firearms-safety.com THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 26 SAFETY EQUIPMENT & SUPPLIES Range Systems Tim Lindell 5121 Winnetka Ave. North New Hope, MN 55428 Phone 888-999-1217 Fax E-mail sales@range-systems.com Website http://range-systems.com/ SAFETY EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES Pyramyd Air 151 Atkinson Hill Avenue Bardstown, KY 40004 Phone 800-726-1696 Fax 502-349-9596 E-mail staff@compasseco.com Website www.compasseco.com SAFETY PRODUCTS Concept Development Corp PO Box 18970 Fountain Hills, AZ 85269 Phone 800-472-4405 Fax 480-836-4435 E-mail Website www.firearms-safety.com SHELTER SYSTEMS - DISASTER RELIEF Grabbit Tool Company Brian Combes 1600 W Evans Ave Ste J Englewood, CO 80110 Phone 720-981-5262 Fax 303-904-0693 E-mail info@grabbittool.com Website www.grabbittool.com SHOOT HOUSES Savage Range Systems, Inc Eoin B. Stafford 100 Springdale Road Westfield, MA 01085 Phone 413-642-4219 Fax 413-562-1152 E-mail estafford@SavageArms.com Website www.SnailTraps.com SHOOT HOUSES Armortex 5926 Corridor Parkway Schertz, TX 78154 Phone 800-880-8306 Fax 210-661-8308 E-mail info@armortex.com Website www.armortex.com SHOOT HOUSES Landtiser Architects Jeffrey G. Landtiser, AIA 2944 North 44th Street, Suite 101 Phoenix, AZ 85018 Phone 602-957-3426 Fax 602-957-3426 E-mail info@landtiserarchitects.com Website www.landtiserarchitects.com SHOOT HOUSES Range Systems Tim Lindell 5121 Winnetka Ave. North New Hope, MN 55428 Phone 888-999-1217 Fax E-mail sales@range-systems.com Website http://range-systems.com/ SHOOT HOUSES Action Target, Inc P.O. Box 636 Provo, UT 84603 Phone 801-377-8033 Fax 801-377-8096 E-mail support@actiontarget.com Website www.actiontarget.com SHOOTING BENCH (portable) Tactical Innovations, LLC 473 South River Road, # 1-230 St. George, UT 84790 Phone 760-953-9067 Fax E-mail doatactical@gmail.com Website www.doatactical.com THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 27 SHOOTING RANGE CONCEPTS Don Turner LLC Don Turner 7602 Lake Louise Avenue Las Vegas, NV 89131 Phone 602-799-6466 Fax 702-633-7935 E-mail donturnerllc@cox.net Website SHOOTING RANGES Armortex 5926 Corridor Parkway Schertz, TX 78154 Phone 800-880-8306 Fax 210-661-8308 E-mail info@armortex.com Website www.armortex.com SHOOTING RANGES American Defense Systems, Inc. 420 McKinney Parkway Lillington, NC 27546 Phone 937-898-4638 Fax 937-898-5472 E-mail info@aitactical.com Website www.adsiarmor.com SHOOTING RANGES McClaren, Wilson & Lawrie, Inc. Jim McClaren 8705 North Central Avenue Phoenix, AZ 85020 Phone 602-331-4141 Fax 602-943-5018 E-mail info@mwlarchitects.com Website www.mwlarchitects.com SHOOTING RANGES Johnson Architects Gary W. Johnson 3868 River Walk Drive Duluth, GA 30096 Phone 770-448-3868 Fax E-mail gwjaia@msn.com Website www.gwjaia.com SHOOTING RANGES Sius Target Systems USA, Inc. 3025 A McNaughton Road Columbia, SC 29223 Phone 803-699-1800 Fax 803-699-0038 E-mail siustgtsys@aol.com Website SHOOTING RANGES Pyramyd Air 151 Atkinson Hill Avenue Bardstown, KY 40004 Phone 800-726-1696 Fax 502-349-9596 E-mail staff@compasseco.com Website www.compasseco.com SHOOTING RANGES Action Target, Inc P.O. Box 636 Provo, UT 84603 Phone 801-377-8033 Fax 801-377-8096 E-mail support@actiontarget.com Website www.actiontarget.com SHOOTING RANGES MT2 Mike Burkett 14045 West 66th Avenue Arvada, CO 80004 Phone 303-465-6977 Fax 303-456-6998 E-mail mburkett@metalstt.com Website http://www.mt2.com/index.htm SHOOTING RANGES Savage Range Systems, Inc. Eoin B. Stafford 100 Springdale Rd. Westfield, MA 01085 Phone 413-642-4219 Fax 413-562-1152 E-mail estafford@SavageArms.com Website www.SnailTraps.com THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 28 SHOOTING RANGES Don Turner LLC Don Turner 7602 Lake Louise Avenue Las Vegas, NV 89131 Phone 602-799-6466 Fax 702-633-7935 E-mail donturnerllc@cox.net SHOOTING RANGES Edward George & Associates Ed George, Jr. 110 Florence Street, 2nd Floor Malden, MA 02148 Phone 781-322-7575 Fax 781-322-1555 E-mail info@edgeorgelaw.com Website http://www.edgeorgelaw.com/ SHOOTING RANGES Range Systems Tim Lindell 5121 Winnetka Ave. North New Hope, MN 55428 Phone 888-999-1217 E-mail sales@range-systems.com Website http://range-systems.com/ SHOOTING SCHOOLS En-Range Thomas M. Taylor 3310 NW 29th Street Miami, FL 33142 Phone 305-635-9858 Fax 305-635-8645 E-mail info@en-range.com Website www.en-range.com SHOOTING SCHOOLS Landtiser Architects Jeffrey G. Landtiser, AIA 2944 North 44th Street, Suite 101 Phoenix, AZ 85018 Phone 602-957-3426 Fax 602-957-3426 E-mail info@landtiserarchitects.com Website www.landtiserarchitects.com SHOOTING SCHOOLS Action Target, Inc. P.O. Box 636 Provo, UT 84603 Phone 801-377-8033 Fax 801-377-8096 E-mail support@actiontarget.com Website www.actiontarget.com SIGHT SYSTEMS XS Sight Systems Dave Biggers 2401 Ludelle Fort Worth, TX 76105 Phone 888-744-4880 Fax 800-734-7939 E-mail Website www.xssights.com SIGHT SYSTEMS Concept Development Corp PO Box 18970 Fountain Hills, AZ 85269 Phone 800-472-4405 Fax 480-836-4435 Website www.firearms-safety.com SIGNS Generic Sign Systems, Inc. Wayne Kosterman 1110 Idaho Street Carol Stream, IL 60188 Phone 630-462-2500 Fax 630-462-2504 E-mail wk@genericsign.com Website www.genericsign.com SILHOUETTE TARGET MFG. Savage Range Systems, Inc Eoin B. Stafford 100 Springdale Road Westfield, MA 01085 Phone 413-642-4219 Fax 413-562-1152 E-mail estafford@SavageArms.com Website www.SnailTraps.com THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 29 SILHOUETTE TARGET MFG. Silhouette Targets Ray Schafer 2321 Piney Mtn. Church Rd. Bostic, NC 28018 Phone 828-245-8168 Fax 828-245-8168 E-mail ppsa@bellsouth.net SILHOUETTE TARGET MFG. Custom Manufacturing Co. Michael Cook 5501 S. Lamar Street Dallas, TX 75215 Phone 214-428-5173 Fax 214-426-4230 E-mail sales@CustomMfgCo.com Website www.custommfgco.com SIMULATORS Advanced Interactive Systems 665 Andover Park West Seattle, WA 98188 Phone 800-441-4487 Fax 206-575-8665 E-mail info@ais-sim.com Website www.ais-sim.com SIMULATORS L3 Communications 7142 Columbia Gateway Drive Columbia, MD 21046 Phone 800-232-6448 Fax 443-285-4750 E-mail lmts.info@L-3com.com Website www.l-3com.com SIMULATORS American Defense Systems, Inc. 420 McKinney Parkway Lillington, NC 27546 Phone 937-898-4638 Fax 937-898-5472 E-mail info@aitactical.com Website www.adsiarmor.com SOUND ABATEMENT Siebein Associates, Inc. Lana S. Cheshire 625 NW 60th Street - Suite C Gainesville, FL 32607 Phone 352-331-5111 Fax 352-331-0009 E-mail office@siebeinacoustic.com Website www.siebeinacoustic.com SOUND ABATEMENT Action Target, Inc P.O. Box 636 Provo, UT 84603 Phone 801-377-8033 Fax 801-377-8096 E-mail support@actiontarget.com Website www.actiontarget.com SOUND ABATEMENT Meggitt Training Systems 296 Brogdon Road Suwanee, GA 30024 Phone 800-813-9046 E-mail CustomerSupport@Meggitt.com Website http://www.meggitttrainingsystems.com SOUND ABATEMENT Regupol America John P. Aten 33 Keystone Drive Lebanon, PA 17042 Phone 800-537-8737 Fax 717-675-2199 E-mail Website www.regupol.com SOUND ABATEMENT Acoustic Sciences Corporation Arthur Noxon P.O. Box 1189 Eugene, OR 97440 Phone 800-272-8823 Fax 541-343-9245 E-mail info@acousticsciences.com Website www.acousticsciences.com THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 30 SOUND ABATEMENT Tectum Inc. Joe Lebold P.O. Box 3002 Newark, OH 43058 Phone 888-977-9691 Fax 800-832-8869 E-mail jlebold@tectum.com Website tectum.com SOUND ABATEMENT Troy Acoustics Corporation Joan Drucker 2580 Sidney Lanier Drive Brunswick, GA 31525 Phone 800-987-3306 Fax 818-376-8495 E-mail info@troysoundwalls.com Website www.troysoundwalls.com SOUND ABATEMENT Lab Safety Supply P.O. Box 1368 Janesville, WI 53547 Phone 800-356-0783 Fax 800-543-9910 E-mail custsvc@labsafety.com Website labsafety.com SOUND ABATEMENT Hansen Consulting Scott Hansen 1005 Moorgate Ave., Apt 204 Spotsylvania, VA 22553 Phone 781-640-4457 Fax E-mail shansen5@comcast.net Website SOUND ABATEMENT Acoustics First Corporation 2247 Tomlyn Street Richmond, VA 23230 Phone 804-342-2900 Fax 804-342-1107 E-mail info@acousticsfirst.com Website www.acousticsfirst.com SOUND ABATEMENT Industrial Acoustics Company 1160 Commerce Avenue Bronx, NY 10462 Phone 718-931-8000 Fax 718-863-1138 E-mail infor@industrialacoustics.com Website www.industrialacoustics.com SOUND ABATEMENT Pinta Acoustic Eric Johnson 2601 49th Ave. N. Suite #400 Minneapolis, MN 55430 Phone 800-662-0032 Fax 612-355-4299 E-mail sales@pinta-acoustic.com Website www.pinta- acoustic.com/applications_GunRanges.php SOUND TESTING EQUIPMENT Okie Environmental & Consulting Services, LLC Charles Sever 930 Shulze Drive Norman, OK 73071 Phone 405-384-1351 Fax 405-329-6967 E-mail cwsever@severconsulting.com SOUND TESTING EQUIPMENT Hansen Consulting Scott Hansen 1005 Moorgate Ave., Apt 204 Spotsylvania, VA 22553 Phone 781-640-4457 E-mail shansen5@comcast.net SOUND TESTING EQUIPMENT E.A.R. Inc. Garry Gordon P.O. Box 18888 Boulder, CO 80308 Phone 800-525-2690 Fax 303-447-2637 E-mail info@EARinc.com Website EARinc.com THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 31 SOUND TESTING EQUIPMENT Eagle Industrial Hygiene Associates Pete Rollman 359 Dresher Road Horsham, PA 19044 Phone 215-672-6088 Fax 215-443-0899 E-mail kcrawford@eaglein.com Website www.eagleih.com STEEL Action Target, Inc P.O. Box 636 Provo, UT 84603 Phone 801-377-8033 Fax 801-377-8096 E-mail support@actiontarget.com Website www.actiontarget.com STEEL Armortex 5926 Corridor Parkway Schertz, TX 78154 Phone 800-880-8306 Fax 210-661-8308 E-mail info@armortex.com Website www.armortex.com STEEL Super Trap Inc. Jeff Peiten 1580Commerce Street Corona, CA 92880 Phone 951-736-9440 Fax 951-736-9450 E-mail info@supertrap.com Website www.supertrap.com STEEL Range Systems Tim Lindell 5121 Winnetka Ave. North New Hope, MN 55428 Phone 888-999-1217 Fax E-mail sales@range-systems.com Website http://range-systems.com/ TARGET COMPANIES Advanced Interactive Systems 565 Andover Park West Seattle, WA 98188 Phone 800-441-4487 Fax 206-575-8665 E-mail info@ais-sim.com Website www.ais-sim.com TARGET COMPANIES Hoppe's Products (Div. of Bushnell Outdr Products) 9200 Cody Overland Park, KS 66214 Phone 800-423-3537 Fax 913-752-3570 E-mail Website www.hoppes.com TARGET COMPANIES Meggitt Training Systems 296 Brogdon Road Suwanee, GA 30024 Phone 800-813-9046 Fax E-mail CustomerSupport@Meggitt.com Website http://www.meggitttrainingsystems.com TARGET COMPANIES The Target Shop 619 Buck Road Pittsgrove, NJ 08318 Phone 856-358-5140 Fax 856-358-5141 E-mail target@dvol.com Website www.thetargetshop.com TARGET COMPANIES Alco Target Company Louis Wurth 2048 Central Avenue Duarte, CA 91010 Phone 888-258-4814 Fax 626-301-9084 E-mail sales@alcotarget.com Website www.alcotarget.com THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 32 TARGET COMPANIES Champion Traps & Targets N5549 County Trunk Z Onalaska, WI 54650 Phone 800-635-7656 Fax 608-781-0368 E-mail tech.expert@atk.com Website www.championtarget.com TARGET COMPANIES Speedwell Division of Rockwood Corp. 410 Clermont Terrace, Suite D Union, NJ 07083 Phone 800-243-8274 Fax 908-355-1414 E-mail info@speedwelltargets.com Website www.speedwelltargets.com TARGET COMPANIES American Target Company 1328 S. Jason St. Denver, CO 80223 Phone 800-733-0433 Fax 303-777-0311 E-mail americtgt@aol.com Website americantargetcompany.com TARGET COMPANIES National Target Company Guy Wynn 3958-D Dartmouth Ct. Frederick, MD 217037805 Phone 800-827-7060 Fax 301-874-4764 E-mail targetguy@netzero.net Website TARGET COMPANIES GP Traps, L.L.C. Brent Fleming 2711 SE 190th Atlanta, KS 67008 Phone 620-394-2341 Fax 620-394-2350 E-mail gptraps@sktc.net Website www.gptraps.com TARGET COMPANIES Beacon Target Turner Inc. Bill Rowan 20519 Lembcke Road Harvard, IL 60033 Phone 888-815-8383 Fax 888-569-7616 E-mail beacontarget@t6b.com Website www.beacontarget.com TARGET COMPANIES American Defense Systems, Inc. 420 McKinney Parkway Lillington, NC 27546 Phone 937-898-4638 Fax 937-898-5472 E-mail info@aitactical.com Website www.adsiarmor.com TARGET COMPANIES Gun Fun Shooting Targets M. Bennett Perritt 6170 Research Park Blvd. Huntsville, AL 35806 Phone 877-748-6386 Fax E-mail bennett@gunfun.com Website gunfun.com TARGET COMPANIES Action Target, Inc. P.O. Box 636 Provo, UT 84603 Phone 801-377-8033 Fax 801-377-8096 E-mail support@actiontarget.com Website www.actiontarget.com TARGET COMPANIES Savage Range Systems, Inc Eoin B. Stafford 100 Springdale Road Westfield, MA 01085 Phone 413-642-4219 Fax 413-562-1152 E-mail estafford@SavageArms.com Website www.SnailTraps.com THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 33 TARGET COMPANIES Super Trap Inc. Jeff Peiten 1580Commerce Street Corona, CA 92880 Phone 951-736-9440 Fax 951-736-9450 E-mail info@supertrap.com Website www.supertrap.com TARGET RETRIEVAL SYSTEMS Action Target, Inc. P.O. Box 636 Provo, UT 84603 Phone 801-377-8033 Fax 801-377-8096 E-mail support@actiontarget.com Website www.actiontarget.com TARGET RETRIEVAL SYSTEMS Mancom Manufacturing Inc. 1335 Osprey Dr. Ancaster, Ontario Phone 888-762-6266 Fax 905-304-6137 E-mail cward@mancom.ca Website www.mancom.ca TARGET RETRIEVAL SYSTEMS Shooting Range Industries 3885 Rockbottom Street N. Las Vegas, NV 89030 Phone 702-362-3623 Fax 702-310-6978 E-mail JRamos@ShootingRangeLLC.com Website www.ShootingRangeIndustries.com TARGET RETRIEVAL SYSTEMS Pilkington Competition Equipment LLC 354 Little Trees Ramble Monteagle, TN 37356 Phone 931-324-3400 TARGET RETRIEVAL SYSTEMS Meggitt Training Systems 296 Brogdon Road Suwanee, GA 30024 Phone 800-813-9046 E-mail CustomerSupport@Meggitt.com Website http://www.meggitttrainingsystems.com TARGET SYSTEMS Sius Target Systems USA, Inc 3025 A McNaughton Road Columbia, SC 29223 Phone 803-699-1800 Fax 803-699-0038 E-mail siustgtsys@aol.com TARGET SYSTEMS American Defense Systems, Inc. 420 McKinney Parkway Lillington, NC 27546 Phone 937-898-4638 Fax 937-898-5472 E-mail info@aitactical.com Website www.adsiarmor.com TOTAL TURN-KEY OPERATIONS Action Target, Inc. P.O. Box 636 Provo, UT 84603 Phone 801-377-8033 Fax 801-377-8096 E-mail support@actiontarget.com Website www.actiontarget.com TOTAL TURN-KEY OPERATIONS Range Development Services Stuart Mullen 1900 Wood Dale Terrace Charlotte, NC 28203 Phone 704-951-7498 E-mail stuart@rangedevelopmentservices.com Website www.rangedevelopmentservices.com THE RANGE SOURCE BOOK 34 TOTAL TURN-KEY OPERATIONS MT2 Mike Burkett 14045 West 66th Avenue Arvada, CO 80004 Phone 303-465-6977 Fax 303-456-6998 E-mail mburkett@metalstt.com Website http://www.mt2.com/index.htm TRAP MACHINES Gene Sears Supply Company Gene Sears 2003 S Shepard Avenue El Reno, OK 73036 Phone 800-522-3314 Fax 405-262-2811 E-mail gsears@coxinet.net Website www.genesears.com TRAP MACHINES Action Target, Inc. P.O. Box 636 Provo, UT 84603 Phone 801-377-8033 Fax 801-377-8096 E-mail support@actiontarget.com Website www.actiontarget.com TRAP MACHINES Promatic, Inc. Steve Robb Phone 816-813-9562 Fax E-mail steve@promatic.biz Website www.promatic.biz TRAP MACHINES Shyda's Services, Inc. 2360 Colebrook Road Lebanon, PA 17042 Phone 717-274-8676 Fax 717-274-8672 E-mail info@shydastraps.com Website shydastraps.com TRAPS Pyramyd Air 151 Atkinson Hill Avenue Bardstown, KY 40004 Phone 800-726-1696 Fax 502-349-9596 E-mail staff@compasseco.com Website www.compasseco.com TRAPS Do-All Outdoors, LLC 216 19th Avenue North Nashville, TN 37203 Phone 800-252-9247 Fax 615-269-4434 E-mail customerservice@do-alloutdoors.com Website www.do-alltraps.com